MiCOM

P120/P121/P122/P123
Overcurrent Relays

Version 6

Technical Guide

P12x/EN T/F75
Technical Guide P12x/EN T/F75
Contents
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/2

MiCOM P120/P121/P122 & P123

OVERCURRENT RELAYS
TECHNICAL GUIDE

CONTENTS

Safety Instructions Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Introduction P12x/EN IT/F75

Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/F75

User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

Menu Content Tables P12x/EN HI/F75

Technical Data and Curve Characteristics P12x/EN TD/F75

Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

Modbus Database P12x/EN CT/F75

Commissioning and Maintenance Guide P12x/EN CM/F75

Connection Diagrams P12x/EN CO/F75

Commissioning Test and Setting Records Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility P12x/EN VC/F75

P12x/EN T/F75 Technical Guide
Contents
Page 2/2 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
 Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

SAFETY SECTION
 Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Safety Section Page 1/10

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

3.1 Symbols 4

3.2 Labels 4

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7

6. EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS 7

7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 7

7.1 Protective fuse rating 7

7.2 Protective Class 7

7.3 Installation Category 7

7.4 Environment 8

8. CE MARKING 8

9. RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA 9

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Page 2/10 Safety Section

BLANK PAGE
 Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Safety Section Page 3/10

1. INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment
provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment and
also includes descriptions of equipment label markings.
Documentation for equipment ordered from AREVA Energy Automation & Information is
despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time.
Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information normally present on
equipment is fully understood by the recipient.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with
the contents of this Safety Guide.

Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with
the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who

• are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and
of the system to which it is being connected;

• are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment
and to isolate, ground, and label it;

• are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;

• are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The operating manual for the equipment gives instructions for its installation, commissioning,
and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales
office and request the necessary information.
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Page 4/10 Safety Section

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the
equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the
equipment is installed or commissioned.

3.1 Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.

Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal

Note – This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT
EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.

3.2 Labels
See "Safety Guide" (SFTY/4L M) for equipment labelling information.

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing,
commissioning or servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge
(ESD) precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp
terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained
for safety.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate
connection diagram.
 Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Safety Section Page 5/10

Protection Class I Equipment

- Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would
be lost.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as
short as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary
inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
- CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections;
- Protective fuse rating;
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
applicable);
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the
application.
Equipment Use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
UL and CSA Listed or Recognized Equipment
To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL
and/or CSA Listed or Recognized parts of the following type: connection cables,
protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and
replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before
opening any connections to it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block
for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the
module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the
equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.
For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for
current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on
removal of the module.
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Page 6/10 Safety Section

External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)

Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are
fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if
touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the
recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible
damage to the equipment, buildings and persons.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At
the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero,
to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and pcb cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used,
this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is
energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live
voltages may be accessible on the extender card.
Insertion and withdrawal of integral heavy current test plugs
It is possible to use an integral heavy current test plug with some equipment.
CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal of heavy current
test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
External test blocks and test plugs
Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such
as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be
accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the
insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
*Note – when a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test
Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them
safe.
Fibre optic communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean
water, when no connections are energised. Contact fingers of test plugs are
normally protected by petroleum jelly which should not be removed.
 Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Safety Section Page 7/10

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning:
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
decommissioning.
Disposal:
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of batteries.

6. EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

Electrical adjustments
It is possible to change current or voltage settings on some equipment by direct
physical adjustment e.g. adjustment of a plug-bridge setting. The electrical power
should be removed before making any change, to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Exposure of live parts
Removal of the cover may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts,
these should not be touched before removing the electrical power.

7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

7.1 Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise
stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse
should be located as close to the unit as possible.

DANGER - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may
produce lethal hazardous voltages.

7.2 Protective Class

IEC 61010-1: 2001 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment
EN 61010-1: 2001 documentation). This equipment requires a protective
conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.

7.3 Installation Category

IEC 61010-1: 2001 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):
EN 61010-1: 2001
Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 500Ω, 0.5J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Page 8/10 Safety Section

7.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).

Pollution Degree – Pollution Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety

Degree 2 standards.
Altitude – operation up to
2000 m
IEC 61010-1: 2001
EN 61010-1: 2001

8. CE MARKING
Compliance with all relevant European
Marking Community directives:

Product safety: Compliance demonstrated by reference to

Low Voltage Directive - 73/23/EEC safety standards.
amended by 93/68/EEC
EN 61010-1: 2001
EN 60950-1: 2001
EN 60255-5: 2001
IEC 60664-1: 2001

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive Compliance demonstrated via the Technical

(EMC) 89/336/EEC amended by Construction File route.
93/68/EEC.
The following Product Specific Standard
was used to establish conformity:
EN 50263 : 2000

Where applicable :

The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of

European directive 94/9/EC. It is approved for operation
outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however
II (2) G approved for connection to Increased Safety, “Ex e”,
motors with rated ATEX protection, Equipment Category
2, to ensure their safe operation in gas Zones 1 and 2
hazardous areas.
ATEX Potentially Explosive CAUTION – Equipment with this marking is not itself
Atmospheres directive suitable for operation within a potentially explosive
94/9/EC, for equipment. atmosphere.
Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body certificates
of compliance.

Radio and Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low

Telecommunications Terminal Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC,
Equipment (R & TTE) down to zero volts, by reference to safety standards.
directive 95/5/EC.
 Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Safety Section Page 9/10

9. RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA

CSA - Canadian Standards Association
UL - Underwriters Laboratory of America

– UL Recognized to UL (USA) requirements

– UL Recognized to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

– UL Listed to UL (USA) requirements

– UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

– Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Page 10/10 Safety Section

BLANK PAGE
Introduction P12x/EN IT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

INTRODUCTION
Introduction P12x/EN IT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/8

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4

3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P120, P121, P122 & P123 RELAYS 5

4. MAIN FUNCTIONS 6

5. EQUIVALENCE TABLES 7
P12x/EN IT/F75 Introduction

Page 2/8 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Introduction P12x/EN IT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/8

1. INTRODUCTION
The overcurrent relays of the MiCOM P120 range are AREVA T&D universal overcurrent
relays. MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays have been designed to control, protect
and monitor industrial installations, public distribution networks and substations, and to be
used as back-up protection for EHV and HV transmission networks.
P12x/EN IT/F75 Introduction

Page 4/8 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual provides a description of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 functions and
settings. The goal of this manual is to allow the user to become familiar with the application,
installation, setting and commissioning of these relays.
This manual has the following format :
P12x/EN IT Introduction
Contents of the manual and general introduction to the MiCOM
P120 range of relays covered in the Guide.
P12x/EN IN Handling, installation and case dimensions
Precautions to be taken when handling electronic equipment.
P12x/EN FT User Guide of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays
A detailed description of the features of MiCOM P120 range of
relays.
P12x/EN TD Technical data and curve characteristics
Comprehensive details on nominal values, setting ranges,
specifications and curves characteristics.
P12x/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Guide to commissioning, problem solving and maintenance of
MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123.
P12x/EN CO Connection diagrams for MiCOM P120/P121 and P122/P123
P12x/EN RS Commissioning test records
P12x/EN VC Hardware/Software version history
P12x/EN CT Communication mapping data bases
Introduction P12x/EN IT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/8

3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P120, P121, P122 & P123 RELAYS

The range of MiCOM protection relays is built on the success of the MIDOS, K and MODN
ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. Relays from the MiCOM P120
range are fully compatible and use the same modular box concept.
MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays provide comprehensive overcurrent phase and
earth fault protection for utilities networks, industrial plants and networks as well as for other
applications where overcurrent protection is required. The earth fault protection is sensitive
enough to be applied in electrical networks where the earth fault current is low.
In addition to its protective functions, each relay offers control and recording features. They
can be fully integrated to a control system so protection, control, data acquisition and
recording of faults, events and disturbances can be made available.
The relays are equipped on the front panel with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2 x 16
back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 button keypad (to access all settings, clear
alarms and read measurements) and 8 LEDs that indicate the status of MiCOM P120, P121,
P122 and P123 relays.
In addition, the use of the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read, reinitialise
and change the settings of the relays, if required, from a local or remote PC computer loaded
with MiCOM S1 software.
Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow the
MiCOM P120 range to provide an adaptable solution for the problems of the protection of
electric networks.
P12x/EN IT/F75 Introduction

Page 6/8 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

4. MAIN FUNCTIONS
The following table shows the functions available for the different models of the MiCOM
P120 range of relays.

ANSI MiCOM MiCOM MiCOM MiCOM

Functions
Code P120 P121 P122 P123
50/51 or
Single-phase overcurrent X
50N/51N
Three-phase overcurrent 50/51 X X X
Earth fault overcurrent 50N/51N X X X X
Restricted Earth fault 64N X X X X
Thermal overload (True RMS) 49 X X
Undercurrent 37 X X
Negative sequence overcurrent 46 X X
Broken conductor detection X X
Cold load pickup X X
Instantaneous/start contact X X X X
Latching output contacts 86 X X X X
Setting groups 1 1 2 2
Circuit breaker failure detection 50BF X X
Trip circuit supervision X X
Circuit Breaker monitoring and control X X
Blocking logic X X X X
Selective relay scheme logic X X
Multi-shot autoreclose 79 X
Clock phase and anti-clock phase
X X
rotation operation
Switch on to fault (SOTF) X
CB control Local/Remote X
Measurements (True RMS) X X X X
Peak and rolling values X X
Event records X X
Fault records X X
Instantaneous records X X
Disturbance records X X
RS 232 front communication X X
RS 485 rear communication
(Modbus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103, X X X X
Courier, DNP3.0)
Introduction P12x/EN IT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/8

5. TABLE OF EQUIVALENCE
The following section describes the models of the MiCOM P120 range together with other
existing relays in the AREVA T&D' catalogue :

K range MIDOS range TROPIC2 range MiCOM range

KCGG 110, 122 MCAG 11, 12 TA 1xxx, 1220B
KCGU 110 MCGG 22 TAH 111x
MCSU TAS 1xxx P120
MCTD 01
MCTI 14
KCGG 11x, 12x,13x, 14x MCAG 1x, 3x TA 1xxx, 2xxx, 3xxx
KCGU 11x, 14x MCGG 22, 42, 5x TA 2220B
MCGG 6x, 82 TA 521x, 5320R
P121
MCSU TAS 1xxx, 2xxx, 3xxx
MCTD 01 TAS 5xxx, 6xxx
MCTI 14, 34, 44
KCGG 11x, 12x,13x, 14x MCAG 1x, 3x TA 1xxx, 2xxx, 3xxx
KCGU 11x, 14x MCGG 22, 42, 5x TA 2220B
MCGG 6x, 82 TA 521x, 5320R
MCSU TAS 1xxx, 2xxx, 3xxx
P122
MCTD 01 TAS 5xxx, 6xxx
MCHD 04 TAT xxx
MCTI 14, 34, 44 TR 1x, TR 2x
MCTI 15, 35
KCGG 120, 130, 140 MCAG 1x, 3x TA 1xxx, 2xxx, 3xxx
KCGG 141, 142 MCGG 22, 42, 5x TA 2220B
KCGU 140 MCGG 6x, 82 TA 521x, 5320R
KVTR MCSU TAS 1xxx, 2xxx, 3xxx
MCTD 01 TAS 5xxx, 6xxx
MCHD 04 TAT xxx P123
MCND 04 TR 1x, TR 2x
MCTI 14, 34, 44 TOLD
MCTI 15, 35 TE 3000
MVAX 12, 21, 31, 91
MVTR 51, 52

FUNCTIONAL EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN AREVA T&D' MiCOM P120 RANGE OF RELAYS AND
THE FORMER AREVA T&D OR GEC-ALSTHOM RANGE OF RELAYS
P12x/EN IT/F75 Introduction

Page 8/8 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

HANDLING, INSTALLATION
AND CASE DIMENSIONS
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/10

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 3
1.1 Receipt of relays 3
1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 3

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 4

3. RELAY MOUNTING 5

4. UNPACKING 6

5. STORAGE 7

6. DIMENSIONS 8
6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals 8
6.2 Communication port RS485 9
6.3 Earthing 9

7. CASE DIMENSIONS 10
P12x/EN IN/F75 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 2/10 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/10

1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
1.1 Receipt of relays
Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to
installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no
damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim
should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA T&D should be promptly notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended to be installed immediately should be
returned with their protective polythene bags.
1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should
not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be
taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case
for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conducting antistatic bag.
There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not
unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the
connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact
considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board
should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used,
which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body.
P12x/EN IN/F75 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 4/10 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling
electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent
but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the
case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be
taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed
and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid
touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the
same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the
same potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in
service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist
straps should have a resistance to ground between 500kΩ – 10MΩ.
If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a
build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be
earthed to the case whenever possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in
BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on
electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such
as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/10

3. RELAY MOUNTING
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.
If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the
assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case
during assembly into a panel or rack.
For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of this chapter
showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres.
P12x/EN IN/F75 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 6/10 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

4. UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts is
damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled personnel. The
installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The
site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases
should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly
applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/10

5. STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a place
free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been
included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will
be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by
gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton.
Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the relay; in
damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-
humifier will lose its efficiency.
Storage temperature : –25°C to +70°C.
P12x/EN IN/F75 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 8/10 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

6. DIMENSIONS
6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals
The individual equipment are delivered with sufficient M4 screws to connect the relay via
annular terminals, with a maximum recommended of two annular terminals per contact.
If necessary, AREVA T&D can provide annular terminals to crimp. 5 references exist
according to the section of the wire (see below). Each reference corresponds to a sachet of
100 terminals.

Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8 (wire size 0.75 - 1.5mm²)

AREVA T&D'S Automation & Information Systems Business
reference: ZB9128 015

Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8mm (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm²)

AREVA T&D'S Automation & Information Systems Business
reference: ZB9128 016

P0166ENb

M4 90˚ Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 0.25 - 1.65mm²)

AREVA T&D'S Automation & Information Systems Business reference,
Stafford part number ZB9124 901

M4 90˚ Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm²)

AREVA T&D'S Automation & Information Systems Business reference,
Stafford part number ZB9124 900

P0167ENb
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/10

To insure the insulation of the terminals and to respect the security and safety instructions,
an isolated sleeve can be used.
We recommend the following cable cross-sections:

− Auxiliary sources Vaux : 1.5 mm²

− Communication Port see paragraph 6.2

− Other circuits 1.0 mm²

Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the maximum wire cross-section which
can be used for the connector blocks (for current inputs and signals) is of 6mm² by using non
-insulated annular terminals. When only pre- insulated terminals can be used, the maximum
wire cross-section is reduced to 2, 63 mm² per annular terminal. If a more significant wire
cross-section is necessary, two wires can be put in parallel, each one finished by a separate
annular terminal.
All the terminal blocks used for connections, except of the port RS485, must be able to
withstand a nominal voltage of minimum 300V peak value.
We recommend to protect the auxiliary source connection by using a fuse of type NIT or TIA
with a breaking capacity of 16A. For security reasons, do never install fuses in current
transformers circuits. The other circuits must be protected by fuses.
6.2 Communication port RS485
Connections to RS485 is made using annular terminals. It is recommended that a two core
screened cable, is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or a200nF total cable
capacitance.
Typical specification:

− Each core : 16/0.2 mm copper conductor, PVC insulated.

− Nominal conductor area : 0.5 mm² per core

− Screen : Overall braid, PVC sheathed

− Linear capacitance between conductor and earth : 100pF/m

6.3 Earthing
Each equipment must be connected to a local earth terminal by the intermediary of a M4
earth terminals. We recommend a wire of minimal section of 2,5 mm², with annular terminals
on the side of the equipment. Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the
possible maximum section is of 6mm² by wire. If a larger section is necessary, one can use
cables connected in parallel, each one ending with an annular terminal separated on the side
of the equipment. One can also use a metal bar.
NOTE: To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or brass
conductor and the back plate of the equipment, it is necessary to take
precautions to isolate them one from the other. This can be done in
several ways, for example by inserting between the conductor and the
case a plated nickel or insulated ring washer or by using a tin
terminals.
P12x/EN IN/F75 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 10/10 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

7. CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or
flush mounting.
Weight : 1.7 to 2.1 Kg
External size : Height case 152 mm
front panel 177 mm
Width case 97 mm
front panel 103 mm
Depth case 226 mm
front panel + case 252 mm

39 39
97 26 26

All dimensions
in mm
168 158

Panel cut-out
Flush mounting fiwing details

4 holes Ø 3.4 49.5 49.5 4 holes Ø 4.4 (M4 screw)

103 25.1 226
MiCOM P121

IA = 214.50A
Trip

Alarm C
Equip.fail

Auxiliary
supply 177 151.2 max.
AUX. 1

AUX. 2

AUX. 3

AUX. 4

Flush mounting
P0001ENa

MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAYS CASE DIMENSIONS

NOTE : For flush mounting, use the screws supplied by AREVA T&D with
head diameter smaller than the hole of the front face, otherwise the
active part will not be plugged properly (do not add washers).
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

User Guide
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/62

CONTENTS

1. PRESENTATION OF MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAYS 5

2. USER INTERFACE 6
2.1 LCD display and keypad description 6
2.1.1 LCD display 6
2.1.2 Keypad 6
2.2 LEDs 7
2.3 Description of the two areas under the top and bottom flaps 8
2.4 The battery box 8

3. PASSWORD 9
3.1 Password protection 9
3.1.1 Password entry 9
3.1.2 Changing the password 9
3.1.3 Change of setting invalidation 9

4. DISPLAYS OF ALARM & WARNING MESSAGES 10

4.1 Electrical Network Alarms 10
4.2 Relay Hardware or Software Warning Messages 12

5. MENUS 14
5.1 Default display 14
5.2 Access to the menu 14
5.3 Menu contents description 14
5.4 OP PARAMETERS Menu 17
5.4.1 P121, P122 and P123 additional OP.PARAMETERS Menu 17
5.4.2 P122 and P123 additional OP.PARAMETERS Menu 18
5.5 Menu CONFIGURATION 18
5.5.1 Submenu DISPLAY 18
5.5.2 Submenu CT RATIO 19
5.5.3 LED 5 to 8 configuration submenus 19
5.5.4 Submenu Selecting Active Protection Group (P122 & P123 only) 23
5.5.5 Alarms sub-menu (P122 & P123 only) 23
5.5.6 Submenu Inputs Configuration (P122 & P123 only) 24
5.5.7 Configuration Relays Maintenance sub-menu (P122 & P123 only) 25
5.5.8 Configuration Phase Rotation sub-menu (P122 & P123 only) 25
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 2/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.6 MEASUREMENTS Menu 26

5.6.1 P122 & P123 additional MEASUREMENTS Menu 26
5.6.2 P123 additional MEASUREMENTS Menu 27
5.7 COMMUNICATION Menu 28
5.7.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu 28
5.7.2 Courier COMMUNICATION Menu 28
5.7.3 IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu 29
5.7.4 DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu 29
5.8 PROTECTION Menu 29
5.8.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu 30
5.8.1.1 I> DMT threshold menu 30
5.8.1.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu 30
5.8.1.3 I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 31
5.8.1.4 I>> threshold menu 31
5.8.1.5 I>>> threshold menu 31
5.8.2 [50N/51N] EARTH OC sub-menu (P121 - P122 - P123 only) 32
5.8.2.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu 32
5.8.2.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu 32
5.8.2.3 Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 33
5.8.2.4 Ie>> threshold menu 33
5.8.2.5 Ie>>> threshold menu 34
5.8.3 [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2> submenu (P122 & P123 only) 34
5.8.3.1 I2> DMT threshold menu 34
5.8.3.2 I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu 35
5.8.3.3 I2> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 35
5.8.3.4 I2>> threshold menu 36
5.8.3.5 [49] Therm OL sub-menu (P122 & P123 only) 36
5.8.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< sub-menu (P122 & P123 only) 37
5.8.5 [79] AUTORECLOSE sub-menu (P123 only) 37
5.8.5.1 [79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE 37
5.8.5.2 [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING 37
5.8.5.3 [79] DEAD and RECLAIM TIMES 38
5.8.5.4 [79] Cycles number 38
5.8.5.5 [79] Cycle allocation 38
5.9 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 39
5.9.1 Trip Commands sub-menu 40
5.9.1.1 P122 & P123 additional Trip Commands menu 40
5.9.1.2 P123 additional Trip COMMAND menu 41
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/62

5.9.2 Latch of trip output relay by Function Submenu (P121, P122 & P123 relays) 41
5.9.2.1 P122 & P123 additional Latch functions sub-menu 42
5.9.2.2 P123 additional latch functions submenu 42
5.9.3 Latch functions submenu (P120 relay) 43
5.9.4 Blocking Logic submenu 44
5.9.4.1 P122 & P123 additional Blocking Logic menu 44
5.9.4.2 P123 additional Blocking Logic menu 45
5.9.5 Logic Select submenus (P122 & P123 only) 45
5.9.6 Outputs Relays submenu 46
5.9.6.1 P122 & P123 additional Outputs menu 47
5.9.7 Latch of the auxiliary output relays (RL2 to RL8) 49
5.9.7.1 P122 & P123 additional latch output relays menu 49
5.9.7.2 P123 additional latch output relays menu 49
5.9.8 Inputs submenu 50
5.9.8.1 P122 & P123 additional Inputs menu 51
5.9.8.2 P123 additional Inputs menu 51
5.9.9 BROKEN CONDUCTOR submenu (P122 & P123 only) 52
5.9.10 COLD LOAD PICK-UP submenu (P122 & P123 only) 52
5.9.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE submenu (P122 & P123 only) 53
5.9.12 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu (P122 & P123 only) 54
5.9.13 Comm. Order Submenu (P122 & P123 only) 55
5.9.14 Submenu SOTF (Switch on to Fault) (P123 only) 55
5.10 RECORDS Menu (P122 & P123 only) 57
5.10.1 CB MONITORING submenu 57
5.10.2 Fault Record submenu for MiCOM P122 and P123 58
5.10.3 INSTANTANEOUS submenu 59
5.10.4 DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu 59
5.10.5 Time PEAK VALUE submenu 60
5.10.6 ROLLING DEMAND submenu 60

6. WIRING 61
6.1 Auxiliary supply 61
6.2 Current measurement inputs 61
6.3 Logic inputs 61
6.4 Output relays 61
6.5 Communication 62
6.5.1 RS485 rear communication port 62
6.5.2 RS232 front communication port (P122 & P123 only) 62
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 4/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/62

1. PRESENTATION OF MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAYS

MiCOM P120, P121 P122 and P123 are fully numerical relays designed to perform electrical
protection and control functions.
The following section describes the MiCOM P120 range and the main differences between
the different models.
MiCOM relays are powered either from a DC (3 voltage ranges) or an AC auxiliary power
supply.
Using the front panel, the user can easily navigate through the menu and access data,
change settings, read measurements, etc.
Eight LEDs situated in the front panel help the user to quickly know the status of the relay
and the presence of alarms. Alarms that have been detected are stored and can be
displayed on the back-lit LCD.
Any short time voltage interruption (<50ms) is filtered and regulated through the auxiliary
power supply.
Regarding current inputs, MiCOM P120 has 2 current inputs available, one for 1A and one
for 5A rated CTs.
MiCOM P121, P122 & P123 have 3 phase and 1 earth current inputs available for 1 and 5
Amps rated CTs. On each one of these relays, it is possible to combine 1 and 5 Amp current
inputs together (i-e a mix between 1A for earth fault and 5A for phase connections).
MiCOM 120, P121, P122 and P123 relays continuously measure phase and earth currents
(P120 makes a single measurement) and take into account the true RMS current value up to
10th harmonic (at 50 Hz).
Output relays are freely configurable and can be activated by any of the control or protection
functions available in the relay. Logic inputs can also be assigned to various control
functions.
On their rear terminals MiCOM P120, P121 P122 and P123 have a standard RS485 port
available. When ordering, the user can choose between the following communication
protocol: ModBus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103, Courier or DNP3.0.
Using RS485 communication channel, all stored information (measurements, alarms, and
parameters) can be read and settings can be modified when the chosen protocol allows it.
Reading and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a standard PC loaded
with AREVA setting software.
Thanks to its RS485 based communication, MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays can
be connected directly to a digital control system. All the available data can then be gathered
by a substation control system and be processed either locally or remotely.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 6/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2. USER INTERFACE
MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relay front panel allows the user to easily enter relay
settings, display measured values and alarms and to clearly display the status of the relay.

MiCOM P122 2 X 16 alphanumerical

P 122BOOF111
N° 369823685 Cde 31705/009
backlit display
2 buttons to read and 0.01 - 8 Ion Ua 48-150 Vdc

clear alarms messages

IA = 214.50 A

Trip led Trip C

Alarm led Alarm

Warning led Warning

Healthy led Healthy

Aux . 1

Aux . 2

Programmable leds Aux . 3 5 buttons to modify the

Aux . 4 setting and read values

+
Battery defghi
RS 232 P0002ENb

FIGURE 1 : MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 FRONT PANEL

The front panel of the relay has three separate sections:
1. The LCD display and the keypad,
2. The LEDs
3. The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.
2.1 LCD display and keypad description
2.1.1 LCD display
In the front panel, a liquid crystal display (LCD) displays settings, measured values and
alarms . Data is accessed through a menu structure.
The LCD has two lines, with sixteen characters each. A back-light is activated when a key is
pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the user to be
able to read the display in most lighting conditions.
2.1.2 Keypad
The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups :

• Two keys located just under the screen (keys ! and ").
Keys ! and " are used to read and acknowledge alarms. To display successive alarms,
press key ". Alarms are displayed in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm
first, the oldest alarm last). To acknowledge the alarms, the user can either acknowledge
each alarm using ! or go to the end of the ALARM menu and acknowledge all the alarms at
the same time.
When navigating through submenus, key ! is also used to come back to the head line of
the corresponding menu.
NOTE : To acknowledge a relay latched refer to the corresponding submenu
section.

• Four main keys #, $, %, & located in the middle of the front panel.
They are used to navigate through the different menus and submenus and to do the setting
of the relay.
The key ' is used to validate a choice or a value (modification of settings).
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/62

2.2 LEDs
The LED labels on the front panel are by default written in English, however the user has
self-adhesive labels available with MiCOM relays on which it is possible to write using a ball
point pen.
The top four LEDs indicate the status of the relay (Trip condition, alarm LED, equipment
failure, auxiliary supply).
The four lower LEDs are freely programmable by the user and can be assigned to display a
threshold crossing for example (available for all models) or to show the status of the logic
inputs (P122 & P123 ONLY).The description of each one of these eight LEDs located in the
left side of the front view is given hereafter (numbered from the top to bottom from 1 to 8):
LED 1 Colour : RED Label : Trip
LED 1 indicates that the relay has issued a trip order to the cut-off element (circuit breaker,
contactor). This LED recopies the trip order issued to the Trip logic output. Its normal state is
unlit. As soon as a triggering order is issued, the LED lights up. It is cleared when the
associated alarm is acknowledged either through the front panel, or by a remote command,
a digital input, or by a new fault (CONFIGURATION/Alarms menu).
LED 2 Colour : ORANGE Label : ALARM
LED 2 indicates that the relay has detected an alarm. This alarm can either be a threshold
crossing (instantaneous), or a trip order (time delayed). As soon as an alarm is detected, the
LED starts blinking. After all the alarms have been read, the LED lights up continuously.
After acknowledgement of all the alarms, the LED is extinguished.
NOTE : It is possible to configure the instantaneous alarms to be self reset or
not by choosing Yes or No in the CONFIGURATION/Alarms Menu.
The alarm LED can be reset either through the front panel, or by remote command, by a
digital input, or by a new fault (CONFIGURATION/Alarms menu).
LED 3 Colour : ORANGE Label : Warning
LED 3 indicates internal alarms of the relay. When the relay detects a « non critical » internal
alarm (typically a communication failure), the LED starts blinking continuously. When the
relay detects a fault that is considered as « critical », the LED lights up continuously. Only
the disappearance of the cause of the fault can clear this LED (repair of the module,
clearance of the Fault).
LED 4 Colour : GREEN Label : Healthy
LED 4 indicates that the relay is powered by an auxiliary source at the nominal range.
LED 5 to 8 Colour : RED Label : Aux.1 to 4.
These LEDs are user programmable and can be set to display information about
instantaneous and time-delayed thresholds as well as the status of the logic inputs (for P122
& P123 only). Under the CONFIGURATION/LED menu of the relay, the user can select the
information he wishes to associate with each LED. He can affect more than one function to
one LED. The LED will then light up when at least one of the associated information is valid
(OR gate). The LED is cleared when all the associated alarms are acknowledged.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 8/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3 Description of the two areas under the top and bottom flaps
Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model number (order
number) and its serial number. This information defines the product in a way that is unique.
In all your requests, please make reference to these two numbers.
Under the model and serial number, you will find information about the level of voltage of the
auxiliary supply and the nominal earth current value.
Under the lower flap, a RS232 port is available in all MiCOM relays. Nonetheless, this
RS232 port is used differently depending on the model of the relay:
1. For MiCOM P120 and P121, this RS232 port can be used to download a new version
of the application software into the relay flash memory.
2. For MiCOM P122 and P123, this RS232 port can be used either to download a new
version of the application software version into the relay flash memory or to plug a
laptop loaded with AREVA T&D’ setting software MiCOM S1.
To withdraw more easily the active part of the MiCOM relay (i-e the chassis) from its case,
open the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor located under the upper
flap, and pull it out of its case pulling the flaps towards you.
2.4 The battery box
The battery box MiCOM E1 allows the user to be able to read and change the settings of the
relay when it is not powered by its auxiliary source.

Battery box MiCOM E1

To MiCOM EIA(RS)232

Input for external supply

12V dc - 24V dc

P0005ENc

FIGURE 2 : BATTERY BOX MiCOM E1

The battery box performs the following functions:
1. It temporary powers the relay. This allows the user to view or modify data when the
auxiliary power supply has failed. The battery used is a 6LR61 type (9V) which can
power the relay for up to 3 hours.
When the battery is flat it is possible to power the battery box with an external dc
supply. The dc voltage range must be between 12 and 24Vdc.
2. It provides an EIA RS232 interface between the MiCOM relay and the PC. This allows
the user to be able to change the setting of the relay using a PC loaded with the
setting software MiCOM S1.
This battery box facilitates the use of the relay allowing the retrieval of records and
disturbance files for example when the auxiliary supply has failed or is not available.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/62

3. PASSWORD
3.1 Password protection
A password is required for relay settings, especially when changing the various thresholds,
time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs and outputs relays.
The password consists of four capital characters. When leaving factory, the password is set
to AAAA. The user can define his own combination of four characters.
Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored parameters is
blocked. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his representative and a stand-
by password specific to the relay may be obtained.
The programming mode is indicated with the letter "P" on the right hand side of the display
on each menu heading. The letter "P" remains present as long as the password is active
(5 minutes if there is no action on the keypad).
3.1.1 Password entry
The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is made for
any one of the six/eight menus and the submenus. The user enters each one of the 4
characters and then validates the entire password with '.
After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu.
If no key is pressed inside of 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new password
request is associated with any subsequent parameter modification.
3.1.2 Changing the password
To change an active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the
Password submenu. Enter the current password and validate it. Then press ' and enter the
new password character by character and validate the new password using '.
The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the new password has
been accepted.
3.1.3 Change of setting invalidation
The procedure to modify a setting is described in the following sections of this manual.
If there is a need to get back to the old setting push key ! before validating the setting
change. The following message will then appear on the LCD for a few seconds and the old
setting will remain unchanged.

UPGRADE
CANCEL
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 10/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

4. DISPLAYS OF ALARM & WARNING MESSAGES

Alarm messages are displayed directly on the front panel LCD. They have priority over the
default display presenting measured current values. As soon as the relay detects an alarm
condition (crossing of a threshold for example), the associated message is displayed on the
front panel LCD and the LED Alarm (LED 2) lights up.
We distinguish two types of alarm and warning messages :
- Alarm messages generated by the electrical power network.
- Warning messages caused by hardware or software faults from the relay.
4.1 Electrical Network Alarms
Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical network
alarm". The involved threshold is indicated. Regarding the phase thresholds, the phase
designation (A, B or C) is also displayed.
If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance and presented
on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm
last). Each alarm message is numbered and the total number of alarm messages is
displayed.
The user can read all the alarm messages pressing ".
The user acknowledges and clears the alarm messages from the LCD pressing !.
The user can acknowledge each alarm message one by one or all by going to the end of the
list to acknowledge, and clear, all the alarm messages pressing !.
The control of the ALARM LED (LED 2) is directly assigned to the status of the alarm
messages stored in the memory.
If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED
(LED 2) flashes.
If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED (LED 2)
lights up continuously.
If all the messages have been ACKNOWLEDGED, and cleared, if the cause that generated
the alarm disappears, the ALARM LED (LED 2) is extinguished.
The different electrical system alarms are listed below:
Ie> 1st stage earth fault threshold
Ie>> 2nd stage earth fault threshold
Ie>>> 3rd stage earth fault threshold
I> PHASE 1st stage overcurrent threshold
I>> PHASE 2nd stage overcurrent threshold
I>>> PHASE 3rd stage overcurrent threshold
tIe> 1st stage earth fault time-out
tIe>> 2nd stage earth fault time-out
tIe>>> 3rd stage earth fault time-out
tI> PHASE 1st stage overcurrent time-out
tI>> PHASE 2nd stage overcurrent time-out
tI>>> PHASE 3rd stage overcurrent time-out
THERMAL ALARM thermal alarm threshold
THERMAL TRIP thermal trip threshold
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/62

I< undercurrent element threshold

tI< PHASE undercurrent fault time-out
BRKN COND. broken conductor indication. I2/I1 ratio exceeded for a period
of time that is higher than tBC can be set under the
AUTOMAT. CTRL/Broken cond. menu.
t AUX 1 t AUX1 time-out
t AUX 2 t AUX2 time-out
CB FAIL circuit breaker failure indication (the CB does not trip on tBF
time. tBF can be set under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail
menu.
I2> negative sequence current threshold (1st stage)
tI2> negative sequence current threshold time-out (1st stage)
I2>> negative sequence current threshold (2nd stage)
tI2>> negative sequence current threshold time-out (2nd stage)
SPRING CHARGE FAIL Faulty circuit breaker indication given by a logic input that
has been assigned (under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs
menu).
T operating CB Operating (or tripping) time of the circuit breaker longer than
the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision
menu.
CB OPEN NB Number of circuit breaker operation higher that the value set
in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
ΣAmps(n) Total measured current broken by CB is higher than the
value set in AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
TRIP CIRCUIT Circuit breaker trip circuit failure longer than the supervision
timer t SUP (that can be set under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB
Supervision menu.
LATCH RELAY At least one output relay is latched.
LATCH RELAY TRIP The relay trip is latched.
CB CLOSE FAILURE Circuit breaker closing time longer than the value set in the
AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
RECLOSER SUCCESSFUL Successful reclose signal. Indicates that when the fault has
been cleared upon circuit breaker reclosure, and has not re-
appeared before expiry of the reclaim time.
RECLOSER BLOCKED Recloser blocking signal. Generated by:
- auxiliary power supply failure during dead time (definitive
trip).
- external blocking signal. External blocking can be set
by the user in the PROTECTION G1 / [79]
AUTORECLOSE/Ext Block menu. This blocking signal is
provided via a logic input assigned to the Block_79 function
in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu.
- definitive trip.
- remote trip command during the reclaim time.
- pick-up of I2> or thermal trip during dead time.
- breaker failure (circuit breaker failure to trip on expiry of
tBF).
- breaker operating time (or tripping time) longer than the set
time.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 12/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

RECLOSER CONFLICT Configuration conflict of the re-close function. This signal is

generated by:
- O/O Interlock not assigned to a logic input or assigned but
not wired to the input.
- no output relay assigned to the CB CLOSE function
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays menu ).
- trip contact latched.
- no re-close cycle assigned to the protection functions
(PROTECTION/ [79] Autoreclose menu ).
MAINTENANCE MODE The relay is in maintenance mode.
4.2 Relay Hardware or Software Warning Messages
Any software or hardware fault internal to MiCOM relay generates a "hardware/software
alarm" that is stored in memory as a "Hardware Alarm". If several hardware alarms are
detected they are all stored in their order of appearance. The warning messages are
presented on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent first and the oldest
last). Each warning message is numbered and the total stored is shown.
The user can read all warning messages pressing ", without entering the password.
It is not possible to acknowledge and clear warning messages caused by internal relay
hardware or software failure. This message can only be cleared once the cause of the
hardware or software failure has been removed.
The control of the WARNING LED (LED 3) is directly assigned to the status of the warning
messages stored in the memory.
If the internal hardware or software failure is major (i.e. the relay cannot perform protection
functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) lights up continuously.
If the internal hardware or software failure is minor (like a communication failure that has no
influence on the protection and automation functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) will flash.
Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages are:
Major fault:
The protection and automation functions are stopped.
The RL0 watchdog relay is de-energised (35-36 contact closed).

<<EEPROM ERROR CALIBR.>> : Calibration zone failure

<<CT ERROR>> : Analog channel failure

Minor fault:
The MiCOM relay is fully operational.
The RL0 watchdog relay is energised (35-36 contact open, 36-37 contact closed).

<<RAM ERROR>> : RAM supplied by battery failed.

<<Battery fail>> : battery failure (flat or not correctly in place)

NOTE : The <<Battery backed RAM memory>> and <<Battery failure>> alarm
messages can be configured to be displayed or not by selecting yes
or no, in the CONFIGURATION/Alarms menu.
<< DEFAULT SETTINGS (*) >>
<< SETTING ERROR (**) >>

<<COMM.ERROR>> : Communication failure

<<CLOCK ERROR>> : Time tag failure

User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/62

(*) DEFAULT SETTINGS: Each time the relay is powered ON it will check its memory
contents to determine whether the settings are set to the factory defaults. If the relay detects
that the default settings are loaded an alarm is raised. The ALARM LED (YELLOW) will light
up and the Watch Dog contact will be activated.
Only one parameter in the relay's menu needs to be changed to suppress these messages
and to reset the watch dog. This alarm is only an indication to the user that the relay has its
default settings applied.
(**) SETTING ERROR: Should the CPU fails to get correctly store data to the EEPROM
during a setting change, a "HARDWARE" ALARM will appear on the LCD display followed
by "SETTING ERROR" message (when pushing on the button). In addition, the ALARM LED
(YELLOW) will light up and the Watch Dog contact will be activated To reset this alarm it is
necessary to power ON and OFF the relay. Following this, the last unsuccessful setting
change will then need to be re-applied. If the alarm persists, i.e. the "SETTING ERROR"
alarm is still displayed, please contact AREVA After Sales Services for advice and
assistance.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 14/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5. MENUS
The menu of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays is divided into main menus and
submenus. The available content depends on the model of the relay.
5.1 Default display
By default, the LCD displays the current value measured (selected phase or earth). As soon
as an alarm is detected by the relay, that information is considered as more important and
the alarm message is then displayed instead of the default value.
The user can configure the information he wants to display by default going under the
CONFIGURATION/Display menu.
5.2 Access to the menu
Navigation through the different menus is done pressing the keys & # $ %. The
organisation of the menus is shown in figure 2 for P120 and P121 and figure 3 for P122 and
P123.
There is no need of a password when reading parameters and measured values.
Modification of a parameter requires entering a password.
Should an error be made in entering a parameter, press ! to cancel.
NOTE : The letter P is displayed when the password needs to be entered. If
no key is pushed during 5 minutes, the password needs to be entered
again.
5.3 Menu contents description
The menu of MiCOM P122 & P123 relays is divided into 8 main sections (6 for P120 and
P121):

⇒ OP PARAMETERS

⇒ CONFIGURATION

⇒ MEASUREMENTS

⇒ COMMUNICATION

⇒ PROTECTION G(1)

⇒ PROTECTION G2 (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ AUTOMAT. CTRL

⇒ RECORDS (P122 & P123 only)

To access these menus from the default display press #.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/62

To return to the default display from these menus or sub-menus press &.

DEFAULT DISPLAY OP PARAMETERS

IA=1245A

CONFIGURATION

MEASUREMENTS

COMMUNICATION

PROTECTION

AUTOMAT. CTRL
P0003ENa

FIGURE 3 : ORGANISATION OF MiCOM P120 AND P121 MAIN MENU

NOTE : The content of the menu is presented in the P12x/EN HI document.
This table helps the user to navigate through the different menus and
submenus.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 16/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

DEFAUL T DISPLAY OP PARAMETERS

IA=1245A

CONFIGURATION

MEASUREMENTS

COMMUNICATION

PROTECTION G1

PROTECTION G2

AUTOMAT. CTRL

RECORDS

P0004ENa

FIGURE 4 : ORGANISATION OF MiCOM P122 AND P123 MAIN MENU

NOTE : The content of the menu is presented in the document P12x/EN HI.
This table helps the user to navigate through the different menus and
submenus.
For MiCOM P121, P122 and P123, while navigating between
submenu points, the user can press the key c to go back to the
corresponding head menu.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/62

5.4 OP PARAMETERS Menu

Press # to access the menu OP PARAMETERS from the default display.

OP PARAMETERS Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu

Press #.to access the menu content.

Password Password entry. This password is required when

**** modifying relay settings and parameters. Press ' to
enter a new password,
Password To enter a password, the user needs to enter it letter by
AAAA letter using & # to go up or down in the alphabet.
After each letter, press $ to enter the following letter. At
the end, press ' to validate the password. If the
password is correct, the message « PASSWORD OK »
is displayed on the screen.
NOTE : The password is initially set in factory to AAAA.

WARNING : NO SETTING CHANGES DONE EITHER LOCALLY (THROUGH RS232)

OR REMOTELY (THROUGH RS485) WILL BE ALLOWED DURING THE 5
FIRST MINUTES FOLLOWING A CHANGE OF PASSWORD.

Description Indicates the type of relay

P121

Reference Displays the reference number that lists the equipment

ALST associated with the relay.
The entry of the reference is made character by
character using # &. After each character (letter,
number or sign), press $ to enter the following character.
Press ' to validate the reference entry.
Note: The reference is initially set in the factory to
ALST.
Frequency Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50
50 Hz or 60 Hz. Press ' to modify this value, and press & #
to select the desired value. Press ' to validate your
choice.
Input 54321 Displays the status of the logic Inputs. The Logic Inputs
Status 10110 are numbered from 1 to 5 for P123, 1 to 3 for P122 and 1
to 2 for P120 and P121. When the status of one input is :
- state 0 : it means that the input is de-energised
- state 1 : it means that the input is energised
Relay 87654321 Displays the status of the logic outputs. The Logic
Status 01011101 Outputs are numbered from 1 to 8 for P123, 1 to 6 for
P122 and 1 to 4 for P120 and P121. When The state of
each output is :
- state 0 : it means that the output relay is activated
- state 1 : it means that the output relay is not
activated
NOTE : The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not
display in the output status menu .

5.4.1 P121, P122 and P123 additional OP.PARAMETERS Menu

Software version Displays the version of the software

6.A
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 18/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.4.2 P122 and P123 additional OP.PARAMETERS Menu

Active Group Displays the active protection and automation group.

1 This value can be either 1 or 2.

Date Displays the date. Press ' to modify this date then use
12/08/02 $ to enter another date. Press ' to validate your choice.
In this example the date is : 12 August 2002.
Time Displays the time. Press ' to modify the time then
13:57:44 press $ to enter another value. Press ' to validate your
choice . In this example the time is : 13 hours, 57
minutes, 44 seconds.

5.5 Menu CONFIGURATION

Under this menu, the different submenus are :

⇒ Display

⇒ CT Ratio

⇒ Led 5

⇒ Led 6

⇒ Led 7

⇒ Led 8

⇒ Group Select (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ Alarms (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ Configuration inputs (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ Relays Maintenance (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ Phase rotation (P122 & P123 only)

Press # to access the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, then $ until the
desired submenu header is displayed.
5.5.1 Submenu DISPLAY

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. Press # to

access the submenu DISPLAY,.

Display Heading of the DISPLAY submenu.

Press #.to access the submenu content.

Default Display Displays the default current value (Phase A, Phase B ,

RMS I A Phase C, Earth N, or the four values simultaneously can
be chosen). Press ' to modify this default value, then
use $ to enter the required value.
Press ' to validate your choice.
Phase A Text Choose a label for phase A. The possible choices are A,
A L1, or R. This value can be modified after entering the
password and is displayed with the associated
measurement value.
Phase B Text Choose a label for phase B. The possible choices are B,
B L2, or S. This value can be modified after entering the
password and is displayed with the associated
measurement value.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 19/62

Phase C Text Choose a label for phase C. The possible choices are
C C, L3, or T. This value can be modified after entering the
password and is displayed with the associated
measurement value.
E/Gnd Text Choose a label for the earth phase. The possible choices
E are N, E, or G. This value can be modified after entering
the password and is displayed with the associated
measurement value.

WARNING : This DISPLAY submenu does not exist in MiCOM P121.

The default display is IA and A,B, C, N for the label of the different
phases.
5.5.2 Submenu CT RATIO

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. Press # to

access the CT RATIO menu, and $ until the desired
submenu is reached.
CT Ratio Heading of the CT RATIO submenu.
To access the submenu, press #, $.

Line CT primary Choose the rated primary current of the line CT.
1000 The setting range is from 1 to 9999.

Line CT sec Choose the rated secondary current of the line CT.
5 The setting value is either 1or 5.

E/Gnd CT primary Choose the rated primary current of the earth CT.
1000 The setting range is from 1 to 9999.

E/Gnd CT sec Choose the rated secondary current of the earth CT.
5 The setting value is either 1 or 5.

5.5.3 LED 5 to 8 configuration submenus

Press # to access the LED 5 CONFIGURATION submenu, then $ twice.
To access the others LEDs CONFIGURATION submenus, press $ 3 times for LED 6, 4
times for LED 7 and 5 times for LED 8.
26 different parameters can be assigned to each LED in MiCOM P123 (20 for MiCOM P122
and 12 for MiCOM P120 and P121).
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 20/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

The following table lists the protection functions that can be assigned to the LEDs (5 to 8) for
each model of relay.

TEXT Information
I> Instantaneous first phase threshold
I>> Instantaneous second phase threshold
I>>> Instantaneous third phase threshold
tI> Time delayed first phase threshold
tI>> Time delayed second phase threshold
tI>>> Time delayed third phase threshold
Ie> Instantaneous first earth threshold
Ie>> Instantaneous second earth threshold
Ie>>> Instantaneous third earth threshold
tIe> Time delayed first earth threshold
tIe>> Time delayed second earth threshold
tIe>>> Time delayed third earth threshold
Therm Trip Trip on Thermal overload
Brkn Cond. Broken conductor detection
CB Fail Detection of a Circuit Breaker failure (CB not open at the end
of tBF timer)
tI2> Time delayed negative phase sequence (1st threshold)
Input 1 Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°1
Input 2 Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°2
Input 3 Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°3
Input 4 Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°4
Input 5 Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°5
Recloser Run Signal that Autoreclose cycle is working
Recloser Blocked Auto-recloser function blocked
t SOTF Switch on to fault timer expired
t Aux 1 Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 1
t Aux 2 Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 2
tI2>> Time delayed negative phase sequence (2nd threshold)

Only available in MiCOM P122 & P123 model

Only available in MiCOM P123 model

NOTES : ⇒ Each parameter can be assigned to one or more LED's.

⇒ One or more parameters (OR logic) can provocate each LED to
light up.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 21/62

Example of LED 5 setting :

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To access the

LED submenu, press # and $ until the desired submenu
is reached.
Led 5 Heading LED 5 submenu.
To access the submenu content, press #.

Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when I> threshold is

I> Yes crossed.
Setting choice No: No operation when I> threshold is
crossed
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tI> delay time
tI> No has elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when tI> delay time has
elapsed.
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when I>> threshold
I>> No is crossed.
Setting choice No: No operation when I>> threshold is
crossed
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tI>> delay time
tI>> No has elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when tI>> delay time
has elapsed.
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when I>>> threshold
I>>> No is crossed.
Setting choice No: No operation when I>>> threshold is
crossed
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tI>>> delay
tI>>> No time has elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when tI>>> delay time
has elapsed
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Ie> threshold
Ie> No is crossed.
Setting choice No: No operation when Ie> threshold is
crossed.
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tIe> delay time
tIe> Yes has elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when tIe> delay time
has elapsed.
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Ie>> threshold
Ie>> No is crossed.
Setting choice No: No operation when Ie>> threshold is
crossed.
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tIe>> delay
tIe>> Yes time has elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when tIe>> delay time
has elapsed.
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Ie>>>
Ie>>> No threshold is crossed.
Setting choice No: No operation when Ie>>> threshold is
crossed.
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tIe>>> delay
tIe>>> Yes time has elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when tIe>>> delay time
has elapsed.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 22/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Example of LED 5 setting (information available only for P122 & P123) :

Led Therm. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Thermal Trip
Trip No occurs.
Setting choice No: No operation when Thermal Trip
occurs.
Led Brkn. Cond Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Brkn. Cond is
Yes detected.
Setting choice No: No operation when Brkn. Cond is
detected.
Led CB Fail Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when CB failure
Yes occurs.
Setting choice No: No operation when CB failure occurs.
Led Input 1 Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present
No at logic input 1.
Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at
logic input 1.
Led Input 2 Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present
Yes at logic input 2.
Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at
logic input 2.
Led Input 3 Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present
No at logic input 3.
Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at
logic input 3.
Led t Aux 1 Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when time Aux1 has
Yes elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when time Aux1 has
elapsed.
Led t Aux 2 Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when time Aux2 has
No elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when time Aux2 has
elapsed.
Led tI2> Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tI2> delay time
No has elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when tI2> delay time
has elapsed.
Led tI2>> Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tI2>> delay
No time has elapsed.
Setting choice No: No operation when tI2>> delay time
has elapsed.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 23/62

Example of LED 5 setting (information only for P123):

Led Input 4 Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present
No at logic input 4.
Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at
logic input 4.
Led Input 5 Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present
No at logic input 5.
Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at
logic input 5.
Led Recloser Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Recloser Run
Run No cycle is active.
Setting choice No: No operation when Recloser Run
cycle is active.
Led Recloser Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Recl. Blocked
Blocked No function is active.
Setting choice No: No operation when Recl. Blocked
function is active.
Led Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when time tSOTF
Conf SOTF has expired.
No Setting choice No: No operation when time tSOTF has
expired.

5.5.4 Submenu Selecting Active Protection Group (P122 & P123 only)

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. Press # to

access the Group Select menu, and $ until the desired
submenu is reached.
Group Select Heading of the GROUP SELECT sub-menu.
Press # to access the submenu content.

Change Group Press ' and use 1 or 2 and & # to select if the change
Input = INPUT of the group is done through an INPUT or through the
MENU. Press ' to confirm your choice.
If MENU is selected, the following menu is displayed:
Setting Group To select active setting protection group 1 or 2 press '
1 and & or #.
Press ' to confirm choice.

5.5.5 Alarms sub-menu (P122 & P123 only)

CONFIGURATION Heading of the configuration menu. To access the Alarm

submenu, press #, $ until the submenu is reached.

Alarms Heading of the Alarms submenu. Press # to access the

submenu content.

Inst. Self-reset ? Setting choice Yes: the alarms that are instantaneous
No will be self reset when they come back to a normal value
(below the threshold).
Setting choice No: the alarms that are instantaneous will
be need to be acknowledged by the user to be reset.
Press ' to modify and use & to select your choice.
Press ' to validate the setting.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 24/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Reset led on Setting choice Yes: the LED associated with an old
fault ? No alarm will be automatically reset when a new fault
occurs. This is done to avoid a display of numerous
alarms that are not active any more.
Setting choice No: the appearance of a new fault will not
automatically reset LEDs associated with an old fault.
To reset or not the LED when a new fault occurs. Press
' to modify the value and use keys & # to select your
choice. Press ' to validate the setting.
Alarm Battery To display or not the alarm "RAM ERROR" or
No "BATTERY FAIL" in case of RAM error or battery failure.
Press ' to modify and use & # keys to select your
choice. Press ' to validate the setting.

5.5.6 Submenu Inputs Configuration (P122 & P123 only)

A digital input can be configured to be activated either on falling edge/low level, or on rising
edge/high level.
Falling edge or low level (idem for rising edge or high level) depends of the application of the
digital inputs.
For example, a digital input configured as "blocking logic" will operate on level, but a digital
input configured as "Cold load pick up" will operate on edge.

Function allocated to the Digital Input Operation of the Digital Input

Unlatch of the output relays On level
Position of the CB, 52a or 52b On level
Blocking logic 1 & 2 On level
Logic Selectivity 1 & 2 On level
Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3 & Aux 4 On level
CB Fault On level
Reset of the thermal state On edge
Blocking of the Autorecloser On level
Cold load Pick Up On edge
Start of disturbance record On edge
Trip circuit supervision On level
Change of setting group On level (since version V6G)
CB Fail start On edge

The user has to set under the Menu CONFIGURATION the auxiliary voltage (AC or DC) for
the digital inputs. This setting is necessary because of the time filtering which is different in
DC and AC.
NOTE : If the V4 or V5 software is used with a V3 hardware the setting has to
be DC.

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. Press # to

access the Configuration Inputs menu, then $ until the
desired submenu is reached.
Configuration Heading of the Configuration Inputs submenu. Press #
Inputs to access the submenu content.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/62

Inputs 54321 Press ' to modify and use & # % $ to assign active
10110 high or low functionality to each logic input. Press ' to
validate your choice.
0 = active low 1 = active high
Voltage input Press ' to modify and use & # to select AC or DC
DC power supply for the digital input. Press ' to confirm the
setting. The power supply for any input is the same as
the power supply of the relay.

5.5.7 Configuration Relays Maintenance sub-menu (P122 & P123 only)

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. Press # to

access the Relays Maintenance menu then $ until the
desired submenu is reached.
REL. Maintenance Heading of the CONFIGURATION RELAYS
MAINTENANCE submenu. Press # to access the
submenu content.
Maintenance Mode Choose if you want to activate the MAINTENANCE
Yes MODE of the relay. If the user selects Yes, output relays
are disconnected from the protection and automation
functions.
Relays 8765W4321 If the MAINTENANCE MODE is activated (set to Yes),
000000001 this menu allows the user to activate each one of the
output relay
1 = relay activated
0 = relay not activated

5.5.8 Configuration Phase Rotation sub-menu (P122 & P123 only)

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. Press # to

access the menu Phase Rotation, and $ until the desired
submenu is reached..
PHASE ROTATION Heading of the PHASE ROTATION sub-menu. Press #
to access the submenu content..

PHASE ROTATION Choose the phase rotation between either A-B-C or A-

A-B-C C-B.
Press ' to change the phase rotation then & to scroll
through the available selections.
Press ' to validate your choice.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 26/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.6 MEASUREMENTS Menu

Under the MEASUREMENTS menu, the user can read the various measurement values.
To access the MEASUREMENTS menu from the default display, press # then $ 2 times.

MEASUREMENTS Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To access the

MEASUREMENTS menu, press #, $, 2 times.
Press # to access the submenu content.
Frequency Displays the network frequency calculated from phase
50.10 Hz currents

IA Displays the current value of phase A (True RMS value)

640.10 A taking into account the phase CT ratio
(CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO submenu).
IB Displays the current value of phase B (True RMS value)
629.00 A taking into account the phase CT ratio
(CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO submenu).
IC Displays the current value of phase C (True RMS value)
634.50 A taking into account the phase CT ratio
(CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO submenu).
IN Displays the earth current value (True RMS value) taking
3.15 A into account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT
RATIO submenu).

5.6.1 P122 & P123 additional MEASUREMENTS Menu

I1 Displays the positive sequence component.

103A

I2 Displays the negative sequence component.

50A

RATIO I2/I1 Displays the ratio of I2/I1. This derived measurement is

50% used by the Broken Conductor detection function.
(Automat. Ctrl menu)
In - fn Displays the earth current In (True RMS value) minus
RST = [C] 0.0A the current value at the fundamental frequency (value of
the harmonics). Press ! to clear the value (password
required)
Thermal θ Displays the % thermal state based on true RMS values.
RST = [C] 67% Press ! to clear the % values. (password required).

Max & Average I Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and
RST = [C] average (rolling) memorised values of the current.
Press ! to clear these values(password required).
Max IA Rms Displays the peak value for phase A. The value is the
127.36 A true RMS maximum value.

Max IB Rms Displays the peak value for phase B. The value is the
156.28 A true RMS maximum value.

Max IC Rms Displays the peak value for phase C. The value is the
139.01 A true RMS maximum value.

Average IA Rms Displays the rolling value for phase A. The value is the
98.25 A true RMS average value.

Average IB Rms Displays the rolling value for phase B. The value is the
97.88 A true RMS average value.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/62

Average IC Rms Displays the rolling value for phase C. The value is the
99.02 A true RMS average value.

MAX. SUBPERIOD Allows the user to clear the maximum subperiod values
RST = [C] of the 3 currents.

MAX. SUBPERIOD Displays the IA peak value demand. The value is the
IA Rms = 245A true RMS maximum value on a subperiod.

MAX. SUBPERIOD Displays the IB peak value demand. The value is the
IB Rms = 240A true RMS maximum value on a subperiod.

MAX. SUBPERIOD Displays the IC peak value demand. The value is the
IC Rms = 250A true RMS maximum value on a subperiod.

ROLLING AVERAGE Allows the user to clear the rolling average values of the
RST = [C] 3 currents.

ROLLING AVERAGE Displays the IA average value demand. The value is the
IA Rms = 0A true RMS average value on a number of subperiod set in
Record menu.
ROLLING AVERAGE Displays the IB average value demand. The value is the
IB Rms = 0A true RMS average value on a number of subperiod set in
Record menu.
ROLLING AVERAGE Displays the IC average value demand. The value is the
IC Rms = 0A true RMS average value on a number of subperiod set in
Record menu.

5.6.2 P123 additional MEASUREMENTS Menu

Reclose Stats Allows the user to clear the statistics stored for the
RST = [C] autoreclose function. Press ! to clear these values.

Total Recloses Displays the total number of reclosings.

16

Cycle 1 Recloses Displays the total number of re-closings for cycle 1.

1

Cycle 2 Recloses Displays the total number of re-closings for cycle 2.

7

Cycle 3 Recloses Displays the total number of re-closings for cycle 3.

5

Cycle 4 Recloses Displays the total number of re-closings for cycle 4.

3

Total Trip & Displays the total number of definitive trips issued by the
Lockout 2 autoreclose function.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 28/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.7 COMMUNICATION Menu

The COMMUNICATION menu content depends on the communication protocol of the relay.
Four protocols are available: MODBUS, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0.
To access the COMMUNICATION menu from the default display, press # then $ 3 times.
5.7.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu

COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ 3 times.
Press # to access the submenus.
Communication ? Activates MODBUS RTU communication via the RS485
Yes port on the rear terminals of the relay. Press ' to
activate the communication, and use & to select Yes.
Press ' to validate your choice.
Baud Rate Choose the baud rate of ModBus transmission.
9600 bd Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or
38400 bd.
Parity Choose the parity in the ModBus data frame.
None Select parity: Even, Odd or Non

Stop Bits Choose the number of stop bits in the ModBus data
1 frame.
Select stop bit: 0 or 1.
Relay Address Choose the network address of the relay in the ModBus
29 network.
Select an address from 1 to 255.
Date format Choose the format of the date, either PRIVATE or IEC
Private protocol.

WARNING : A MODBUS NETWORK IS LIMITED TO 32 RELAY ADDRESSES ON THE

SAME MODBUS SUB-LAN.
5.7.2 Courier COMMUNICATION Menu

COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $, 3 times.
Press # to access the submenus.
Communication ? Activates Courier communication via the RS485 port on
Yes the rear terminals of the relay. Press ' to activate the
communication, then use & to select Yes. Press ' to
validate your choice.
Relay Address Choose the network address of the relay in the Courier
12 network. Select an address from 1 to 255 using & and
press ' to validate your choice.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 29/62

5.7.3 IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu

COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ 3 times.
Press # to access the submenus.
Communication ? Activates IEC 60870-5-103 communication via the
Yes RS485 port on the rear terminals of the relay. Press '
to activate communication, then use & to select Yes.
Press ' to validate your choice.
Data Bits Choose the baud rate of IEC 60870-5-103 transmission.
9600 bd Select from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400 bauds using &. Press ' to validate your choice.
Relay Address Choose the network address of the relay in the IEC
29 60870-5-103 network. Select from 1 to 255 using &.
Press ' to validate your choice.

5.7.4 DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu

COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ 3 times.
Press # to access the submenus.
Communication ? Activates MODBUS RTU communication via the RS485
Yes port on the rear terminals of the relay. Press ' to
activate communication, and use & to select Yes. Press
' to validate your choice.
Baud Rate Choose the baud rate of MODBUS transmission. Select
9600 bd from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
bauds using &. Press ' to validate your choice.
Parity Choose the parity in the MODBUS frame. Select Even,
None Odd or None using &. Press ' to validate your choice.

Stop Bits Choose the number of stop bits in the MODBUS frame.
1 Select 0 or 1 using &. Press ' to validate your choice.

Relay Address Choose the network address of the relay in the

29 MODBUS network. Select from 1 to 255 using &. Press
' to validate your choice.

5.8 PROTECTION Menu

The protection menu is divided into two groups for MiCOM P122 and P123: PROTECTION
G1 for the first setting group and PROTECTION G2 for the second setting group.
Under this PROTECTION menu, the user can program the parameters of the different phase
or earth protection functions and define their associated setting (thresholds, time delay).
The different submenus are listed below:
[50/51] Phase OC
[50N/51N] E/Gnd
[46] (P122 & P123 only) Neg seq OC
[49] (P122 & P123 only) Therm OL
[37] (P122 & P123 only) Under Current
[79] (P123 only) Autoreclose
Press # to access the PROTECTION menu (PROTECTION G1 menu for MiCOM P122 and
P123), then $ until the desired submenu is reached. For MiCOM P122 and P123, press # to
access the PROTECTION G2 menu, then $ five times.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 30/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.8.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu

PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu. Press # to access

to the menu,then $ until the desired submenu is reached.

[50/51] Phase OC Heading of the [50/51] Phase Overcurrent submenu

Press # to navigate through the different submenus.

I> ? Setting choice Yes: the first phase threshold (I>) is

Yes enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the first phase threshold (I>) is not
enabled, and the next menu is the “I>>” menu.
I> Set the value for the current threshold I>. Press ' to
4 In modify this value. The threshold setting range is from 0.1
to 25In. Press ' to validate your choice.
Delay Type Select the time delay type associated with I>. Setting
DMT choices are: DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time
curves, and RI for the electromechanical inverse time
curve.
If the user selects DMT the following menu is displayed:

5.8.1.1 I> DMT threshold menu

Delay Type Shows that the delay time type chosen is DMT.
DMT

tI > Set the value for thetime delay associated with I>. The
100 ms setting range is from 0 to 150 s. Use & to change
setting and press ' to validate your choice .
t Reset Set the reset time value. The setting range isfrom 0 to
0 ms 600 s. Use & to change setting and press ' to validate
your choice (only for P122, P123).

5.8.1.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu

Delay Type Displays the inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI

IDMT curves associated with I>.

Idmt Select the type of curve. Select your choice from IEC SI,
IEC SI IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI using & and press ' to validate your
choice.
Tms Set the TMS value for the curve. The setting range is
0,025 from 0.025 to 1.5. Use & to change setting and press '
to validate your choice.

5.8.1.2.1 P122 & P123 additional I> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu

t Reset Set the reset time setting value. The setting range is
60 ms from 40 ms to 100 s. Use & to change setting and press
' to validate your choice.

5.8.1.2.2 P122 & P123 additional I> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo Select the reset delay time type.. Select between DMT
Reset DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using & and
press ' to validate your choice.
t Reset Set the Reset time setting value . Select from 40 ms to
40 ms 100 s using & and press ' to validate your choice.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 31/62

5.8.1.2.3 P122 & P123 additional I> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo Select the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT
Reset IDMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using & and
press ' to validate your choice.
Rtms Set the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time
0.025 choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using & and press ' to
validate your choice.

5.8.1.3 I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu

Delay Type Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical

RI RI curve).

K Select the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10

2.500 using & and press ' to validate your choice.

5.8.1.3.1 P122 & P123 additional I> DMT reset time, Electromechanical RI curves menu

t Reset Set the value for the time reset. The setting range is from
60 ms 40 ms to 100 s. Use & to change setting and press ' to
validate your choice.

5.8.1.4 I>> threshold menu

I>> ? Setting choice Yes: the second phase threshold (I>>) is

Yes enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the second phase threshold (I>>) is
not enabled, and the next menu is the “I>>>” menu.
I>> Set the value for the second current threshold I>>. Press
10 In ' to modify this value. The threshold setting range is
from 0.5 to 40In. Press ' to validate your choice.
Delay Type Select the threshold delay time type associated with I>>.
DMT Setting choices are: DMT for definite time, IDMT for
inverse time curves, and RI for the electromechanical
inverse time curve.
tI >> Set the value for the time delay associated with the
100 ms second threshold I>>. Select the time delay from 0 to
150 s using & and press ' to validate your choice.
t Reset Set the value for the time reset. Press & to modify this
0 ms value. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s. Press ' to
validate your choice (only P122, P123).

5.8.1.5 I>>> threshold menu

I>>> ? Setting choice Yes: the third phase threshold (I>>>) is

Yes enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the third phase threshold (I>>>) is not
enabled, and the next menu is the heading of the [50/51]
phase OC.
I>>> Sample Select the mode of operation of the third threshold. I>>>
No operates on current sample base if you select (YES), or
on Fast Fourier Transformation base if you select (NO)
(Only P122, P123).
I>>> Set the value for the third current threshold I>>>. Press
10 In ' to modify this value. The threshold setting range is
from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to validate your choice.
tI >>> Set the time delay associated with I>>>. The setting
100 ms range is from 0 to 150 s. Use & to change setting and
press ' to validate your choice .
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 32/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.8.2 [50N/51N] EARTH OC sub-menu (P121 - P122 - P123 only)

PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu. To gain access to

the menu, press #, $ 4 times.

[50N/51N] E/Gnd Heading of the [50N/51N] E/Gnd submenu.

Press # access the different submenus.
Ie> ? Setting choice Yes: the first earth fault threshold (Ie>) is
Yes enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the first earth fault threshold (Ie>) is
not enabled, and the next menu is the heading of the
[50/51] phase OC.
le > Set the value for the earth fault current threshold Ie>.
0.05 Ien Press ' to modify this value. Three earth fault current
ranges are available (at order):
from 0.002 to 1 Ien. Cortec code A
from 0.01 to 8 Ien. Cortec code B
from 0.1 to 40 Ien. Cortec code C
Press ' to validate your choice.
Delay Type Select the threshold delay time type associated with Ie>.
DMT Setting choices are: DMT for definite time, IDMT for
inverse time curves, and RI for the electromechanical
inverse time curve.

5.8.2.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu

Delay Type Display of the Ie> DMT time delay.

DMT

tIe > Set the time delay associated with Ie>. The setting
100 ms range is from 0 to 150 s. Use & to change setting and
press ' to validate your choice.
t Reset Set the value for the time reset. Press & to modify this
0 ms value. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s. Press ' to
validate your choice (only P122, P123).

5.8.2.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu

Delay Type Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI
DMT curves).

Idmt Select the Ie> type of curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI,
IEC SI IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI,
IEEE EI using & and press ' to validate your choice.
Tms Setthe value for the time multiplier setting Tms of the
0,025 selected curve. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using & and
press ' to validate your choice.

5.8.2.2.1 P122 & P123 additional Ie> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu

t Reset Set the value for the time reset. Press & to modify this
60 ms value. The setting range is from 40 ms to 100 s. Press
' to validate your choice.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 33/62

5.8.2.2.2 P122 & P123 additional Ie> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo Select the type of reset time delay. Setting choices are:
Reset DMT DMT for definite time and IDMT for inverse time curves.

t Reset Set the value for the time reset associated with the DMT
40 ms reset time choice. Press & to modify this value. The
setting range is from 40 ms to 100 s. Press ' to validate
your choice (only P122, P123).

5.8.2.2.3 P122 & P123 additional Ie> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo Select the reset time type. Setting choices are: DMT for
Reset IDMT definite time and IDMT for inverse time curves.

Rtms Set the value for the Rtms factor associated to IDMT
0.025 delay type reset.

5.8.2.3 Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu

Delay type Displays the Ie> inverse time delay (electromechanical

RI RI curve).

K Set the K value associated to the RI curve. The setting

2.500 range is from 0.100 to 10.

5.8.2.3.1 P122 & P123 additional Ie> DMT reset time, RI curves menu

t Reset Set the value for the time reset. Press & to modify this
60 ms value. The setting range is from 40 ms to 100 s. Press
' to validate your choice.

5.8.2.4 Ie>> threshold menu

Ie>> ? Setting choice Yes: the second earth threshold (Ie>>) is

Yes enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the second earth threshold (Ie>>) is
not enabled, and the next menu is the “Ie>>>” menu.
Ie>> Set the value for the second earth fault current threshold
5 Ien Ie>>. Press ' to modify this value. Three earth fault
current ranges are available (at order):
from 0.002 to 1 Ien. Cortec code A
from 0.01 to 8 Ien. Cortec code B
from 0.5 to 40 Ien. Cortec code C
Press ' to validate your choice.
Delay Type Select the threshold delay time type. Setting choices are:
DMT DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves and
RI for electromechanical inverse time curve.
tIe>> Set the time delay associated with Ie>>. The setting
100 ms range is from 0 to 150 s. Use & to change setting and
press ' to validate your choice.
t Reset Set the value for the time reset. The setting range is from
0 ms 0 to 600 s. Use & to change setting and press ' to
validate your choice (only P122, P123).
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 34/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.8.2.5 Ie>>> threshold menu

Ie>>> ? Setting choice Yes: the third earth threshold (Ie>>>) is

Yes enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the third earth threshold (Ie>>>) is not
enabled, and the next menu is the heading of the menu
[50N/51N] E/Gnd.
Ie>>> Sample Select the mode of operation of the third threshold.
No Ie>>> operates on current sample base if you select
(YES), or on Fast Fourier Transformation base if you
select (NO) (Only P122, P123).
Ie>>> Set the value for the third earth fault current threshold
10 Ien Ie>. Press ' to modify this value. The threshold setting
range is from 0.5 to 40 Ien. Press ' to validate your
choice.
tIe>>> Set the time delay associated with Ie>>>. The setting
100 ms range is from 0 to 150 s. Use & to change setting and
press ' to validate your choice.

5.8.3 [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2> submenu (P122 & P123 only)

PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu. To gain access to

the menu, press # , 4 times.

[46] Neg Seq OC Heading of the [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2>
submenu.

I2 > ? Setting choice Yes: the first negative phase sequence

Yes overcurrent threshold (I2>) is enabled. Then the
following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the first negative phase sequence
overcurrent threshold (I2>) is not enabled, and the next
menu is not activated.
I2 > Set the value for the negative phase sequence threshold
0.1 In I2>. Press ' to modify this value. The threshold setting
range is from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Press ' to
validate your choice..
Delay Type Select the threshold delay time type associated with I2>.
DMT Setting choices are: DMT for definite time, IDMT for
inverse time curves and RI for electromechanical inverse
time curve.

5.8.3.1 I2> DMT threshold menu

Delay Type Display of the I2> DMT time delay.

DMT

t I2 > Set the time delay associated with I2>. The setting
100 ms range is from 0 to 150 s. Use & to change setting and
press ' to validate your choice.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 35/62

5.8.3.2 I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu

Delay Type Display of the I2> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI
IDMT curves).

Curve Selection of the I2> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI,
IEC SI IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI,
IEEE EI using & and validate your choice using the key
'.
Tms Set the time multiplier setting value associated to the
0,025 selected curve. Setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5.

5.8.3.2.1 I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu

t Reset Set the value for the time reset. The setting range is from
60 ms 40 ms to 100 s. Use & to change setting and press ' to
validate your choice.

5.8.3.2.2 I2> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo Select the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT
Reset DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using & and
press ' to validate your choice.
t Reset Set the value for the time reset. The setting range is from
40 ms 40 ms to 100 s. Use & to change setting and press ' to
validate your choice (only P122, P123).

5.8.3.2.3 I2> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo Select the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT
Reset IDMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using & and
press ' to validate your choice.
Rtms Select the Rtms value associated to the IDMT curve.
0.025 Setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5. Use & to change
setting and press ' to validate your choice.

5.8.3.3 I2> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu

Delay Type Display of the I2> inverse time delay (electromechanical

RI RI curve).

K Set the value for the K factor associated to the RI curve.

2.500 Setting range is from 0.100 to 10. Use & to change
setting and press ' to validate your choice.

5.8.3.3.1 I2> DMT reset time, RI curves

t Reset Set the value for the reset time. The setting range is from
60 ms 40 ms to 100 s. Use & to change setting and press ' to
validate your choice.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 36/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.8.3.4 I2>> threshold menu

I2>> ? Setting choice Yes: the second negative phase

Yes sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>) is enabled. Then
the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the second negative phase sequence
overcurrent threshold (I2>) is not enabled, and the next
menu is not activated.
I2>> Set the value for the second threshold of the negative
1 In phase sequence OC I2>>. Press ' to modify this value.
The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps
of 0.01 In. Press ' to validate your choice.
tI2>> Set the time delay associated with I2>>. The setting
150 ms range is from 0 to 150 s. Use & to change setting and
press ' to validate your choice.

5.8.3.5 [49] Therm OL sub-menu (P122 & P123 only)

PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu. Press # to access

the menu, ,then $ 4 times.

[49] Therm OL Heading of the [49] Therm OL (Thermal Overload)

submenu.
Press # to access the different submenus.
Therm OL ? Setting choice Yes: the thermal overload function is
Yes enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the thermal overload function is not
enabled, and no menu content is displayed.
Iθ > Set the value for the thermal current threshold Iθ>. Press
0.5 In ' to modify this value. The setting range is from 0.1 to
3.2 In in steps of 0.01.Press ' to validate your choice.
Te Set value for the Te thermal time constant associated
10 mn with the thermal overload formula. Press ' to modify
this value. The setting range is from 1 min to 200 min in
steps of 1 min. Press ' to validate your choice
k Set the value for the k factor associated with the thermal
1.01 overload function. Press ' to modify this value. The
setting range is from 1 to 1.5 in steps of 0.01. Press '
to validate your choice.
θ Trip Set the percentage applicable to the thermal overload
110 % trip threshold. Press ' to modify this value. The setting
range is from 50 % to 200 % in steps of 1%. Press ' to
validate your choice.
θ Alarm ? Setting choice Yes: the thermal overload alarm function
Yes is enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the thermal overload function is not
enabled, and refer to the THERMAL OVERLOAD
submenu.
θ Alarm Set the percentage applicable to the thermal overload
90 % alarm threshold. Press ' to modify this value. The
setting range is from 50 % to 200 % in steps of 1%.
Press ' to validate your choice.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 37/62

5.8.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< sub-menu (P122 & P123 only)

PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu. Press # to access

the menu, then $ 4 times.

[37] Under Heading of the [37] Under-Current submenu.

Current Press # to access the submenu content.

I<? Setting choice Yes: the first undercurrent threshold (I<) is

Yes enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the first undercurrent threshold (I<) is
not enabled, and the next menu is not activated.
I< Set the value for the undercurrent threshold I<. Press '
0.2 In to modify this value. The threshold setting range is from
0.02 to 1 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Press ' to validate your
choice.
tI < Set the time delay associated with I<. The setting range
200 ms is from 0 to 150 s. Use & to change setting and press '
to validate your choice.

5.8.5 [79] AUTORECLOSE sub-menu (P123 only)

PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu. Press # to access

the menu, then $ 4 times.

[79] Autoreclose Heading of the [79] AUTORECLOSER submenu

Press # to access the submenu.

Autoreclose ? Setting choice Yes: the autoreclose function is enabled.

Yes Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the autoreclose function is not
enabled, and no menu is activated.
Ext CB Fail ? Setting choice Yes: the external circuit breaker failure
Yes function associated with the autoreclose function is
enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
Setting choice No: the Ext Block submenu is activated.

5.8.5.1 [79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE

Ext CB Fail Allows the use of a dedicated input (CB FLT) to inform
Yes the autoreclose function of the state of the CB (failed or
operational).
Ext CB Fail Time Set the value for the external CB failure time delay tCFE.
10000 ms Once this set time has elapsed, the information Ext CB
Fail is validated. Setting range is from 10 ms to 600 s.
Use & to change setting and press ' to validate your
choice.

5.8.5.2 [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING

Ext Block ? Allows the use of a dedicated input (Block_79) to block

Yes the autoreclose function.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 38/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.8.5.3 [79] DEAD and RECLAIM TIMES

Dead Time Set the value for the First Cycle Dead Time (tD1)
tD1 60 ms associated with the autoreclose function. Setting range is
from 10 ms to 300 s in steps of 10 ms. Use & to change
setting and press ' to validate your choice.
Dead Time Set the value for the second Cycle Dead Time (tD2)
tD2 100 ms associated with the autoreclose function. Setting range is
from 10 ms to 300 s in steps of 10 ms. Use & to change
setting and press ' to validate your choice.
Dead Time Set the value for the third Cycle Dead Time (tD3)
tD3 200 ms associated with the autoreclose function. Setting range is
from 10 ms to 600 s in steps of 10 ms. Use & to change
setting and press ' to validate your choice.
Dead Time Set the value for the fourth Cycle Dead Time (tD4)
tD4 60 ms associated with the autoreclose function. Setting range is
from 10 ms to 600 s in steps of 10 ms. Use & to change
setting and press ' to validate your choice.
Reclaim Time Set the Reclaimer time value (tR) associated with the
tR 120 ms autoreclose function. Setting range is from 20 ms to 600
s in steps of 10 ms. Use & to change setting and press
' to validate your choice.
Inhib Time Set the value for the Inhibit Time (tI) associated with the
tI 120 ms autoreclose function. Setting range is from 20 ms to 600
s in steps of 10 ms. Use & to change setting and press
' to validate your choice.

5.8.5.4 [79] Cycles number

Phase Cycles Select the number of cycles associated with the phase
4 autoreclose function. Select from 0 to 4 using & and
press ' to validate your choice.
E/Gnd Cycles Select the number of cycles associated with the earth
4 autoreclose function. Select from 0 to 4 using & and
press ' to validate your choice.

5.8.5.5 [79] Cycle allocation

CYCLES 4321 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip

tI> 1101 1 = trip on tI> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tI> pick-up
CYCLES 4321 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip
tI>> 1211 1 = trip on tI>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tI>> pick-up
CYCLES 4321 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip
tI>>> 1110 1 = trip on tI>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tI>>> pick-up
CYCLES 4321 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip
tIe> 0111 1 = trip on tIe> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tIe> pick-up
CYCLES 4321 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip
tIe>> 1121 1 = trip on tIe>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tIe>> pick-up
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 39/62

CYCLES 4321 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip

tIe>>> 1111 1 = trip on tIe>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tIe>>> pick-up
CYCLES 4321 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip
tAux1> 1112 1 = trip on tAux1> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tAux1> pick-up
CYCLES 4321 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip
tAux2> 0111 1 = trip on tAux2> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tAux2> pick-up

5.9 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

Under the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, the user can program the different automation functions
available in the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123.
The different submenus are listed below:

⇒ Trip Commands

⇒ Latch of the trip output relay RL1 by function (P121, P122, P123 only)

⇒ Latch of functions (P120 only)

⇒ Blocking logic (1)

⇒ Blocking Logic 2 (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ Logic Select. 1 (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ Logic Select. 2 (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ Outputs Relays

⇒ Latch of the auxiliary output relays (P121, P122, P123 only)

⇒ Inputs

⇒ Broken Conductor (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ Cold load PU(P122 & P123 only)

⇒ CB Fail (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ CB Supervision (P122 & P123 only)

⇒ Comm. Ord. Latch times (P122 & P123 only)

To access the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, press & then # until the menu is reached.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 40/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.9.1 Trip Commands sub-menu

This submenu makes it possible to assign some or all the selected thresholds to the trip
output relay (RL1).

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ 6 times.

Trip Commands Heading of the Trip ORDER sub-menu.

Press # to access the different submenus..

Trip tI> Setting choice Yes: Assign the first phase overcurrent
Yes time delay threshold to the trip output relay RL1. Then
the trip output relay (RL1) will be activated at the end of
the time delay tI>.
Setting choice No: the trip output relay (RL1) will never
be activated, even at the end of the time delay tI>.
Trip tI>> Assign the second phase time delay overcurrent
Yes threshold (tI>>) to the trip output relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip tI>>> Assign the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold
No (tI>>>) to the trip output relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip tIe> Assign the first earth fault overcurrent (tIe>) to the trip
Yes output relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip tIe>> Assign the second earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>) to the
No trip output relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip tIe>>> Assign the third earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>>) to the trip
No output relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.

5.9.1.1 P122 & P123 additional Trip Commands menu

Trip tI < Assign the minimum current threshold (tI<) to the trip
No output relay RL1. This information is generated in less
than a cycle of the network frequency (50 or 60 Hz).
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip tI2 > Assign the first negative phase sequence overcurrent
No time delayed threshold (tI2>) to the trip output relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip tI2 >> Assign the second negative phase sequence overcurrent
No time delayed threshold (tI2>>) to the trip output relay
RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip Thermal θ Assign the thermal overload trip threshold (θTrip) to the
No trip output relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip Brkn.Cond Assign the broken conductor detection signal to the trip
Yes output relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 41/62

Trip t Aux 1 Assign the delayed auxiliary input Aux 1 to the trip output
No relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip t Aux 2 Assign the delayed auxiliary input Aux 2 to the trip output
No relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip t Aux 3 Assign the delayed auxiliary input Aux 3 to the trip output
No relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip CB Fail Assign the Breaker failure signal to the trip output relay
No RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.

5.9.1.2 P123 additional Trip COMMAND menu

Trip t Aux 4 Assign the delayed auxiliary input Aux 4 to the trip output
No relay RL1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Trip SOTF Assign the SOTF function to the trip output. When the t
No SOTF has elapsed, the trip command is ordered.
Setting choice: Yes, No
Ctrl Trip Assign the control Trip function to the trip output relay
No RL1.
Setting choice: Yes, No
Trip CB Fail Assign the CB Fail function to the trip output relay RL1.
No Setting choice: Yes, No

5.9.2 Latch of trip output relay by Function Submenu (P121, P122 & P123 relays)
With this submenu the user can program the trip output relay RL1associated with one or
many thresholds so that it stays latched after the cause for activating these functions has
disappeared.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu, and $ until the desired menu is
reached.
Latch Functions Heading of the submenu.
Press # to access the different submenus.

Latch tI> Setting choice Yes: Latch the trip output relay RL1
Yes associated with first phase overcurrent time delay
threshold. The relay will be remain latched after tI> has
disappeared.
Setting choice No: The trip output relay RL1 will be
active when the relevant command is active; the relay
will not be active if the relevant command is reset.
Latch tI>> Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the
Yes second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>).
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch tI>>> Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the third
No phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>).
Setting choice: Yes or No.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 42/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Latch tIe> Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the first
No earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>).
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch tIe>> Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the
No second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>).
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch tIe>>> Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the third
No earth fault time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>).
Setting choice: Yes or No.

5.9.2.1 P122 & P123 additional Latch functions sub-menu

Latch tI < Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the time
Yes delay minimum current threshold (tI<).
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch tI2 > Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the time
No delay negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold
(tI2>) to the trip output.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch tI2 >> Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the time
No delay negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold
(tI2>>) to the trip output.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch Thermal θ Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the
No thermal overload Trip information (θ Trip).
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch Brkn.Cond Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the
No broken conductor function.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch t Aux 1 Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the
No delayed auxiliary input Aux 1.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch t Aux 2 Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the
No delayed auxiliary input Aux 2.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch t Aux 3 Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the
No delayed auxiliary input Aux 3.
Setting choice: Yes or No.

5.9.2.2 P123 additional latch functions submenu

Latch t Aux 4 Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the
No delayed auxiliary input Aux 4.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch SOTF Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the SOTF
No function.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
Latch CB Fail Latch the trip output relay RL1 associated with the CB
No Fail function.
Setting choice: Yes or No.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 43/62

NOTE : To reset the latched output relay :

P121 P122 &P123

The active relay latched can - Either by resetting of the - Either by resetting of the
be reset by: alarm "tI> PHASE"* from alarm "LATCH RELAY
the front panel by pushing TRIP" from the front panel
!. by pushing !.
- or by a logic input assigned - or by a logic input assigned
to this function to this function
- or by remote command. - or by remote command.

Note: No alarm dedicated to Note: The alarm "LATCH

the latch of RL1 RELAY TRIP" is dedicated to
the latch of RL1
* : tI> or other function presented in the "AUTOMAT. CTRL/Latch functions" menu

5.9.3 Latch functions submenu (P120 relay)

Through this submenu, the user can program trip functions so that output relays (including
the trip output relay RL1) remain latched after the cause for exceeding the threshold has
disappeared.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ until the submenu is reached.

Latch function Heading of the submenu.

Press # to access the submenus.

Latch tI> Setting choice Yes: Latch the output relays associated
Yes with first phase overcurrent time delay threshold. The
relay will be remain latched after tI> has disappeared.
Setting choice No: The output relay will be active when
the relevant command is active; the relays will not be
active if the relevant command is reset.
Latch tI>> Setting choice Yes: Latch the output relays associated
Yes with second phase overcurrent time delay threshold. The
relay will be remain latched after tI>> has disappeared.
Setting choice No: The output relay will be active when
the relevant command is active; the relays will not be
active if the relevant command is reset.
Latch tI>>> Setting choice Yes: Latch the output relays associated
Yes with third phase overcurrent time delay threshold. The
relay will be remain latched after tI>>> has disappeared.
Setting choice No: The output relay will be active when
the relevant command is active; the relays will not be
active if the relevant command is reset.

NOTE : To reset the latched relays with MiCOM P120:

When a relay associated to a time delay overcurrent threshold is
latched, no dedicated alarm signalling that the relay has been latched
is displayed.
The latched output can be reset by acknowledging the alarm message
pressing keys " and !.
The latched relay can also be reset either by an opto input or by a
remote command.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 44/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.9.4 Blocking Logic submenu

Through the Blocking Logic submenu, the user can block each delayed threshold using a "Blk
Log" input (refer to Inputs menu). MiCOM P122 & P123 relays have the submenu Blocking
Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 available for setting.
It is possible to enable or disable the “blocking” of most protection functions even if a logic
input has been assigned to that function. Blocking of a protection function can be prevented
if “No” is selected in the relevant window (see below). Blocking of a protection function can
be enabled if “Yes” is selected in the relevant window.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu then $ 6 times.

Blocking Logic Heading of the Blocking Logic submenu.

Press # to access the different submenus.

Block tI> Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the first time delay

Yes overcurrent threshold (tI>) from locking on the level (logic
state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block tI>> Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the second time
Yes delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) from locking on the
level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block tI>>> Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the third time delay
Yes overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) from locking on the level
(logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block tIe> Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the first earth time
No delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) from locking on the
level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block tIe>> Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the second earth
No fault time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>) from
locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk
Log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block tIe>>> Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the third earth fault
No time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>) from locking on
the level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.

5.9.4.1 P122 & P123 additional Blocking Logic menu

Block 1 tI2 > Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the first time delay
No negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>)
from locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic input
"Blk Log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block 1 tI2 >> Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the second time
No delay negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold
(tI2>>) from locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic
input "Blk Log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block 1 Thermal θ Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the trip threshold for
Yes thermal overload from locking on the level (logic state 1)
of logic input "Blk Log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 45/62

Block 1 Brkn.Cond Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the Broken

No Conductor trip signal from locking on the level (logic
state 1) of logic input "Blk log".
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block 1 t Aux 1 Enables/disables Blocking Logic of time delay of
No auxiliary input Aux1.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block 1 t Aux 2 Enables/disables Blocking Logic of time delay of
No auxiliary input Aux2.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Block 1 t Aux 3 Enables/disables Blocking Logic of time delay of
No auxiliary input Aux 3.
Setting choice: Yes, No

5.9.4.2 P123 additional Blocking Logic menu

Block 1 t Aux 4 Enables/disables Blocking Logic of time delay of

No auxiliary input Aux 4.
Setting choice: Yes, No.

5.9.5 Logic Select submenus (P122 & P123 only)

With the submenu Logic Select. 1 or Logic Select. 2, the user can assign each time delay
threshold to the "Log Sel" input (refer to Inputs menu). To access the submenu Logic Select. 1
or Logic Select. 2, press # and $ until the submenu is reached.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ 6 times.

Logic Select. 1 Heading of the Logic Select. 1 submenu.

Press # to access the different submenus.

Sel1 tI>> Enables/disables Logic Selectivity 1 of the second phase

Yes time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>).
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Sel1 tI>>> Enables/disables Logic Selectivity 1 of the third phase
Yes time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>).
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Sel1 tIe>> Enables/disables Logic Select 1 of the second earth fault
No time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>).
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Sel1 tIe>>> Enables/disables Logic Select 1 of the third earth fault
No time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>).
Setting choice: Yes, No.
t Sel1 Set the selective scheme logic time delay t Sel1. The
20 ms setting range for t Sel1 is from 0 s to 150 s, in steps of
10 ms.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 46/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.9.6 Outputs Relays submenu

This submenu makes it possible to assign various alarm and trip thresholds (instantaneous
and/or time delay) to a logic output. Excepted from this option are the Watchdog (RL0) and
the Tripping (RL1) outputs (refer to Trip Commands submenu).
The total number of programmable logic outputs for the four relay models is listed in the
table:

Model P120 P121 P122 P123

Output relays 3 3 5 7

RL2 relay is a change over relay. The others RL3 to RL8 are normally open relays.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu and $ until the submenu is reached.

Output Relays Heading of the Output Relays submenu.

To navigate within submenu points, press & #. To
modify setting, press '. Use & # % $ to scroll and set
available selections. Press ' to confirm choice.
Trip 8765432 Assign output signal Trip (RL1) to other output relays;
1100010 i.e. to output 3 (RL3), 7 (RL7) and 8 (RL8).
Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
I> 8765432 Assign first phase instantaneous overcurrent threshold
0000010 (I>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the output
relay; 0 no assignment.
tI> 8765432 Assign first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>)
1100010 to output relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the output
relay; 0 no assignment.
I>> 8765432 Assign second phase instantaneous overcurrent
1100010 threshold (I>>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns
the output relay; 0 no assignment.
tI>> 8765432 Assign second phase time delay overcurrent threshold
1100010 (tI>>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the
output relay; 0 no assignment.
I>>> 8765432 Assign third phase instantaneous overcurrent threshold
1100010 (I>>>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the
output relay; 0 no assignment.
tI>>> 8765432 Assign third phase instantaneous overcurrent threshold
1100010 (I>>>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the
output relay; 0 no assignment.
Ie> 8765432 Assign first earth instantaneous overcurrent threshold
1100010 (Ie>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the
output relay; 0 no assignment.
tIe> 8765432 Assign first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>)
1100010 to output relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the output
relay; 0 no assignment.
Ie>> 8765432 Assign second earth fault instantaneous overcurrent
1100010 threshold (Ie>>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1
assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
tIe>> 8765432 Assign second earth fault time delay overcurrent
1100010 threshold (tIe>>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1
assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 47/62

Ie>>> 8765432 Assign third earth fault instantaneous overcurrent

1100010 threshold (Ie>>>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1
assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
tIe>>> 8765432 Assign third earth fault time delay overcurrent threshold
1100010 (tIe>>>) to output relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the
output relay; 0 no assignment.
CB 8765432 Assign the circuit breaker closing order to output relays. ;
Close 10100000 i.e. to output 6 & 8 (RL6 & RL8). Setting choice: 1
assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.

5.9.6.1 P122 & P123 additional Outputs menu

tI< 8765432 Assign threshold for undercurrent (I<) to the output

1100010 relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8).
Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
tI2> 8765432 Assign negative phase sequence overcurrent time delay
1100010 threshold (tI2>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 &
8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8).
Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
tI2>> 8765432 Assign negative phase sequence overcurrent time delay
1100010 second threshold (tI2>>) to the output relays; i.e. to
output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8).
Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
Therm. 8765432 Assign thermal alarm threshold to the output relays; i.e.
Alarm 1100010 to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8).
Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
Therm. 8765432 Assign thermal trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to
Trip 1100010 output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8).
Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
CB Alarm 8765432 Assign Circuit Breaker Alarm function signal (CB Open
1100010 NB, Sum Amps(n), CB Open Time and CB Close Time)
to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 &
RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
52 Fail 8765432 Assign the trip circuit supervision (TCS) failure function
1100010 signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3,
RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0
no assignment.
Brkn. 8765432 Assign the broken conductor function signal to the output
Cond 1100010 relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting
choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
CB Fail 8765432 Assign the circuit breaker failure function signal to the
1100010 output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8).
Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
CB Fail = CB not open at the end of tBF timer.
t Aux 1 8765432 Assign delayed auxiliary input Aux 1 to the output relays;
1100010 i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice:
1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
t Aux 2 8765432 Assign delayed auxiliary input Aux 2 to the output relays;
1100010 i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice:
1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 48/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

t Aux 3 8765432 Assign delayed auxiliary input Aux 3 to the output relays;
1010101 i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice:
1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
Order 1 8765432 Assign remote command 1 to the output relays; i.e. to
Comm. 0000100 output 4 (RL4). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output
relay; 0 no assignment.
Order 2 8765432 Assign remote command 2 to the output relays; i.e. to
Comm. 0000010 output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output
relay; 0 no assignment.
Order 3 8765432 Assign remote command 3 to the output relays; i.e. to
Comm. 0000001 output 2 (RL2). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output
relay; 0 no assignment.
Order 4 8765432 Assign remote command 4 to the output relays; i.e. to
Comm. 1000000 output 8 (RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output
relay; 0 no assignment.
Active 8765432 Assign the Active Group indication to the output relays;
Group 0010000 i.e. to output 6 (RL6). Setting choice: 1 assigns the
output relay; 0 no assignment.

5.9.6.1.1 P123 additional Outputs menu

t Aux 4 8765432 Assign the delayed auxiliary input Aux 4 to the output
0010000 relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
79 Run 8765432 Assign the "autorecloser in progress" signal to the output
1100010 relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.
79 Trip 8765432 Assign the autoreclose final trip function to the output
1100010 relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.

79 Locked 8765432 Assign the autoreclose final close function to the output
1100010 relays. Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignment.

SOTF 8765432 Assign the SOTF functionality to the output relays; i.e. to
Group 0000010 output 3 (RL3). When the tSOTF has elapsed the
assigned relay is activated. Setting choice 1 assigns the
output relay, 0 no assignment.

CONTROL 8765432 Assign the Control trip command to the output relays; i.e.
Trip 0000100 to output 4 (RL4). Setting choice 1 assigns the output
relay, 0 none assignment.

CONTROL 8765432 Assign the Control close command to the output relays;
Close 0000100 i-e to output 4 (RL4). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output
relay; 0 no assignment
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 49/62

5.9.7 Latch of the auxiliary output relays (RL2 to RL8)

This submenu (not available in P120 menu) makes it possible to latch the auxiliary output
relays, relay by relay.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ 6 times.

Latch Output Heading of the Latch Output Relays submenu.

Relays Press # to access the different submenus.

Output 2 Latch the auxiliary output relay RL2.

No Setting choice: Yes, No.

Output 3 Latch the auxiliary output relay RL3.

Yes Setting choice: Yes, No.

Output 4 Latch the auxiliary output relay RL4.

Yes Setting choice: Yes, No.

5.9.7.1 P122 & P123 additional latch output relays menu

Output 5 Latch the auxiliary output relay RL5.

Yes Setting choice: Yes, No.

Output 6 Latch the auxiliary output relay RL6.

No Setting choice: Yes, No.

5.9.7.2 P123 additional latch output relays menu

Output 7 Latch the auxiliary output relay RL7.

Yes Setting choice: Yes, No.

Output 8 Latch the auxiliary output relay RL8.

No Setting choice: Yes, No.

NOTE : To reset the latched auxiliary relays :

P121 P122 &P123

The auxiliary output latched - Either by resetting of the - Either by resetting of the
can be reset by: "OP alarm "LATCH RELAY
PARAMETERS/Relay TRIP" from the front panel
Status" from the front by pushing !.
panel by pushing !.
- or by a logic input
- or by a logic input assigned to this function
assigned to this function
- or by remote command.
- or by remote command.

Note: No alarm dedicated to Note: The alarm "LATCH

the latch of the auxiliary RELAY TRIP" is dedicated to
output relay the latch of RL1
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 50/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.9.8 Inputs submenu

With the submenu Inputs it is possible to assign either a label or an automation function to
each logic input (according to the following table) :

Label abstract Label signification

None No link/assignment
Unlatch Unlocks latched output relays
52 a Position of the circuit breaker (open)
52 b Position of the circuit breaker (close)
CB FLT External failure information from the CB
Aux 1 Assign external information to input Aux1
Aux 2 Assign external information to input Aux2
Blk Log (1) Blocking logic 1
Blk Log 2 Blocking logic 2
Strt Dist Starting of the disturbance recording function
Cold L PU Assign cold load pick up
Log Sel 1 Logic selectivity 1
Log Sel 2 Logic selectivity 2
Change set Change of setting group (default setting group 1)
θ Reset Reset of the thermal state
Trip Circ Trip circuit supervision input
Strt tBF Starting of the Breaker Fail Timer
Rst led Reset of the "Trip" & "Alarm" leds
Maint. M Maintenance Mode ON/OFF change
Aux 3 Assign the input the external information Aux 3
Block [79] Blocking of the autorecloser function [79]
Aux 4 Assign the input the external information Aux 4
Man. Close Manual control close CB
Local Local mode condition (if activated,any remote command to the
output relays is forbidden)

NOTE: For P120 and P121 :

The external information Aux1 and Aux2 is used only for signalisation
on the communication network.
T Aux1 and t Aux2 are fixed and equal to 0 ms.
Only one blocking logic function.

Only available in model MiCOM P122 and P123

Only available in model MiCOM P123

User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 51/62

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ 6 times.

Inputs Heading of the Inputs sub-menu.

To navigate within submenu points, press & #. To
modify setting, press '. Use & # % $ to scroll and set
available selections. Press ' to confirm choice.
Input 1 Assign label 52a to logic input 1.
52a To modify see above windows.

Input 2 Assign label 52a to logic input 2.

52b To modify see above windows.

5.9.8.1 P122 & P123 additional Inputs menu

Input 3 Assign label 52a to logic input 3.

Aux1 To modify see above windows.

Aux1 Time Displays setting value of timer assigned to logic input

t Aux1 300 ms Aux1.
The setting range for tAux1 is from 0 ms to 200 s, in
steps of 10 ms.
Aux2 Time Displays setting value of timer assigned to logic input
t Aux2 1.2 ms Aux2.
The setting range for tAux2 is from 0 ms to 200 s, in
steps of 10 ms.
Aux3 Time Displays setting value of timer assigned to logic input
t Aux3 10s Aux3.
The setting range for tAux3 is from 0 ms to 200 s, in
steps of 10 ms.

5.9.8.2 P123 additional Inputs menu

Input 4 Assign label Log Sel1 to logic input 4.

Log Sel 1 To modify see above windows.

Input 5 Assign label Aux2 to logic input 5.

Aux 2 To modify see above windows.

Aux4 Time Displays setting value of timer assigned to input Aux4.

t Aux4 100s The setting range for tAux4 is from 0 ms to 200 s, in
steps of 10 ms.

Input 7 Assign the Manual control close signal to the assigned

Man. Close logic input 7. To modify see above windows.

Input 7 Assign the Local signal to the assigned logic input 7. To

Local modify see above windows.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 52/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.9.9 BROKEN CONDUCTOR submenu (P122 & P123 only)

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ until the submenu is reached.

Broken Cond. Heading of Broken Conductor detector submenu.

To navigate within submenu points, press & #. To
modify setting, press '. Use & # % $ to scroll and set
available selections.
Brkn. Cond. ? Selection of the Broken Conductor function.
Yes Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed:
If No is selected, the Broken Conductor function is
inactive.
Brkn. Cond Time Displays delay timer setting (tBC) for the Broken
tBC 20 ms Conductor function.
The setting range for tBC is from 0 to 14400s, in steps of
1s.
Ratio I2/I1 Displays value, in percent, for the Broken Conductor
20 % threshold. This threshold is the ratio between negative
and positive phase sequence current.
Setting range is from 20 to 100% by, in steps of 1%.
5.9.10 COLD LOAD PICK-UP submenu (P122 & P123 only)
The Cold Load PU submenu allows the user to enable the cold load pick-up function.
Selected threshold values can temporary be raised.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ until the submenu is reached.

Cold Load PU Heading of the Cold Load PU submenu.

To navigate within submenu points, press & #. To
modify setting, press '. Use & # % $ to scroll and set
available selections. Press ' to confirm choice.
Cold Load PU ? Selection of the cold load pick-up function.
Yes Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed:
If No is selected, the cold load pick-up function is
inactive.
Cold Load PU Assign the I> time delay threshold with the cold load pick
tI> ? No up function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Cold Load PU Assign the I>> time delay threshold with the cold load
tI>> ? Yes pick up function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Cold Load PU Assign the tI>>> time delay threshold with the cold load
tI>>> ? Yes pick up function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Cold Load PU Assign the tIe> time delay threshold with the cold load
tIe> ? Yes pick up function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Cold Load PU Assign the tIe>> time delay threshold with the cold load
tIe>> ? Yes pick up function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Cold Load PU Assign the tIe>>> time delay threshold with the cold load
tIe>>> ? Yes pick up function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 53/62

COLD LOAD P/UP Assign the tI2> time delay threshold with the cold load
tI2> Yes pick up function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
COLD LOAD P/UP Assign the tI2>> time delay threshold with the cold load
tI2>> No pick up function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Cold Load PU Assign the Thermal overload time delay threshold with
t Therm. ? Yes the cold load pick up function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
Cold Load PU Displays scaling value, in percent, for the cold load pick
level 200 % up assigned to the selected thresholds.
Setting range is from 100% to 500%, in steps of 1%.
Cold Load PU Displays delay timer setting (tCL) for the Cold Load Pick-
tCL = 400 ms up function.
Setting range is from 0.1 to 3600 s, in steps of 10 ms.

5.9.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE submenu (P122 & P123 only)

With the CB Fail submenu, circuit breaker failure can be detected and associated
parameters can be set.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu then $ until the menu is reached.

CB Fail Heading of the CB Fail submenu. To navigate within

submenu points, press & #. To modify setting, press
'. Use & # % $ to scroll and set available selections.
Press ' to confirm choice.
CB Fail ? Selection of the circuit breaker failure function.
Yes Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed:
If No is selected, the CB Fail function is inactive.
I<= Selection of the under current threshold associated to
0.1 In the CB failure detection function.
Setting range is from 0.02 In to 1 In in steps of 0.01 In.
CB Fail Time Selection of the circuit breaker failure time delay. Setting
tBF 40 ms range is from 10 ms to 10 s in steps of 10 ms.

Block I> ? Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal I>
No in case of circuit breaker failure detection.
Select Yes or No.
Block Ie> ? Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal
Yes Ie> in case of circuit breaker failure detection.
Select Yes or No.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 54/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.9.12 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu (P122 & P123 only)

With the CB Supervision submenu circuit breakers can be supervised and monitored, and
associated parameters can be set.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ until the submenu is reached.

CB Supervision Heading of the CB Supervision submenu.

To navigate within submenu points, press & #. To
modify setting, press '. Use & # % $ to scroll and set
available selections. Press ' to confirm choice.
TC Supervision Selection of the trip circuit supervision function.
Yes Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed:
If No is selected, the TC supervision function is inactive.
t Trip Circuit Displays the delay timer setting (tSUP) for TC
t SUP 200 ms supervision.
The setting range for tSUP is from 0.1 to 10 s, in steps of
10 ms.
CB Open S'vision Selection of the time monitoring function of CB open
Yes operations.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following window is displayed:
If No is selected the next window is CB Close S'vision.
CB Open Time Displays monitoring time for CB open operations.
100 ms Setting range from 0.05 to 1.0 s, in steps of 10 ms.

CB Close S'vision Selection of the time monitoring function of CB close

Yes operations.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following window is displayed:
If No is selected the next window is CB Open Alarm.
CB Close Time Displays monitoring time for CB close operations.
100 ms Setting range from 0.050 to 1.0 s, in steps of 10 ms.

CB Open Alarm ? Selection of the monitor function for maximum count of

Yes CB operations.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following window is displayed:
If No is selected, the next window is ΣAmps(n).
CB Open NB = Displays alarm threshold for CB open count.
0 Setting range is from 0 to 50000, in steps of 1.

ΣAmps(n) ? Selection of the monitoring function that continuously

Yes sums the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted
by the CB.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following window is displayed:
If No is selected, the next window is tOpen Pulse.
ΣAmps(n) ? Displays alarm threshold for the summation of the
1000 E6 current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB.
Setting range is from 0 to 4000 E6 A (or A²), in steps of 1
E6. (E6 = 106)
n 1 Displays the exponent for the summation (I A or I² A²).
Setting choice for n: 1or 2

t Open Pulse Displays and sets the tripping pulse time.

100 ms Setting range is from 0.1 to 5 s, in steps of 10 ms.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 55/62

t Close Pulse Displays and sets the closing pulse time. Setting range is
100 ms from 0.1 to 5 s, in steps of 10 ms.

5.9.13 Comm. Order Submenu (P122 & P123 only)

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. Press # to

access the menu, then $ Until the desired submenu is
reached.
Comm. Ord. Latch Heading of the Comm. Ord. Latch Times submenu.
Times Press # to access the different submenus.
NOTE : This submenu is active if at least one
communication order is assigned to an output
relay.
t Comm 1 Selection of the t Comm 1 pulse time.
100 ms The setting range for t Comm 1 is from 0.1 s to 5 s, in
steps of 0.05 s. Use & to modify and press ' to
validate your choice.
t Comm 2 Selection of the t Comm 2 pulse time.
150 ms The setting range for t Comm 2 is from 0.1 s to 5 s,
insteps of 0.05. Use & to modify and press ' to
validate your choice.
t Comm 3 Selection of the t Comm 3 pulse time.
5s The setting range for t Comm 3 is from 0.1 s to 5 s ,in
steps of 0.05 s. Use & to modify and press ' to
validate your choice.
t Comm 4 Selection of the t Comm 4 pulse time.
1s The setting range for t Comm 4 is from 0.1 s to 5 s in
steps of 0.05 s. Use & to modify and press ' to
validate your choice.

5.9.14 Submenu SOTF (Switch on to Fault) (P123 only)

With the SOTF submenu, it is possible to shorten the time to trip when for example the relay
has detected a fault that is still present on a feeder after energising.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

Press # to access the SOTF-menu, and $ until the desired
submenu is reached.
SOTF Heading of SOTF submenu.
To navigate within submenu points, press & #. To modify
setting, press '. Use & # % $ to scroll and set available
selections. Press ' to confirm choice.
Sotf? Enables/Disables the SOTF function.
No Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed:
If No is selected, the SOTF submenu is not activated.
t Sotf Set the time delay value (tSotf) associated to the SOTF
0.10 s function.
The setting range for t Sotf is from 0 to 500 ms, in steps of
10 ms.
The SOTF/TOR tripping time delay is useful for some cases
of serious transient or when three poles don’t close at the
same time, or when the CB doesn’t close instantaneously.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 56/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

I>>? Setting choice Yes: The crossing of the I>> threshold

No activates the SOTF function. The timer t Soft starts its
countdown on crossing of the I>> threshold, and once
elapsed, the relay issues a trip order.
Setting choice No: The crossing of the I>> threshold doesn’t
activate the SOTF function.
I>>>? Setting choice Yes: The crossing of the I>>> threshold
No activates the SOTF function. The timer t Soft starts its
countdown on crossing of the I>>> threshold, and once
elapsed, the relay issues a trip order.
Setting choice No: The crossing of the I>>> threshold
doesn’t activate the SOTF function.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 57/62

5.10 RECORDS Menu (P122 & P123 only)

Through the RECORDS menu, stored data, events, disturbances and monitoring information
can be displayed and read:

⇒ CB Monitoring
⇒ fault record
⇒ Instantaneous
⇒ Disturb record
⇒ Time peak value
⇒ Rolling demand
To access the RECORDS menu, press & then $ 7 times.
5.10.1 CB MONITORING submenu
Through the CB Monitoring submenu, it is possible to read and clear counter values
associated with the circuit breaker.

RECORD Heading the RECORD menu. Press # to access the

menu, then $ 7 times.

CB Monitoring Heading the CB Monitoring submenu.

Press # to access the different submenus.
CB Opening Time Displays the circuit breaker opening time in ms.
95 ms

CB Closing Time Displays the circuit breaker closing time in ms.

115 ms

CB Operations Displays the number of opening commands executed by

RST = [C] 5489 the circuit breaker. To clear these values, press !.

Σ Amps (n) Displays the summation of the current (in Amps or

RST = [C] square Amps) interrupted by the CB. Stored current
values for all 3 phases are cleared together. To clear
these values, press !.
Σ Amps (n) IA Displays the summation value of the current (in Amps or
4 E4 square Amps) for phase A interrupted by the circuit
breaker.
Σ Amps (n) IB Displays the summation value of the current (in Amps or
2 E4 square Amps) for phase B interrupted by the circuit
breaker.
Σ Amps (n) IC Displays the summation value of the current (in Amps or
8 E3 square Amps) for phase C interrupted by the circuit
breaker.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 58/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.10.2 Fault Record submenu for MiCOM P122 and P123

The Fault Record submenu makes it possible to read up to five stored fault records.
Information about a fault is recorded when a threshold is crossed.

RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu. Press #, to access the

menu, the $ 7 times.

fault Record Heading of the fault Record submenu.

Press # to access the different submenus.
Record Number Selection of the fault record number) to be displayed
2 (select either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). To modify this fault record
number, press ' then using & enter the required
number. Press ' to validate your choice.
fault Time Displays the time when the fault was recorded. The
12:05:23:42 format of the time is hh:mm:ss.
In this example the fault was recorded at 12:05:23 pm
(and 420ms).
fault Date Displays the date when the fault was recorded. The
12/11/99 format of the Date is DD/MM/YY.
In this example, the fault was recorded on November
12th 1999.
Active Set Group Displays the active setting group (1 or 2).
1

Faulted Phase Displays the phase, where a fault occurred, for the
Phase A chosen fault record. (NONE, phase A, B, C, EARTH, AB,
AC, BC, or ABC).
Threshold Displays the origin of the fault that generated the trip
I>> order.

Magnitude Displays the magnitude value of the fault: Voltage,

1200 A current, earth power. The value is based on the
amplitude at 50 or 60 Hz.
IA Magnitude Displays the magnitude value of the phase A current at
1200 A the time of the fault.

IB Magnitude Displays the magnitude value of the phase B current at

500 A the time of the fault.

IC Magnitude Displays the magnitude value of the phase C current at

480 A the time of the fault.

In Magnitude Displays the magnitude value of the earth current at the

103 A time of the fault.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 59/62

5.10.3 INSTANTANEOUS submenu

Through the INSTANANEOUS submenu, it is possible to read recorded values associated
with the crossing of a threshold (start information).

RECORDS Heading of the RECORDS menu. Press # to access the

menu, then $ 7 times.

Instantaneous Heading of the Instantaneous submenu.

Press # to access the different submenus.
Number Select the number of Instantaneous records to be
5 displayed (maximum 5). Press ' to modify this value,
then use & to enter a new number. Press ' to validate
your choice.
Hour Displays the time when the instantaneous record was
13:07:15:53 recorded. The format of the time is hh:mm:ss: ms.
In this example the fault was recorded at 1:07:15 pm and
530 ms.
Date Displays the date when the instantaneous record was
12/11/01 recorded. The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY.
In this example, the fault was recorded on November
12th 2001.
Origin Displays which threshold has been crossed.
Ie>

Length Displays the period of time during which the threshold

57 ms has been exceeded.

Trip Displays if a trip followed the crossing of the threshold or

No not.

5.10.4 DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu

The Disturb Record submenu makes it possible to set and read up to 5 disturbance records
of 3 seconds each.

RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu. Press # to access the

menu, then $ 7 times.

Disturb Record Heading of the Disturb Record submenu.

Press # to access the different submenus.
Pre-Time Set the disturbance record pre-time. Select from 100 ms
0.2 s to 3s by step of 100 ms using & and validate your
choice using '.
Post-Time Set the disturbance record post-time. Select from 100
0.2 s ms to 3s by step of 100 ms using & and validate your
choice using '.

WARNING : THE TOTAL DISTURBANCE RECORDING TIME IS 3 SECONDS (PRE

TIME + POST TIME).

Disturb Rec Trig Select which criteria will start the disturbance record
ON INST. function. Setting choices are ON INST. (starts recording
on instantaneous thresholds) or ON TRIP (starts
recording after a trip happened). Use & to modify the
criteria then press ' to validate your choice.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 60/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.10.5 Time PEAK VALUE submenu

The Time PEAK VALUE submenu makes it possible to set parameters associated to this
function. (Peak and Average values displayed in the Measurements menu)

RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu. Press # to access the

menu, then $ 7 times.

Time Peak Value Heading of the Time Peak Value submenu.

Press # to access the different submenus.

Time Window Set the value for the time window during which peak
5 mn and average values are stored. Select from 5mn, 10mn,
15mn, 30mn, or 60mn using & and press ' to validate
your choice.
5.10.6 ROLLING DEMAND submenu
The Rolling Demand submenu makes it possible to set the values for rolling sub-period and
number of the sub-period used for the calculation of the 3 phase Rolling Average and peak
demand values, available in the Measurement menu.

RECORDS Heading of the RECORDS menu. Press # toaccess the

menu, then $ 7 times.

Rolling Demand Heading of the Rolling Demand submenu.

Press # to access the different submenus.

Sub period Set the window of time of the subperiod used to

1 mn calculate rolling average values d. Select from 1 mn to
60 mn in step of 1 mn using & and press ' to validate
your choice .
Num of Sub Per Select the number of sub-period used for the calculation
1 of the average of these average values.
User Guide P12x/EN FT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 61/62

6. WIRING
MiCOM P120 range of relays have the same terminal layout for common elements. The
wiring diagram for each model is provided in Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.
6.1 Auxiliary supply
The auxiliary power supply for the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 & P123 relays can be either
direct current with a voltage range of 24-60 VDC, 48-150 VDC, 130-250 VDC, or alternative
current with a voltage range of 110-250 VAC/ 50-60 Hz. The voltage range (Ua) is specified
on the adhesive paper label under the top hinged cover on the front of the relay.
The auxiliary power supply must be connected only to terminals 33 and 34.
6.2 Current measurement inputs
MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 have 3 phase and 1 earth current inputs available for 1
and 5 Amps rated CTs. On each one of these relays, it is possible to combine 1 and 5 Amp
current inputs together (i-e a mix between 1A for earth fault and 5A for phase connections)
(refer to the wiring diagram).
NOTE : All phase inputs must have the same rating (1 or 5 Amps).
6.3 Logic inputs
The number of logic inputs depends on the relay model. The relays have programmable
opto-isolated logic inputs, which can be assigned to any available label or function.
Logic inputs for each relay model:

Model P120 P121 P122 P123

Logic outputs 2 2 3 5

The voltage range of the inputs is identical to the DC (or AC) auxiliary supply range of the
MiCOM relay (e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, logic input voltage range = 48-150 Vdc).
On the same MiCOM P12x relay, the user can mix different voltage levels for the logic inputs
(e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, Input 1= 48 Vdc, Input 2-5= 110 Vdc).
If the user sets the supply of the logic input as AC they are active from 24 to 220Vac.
The automation functions that can be assigned to these logic inputs can be selected from the
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu.
NOTE : Do not forget to select in the CONFIGURATION/Configuration Inputs
Menu weither the voltage input is "AC" or "DC". .
6.4 Output relays
The number of logic outputs depends on the relay model. The relays have configurable logic
outputs, which can be assigned to any available function.
The number of logic outputs available for each relay model is presented in the following
table:

Model P120 P121 P122 P123

Logic outputs 5 5 7 9

The first logic output (RL0) is dedicated to indicate a relay fault (Watchdog, WD) and is not
part of this table.
The normally closed (NC) contact of the Watchdog (RL0) can not be configured. The other
contacts can be configured to be activated on activation of the different functions available in
the relay. A basic output matrix is included in the relay.
Some logic outputs have changeover contacts (RL1 and RL2). The other relays (RL3, to RL
9) are normally open contacts.
The protection and control functions that can be assigned to these output relays can be
selected from the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu.
P12x/EN FT/F75 User Guide

Page 62/62 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

6.5 Communication

6.5.1 RS485 rear communication port

All MiCOM relays have an RS485 rear communication port.
The terminals 29-30-31-32 are dedicated to the RS485 communication port. See wiring
diagrams in chapter P12y/EN CO of the Technical Guide.
6.5.2 RS232 front communication port (P122 & P123 only)
MiCOM P122 and P123 relays provide a RS 232 communication port. This port is dedicated
to MiCOM Setting software MiCOM S1.
The cable between the P122 or P123 and the PC is a standard RS 232 shielded-cable.
The relay requires a RS232 cable with a 9-pin male connector.
The RS232 cable has to be wired as indicated below:

FIGURE 5: FRONT PANEL PORT COMMUNICATION RS232 CABLE WIRING

Menu Content Tables P12x/EN HI/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

MENU CONTENT TABLES

Menu Content Tables P12x/EN HI/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/32

CONTENTS

1. MiCOM P120 - V4 SOFTWARE 3

2. MiCOM P121 – V5 SOFTWARE 5

3. MiCOM P122 – V5 SOFTWARE 8

4. MiCOM P123 – V5 SOFTWARE 14

5. MiCOM P122 – V6 SOFTWARE 20

6. MiCOM P123 – V6 SOFTWARE 26

P12x/EN HI/F75 Menu Content Tables

Page 2/32 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
 1.
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IL1 = 1245 A

OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION

Menu Content Tables

Password Frequency Communication ?

Display CT Ratio Led 5 / 6 / 7 / 8
**** 50.01 Hz Yes

Description Phase Text CT primary Led IL1 Baud Rate

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

P120 L1 1000 I> Y/N 257.05 A 19200 Bd

tI> Y/N
l>> Y/N
Reference CT sec tI>> Y/N Parity
MiCOM P120 - V4 SOFTWARE

ALST 1 I>>> Y/N None

tI>>> Y/N
Ie> Y/N
Frequency tIe> Y/N Stop bits
50 Hz Ie>> Y/N 1
tIe>> Y/N
Ie>>> Y/N
Input 21 tIe>>> Y/N Relay Address
Status 01 12

Relay 4321
Status 1011

MiCOM P120 - V4 Software

Menu content
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 3/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IL1 = 1245 A
Page 4/32

PROTECTION AUTOMAT. CTRL

P12x/EN HI/F75

[50/51] Phase OC Trip Commands Latch Functions Blocking Logic Output Relays Inputs 1/2

Trip tI > Latch tI > Block tI > Trip 432 None

I>? I>>> Yes Yes Yes 100 Unlatch
Yes 10.0 In
I> 52 a
Trip tI >> Latch tI >> Block tI >> tl > 52 b
Yes Yes Yes
I> t I>>> I >> CB FLT
0.1 In 110 ms tl >> Aux 1
Trip tI >>> Latch tI >>> Block tI >>>
I >>> Aux 2
Yes Yes Yes
tl >>> Blk Log
Delay Type
CB Close
IDMT

Idmt
IEC SI

Tms
0.025

I>> ?
Yes

I>>
2.0 In
MiCOM P120 - V4 Software
t I>>
300 ms Menu content
I>>> ?
Yes
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 2.
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IL1 = 1245 A

OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION PROTECTION

Password Frequency Communication ?

CT Ratio Led 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 [50/51] Phase OC
**** 50.01 Hz Yes
Menu Content Tables

Description Line CT primary Led IL1 Baud Rate I>? t I>>

P121-1 1000 I> Y/N 257.05 A 19200 Bd Yes 300 ms
tI> Y/N
l>> Y/N
Reference Line CT sec tI>> Y/N IL2 Parity I> I>>> ?
ALST 1 I>>> Y/N 258.80 A None 0.1 In Yes
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

tI>>> Y/N
Ie> Y/N
Software version E/Gnd CT primary tIe> Y/N IL3 Stop bits Delay Type I>>>
5.D 1000 Ie>> Y/N 257.50 A 1 IDMT 10.0 In
MiCOM P121 – V5 SOFTWARE

tIe>> Y/N
Ie>>> Y/N
Frequency E/Gnd CT sec tIe>>> Y/N IN Relay Address Idmt t I>>>
50 Hz 1 20.00 A 12 IEC SI 110 ms

Input 21 Tms
Status 01 0.025

Relay 4321 tReset

Status 1011 60 ms

I>> ?
Yes

I>>
2.0 In

MiCOM P121 - V5 Software Delay Type

DMT
Menu content
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 5/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IL1 = 1245 A
Page 6/32

PROTECTION AUTOMAT. CTRL

P12x/EN HI/F75

[50N/51N] E/Gnd Trip Commands Latch Functions Blocking Logic Output Relays

Ie > ? Trip tI > Latch tI > Block tI > Trip 432

Yes Yes Yes Yes 100
I>
Ie > Trip tI >> Latch tI >> Block tI >> tl >
0.01 Ien Yes Yes Yes
Ie >>> ? I >>
Yes tl >>
Delay Type Trip tI >>> Latch tI >>> Block tI >>>
I >>>
INV Ie >>> Yes Yes Yes
tl >>>
1.0 Ien
Latch tIe > Block tIe > Ie >
Idmt Trip tIe >
IEC SI Yes Yes Yes tle >
t Ie >>>
Ie >>
300 ms
Tms Trip tIe >> Latch tIe >> Block tIe >> tle >>
0.025 Yes Yes Yes Ie >>>
tle >>>
t Reset Trip tIe >>> Latch tIe >>> Block tIe >>> CB Close
60 ms Yes Yes Yes

Ie >> ?
Yes

Ie >>
0.01 Ien

Delay Type
DMT

t Ie >>
300 ms MiCOM P121 - V5 Software
Menu content
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IL1 = 1245 A

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Latch Output Relays Inputs 1/2

Menu Content Tables

Output 2 None
No
Unlatch
52 a
Output 3 52 b
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Yes CB FLT
Aux 1
Aux 2
Output 4 Blk Log
No

MiCOM P121 - V5 Software

Menu content
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 7/32
 3.
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
Page 8/32

OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION
P12x/EN HI/F75

Password
Display CT Ratio Led 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 Group Select Alarms Inputs
****

Description Default Display Line CT primary Led Change Group Inst. Self-reset ? Inputs : 321
P122-1 RMS I A 1000 I> Y/N INPUT = EDGE No 001
tI> Y/N
l>> Y/N
Reference Phase A Text Line CT sec tI>> Y/N Setting Group Reset led on Voltage input =
ALST A 1 I>>> Y/N 1 fault? No DC
tI>>> Y/N
Ie> Y/N
Software version Phase B Text E/Gnd CT primary tIe> Y/N Alarm Battery =
5.F B 1000 Ie>> Y/N No
MiCOM P122 – V5 SOFTWARE

tIe>> Y/N
Ie>>> Y/N
Frequency Phase C Text E/Gnd CT sec tIe>>> Y/N
50 Hz C 1 Therm Trip Y/N
Brkn. Cond Y/N
CB Fail Y/N
Active Group = E/Gnd Text tI2> Y/N
1 N tI2>> Y/N
Input 1 Y/N
Input 2 Y/N
Input 321 Input 3 Y/N
Status 101 tAux 1 Y/N
tAux 2 Y/N

Relay 654321
Status 001011

Date
14/08/02

Time
MiCOM P122 - V5 Software
13 : 15 : 33
Menu content
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

PROTECTION
CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION
G1/G2

Frequency Max IB RMS = Communication ?

REL. MAINTENANCE Phase Rotation [50/51] Phase OC
50.01 Hz 0.00 A Yes

IA Max IC RMS = I>? I>>> ?

Menu Content Tables

Maintenance Mode Phase rotation = 257.05 A 0.00 A Baud Rate Yes Yes
oui A-B-C 19200 Bd
IB Average IA RMS = I> I>>>
258.80 A 150 A 0.1 In 10.0 In
RELAYS 65W4321 Parity
CMD 0000000 None
IC Average IB RMS = Delay Type t I>>>
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

257.50 A 148 A IDMT 110 ms

Stop bits
IN Average IC RMS = 1 Idmt
20.00 A 153 A IEC SI

I1= MAX. SUBPERIOD Relay Address Tms

103 A RST =[C] 12 0.025

I2= MAX. SUBPERIOD tReset

Date format =
50 A I A RMS=254.2 A 60 ms
PRIVATE
RATIO I 2 / I 1 = MAX.SUBPERIOD I>> ?
50 % I B RMS=254.2 A Yes

IN - fn = MAX. SUBPERIOD I>>

RST = [C] 0.0A I C RMS=254.1 A 2.0 In

Thermal θ ROLLING AVERAGE Delay Type

RST = [C] 0% RST=[C] DMT

Max & Average I ROLLING AVERAGE t I>>

RST = [C] I A RMS= 0.00 A 300 ms

Max IA RMS ROLLING AVERAGE

350 A I B RMS= 0.00 A

ROLLING AVERAGE
MiCOM P122 - V5 Software
I C RMS= 0.00 A
Menu content
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 9/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

PROTECTION
Page 10/32

G1/G2
P12x/EN HI/F75

[50N/51N] E/Gnd [46] Neg Seq OC [49] Therm OL [37] Undercurrent

Ie > ? I2 > ? Therm OL ? I<?

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ie > I2 >
Iθ> I<
0.01 Ien Ie >>> ? 0.1 In
0.1 In 0.2 In
Yes
Delay Type Delay Type
INV IDMT Te tI <
Ie >>>
1 mn 200 ms
1.0 Ien
Idmt Curve
IEC SI IEC SI k
t Ie >>>
1.05
300 ms
Tms Tms
0.025 0.025 θ Trip
100 %
t Reset t Reset
60 ms 60 ms θ Alarm ?
Yes
Ie >> ? I2 >> ?
Yes Yes θ Alarm
100 %
Ie >> I2 >>
0.01 Ien 0.5 In

Delay Type t I2 >>

DMT 110 ms

t Ie >>
300 ms
MiCOM P122
V5 Software - Menu content
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
AUTOMAT. CTRL

Trip Commands Latch Functions Blocking Logic 1/2 Logic Select 1/2 Output Relays

Trip tI > Latch tI > Block 1 tI > Sel 1 tI >>

Trip 65432
Yes Trip Brkn. Cond Yes Latch Brkn. Cond Yes Yes
00100
No Yes I>
Menu Content Tables

Trip tI >> Latch tI >> Block 1 tI >> Sel 1 tI >>> tl >

Yes Trip tAux 1 Yes Latch tAux 1 Yes Yes I >>
Yes Yes tl >>
Latch tI >>> Block 1 tI >>> Sel 1 tle >> I >>>
Trip tI >>>
Yes Yes Yes tl >>>
Yes Trip tAux 2 Latch tAux 2 Ie >
Yes
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Yes tle >

Trip tIe > Latch tIe > Block 1 tIe > Sel 1 tle >>> Ie >>
Yes Trip tAux 3 Yes Latch tAux 3 Yes Yes tle >>
Yes Yes Ie >>>
Trip tIe >> Latch tIe >> Block 1 tIe >> t Sel 1 tle >>>
Yes Yes Yes 150 ms tl <
tI2>
Trip tIe >>> Latch tIe >>> Block 1 tIe >>> tI2>>
Yes Yes Yes Therm Alarm
Therm Trip
CB Alarm
Trip tI < Latch tI < Block 1 tI2 > 52 Fail
Yes Yes Yes Brkn Cond
CB Fail
Trip tI2 > Latch tI2 > Block 1 tI2 >> CB Close
Yes Yes No tAux 1
tAux 2
Trip tI2 >> Block 1 Thermal θ tAux 3
Latch tI2 >>
No Yes Order Comm 1
No
Order Comm 2
Thermal Trip θ Block 1 Brkn. Cond Order Comm 3
Latch Thermal θ No Order Comm 4
Yes
Yes Active Group
Block 1 tAux 1
No

MiCOM P122 Block 1 tAux 2

No
V5 Software - Menu content
Block 1 tAux 3
No
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 11/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Page 12/32

Comm.Ord. Latch
Latch Output Relays Inputs 1/2/3 Broken Conductor Cold Load PU CB Fail CB Supervision times
P12x/EN HI/F75

Output 2 Brkn. Cond ? Cold Load PU ? CB Fail ? TC Supervision ? tComm 1

None
No Yes Yes Yes Yes 150 ms
Unlatch
52 a
Output 3 52 b Brkn. Cond Time Cold Load PU I<= t trip circuit tComm 2
Yes CB FLT tBC 32 s tl> ? Yes 0.1 In tSUP 3s 1s
Aux 1
Output 4 Aux 2 Ratio I 2/I 1 Cold Load PU CB Fail Time CB Open S’vision ? tComm 3
No Blk Log 1 20 % tl>> ? Yes tBF 200 ms Yes 5s
Blk Log 2
Strt Dist
Output 5 Cold L PU Cold Load PU Bloc I > ? CB Open Time tComm 4
Yes Log Sel 1 tl>>>? Yes No 150 ms 0.5 s
Log Sel 2
Output 6 Change set Cold Load PU Bloc Ie > ? CB Close S’vision ?
No θ Reset tle > ? Yes Yes Yes
Trip Circ
Start tBF Cold Load PU CB Close Time
Rst Led tle>> ? Yes
Maint. M. 150 ms
Aux 3 Cold Load PU
CB Open Alarm ?
tle >>> ? Yes
Aux 1 Time Yes
tAux1 110 ms Cold Load PU
CB Open NB
tl2> ? Yes
Aux 2 Time 1500
tAux 2 250 ms Cold Load PU
tl2 >> ? No ΣAmps (n) ?
Aux 3 Time Yes
tAux 3 300 ms Cold Load PU
tTherm ? Yes ΣAmps (n) tOpen Pulse
3 E6 300 ms

MiCOM P122 - V5 Software Cold Load PU

Level 120 % n tClose Pulse
2 500 ms
Menu content Cold Load PU
tCL 2s
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

RECORDS

CB Monitoring Fault Record Instantaneous Disturb Record Time Peak Value Rolling Demand
Menu Content Tables

CB Opening Time Record Number Number Pre-Time Time Window Sub Period
83 ms 4 5 1.3 s 5 mn 1mn

CB Closing Time Fault Time Hour Post-Time Num of Sub Per

100 ms 12:05:23:42 13:07:15:53 0.2 s 1
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

CB Operations Fault Date Date Disturb Rec Trig

RST =[C] 1312 09/12/00 10/12/00 ON INST.

ΣAmps (n) Active Set Group Origin

RST = [C] 2 Io>

ΣAmps (n) IA Faulted Phase Length

5 E6 EARTH 57 ms

ΣAmps (n) IB Threshold Trip

5 E6 Ie>> No

ΣAmps (n) IC Magnitude

5 E6 1200 A

IA Magnitude
1200 A MiCOM P122 - V5 Software
IB Magnitude Menu content
500 A

IC Magnitude
480 A

IN Magnitude
103 A
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 13/32
 4.
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION
Page 14/32
P12x/EN HI/F75

Password
Display CT Ratio LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 Group Select Alarms Inputs
****

Description Default Display Line CT primary Led Change Group Inst. Self-reset ? Inputs : 54321
P123-1 RMS I A 1000 I> Y/N Input = EDGE No 00001
tI> Y/N
l>> Y/N
Reference Phase A Text Line CT sec tI>> Y/N Setting Group Reset led on Voltage input =
ALST A 1 I>>> Y/N 1 fault? No DC
tI>>> Y/N
Ie> Y/N
Software version Phase B Text E/Gnd CT primary tIe> Y/N Alarm Battery =
5.F B 1000 Ie>> Y/N No
MiCOM P123 – V5 SOFTWARE

tIe>> Y/N
Ie>>> Y/N
Frequency Phase C Text E/Gnd CT sec tIe>>> Y/N
50 Hz C 1 Therm Trip Y/N
Brkn. Cond Y/N
CB Fail Y/N
Active Group = E/Gnd Text tI2> Y/N
1 N Input 1 Y/N
Input 2 Y/N
Input 3 Y/N
Input 54321 Input 4 Y/N
Status 00101 Input 5 Y/N
Recloser Run Y/N
Recloser Blocked Y/N
Relay 87654321 tAux 1 Y/N
Status 00001011 tAux 2 Y/N
tI2>> Y/N

Date
14/08/02

Time
MiCOM P123 - V5 Software
14 : 15 : 34 Menu content
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

PROTECTION
CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION
G1/G2

Frequency Max IB RMS = ROLLING AVERAGE Communication ?

REL. MAINTENANCE Phase Rotation [50/51] Phase OC
50.01 Hz 0.00 A I C RMS= 0.00 A Yes

Maintenance Mode Phase rotation = IA Max IC RMS = Reclose Stats Baud Rate I>?
oui A-B-C 257.05 A 0.00 A RST = [C] 19200 Bd Yes
Menu Content Tables

RELAYS 8765W4321 IB Average IA RMS Total recloses Parity I>

CMD 000000000 258.80 A 150 A 0 None 0.1 In

IC Average IB RMS = Cycle 1 Recloses Stop bits Delay Type

257.50 A 148 A 0 1 IDMT
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

IN Average IC RMS = Cycle 2 Recloses Relay Address Idmt

20.00 A 153 A 0 12 IEC SI

I1= MAX. SUBPERIOD Cycle 3 Recloses Date format = Tms

103 A RST =[C] 0 PRIVATE 0.025

I2= MAX. SUBPERIOD Cycle 4 Recloses tReset

50 A I A RMS=254.2 A 0 60 ms

RATIO I 2 / I 1 = MAX. SUBPERIOD Total Trip & I>> ?

50 % I B RMS=254.2 A Lockout 0 Yes

IN - fn = MAX. SUBPERIOD I>>

RST = [C] 0.00A I C RMS=254.1 A 2.0 In

Thermal θ ROLLING AVERAGE Delay Type

RST = [C] 0% RST=[C] DMT

Max & Average I ROLLING AVERAGE t I>>

RST = [C] I A RMS= 0.00 A 300 ms

Max IA RMS ROLLING AVERAGE I>>> ?

350 A I B RMS= 0.00 A Yes

I>>>
10.0 In

t I>>>
MiCOM P123 - V5 Software - Menu content 110 ms
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 15/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

PROTECTION
G1/G2
Page 16/32
P12x/EN HI/F75

[50N/51N] E/Gnd [46] Neg Seq OC [49] Therm OL [37] Undercurrent [79] Autoreclose

Ie > ? I2 > ? Therm OL ? I<? Autoreclose ?

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ie >>> ? CYCLES 4321
Ie > Yes I2 > Iθ> Ext CB Fail ? tI> 0111
I<
0.01 Ien 0.1 In 0.1 In 0.2 In Yes
Ie >>> CYCLES 4321
1.0 Ien tI>> 1121
Delay Type Delay Type Te tI < Ext CB Fail Time
IDMT t Ie >>> IDMT 1 mn 200 ms 100 ms
300 ms CYCLES 4321
k tI>>> 1111
Idmt Curve Ext Block ?
IEC SI IEC SI 1.05 Yes
CYCLES 4321
tIe> 1111
Tms Tms θ Trip Dead Time tD1/tD2/
0.025 0.025 100 % tD3/tD4= 50 ms
CYCLES 4321
tIe>> 1111
t Reset t Reset θ Alarm ? Reclaim Time
60 ms 60 ms Yes tR 10 s
CYCLES 4321
tIe>>> 1111
Ie >> ? I2>> ? θ Alarm Inhib Time
Yes Yes 100 % tI 520 ms
CYCLES 4321
tAux1 1112
Ie >> I2>> Phase Cycles
0.01 Ien 0.5 In 3
CYCLES 4321
tAux2 0111
Delay Type t I2>> E/Gnd Cycles
DMT 110 ms 2

t Ie >>
300 ms

MiCOM P123 - V5 Software - Menu content

Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Trip Commands Latch Functions Blocking Logic 1/2 Logic Select 1/2 Output Relays

Trip tI > Latch tI > Block 1 tI > Sel1 tI >>

Trip 8765432
Trip Brkn.Cond Yes Latch Brkn. Cond Yes Yes
Menu Content Tables

Yes
1000100
No Yes
I>
Trip tI >> Latch tI >> Block 1 tI >> Sel 1 tI >>> tl >
Yes Trip tAux 1 Yes Latch tAux 1 Yes Yes I >>
Yes Yes tl >>
Trip tI >>> Latch tI >>> Block 1 tI >>> Sel1 tle >> I >>>
Trip tAux 2 Latch tAux 2
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Yes Yes Yes Yes tl >>>

Yes Yes Ie >
tle >
Trip tIe > Trip tAux 3 Latch tIe > Latch tAux 3 Block 1 tIe > Sel 1 tle >>> Ie >>
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes tle >>
Ie >>>
Trip tIe >> Trip tAux 4 Latch tIe >> Latch tAux 4 Block 1 tIe >> t Sel 1 tle >>>
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 150 ms tl <
tl2 >
Trip tIe >>> Latch tIe >>> Block 1 tIe >>> tI2 >>
Yes Yes Yes Therm Alarm
Therm Trip
Trip tI < CB Alarm
Latch tI < Block 1 tI2>
Yes 52 Fail
Yes Yes
Brkn Cond
CB Fail
Trip tI2 > Latch tI2 > Block 1 tI2 >> CB Close
Yes Yes No tAux1
tAux2
Trip tI2 >> Latch tI2 >> Block 1 Thermal θ tAux3
No No Yes tAux4
79 Run
Trip Thermal θ Latch Thermal θ Block 1 Brkn. Cond 79 Trip
Yes Yes No Order Comm 1
Order Comm 2
Order Comm 3
Block 1 tAux 1 Block 1 tAux 3
Order Comm 4
No No
Active Group
MiCOM P123 - V5 Software Block 1 tAux 2 Block 1 tAux 4
Menu content No No
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 17/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Page 18/32

Latch Output Comm.Ord. Latch

Inputs 1/2/3/4/5 Broken Conductor Cold Load PU CB Fail CB Supervision
P12x/EN HI/F75

Relays times

Output 2 Brkn.Cond ? Cold Load PU ? CB Fail ? TC Supervision ? tComm 1

None
No Yes Yes Yes Yes 150 ms
Unlatch
52 a
Output 3 52 b Brkn.Cond Time Cold Load PU I<= t trip circuit tComm 2
Yes CB FLT tBC 32 s tl> ? Yes 0.1 In tSUP 3s 1s
Aux 1
Output 4 Aux 2 Ratio I 2/I 1 Cold Load PU CB Fail Time CB Open S’vision ? tComm 3
No Blk Log 1 20 % Yes 5s
tl>> ? Yes tBF 200 ms
Blk Log 2
Strt Dist
Output 5 Cold L PU Cold Load PU Block I > ? CB Open Time tComm 4
Yes Log Sel 1 tl>>>? Yes No 150 ms 0.5 s
Log Sel 2
Output 6 Changeset Cold Load PU Bloc Ie > ? CB Close S’vision ?
No Block 79 tle > ? Yes Yes Yes
θ Reset
Output 7 Trip Circ Cold Load PU CB Close Time
Yes Start tBF tle>> ? Yes 150 ms
Rst Led
Maint. M. CB Open Alarm ?
Output 8 Cold Load PU
Aux 3
No tle >>> ? Yes Yes
Aux 4

Aux1 Time Cold Load PU CB Open NB

tAux1 110 ms tI2> ? Yes 1500

Cold Load PU ΣAmps (n) ?

Aux2 Time
tAux2 250 ms tl2>> ? No Yes

Aux3 Time
Cold Load PU ΣAmps (n) tOpen Pulse
tAux3 300 ms tTherm ? Yes 3 E6 300ms

Cold Load PU n tClose Pulse

Aux4 Time
Level 120 % 2 500 ms
tAux4 50 ms

Cold Load PU
MiCOM P123 - V5 Software - Menu content tCL 2s
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

RECORDS

CB Monitoring Fault Record Instantaneous Disturb Record Time Peak Value Rolling Demand
Menu Content Tables

CB Opening Time Record Number Number Pre-Time Time Window Sub Period
83 ms 4 5 1.3 s 5 mn 1mn

CB Closing Time Fault Time Hour Post-Time Num of Sub Per

100 ms 12:05:23:42 13:07:15:53 0.2 s 1
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

CB Operations Fault Date Date Disturb Rec Trig

RST = [C] 1312 09/01/01 09/01/01 ON INST.

ΣAmps (n) Active Set Group Origin

RST= [C] 2 Ie>

ΣAmps (n) IA Faulted Phase Length

5 E6 EARTH 57 ms

ΣAmps (n) IB Threshold Trip

5 E6 Ie> No

ΣAmps (n) IC Magnitude

5 E6 1200 A

IA Magnitude
1200 A

IB Magnitude
MiCOM P123 V5 Software
500 A
Menu content
IC Magnitude
480 A

IN Magnitude
103 A
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 19/32
 5.
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION
Page 20/32

Password
P12x/EN HI/F75

Display CT Ratio LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 Group Select Alarms Inputs

****

Description Default Display Line CT primary Led Change Group Inst. Self-reset ? Inputs : 321
P122-1 RMS I A 1000 I> Y/N Input = MENU No 001
tI> Y/N
l>> Y/N
Reference Phase A Text Line CT sec tI>> Y/N Setting Group Reset led on Voltage input =
ALST A 1 I>>> Y/N 1 fault? No DC
tI>>> Y/N
Ie> Y/N
Software version Phase B Text E/Gnd CT primary tIe> Y/N Alarm Battery =
5.D B 1000 Ie>> Y/N No
MiCOM P122 – V6 SOFTWARE

tIe>> Y/N
Ie>>> Y/N
Frequency Phase C Text E/Gnd CT sec tIe>>> Y/N
50 Hz C 1 Therm Trip Y/N
Brkn. Cond Y/N
CB Fail Y/N
Active Group = E/Gnd Text tI2> Y/N
1 N tI2>> Y/N
Input 1 Y/N
Input 2 Y/N
Input 321 Input 3 Y/N
Status 101 tAux 1 Y/N
tAux 2 Y/N

Relay 654321
Status 001011

Date
04/03/02

Time
MiCOM P122 - V6 Software
14 : 15 : 34
Menu content
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION

Frequency Max IB RMS = ROLLING AVERAGE Communication ?

REL. MAINTENANCE Phase Rotation 50.01 Hz 0.00 A I C RMS= 0.00 A Yes

Maintenance Mode Phase rotation = IA Max IC RMS = Baud Rate

Yes A-B-C 257.05 A 0.00 A 19200 Bd
Menu Content Tables

RELAYS 65W4321 IB Average IA RMS Parity

CMD 0000000 258.80 A 150 A None

IC Average IB RMS = Stop bits

257.50 A 148 A 1
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

IN Average IC RMS = Relay Address

20.00 A 153 A 12

I1= MAX. SUBPERIOD Date format =

103 A RST =[C] PRIVATE

I2= MAX. SUBPERIOD

50 A I A RMS=254.2 A

RATIO I 2 / I 1 = MAX. SUBPERIOD

50 % I B RMS=254.2 A

IN - fn = MAX. SUBPERIOD
RST = [C] 0.00A I C RMS=254.1 A

Thermal θ ROLLING AVERAGE

RST = [C] 0% RST=[C]

Max & Average I ROLLING AVERAGE

RST = [C] I A RMS= 0.00 A

Max IA RMS ROLLING AVERAGE

350 A I B RMS= 0.00 A

MiCOM P122 - V6 Software - Menu content

P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 21/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

PROTECTION
G1/G2
Page 22/32

[50/51] Phase OC [50N/51N] E/Gnd [46] Neg Seq OC [49] Therm OL [37] Undercurrent
P12x/EN HI/F75

I>? Ie > ? I2 > ? Therm OL ? I<?

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

I>>> ?
I> Ie > I2 > Iθ> I<
Yes
0.1 In 0.01 Ien 0.1 In 0.1 In 0.2 In
Ie >>> ?
Yes
Delay Type I>>> sample
Delay Type Delay Type Te tI <
IDMT Yes
IDMT IDMT 1 mn 200 ms
Ie >>> sample
I>>> Yes
Idmt Idmt Curve k
IEC SI 10.0 In
IEC SI IEC SI 1.05
Ie >>>
Tms t I>>> 1.0 Ien
110 ms Tms Tms θ Trip
0.025
0.025 0.025 100 %
t Ie >>>
tReset 300 ms
t Reset t Reset θ Alarm ?
60 ms
60 ms 60 ms Yes
I>> ?
Ie >> ? I2>> ? θ Alarm
Yes
Yes Yes 100 %

I>>
2.0 In Ie >> I2>>
0.01 Ien 0.5 In
Delay Type
DMT Delay Type t I2>>
DMT 110 ms
t I>>
300 ms
t Ie >>
300 ms

MiCOM P122 - V6 Software - Menu content

Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Trip Commands Latch Functions Blocking Logic 1/2 Logic Select 1/2 Output Relays

Trip tI > Latch tI > Block 1 tI > Sel1 tI >>

Trip 65432
Yes Trip Brkn.Cond Yes Latch Brkn. Cond Yes Yes
00100
Menu Content Tables

No Yes I>
Trip tI >> Latch tI >> Block 1 tI >> Sel 1 tI >>> tl >
Yes Trip tAux 1 Yes Latch tAux 1 Yes Yes I >>
Yes Yes tl >>
Trip tI >>> Latch tI >>> Block 1 tI >>> Sel1 tle >> I >>>
Yes Trip tAux 2 Yes Yes Yes tl >>>
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Latch tAux 2 Ie >

Yes Yes tle >
Trip tIe > Latch tIe > Block 1 tIe > Sel 1 tle >>> Ie >>
Yes Trip tAux 3 Yes Yes Yes tle >>
Latch tAux 3
Yes Ie >>>
Yes
Trip tIe >> Latch tIe >> Block 1 tIe >> t Sel 1 tle >>>
Yes Yes Yes 150 ms tl <
tl2 >
Trip tIe >>> Latch tIe >>> Block 1 tIe >>> tI2 >>
Yes Yes Yes Therm Alarm
Therm Trip
Trip tI < CB Alarm
Latch tI < Block 1 tI2>
Yes 52 Fail
Yes Yes
Brkn Cond
CB Fail
Trip tI2 > Latch tI2 > Block 1 tI2 >> CB Close
Yes Yes No tAux1
tAux2
Trip tI2 >> Latch tI2 >> Block 1 Thermal θ tAux3
No No Yes Order Comm 1
Order Comm 2
Trip Thermal θ Latch Thermal θ Block 1 Brkn. Cond Order Comm 3
Yes Yes No Order Comm 4
Active Group
Block 1 tAux 1 Block 1 tAux 3
No No
MiCOM P122 - V6 Software Block 1 tAux 2
No
Menu content
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 23/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Page 24/32

Latch Output
Inputs 1/2/3 Broken Conductor Cold Load PU CB Fail CB Supervision
Relays
P12x/EN HI/F75

Output 2 Brkn.Cond ? Cold Load PU ? CB Fail ? TC Supervision ?

None
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Unlatch tOpen Pulse
52 a 300ms
Output 3 52 b Brkn.Cond Time Cold Load PU I<= t trip circuit
Yes CB FLT tBC 32 s tl> ? Yes 0.1 In tSUP 3s
Aux 1 tClose Pulse
Output 4 Aux 2 Ratio I 2/I 1 Cold Load PU CB Fail Time CB Open S’vision ? 500 ms
No Blk Log 1 20 % Yes
tl>> ? Yes tBF 200 ms
Blk Log 2
Strt Dist
Output 5 Cold L PU Cold Load PU Block I > ? CB Open Time
Yes Log Sel 1 tl>>>? Yes No 150 ms
Log Sel 2
Output 6 Changeset Cold Load PU Bloc Ie > ? CB Close S’vision ?
No θ Reset tle > ? Yes Yes Yes
Trip Circ
Start tBF Cold Load PU CB Close Time
Rst Led tle>> ? Yes 150 ms
Maint. M.
Aux 3 CB Open Alarm ?
Cold Load PU
tle >>> ? Yes Yes

Cold Load PU CB Open NB

Aux1 Time
tAux1 110 ms tI2> ? Yes 1500

Cold Load PU ΣAmps (n) ?

Aux2 Time
tAux2 250 ms tl2>> ? No Yes

Cold Load PU ΣAmps (n)

Aux3 Time
tTherm ? Yes 3 E6
tAux3 300 ms

Cold Load PU n
Level 120 % 2

Cold Load PU
tCL 2s
MiCOM P122 - V6 Software - Menu content
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

RECORDS

CB Monitoring Fault Record Instantaneous Disturb Record Time Peak Value Rolling Demand

CB Opening Time Number Pre-Time Time Window Sub Period

Menu Content Tables

Record Number
83 ms 4 5 1.3 s 5 mn 1mn

CB Closing Time Fault Time Hour Post-Time Num of Sub Per

100 ms 12:05:23:42 13:07:15:53 0.2 s 1
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

CB Operations Fault Date Date Disturb Rec Trig

RST = [C] 1312 09/01/01 09/01/01 ON INST.

ΣAmps (n) Active Set Group Origin

RST= [C] 2 Ie>

ΣAmps (n) IA Faulted Phase Length

5 E6 EARTH 57 ms

ΣAmps (n) IB Threshold Trip

5 E6 Ie> No

ΣAmps (n) IC Magnitude

5 E6 1200 A

IA Magnitude
1200 A

IB Magnitude
MiCOM P122 - V6 Software -
500 A

IC Magnitude
Menu content
480 A

IN Magnitude
103 A
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 25/32
 6.
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION
Page 26/32

Password
P12x/EN HI/F75

Display CT Ratio LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 Group Select Alarms Inputs

****

Description Default Display Line CT primary Led Change Group Inst. Self-reset ? Inputs : 54321
P123-1 RMS I A 1000 I> Y/N Input = Input No 00001
tI> Y/N
l>> Y/N
Reference Phase A Text Line CT sec tI>> Y/N Setting Group Reset led on Voltage input =
ALST A 1 I>>> Y/N 1 fault? No DC
tI>>> Y/N
Ie> Y/N
Software version Phase B Text E/Gnd CT primary tIe> Y/N Alarm Battery =
6.E B 1000 Ie>> Y/N No
MiCOM P123 – V6 SOFTWARE

tIe>> Y/N
Ie>>> Y/N
Frequency Phase C Text E/Gnd CT sec tIe>>> Y/N
50 Hz C 1 Therm Trip Y/N
Brkn. Cond Y/N
CB Fail Y/N
Active Group = E/Gnd Text tI2> Y/N
1 N tI2>> Y/N
Input 1 Y/N
Input 2 Y/N
Input 54321 Input 3 Y/N
Status 00101 Input 4 Y/N
Input 5 Y/N
Recloser Run Y/N
Relay 87654321 Recloser Blocked Y/N
Status 00001011 tAux 1 Y/N
tAux 2 Y/N
Conf Soft Y/N
Date
04/03/02

Time
MiCOM P123 - V6 Software
14 : 15 : 34
Menu content
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
PROTECTION
CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION
G1/G2

Phase Rotation Frequency Max IB RMS = ROLLING AVERAGE Communication ?

REL. MAINTENANCE [50/51] Phase OC
50.01 Hz 0.00 A I C RMS= 0.00 A Yes

Maintenance Mode Phase rotation = IA Max IC RMS = Reclose Stats Baud Rate I>?
Yes A-B-C 257.05 A 0.00 A RST = [C] 19200 Bd Yes
Menu Content Tables

IB Average IA RMS Total recloses Parity I>

RELAYS 8765W4321
258.80 A 150 A 0 None 0.1 In
CMD 000000000

IC Average IB RMS = Cycle 1 Recloses Stop bits Delay Type

257.50 A 148 A 0 1 IDMT
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

IN Average IC RMS = Cycle 2 Recloses Idmt

Relay Address
20.00 A 153 A 0 IEC SI
12

Tms
I1= MAX. SUBPERIOD Cycle 3 Recloses Date format =
0.025
103 A RST =[C] 0 PRIVATE

tReset
I2= MAX. SUBPERIOD Cycle 4 Recloses
60 ms
50 A I A RMS=254.2 A 0
I>> ?
RATIO I 2 / I 1 = MAX. SUBPERIOD Total Trip &
Yes
50 % I B RMS=254.2 A Lockout 0

I>>
IN - fn = MAX. SUBPERIOD 2.0 In
RST = [C] 0.00A I C RMS=254.1 A
Delay Type
Thermal θ ROLLING AVERAGE DMT
RST = [C] 0% RST=[C]
t I>>
Max & Average I ROLLING AVERAGE 300 ms
RST = [C] I A RMS= 0.00 A
tReset
0 ms
Max IA RMS ROLLING AVERAGE
350 A I B RMS= 0.00 A I>>>
I>>> ?
10.0 In
Yes
t I>>>
110 ms I>>> sample
MiCOM P123 - V6 Software - Menu content Yes
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 27/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

PROTECTION
G1/G2
Page 28/32

[50N/51N] E/Gnd [46] Neg Seq OC [49] Therm OL [37] Undercurrent [79] Autoreclose
P12x/EN HI/F75

Ie > ? I2 > ? Therm OL ? I<? Autoreclose ?

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
CYCLES 4321
I< Ext CB Fail ? tI> 0111
Ie > I2 > Iθ>
0.01 Ien 0.1 In 0.1 In 0.2 In Yes
Ie >>> ? CYCLES 4321
Yes tI>> 1121
Delay Type Delay Type Te tI < Ext CB Fail Time
IDMT Ie >>> sample IDMT 1 mn 200 ms 100 ms
Yes CYCLES 4321
Idmt Curve k Ext Block ? tI>>> 1111
IEC SI Ie >>> IEC SI 1.05 Yes
1.0 Ien CYCLES 4321
Tms Tms θ Trip Dead Time tD1/tD2/ tIe> 1111
0.025 t Ie >>> 0.025 100 % tD3/tD4= 50 ms
CYCLES 4321
300 ms
t Reset θ Alarm ? tIe>> 1111
t Reset Reclaim Time
60 ms 60 ms Yes tR 10 s
CYCLES 4321
Ie >> ? I2>> ? θ Alarm tIe>>> 1111
Inhib Time
Yes Yes 100 % tI 520 ms
CYCLES 4321
tAux1 1112
Ie >> I2>> Phase Cycles
0.01 Ien 0.5 In 3
CYCLES 4321
tAux2 0111
Delay Type t I2>> E/Gnd Cycles
DMT 110 ms 2

t Ie >>
300 ms

tReset
0 ms

MiCOM P123 - V6 Software - Menu content

Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Trip Commands Latch Functions Blocking Logic 1/2 Logic Select 1/2 Output Relays

Trip tI > Latch tI > Block 1 tI > Sel1 tI >>

Trip 8765432
Yes Trip Brkn.Cond Yes Latch Brkn. Cond Yes Yes
1000100
Menu Content Tables

No Yes I>
Trip tI >> Latch tI >> Block 1 tI >> Sel 1 tI >>> tl >
Yes Trip tAux 1 Yes Latch tAux 1 Yes Yes I >>
Yes Yes tl >>
Trip tI >>> Latch tI >>> Block 1 tI >>> Sel1 tle >> I >>>
Yes Trip tAux 2 Yes Yes Yes tl >>>
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Latch tAux 2 Ie >

Yes Yes tle >
Trip tIe > Latch tIe > Block 1 tIe > Sel 1 tle >>> Ie >>
Yes Trip tAux 3 Yes Yes Yes tle >>
Latch tAux 3
Yes Ie >>>
Yes
Trip tIe >> Latch tIe >> Block 1 tIe >> t Sel 1 tle >>>
Yes Trip tAux 4 Yes Yes 150 ms tl <
Yes Latch tAux 4
tl2 >
Yes
Trip tIe >>> Latch tIe >>> Block 1 tIe >>> tI2 >>
Yes Trip Soft Yes Yes Therm Alarm
Yes Latch Soft Therm Trip
Yes CB Alarm
Trip tI < Latch tI < Block 1 tI2>
Yes Ctrl Trip 52 Fail
Yes Yes
Yes Latch CB Fail Brkn Cond
Yes CB Fail
Trip tI2 > Latch tI2 > Block 1 tI2 >> CB Close
Yes Trip CB fail Yes No tAux1
Yes tAux2
Trip tI2 >> Latch tI2 >> Block 1 Thermal θ tAux3
No No Yes tAux4
79 Run
Trip Thermal θ Latch Thermal θ Block 1 Brkn. Cond 79 Trip
Yes Yes No 79 Lock
Order Comm 1
Order Comm 2
Block 1 tAux 1 Block 1 tAux 3
Order Comm 3
No No
Order Comm 4
MiCOM P123 - V6 Software Active Group
Block 1 tAux 2 Block 1 tAux 4 Soft
No No Control Trip
Menu content Control Close
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 29/32
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Page 30/32

Latch Output Soft

Inputs 1/2/3/4/5 Broken Conductor Cold Load PU CB Fail CB Supervision
P12x/EN HI/F75

Relays

Output 2 Brkn.Cond ? Cold Load PU ? CB Fail ? TC Supervision ? Soft

None
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Unlatch tOpen Pulse
52 a 300ms
Output 3 52 b Brkn.Cond Time Cold Load PU I<= t trip circuit tSoft
Yes CB FLT tBC 32 s tl> ? Yes 0.1 In tSUP 3s 100 ms
Aux 1 tClose Pulse
Output 4 Aux 2 Ratio I 2/I 1 Cold Load PU CB Fail Time CB Open S’vision ? 500 ms I >>
No Blk Log 1 20 % tl>> ? Yes tBF 200 ms Yes Yes
Blk Log 2
Strt Dist
Output 5 Cold L PU Cold Load PU Block I > ? CB Open Time I >>>
Yes Log Sel 1 tl>>>? Yes No 150 ms Yes
Log Sel 2
Output 6 Changeset Cold Load PU Bloc Ie > ? CB Close S’vision ?
No Block 79 tle > ? Yes Yes Yes
θ Reset
Output 7 Trip Circ Cold Load PU CB Close Time
Yes Start tBF tle>> ? Yes 150 ms
Rst Led
Maint. M.
Output 8 Cold Load PU CB Open Alarm ?
Aux 3
No tle >>> ? Yes Yes
Aux 4
Man Close Local MiCOM P123
Cold Load PU CB Open NB
tI2> ? Yes 1500
Aux1 Time V6 Software
tAux1 110 ms Cold Load PU ΣAmps (n) ?
tl2>> ? No Yes
Aux2 Time Menu content
tAux2 250 ms Cold Load PU ΣAmps (n)
tTherm ? Yes 3 E6
Aux3 Time
tAux3 300 ms Cold Load PU n
Level 120 % 2
Aux4 Time
tAux4 50 ms Cold Load PU
tCL 2s
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
 DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A

RECORDS

CB Monitoring Fault Record Instantaneous Disturb Record Time Peak Value Rolling Demand

CB Opening Time Number Pre-Time Time Window Sub Period

Menu Content Tables

Record Number
83 ms 4 5 1.3 s 5 mn 1mn

CB Closing Time Fault Time Hour Post-Time Num of Sub Per

100 ms 12:05:23:42 13:07:15:53 0.2 s 1
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

CB Operations Fault Date Date Disturb Rec Trig

RST = [C] 1312 09/01/01 09/01/01 ON INST.

ΣAmps (n) Active Set Group Origin

RST= [C] 2 Ie>

ΣAmps (n) IA Faulted Phase Length

5 E6 EARTH 57 ms

ΣAmps (n) IB Threshold Trip

5 E6 Ie> No

ΣAmps (n) IC Magnitude

5 E6 1200 A

IA Magnitude
1200 A

IB Magnitude
MiCOM P123 - V6 Software
500 A

IC Magnitude
Menu content
480 A

IN Magnitude
103 A
P12x/EN HI/F75

Page 31/32
P12x/EN HI/F75 Menu Content Tables

Page 32/32 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

TECHNICAL DATA AND

CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/36

CONTENT

1. RATINGS 3
1.1 Power Supply 3
1.2 Frequency 3
1.3 Current Inputs 3
1.4 Logic Inputs 4
1.4.1 Supply 4
1.5 Output Relay Characteristic 4

2. INSULATION 5

3. EMC TESTS 5

4. ENVIRONMENT 5

5. DEVIATION OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS 6

6. DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS 7

7. DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS 7

8. PROTECTION SETTING RANGES 8

8.1 [50/51] Phase Overcurrent (P120, P121, P122 & P123) 8
8.1.1 Protection Setting Ranges 8
8.2 [50N/51N] Earth fault protection (P120, P121, P122 & P123) 8
8.2.1 Protection Setting Ranges 9
8.3 Undercurrent Protection (P122 & P123) 10
8.3.1 Protection Setting Ranges 10
8.4 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P122 & P123) 10
8.4.1 Protection Setting Ranges 10
8.5 Thermal Overload Protection (P122 & P123) 11
8.5.1 Protection Setting Ranges 11
8.6 Multishot Autoreclose Function (P123) 12
8.6.1 Multishot Autoreclose Settings 12
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 2/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

9. AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS 14

9.1 Cold Load Pickup (P122 & P123) 14
9.2 Auxiliary Timers (P122 & P123) 14
9.3 Broken Conductor Detection (P122 & P123) 14
9.3.1 Broken Conductor Detection Setting Ranges 14
9.4 Circuit Breaker Failure (P122 & P123) 14
9.4.1 CB Fail Setting Ranges 14
9.5 Trip Circuit Supervision (P122 & P123) 15
9.5.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Setting Ranges 15
9.6 Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring (P122 & P123) 15
9.6.1 Setting Ranges 15
9.7 SOTF/TOR Switch on to fault / Trip on reclose (P123) 15
9.7.1 Setting Ranges 15

10. RECORDING FUNCTIONS (P122 & P123) 16

10.1 Event Records 16
10.2 Fault Records 16
10.3 Instantaneous recorder 16
10.4 Disturbance Records 16
10.4.1 Triggers; Data; Setting Ranges 16

11. COMMUNICATION 17

12. CURVES 18
12.1 General 18
12.1.1 Inverse Time Curves: 18
12.1.2 Reset Timer 19
12.2 Thermal Overload Curves 20
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/36

1. RATINGS
1.1 Power Supply

Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx 24-60Vdc; 48-150Vdc;

130-250Vdc
100-250Vac 50/60Hz
125-250Vdc/100-250Vac
(special application)
Operating range DC ± 20% of Vx
AC – 20%, +10% of Vx
Residual ripple Up to 12%
Stored energy time ≥50 ms for interruption of Vx
Burden Stand by: <3W DC or <8VA AC
Max: <6W DC or <14VA AC

1.2 Frequency

Frequency protection functions From 45 to 65Hz

Nominal frequency 50/60Hz

1.3 Current Inputs

Phase current inputs 1 and 5A by connection

Earth current inputs 1 and 5A by connection
Operating range Selection by ordering code (Cortec)
Burden Phase Current < 0.025 VA (1A)
< 0.3 VA (5A)
Burden Earth Current < 0.008 VA (1A)
< 0.010 VA (5A)
Thermal withstand 1s @ 100 x rated current
2s @ 40 x rated current
continuous @ 4 x rated current
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 4/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.4 Logic Inputs

Logic input type Independent optically insulated

Logic input burden < 10 mAmps per input
Logic input recognition time < 5ms

1.4.1 Supply
The logic inputs shall be powered with a DC voltage, excepted the M auxiliary voltage range
which acccepts both DC and AC voltage as logic input control voltage.

Logic input electrical functionality

Ordering Relay ausiliary power Auxiliary voltage Minimum Minimum
Code supply range range for the polarisation polarisation
(Cortec) logic inputs(*) voltage level current level
(Volt) (mAmps)
A 24 - 60 Vdc 19 – 60 Vdc 15 Vdc 3.35 mAmps
F 48 – 150 Vdc 32 – 150 Vdc 25 Vdc 3.35 mAmps
M 130 – 250 Vdc 48 – 250 Vdc 38 Vdc 2.20 mAmps
100 – 250 Vdc 48 – 250 Vac 38 Vdc 1.90 mA rms

T 48 – 150 Vdc 32 – 150 Vdc 25 Vdc 3.35 mAmps

Special EA (**)
U 130 – 250 Vdc 48 – 250 Vdc 38 Vdc 2.20 mAmps
Special EA (**)
H 125 – 250 Vdc 105 – 145 Vdc 96 Vdc 1.8 mA
100 – 250 Vdc

(*) The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations for the logic inputs is ±20% in DC voltage
and −20%, +10% in AC voltage.
(**) Logic input recognition time for EA approval. Dedicated filtering on 24 samples (15 ms at
50 Hz)
1.5 Output Relay Characteristic

Contact rating
Contact relay Dry contact Ag CdO
Make current Max. 30A and carrry for 3s
Carry capacity 5A continuous
Rated Voltage 250Vac
Breaking characteristic
Breaking capacity AC 1250 VA resistive
1250 VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5)
220 Vac, 5A (cos ϕ = 0.6)
Breaking capacity DC 135 Vdc, 0.3A (L/R = 30 ms)
250 Vdc, 50W resistive or
25W inductive (L/R=40ms)
Operation time <7ms
Durability
Loaded contact 10000 operation minimum
Unloaded contact 100000 operation minimum
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/36

2. INSULATION
Dielectric withstand IEC 60-255-5 2 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode
Impulse voltage IEC 60-255-5 5 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode

Insulation resistance IEC 60-255-5 > 1000 MΩ

3. EMC TESTS
High frequency IEC 61000-4-1 2.5 kV common mode, class 3
disturbance 1 kV differential mode, class 3
Fast transient IEC 61000-4-4 4 kV common mode, class 4
ANSI C37.90.1 2 kV others, class 4
Electrostatic IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV, class 4
discharge
RFI immunity ANSI C37.90.2 35 v/M
radiated IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m

4. ENVIRONMENT
Temperature IEC 600-68-2-1 Storage –25 °C to +70 °C
IEC 600-68-2-2 Operation -25 °C to + 55 °C
Humidity dam heat IEC 600-68-2-3 56 days at 93% RH and 40 °C
Enclosure protection IEC 60-529 IP 52, IK 07
Sinusoidal Vibrations IEC 60-255-21-1 Response and endurance, class 2
Shocks IEC 60-255-21-2 Response and withstand, class 1
Bump IEC 60-255-21-2 Response and withstand, class 1
Seismic IEC 60-255-21-3 Class 1
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 6/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5. DEVIATION OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS

Glossary
I : Phase current
Is : I>, I>>, I>>> & I<
I2s : I2>, I2>> & I2>>>
Ies : Ie>, Ie>> & Ie>>>
DT : Definite time
IDMT : Inverse definite minimum time

Element Range Deviation Trigger Reset Time deviation

Phase overcurrent 0.1 to 40 In ± 2% DT: Is ± 2% 0.95 Is ±2% ±2% +30…50ms
elements IDMT: 1.1Is ±2% 1.05 Is ±2% ±5% +30…50ms
I> & I>> & I>>>
Earth fault overcurrent 0.002 to 1Ien ± 2% DT: Ies ± 2% 0.95 Ies ±2% ±2% +30…50ms
elements 0.01 to 8 Ien IDMT: 1.1Ies ±2% 1.05 Ies ±2% ±5% +30…50ms
Ie> & Ie>> & Ie>>> 0.1 to 40 Ien
Negative sequence 0.1 to 40 In ± 2% DT: I2s ± 2% 0.95 I2s ±2% ±2% +30…50ms
phase overcurrent IDMT: 1.1I2s ±2% 1.05 I2s ±2% ±5% +30…50ms
elements
I2>, I2>> & I2>>>
Phase undercurrent 0.02 to 1 In ± 2% DT: I< ± 2% 0.95 I< ±2% ±2% +30…50ms
element I<
Broken conductor [I2/I1]. 20 to 100% ± 3% DT: I2/I1 ± 3% 0.95 I2/I1 ±3% ±2% +30…50ms
Thermal overload 0.10 to 3.2 In ± 3% IDMT: Iθ> ± 3% 0.97 Iθ>±3% –5% +30…50ms
Iθ>, θ Alarm, θ Trip (ref. IEC 60255-8)
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/36

6. DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS

Autoreclose timers tDs, tR, tI ±2% +10…30ms
CB fail & CB monitoring timers ±2% +10…30ms
Auxiliary timers tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4 ±2% +10…30ms
Cold load pickup ±2% +20…40ms
SOTF/TOR ±2% +20…40ms

7. DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS
Measurement Range Deviation
Phase current 0.1 to 40 In Typical ±0.5% at In
Earth current 0.002 to 1Ien Typical ±0.5% at Ien
0.01 to 8 Ien Typical ±0.5% at Ien
0.1 to 40 Ien Typical ±0.5% at Ien
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 8/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

8. PROTECTION SETTING RANGES

8.1 [50/51] Phase Overcurrent (P120, P121, P122 & P123)

− Phase current Fundamental only

NOTE : When I> or I>> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting
recommended should be 2In.
8.1.1 Protection Setting Ranges

Setting Range
[51] Phase OC Min Max Step
I> ? No or Yes
I> 0.1 In 25 In 0.01 In
Delay type DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tI> 0s 150 s 0.01 s
I> TMS 0.025 1.5 0.025
I> Reset Delay Type DT or IDMT
I> RTMS 0.025 3.2 0.025
I> tReset 0.00 s 100 s 0.01 s
I>> ? No or Yes
I>> 0.5 In 40 In 0.01 In
Delay type DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tI>> 0s 150 s 0.01 s
I>> TMS 0.025 1.5 0.025
I>> Reset Delay Type DT or IDMT
I>> RTMS 0.025 3.2 0.025
I>> tReset 0.00 s 100 s 0.01 s
I>>> ? No or Yes or Peak
I>>> 0.5 In 40 In 0.01 In
tI>>> 0s 150 s 0.01 s

8.2 [50N/51N] Earth fault protection (P120, P121, P122 & P123)

− Earth fault current Fundamental only

− Earth fault current ranges See following table

NOTE : When Ie> or Ie>> are associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum
setting recommended should be the maximum of the range divided by
20.
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/36

8.2.1 Protection Setting Ranges

Setting Range
[Earth] OC Min Max Step
High sensitivity current set Cortec code P12-C-X---X
Ie> 0.002 Ien 1 Ien 0.001 Ien
Ie>> 0.002 Ien 1 Ien 0.001 Ien
Ie>>> 0.002 Ien 1 Ien 0.001 Ien
Med. sensitivity current set Cortec code P12-B-X---X
Ie> 0.01 Ien 1 Ien 0.005 Ien
Ie>> 0.01 Ien 8 Ien 0.005 Ien
Ie>>> 0.01 Ien 8 Ien 0.005 Ien
Low sensitivity current set Cortec code P12-A-X---X
Ie> 0.1 Ien 25 Ien 0.1 Ien
Ie>> 0.5 Ien 40 Ien 0.1 Ien
Ie>>> 0.5 Ien 40 Ien 0.1 Ien
Ie> ? No or Yes
Delay type DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tIe> 0s 150 s 0.01 s
Ie> TMS 0.025 1.5 0.025
Ie> Reset Delay Type DT or IDMT
Ie> RTMS 0.025 3.2 0.025
Ie> tReset 0.00 s 100 s 0.01 s
Ie>> ? No or Yes
Delay type DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tIe>> 0s 150 s 0.01 s
Ie>> TMS 0.025 1.5 0.025
Ie>> Reset Delay Type DT or IDMT
Ie>> RTMS 0.025 3.2 0.025
Ie>> tReset 0.04 s 100 s 0.01 s
tIe>> 0s 150 0.01 s
Ie>>> ? No or Yes
tIe>>> 0s 150 s 0.01 s
Ie>>> tReset 0.00 s 100 s 0.01 s
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 10/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

8.3 Undercurrent Protection (P122 & P123)

− Undercurrent: Fundamental only

− Phase current: Fundamental only

8.3.1 Protection Setting Ranges

Setting ranges
[37] Under Current Min Max Step
I< ? Yes or No
I< 0.2 In 1 In 0.01 In
tI< 0s 150 s 0.01 s

8.4 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P122 & P123)

− Phase current: Fundamental only

NOTE : When I2> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting
recommended should be 2In.
8.4.1 Protection Setting Ranges

Setting ranges
[46] Neg.Seq. OC Min Max Step
I2> ? No or Yes
I2> 0.1 In 40 In 0.01 In
Delay Type DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tI2> 0s 150s 0.01s
I2> TMS 0.025 1.5 0.025
I2> Reset Delay Type DT or IDMT
I2> RTMS 0.025 1.5 0.025
I2> tReset 0.04 s 100 s 0.01 s
I2>> ? No or Yes
I2>> 0.1 In 40 In 0.01 In
tI2>> 0s 150s 0.01s
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/36

8.5 Thermal Overload Protection (P122 & P123)

− Phase Current: RMS

8.5.1 Protection Setting Ranges

[49] Therm. OL Setting ranges

Therm. OL ? No or Yes
Iθ 0.1 In 3.2 In 0.01
Te 1 mn 200 mn 1mn
k 1 1,5 0.01
θ Trip 50% 200% 1%
θ Alarm ? No or Yes
θ Alarm 50% 200% 1%
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 12/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

8.6 Multishot Autoreclose Function (P123)

Main shots: 4 independent shots.
External logic inputs: 4 inputs (external CB fail, phase start, earth start, blocking order).
Internal programmable trigger from phase and earth fault on all re-closing cycles.
External trigger from logic input.
Programmable dead times and reclaim time setting.
8.6.1 Multishot Autoreclose Settings

Setting range
[79] Autoreclose Min Max Step
Autoreclose ? Yes or No
Ext. CB Fail ? Yes or No
Ext. CB Fail time 0.01 s 600 s 0.01 s
Aux1 ((I>) ? Yes or No
Aux2 (Ie>) ? Yes or No
Ext Block ? Yes or No
Dead time
tD1 0.01 s 300 s 0.01 s
tD2 0.01 s 300 s 0.01 s
tD3 0.01 s 600 s 0.01 s
tD4 0.01 s 600 s 0.01 s
Reclaim time
tR 0.02 s 600 s 0.01 s
Inhib time
tI 0.02 s 600 s 0.01 s
Phase Cycles 0 4 1
E/Gnd Cycles 0 4 1
Cycles 4321 Settings
tI> 1111 0 or 1 or 2
tI>> 1111 0 or 1 or 2
tI>>> 1111 0 or 1 or 2
tIe> 1111 0 or 1 or 2
tIe>> 1111 0 or 1 or 2
tIe>>> 1111 0 or 1 or 2
tAux1 1111 0 or 1 or 2
tAux2 1111 0 or 1 or 2

0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip

1 = trip on pick up of the protection element, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on pick up of the protection element also if this has been set in the CRTL/Trip
commands/Trip menu.
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/36

8.6.1.1 Further timing

Fixed time out for lacking of CB opening signal on trip protection : 2.00 s at 50 Hz
1.67 s at 60 Hz
Time out for lacking of CB closing signal on close control after dead time :
tClose Pulse(*): from 0.1 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
(*) Setting available in CB monitoring menu.
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 14/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

9. AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS

9.1 Cold Load Pickup (P122 & P123)

Setting range
Cold Load PU Min Max Step
Cold Load PU ? Yes or No
Level 20% 500% 1%
tCL 0.1 s 3600 s 0.1 s

9.2 Auxiliary Timers (P122 & P123)

Auxiliary timers: 4 assigned to the logic inputs
Aux1, Aux2,Aux3, Aux4

Setting range
Auxiliary timers Min Max Step
tAux1 0 200 s 0.01 s
tAux2 0 200 s 0.01 s
tAux3 0 200 s 0.01 s
tAux4 0 200 s 0.01 s

9.3 Broken Conductor Detection (P122 & P123)

Principle used: I2/I1
Functionality available for: (IA or IB or IC) > 10% In
9.3.1 Broken Conductor Detection Setting Ranges

Setting range
Broken Conductor Min Max Step
Brkn.Cond ? Yes or No
Ratio I2/I1 20% 100% 1%
Brkn.Cond Time tBC 1s 14400 s 1s

9.4 Circuit Breaker Failure (P122 & P123)

9.4.1 CB Fail Setting Ranges

Setting range
CB Fail Min Max Step
CB Fail ? Yes or No
I< BF 0.02 In 1In 0.01 In
CB Fail Time tBF 0.03 s 10 s 0.01 s
Block I> No Yes Yes or No
Block Ie> No Yes Yes or No
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/36

9.5 Trip Circuit Supervision (P122 & P123)

9.5.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Setting Ranges

Setting range
TC Supervision Min Max Step
TC Supervision ? Yes or No
t trip circuit tSUP 0.1 s 10 s 0.05 s

9.6 Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring (P122 & P123)

9.6.1 Setting Ranges

CB Supervision Setting range

Min Max Step
CB Open S’vision? Yes or No
CB Open time 0.05 s 1s 0.01 s
CB Close S’vision? Yes or No
CB Close time 0.05 s 1s 0.01 s
CB Open Alarm ? Yes or No
CB Open NB 0 50000 1
ΣAmps(n) ? Yes or No
ΣAmps(n) 0 E6 A 4000 E6 A 1E6 A
n 1 2 1
tOpen Pulse(*) 0.10 s 5s 0.01 s
tClose Pulse(*) 0.10 s 5s 0.01 s

(*)Note: The tOpen/Close Pulse is available in the P123 for the Local /Remote functionality
9.7 SOTF/TOR Switch on to fault / Trip on reclose (P123)
9.7.1 Setting Ranges

SOTF Setting range

Min Max Step
SOTF? Yes or No
t SOTF 0 ms 500 ms 10ms
I>> Yes or No
I>>> Yes or No
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 16/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

10. RECORDING FUNCTIONS (P122 & P123)

10.1 Event Records

Capacity 75 events
Time-tag 1 millisecond
Triggers Any selected protection alarm and
threshold
Logic input change of state
Setting changes
Self test events

10.2 Fault Records

Capacity 5 faults
Time-tag 1 millisecond
Triggers Any selected protection alarm and
threshold
Data Fault date
Protection thresholds
Setting Group
AC inputs measurements (RMS)
Fault measurements

10.3 Instantaneous recorder

Capacity 5 starting informations (instantaneous

Time-tag 1 millisecond
Triggers Any selected protection alarm and
threshold
Data date, hour
origin (any protection alarm)
length (duration of the instantaneous
trip yes or no

10.4 Disturbance Records

10.4.1 Triggers; Data; Setting Ranges

Disturbance Records P122 P123

Triggers Any selected protection alarm and threshold, logic input, remote
command
Data AC input channels
digital input and output states
frequency value
Default value Setting range
P122 P123 Min Max Step
Pre-Time 2.5 2.5 0.1 3 0.1
Post-Time 0.5 0.5 0.1 3 0.1
Disturb rec Trig ON TRIP ON TRIP ON TRIP or ON INST.
Trigger Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Logic input
Remote command
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/36

11. COMMUNICATION
Type Relay
Physical Link Connectors Data Rate Protocol
Port position
RS485 Rear port Screened twister Screws or 300 to 38400 baud ModBus RTU, Courier,
pair snap-on (programmable) IEC60870-5-103,
DNP3.0
RS232 Front port Screened twister Sub–D 9 pin 300 to 38400 baud ModBus RTU
pair female (programmable)
(P122 &
connector
P123)
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 18/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

12. CURVES
12.1 General
Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches Is (general
threshold), the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the
inverse time characteristic is 1.1Is (with a tolerance of ± 0.05Is).
12.1.1 Inverse Time Curves:
The first stage thresholds for phase (earth) overcurrent can be selected with an inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a
mathematical formula.
In all, there are eleven IDMT characteristics available.
The mathematical formula applicable to the first ten curves is:

 K 
t = T × + L 
 (I I S )α − 1 
 
Where:
t Operation time
K Factor (see table)
I Value of measured current
Is Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
α Factor (see table)
L ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC and RECT curves)
T Time multiplier setting from 0.025 to 1.5

Type of curve Standard K factor α factor L factor

Short time inverse AREVA 0.05 0.04 0
Standard inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Very inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long time inverse AREVA 120 1 0
Short time inverse C02 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114
Long time inverse C08 5.95 2 0.18
Very inverse ANSI/IEEE 19.61 2 0.491
Extremely inverse ANSI/IEEE 28.2 2 0.1217
Rectifier protection RECT 45900 5.6 0

The RI curve has the following definition:

1
t= K ⋅
0.236
0 .339 −
( )
I
Is
K setting is from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05.
The equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/Is ≤ 20.
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 19/36

12.1.2 Reset Timer

The first stage thresholds for phase and earth overcurrent protection, negative sequence
overcurrent and wattmetric/IeCos are provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset".
It may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse definite minimum time characteristic
(IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when
grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays that have inherent reset time
delays.
The second and third stage thresholds for the wattmetric/IeCos protection and earth fault
overcurrent protection only have a definite time reset.
A possible situation where the reset timer may be used is to reduce fault clearance times
where intermittent faults occur.
An example may occur in a cable with plastic insulation. In this application it is possible that
the fault energy melts the cable insulation, which then reseals after clearance, thereby
eliminating the cause for the fault. This process repeats itself to give a succession of fault
current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until
the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is set to minimum the P125, P126 and P127
relays will be repeatedly reset and will not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent.
By using the reset timer hold function the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby
reducing fault clearance time.
The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is:
 K 
t = T × 
 1 − (I I S )α 
 
Where:
t Reset time
K Factor (see table)
I Value of the measured current
Is Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)

α Factor (see table)

T Reset time multiplier (RTMS) setting between 0.025 and 1.5.

Type of curve Standard K factor α factor

Short time inverse C02 2.261 2
Moderately inverse ANSI/IEEE 4.850 2
Long time inverse C08 5.950 2
Very inverse ANSI/IEEE 21.600 2
Extremely Inverse ANSI/IEEE 29.100 2
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 20/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

12.2 Thermal Overload Curves

The thermal time characteristic is given by:
 −t 
 
e τ  =
(I ² − (kxIFLC )² )
(I ² − Ip ² )
Where:
t = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I

τ = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant equipment

I = Largest phase current
IFLC = Full load current rating (relay setting 'Thermal Trip')
k = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC
IP = Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the
overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold".
Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are given in Technical Data.
The mathematical formula applicable to MiCOM Relays is the following

 K² - θ² 
t Trip = Te In  
 K ² − θtrip² 
 
Where :
t Trip = Time to trip (in seconds)
Te = Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected (in seconds)

K = Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k Iθ> with:

Ieq = Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase
current

Iθ> = Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier
k = Factor associated to the thermal state formula

θ alarm = Initial thermal state.

θ trip = Trip thermal state

The settings of these parameters are available in the various menus. The calculation of the
thermal state is given by the following formula:

²  −t    −t 
 Ieq  1− e
 
 Te  
 
 Te 
Θ τ +1 =   + Θ τe
 kxIΘ >  



θ being calculated every 20ms.
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 21/36

The following curves are given for indication only.

12.3 IEC Curves

IEC & AREVA Curves

(TMS=0,025)
10

1
TIME IN SECONDS

0,1

0,01

0,001
1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

Short time inverse (AREVA)

Standard Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long Time Inverse (AREVA)
P0006ENb
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 22/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Short Time Inverse (AREVA)

10

A
B

C
TIME IN SECONDS

0,1
D

0,01 E

0,001
1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E : TMS=0.025 D : TMS=0.2 C : TMS=0.5 B : TMS=1 A : TMS=1.25

P0007ENb
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 23/36

STANDARD INVERSE (IEC)

100

10

A
B
TIME IN SECONDS

C
1

0,1

0,01
1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E : TMS=0.025 D : TMS=0.2 C : TMS=0.5 B : TMS=1 A : TMS=1.25

P0008ENa
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 24/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

VERY INVERSE (IEC)

100

10
TIME IN SECONDS

1 A
B

0,01

0,001
1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E : TMS=0.025 D : TMS=0.2 C : TMS=0.5 B : TMS=1 A : TMS=1.25

P0009ENa
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/36

EXTREMEMELY INVERSE (IEC)

10000

1000

100
TIME IN SECONDS

10

A
B
0,1 C

0,01

0,001
1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E :TMS=0.025 D : TMS=0.2 C : TMS=0.5 B : TMS=1 A : TMS=1.25

P00010ENa
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 26/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

LONG TIME INVERSE (AREVA)

10000

1000

100
TIME IN SECONDS

A
B

D
1

E
0,1
1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E : TMS=0.025 D : TMS=0.2 C : TMS=0.5 B : TMS=1 A : TMS=1.25

P0011ENb
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/36

12.4 RI Curves

RI CURVES

100

10
TIME IN SECONDS

0,1
1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E : k=0.1 D : k=1 C : k=2 B : k=5 A : k=10

P0012ENa
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 28/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

12.5 IEEE/ANSI & CO Curves

ANSI/IEEE & CO curves

(TMS/RTMS=0.025)
100

10

1
TIME IN SECONDS

0,1

0,01

0,001

0,0001
0,01 0,1 1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

Short Time Inverse (CO2) Moderately Inverse

Long Time Inverse (CO8) Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
P0013ENa
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 29/36

SHORT TIME INVERSE (CO2)

100

10

1
TIME IN SECONDS

0,1
A
A B

B C

C
D
0,01
D

E
0,001 E

0,0001
0,01 0,1 1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

B : TMS/RTMS=1 A : TMS/RTMS=1.25

E : TMS/RTMS=0.025 D : TMS/RTMS=0.2 C : TMS/RTMS=0.5

P0014ENa
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 30/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

MODERATELY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)

1000

100

10
TIME IN SECONDS

A
1
A B

B C
C

D
D
0,1

E
E

0,01
0,01 0,1 1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E : TMS/RTMS=0.025 D : TMS/RTMS=0.2 C : TMS/RTMS=0.5

B : TMS/RTMS=1 A : TMS/RTMS=1.25
P0015ENa
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 31/36

LONG TIME INVERSE (CO8)

100

10
A

B
C

D
1
TIME IN SECONDS

A
E B

0,1 C

0,01

0,001
0,01 0,1 1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E : TMS/RTMS=0.025 D : TMS/RTMS=0.2 C : TMS/RTMS=0.5

B : TMS/RTMS=1 A : TMS/RTMS=1.25
P0016ENa
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 32/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

VERY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)

1000

100

B
C
TIME IN SECONDS

10

1
A
E B

0,1
D

E
0,01
0,01 0,1 1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E : TMS/RTMS=0.025 D : TMS/RTMS=0.2 C : TMS/RTMS=0.5

B : TMS/RTMS=1 A : TMS/RTMS=1.25
P0017ENa
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 33/36

EXTREMELY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)

1000

100

A
B

10 C

D
TIME IN SECONDS

A
B
0,1 C

0,01

0,001
0,01 0,1 1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

E : TMS/RTMS=0.025 D : TMS/RTMS=0.2 C : TMS/RTMS=0.5

B : TMS/RTMS=1 A : TMS/RTMS=1.25
P0018ENa
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 34/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

12.6 Rectifier protection curve

RECTIFIER (P122 & P123 only)

10000

1000

100
TIME IN SECONDS

45900
t=
(I/Is)5.6-1
1

0,1
1 1.6 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

TMS = 1

P0019ENa
Technical Data P12x/EN TD/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 35/36

12.7 LABORELEC CURVE

50

P0020ENa
1.5

1.0

0.5

40
Primary zero sequence current (A)
30
20
3

10
5
1
5

Time (sec)
P12x/EN TD/F75 Technical Data

Page 36/36 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

12.8 Thermal overload curves

TRIPPING CURVE FUNCTION OF THE PREFAULT LOAD

(k=1.1 & T e=10mn)
10000

1000

100
TIME IN SECONDS

A
10
B
C
D

E
1

0,1
1 10

MULTIPLES OF THERMAL THRESHOLD SETTING I >

A : No prefault load, thermal state = 0%

B : Thermal state=30%
C : Thermal state=50%
D : Thermal state=70%
E : Thermal state=90%
P0021ENa
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

APPLICATION GUIDE
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/76

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 5
1.1 Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines 5
1.2 MiCOM Overcurrent Relays 6

2. EARTH AND PHASE CURRENT OVERCURRENT FUNCTIONS 8

2.1 Instantaneous function (50/50N) 9
2.2 DMT thresholds 9
2.3 IDMT thresholds 9
2.3.1 Inverse time curves 9
2.3.2 Laborelec curves 10
2.4 Reset timer 11
2.4.1 Reset timer (P122 & P123 only) 11
2.5 Time graded protection 12

3. TRANSFORMER INRUSH CURRENTS 13

4. BUSBAR PROTECTION ON RADIAL SYSTEMS 14

5. BLOCKING LOGIC FUNCTION (BLOCKED OVERCURRENT

PROTECTION) 15

6. RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT 16

6.1 Introduction 16
6.2 High impedance principle 17
6.3 Setting guide 18
6.3.1 CT requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection 19
6.4 Use of METROSIL non linear resistors 19
6.4.1 Metrosil units for relays with 1A CT 21
6.4.2 Metrosil units for relays with 5A CT 21

7. RECTIFIER PROTECTION 22

8. BACK-UP DIAGRAM USING « TRANSFERRED SELECTIVE

TRIPPING » 24

9. REMOTE PROTECTION STAND-BY DIAGRAM 26

10. 1 ½ BREAKER SCHEME 27

11. THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 28

11.1 Time Constant Characteristic 28
11.2 Setting Guidelines 30
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 2/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

12. COLD LOAD PICK-UP (P122 & P123 ONLY) 31

12.1 Air Conditioning/Resistive Heating Loads 32
12.2 Motor Feeders 32
12.3 Earth Fault Protection applied to Transformers 32

13. SWITCH ONTO FAULT / TRIP ON RECLOSE PROTECTION

(P123 ONLY) 33
13.1 General 33
13.2 SOTF/ TOR description 33

14. LOCAL / REMOTE MODE (P123 ONLY) 35

14.1 General 35
14.2 Setting 35

15. AUXILIARY TIMERS (P122 & P123 ONLY) 37

16. SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 38

17. MAINTENANCE MODE 40

18. SELECTIVE SCHEME LOGIC (P122 & P123 ONLY) 41

19. NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

(P122 & P123 ONLY) 42
19.1 I2> and I2>> Setting Guidelines 42

20. BROKEN CONDUCTOR DETECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 44

20.1 Example of Setting 45

21. DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE

FUNCTION (P123 ONLY) 46
21.1 Introduction 46
21.2 Description of the function 48
21.2.1 Autorecloser activation 48
21.2.2 Autoreclose menu 48
21.2.3 Logic Functions 49
21.2.4 Autoreclose logic description 50
21.2.5 Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close 50
21.2.6 Recloser lockout 51
21.2.7 Setting group change lockout 51
21.3 Setting Guidelines 51
21.3.1 Number Of Shots 51
21.3.2 Dead Timer Setting 51
21.3.3 Reclaim Timer Setting 53
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/76

22. CIRCUIT BREAKER STATE MONITORING 55

23. CIRCUIT BREAKER CONDITION MONITORING (P122 & P123 ONLY) 56

23.1 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features 56
23.2 Setting guidelines 57
23.2.1 Setting the Σ I Thresholds
n
57
23.2.2 Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds 58
23.2.3 Setting the Operating Time Thresholds 58

24. UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION FUNCTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 59

25. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION :

CBF (P122 & P123 ONLY) 60
25.1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection mechanism 60
25.2 Typical settings 63
25.2.1 Breaker Fail Timer Settings 63
25.2.2 Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings 63

26. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 64

26.1 Trip Circuit Supervision mechanism 64

27. EVENT RECORDS (P122 & P123 ONLY) 68

28. FAULT RECORDS (P122 & P123 ONLY) 69

29. INSTANTANEOUS RECORDER (P122 & P123 ONLY) 70

30. DISTURBANCE RECORDER (P122 & P123 ONLY) 71

31. ROLLING AND PEAK VALUE DEMANDS (P122 & P123 ONLY) 72
31.1 Rolling demand 72
31.2 Peak value demand 73

32. CT REQUIREMENTS 74
32.1 Definite time / IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection 74
32.2 Instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection 74
32.3 Definite time / IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection 74
32.4 Low impedance restricted earth fault (REF) protection 75
32.5 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection 75
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 4/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/76

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines
The secure and reliable transmission and distribution of power within a network is heavily
dependent upon the integrity of underground cables and overhead lines, which link the
various sections of the network together. Therefore the associated protection system must
also provide both secure and reliable operation.
The most common fault conditions, on underground cables and overhead lines, are short
circuit faults. These faults may occur between the phase conductors but will most often
involve one or more phase conductor becoming short-circuited to earth.
Faults caused by short circuits require the fastest faulted conductor clearance times but at
the same time allowing for suitable co-ordination with other downstream protection devices.
Fault sensitivity is an issue common to all voltage levels. For transmission systems, tower-
footing resistance can be high. Also, high resistance faults might be prevalent where lines
pass over sandy or rocky terrain. Fast, discriminative faulted conductor clearance is required
for these fault conditions.
The effect of fault resistance is more pronounced on lower voltage systems, resulting in
potentially lower fault currents, which in turn increases the difficulty in the detection of high
resistance faults. In addition, many distribution systems use earthing arrangements designed
to limit the passage of earth fault current.
Earthed methods as such as using resistance, Petersen coil or insulated systems make the
detection of earth faults arduous. Special protection equipment is often used to overcome
these problems.
Nowadays, the supply continuity in the energy distribution is of paramount importance.
On overhead lines most of faults are transient or semi-permanent in nature.
In order to increase system availability multi-shot autoreclose cycles are commonly used in
conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements. For permanent faults it is essential that
only the faulted section of the network is isolated. High-speed, discriminative fault clearance
is therefore a fundamental requirement of any protection scheme on a distribution network.
Power transformers are installed at all system voltage levels and have their own specific
requirements with regard to protection. In order to limit the damage incurred by a transformer
under fault conditions, fast clearance of the windings with phase to phase and phase to earth
faults is a primary requirement.
Damage to electrical plant equipment such as transformers, cables and lines may also be
incurred by excessive loading conditions, which leads directly to overheating of the
equipment and subsequent degradation of their insulation. To protect against such fault
conditions, protective devices require thermal characteristics too.
Uncleared faults, arising either from the failure of the associated protection system or of the
switchgear itself, must also be considered. The protection devices concerned should be
fitted with logic to deal with breaker failure and relays located upstream must be able to
provide adequate back-up protection for such fault conditions.
Other situations may arise on overhead lines, such as broken phase conductors.
Traditionally, a series fault has been difficult to detect.
With today's digital technology, it is now possible to design elements, which are responsive
to such unbalanced system, conditions and to subsequently issue alarm and trip signals.
On large networks, time co-ordination of the overcurrent and earth fault protection relays can
often lead to problematic grading situations or, as is often the case, excessive fault
clearance times. Such problems can be overcome by relays operating in blocked overcurrent
schemes.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 6/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.2 MiCOM Overcurrent Relays

MiCOM relays are a range of products from AREVA T&D using the latest digital technology.
The range includes devices designed for application to a wide range of power system plant
equipment such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead lines and cables.
Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in order to
achieve a high degree of conformity between products. One product among this range is the
overcurrent relay.

MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays have been designed to provide higher
functionality in terms of protections, measuring, automatic operation and order control. They
can be applied to industrial and distribution network applications, as well as in high voltage
and extremely high voltage protection applications.
They can operate in networks with neutral earthed by impedance, by resonant system such
as Petersen coil, in insulated system and in system with neutral earthed.
The protection functions can be used associated with the blocking feature in order to
optimise the performance of the protection schemes, thus reducing operating times.
The earth and phase protection functions include instantaneous and time delay information.
The delay time for the first and second stage for phase and earth fault protections can be
chosen to be in definite or inverse delay time (IEC, ANSI/IEEE, CO, RI and RECT).
This wide choice of characteristics of triggering times makes it possible to easily integrate
these relays to an existing protection scheme, irrespective of other relays already installed
on the network.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/76

The protection and additional features of each model are listed in the following table.

Functions ANSI Code MiCOM MiCOM MiCOM MiCOM

P120 P121 P122 P123
Single-phase overcurrent 50/51 or X
50N/51N
Three-phase overcurrent 50/51 X X X
Earth fault overcurrent 50N/51N X X X X
Restrictive Earth fault 64N X X X X
Thermal overload (True RMS) 49 X X
Undercurrent 37 X X
Negative sequence overcurrent 46 X X
Broken conductor detection X X
Cold load pickup X X
Instantaneous/start contact X X X X
Latching output contacts 86 X X X X
Setting groups 1 1 2 2
Circuit breaker failure detection 50BF X X
Trip circuit supervision (TCS) X X
Switch on to fault (SOTF) X
CB control Local / Remote X
Circuit Breaker monitoring and X X
control
Blocking logic X X X X
Selective relay scheme logic X X
Multi-shot autoreclose 79 X
Clock phase and anti-clock X X
Phase rotation operation
Measurements (True RMS) X X X X
Peak and rolling values X X
Event records X X
Instantaneous records X X
Fault records X X
Disturbance records X X
RS 232 front communication for X X
MiCOM S1 Software
RS 485 rear communication X X X X
(Modbus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103,
Courier, DNP3.0)
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 8/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2. EARTH AND PHASE CURRENT OVERCURRENT FUNCTIONS

MiCOM P120 range of relays provide definite and independent time delay overcurrent
protection.
Each phase current and earth current input has three thresholds.
The first and second thresholds can be set as definite delay time or inverse delay time using
the IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves. Their parameters are shown in the Technical
Data chapter of this Technical Guide.
The third threshold can be set as definite delay time only, but can be set to work on the peak
of the current measured.
In a similar way, the earth fault elements has three different thresholds, that besides can be
set independently of the settings chosen for the phases.
The instantaneous thresholds are represented by the symbol “I>” for the first threshold, “I>>”
and “I>>>” for the second and third instantaneous thresholds (“Ie>”, “Ie>>” and “Ie>>>” for
earth thresholds).
The time delayed thresholds are represented by the symbol “tI>” for the first threshold, “tI>>”
and “tI>>>” for the second and third time delay thresholds (“tIe>”, “tIe>>” and “tIe>>>” for the
time delay earth fault thresholds).
The protection elements trip when the following conditions are realized:

− The phase current exceeds the set overcurrent threshold.

− The time delay has elapsed.

− The blocking logic (if used) is not activated.

The following diagrams show the functionality for each threshold.

Inst. I>

Max I> & IDMT/DT Trip I>

Block. tI>
&
Inst. I>>

Max I>> & IDMT/DT Trip I>>

Block. tI>>
&
Inst. I>>>

Max I>>> & DT Trip I>>>

Block. tI>>>
&

Blocking logic
P0022ENa

FIGURE 1 : LOGIC OF PHASE THRESHOLDS I>, I>> AND I>>>

With: Max I> = [IA>] OR [IB>] OR [IC>]
Max I>> = [IA>>] OR [IB>>] OR [IC>>]
Max I>>> = [IA>>>] OR [IB>>>] OR [IC>>>]
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/76

The logic associated to the earth fault threshold is identical to the one described above. The
different thresholds I> & tI>, I>> & tI>> and I>>> & tI>>> are respectively replaced by
thresholds Ie> & tIe>, Ie>> & tIe>> and Ie>>> & te>>>.
Thanks to the «Blocking Logic» function, it is possible to freeze the timer as long as the "Blk
Log" signal is active.
As soon as the blocking “Blk Log" signal disappears, if the overcurrent value is still over the
set threshold, the time delay resumes its countdown considering the value prior to the
activation of the blocking function as its new initial value. This allows a faster clearance of
the fault after a reset of the “Blk Log" signal.
2.1 Instantaneous function (50/50N)
For P122 and P123 relays :
In order to ensure fast tripping on highly saturated current signal, it has been decided that
I>>> and Ie>>> should operate on a current sample base in addition to the Fast Fourier
transformation bases (see User Guide chapter). Both algorithms can operate on a highly
saturated current signal. However with a high X/R ratio, it is recommended to use the sample
base method.
As soon as a phase (or earth) threshold is running, the instantaneous output associated with
this threshold is activated. This output indicates that the protection element has detected a
phase (or earth) fault and that the time delay associated with the threshold has started. This
time delay can be blocked via the logic input "Blk Log" associated with this threshold. If this
blocking input is activated by an output contact of a downstream relay, the logic that will lead
to the trip command is then blocked only if the relay that is the closest to the fault can see
and therefore eliminate the fault. This principle is known as «Blocking logic» or «Blocking». It
is described in more detail in this document.
2.2 DMT thresholds
The three phase (earth) overcurrent thresholds can be selected with a time constant delay.
The time to operate is equal to the time delay set, plus the time for the output contact to
operate (typically about 20 to 30 ms ; 20ms for a current exceeding or equal to 2 times the
threshold) and the time required to detect the overcurrent state (maximum 20ms at 50Hz).
For DMT curves, a reset timer "t Reset" is associated with the first and second thresholds
(phase and earth elements).
2.3 IDMT thresholds
2.3.1 Inverse time curves
The first and second phases (earth) overcurrent threshold can be selected with a dependent
time characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a mathematical formula.
There are eleven inverse time characteristics available.
The mathematical formula applicable to the first ten curves is :
K
t=T x ( +L )
(I/IS)α–1

Where:
t = Tripping time
K = Coefficient (see table)
I = Value of measured current
IS = Value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value)

α = Coefficient (see table)

L = ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for IEC curves)
T = Time multiplier between 0.025 and 1.5
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 10/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Type of curve Standard K factor α factor L factor

Short Time Inverse AREVA 0.05 0.04 0
Standard inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Very inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long time inverse ALSTOM 120 1 0
Short Time Inverse C02 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114
Long Time Inverse C08 5.95 2 0.18
Very Inverse ANSI/IEEE 19.61 2 0.491
Extremely Inverse ANSI/IEEE 28.2 2 0.1215
Rectifier Protection 45900 5.6 0

The RI curve (electromechanical) is given by the following formula:

 1 
t = K ×  
 0. 339 − 0 .236 /( I / Is) 

With K that can be adjusted from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05.

This equation is valid for 1.1≤ (I/Is) ≤ 20.

Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches Is, the minimum
guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse time
characteristic is 1.1Is (with a tolerance of ± 0,05Is), except rectifier protection curve for which
the minimum value is 1.6 Is ±0.05 Is.
2.3.2 Laborelec curves
The first and second earth threshold can be selected with dedicated Laborelec curves.
3 curves are available with the following formula :
t = aI + b
where : t = tripping time
a and b = coefficient (see table)
I = Primary residual current (between 1 and 40A)

Type of curve a b
LABORELEC 1 – 0.0897 4.0897
LABORELEC 2 – 0.0897 4.5897
LABORELEC 3 – 0.0897 5.0897

In order to be compliant with Laborelec specifications the relay should be used with:

− An earth current range of 0.01 Ion to 8 Ion

− A rated current of 1A

− A core balanced CT with a 20/1ratio.

To use the full range of the curve, the relay must be set to 0.05Ion (secondary residual
current).
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/76

2.4 Reset timer

The first phase overcurrent threshold [I>/tI>] ([Ie>/tIe>] for the earth) has a reset timer.
The value that is set for this reset timer corresponds to the minimum time during which the
current value needs to be lower than 95% of the phase (or earth) threshold before the
corresponding phase (or earth) time delay is reset.
NOTE : This rule doesn’t apply when the protection triggers. When the
protection triggers, the time delay tI> (or tIe>) is immediately reset.
The value of this reset timer depends on the type of timer associated with the first phase
(Earth) threshold.

Type of timer associated Reset Timer

with the first & second
phase (earth) threshold P120, P121 P122, P123

DMT (see note below) 0 ms 0 ms to 600 s

LABORELEC *, Rectifier, Setting range from 40 ms to
50 ms
IDMT IEC or RI 100 s
Setting range from 40 ms to
100 s
IDMT IEEE or CO 50 ms or
Inverse Time
(Choice of 5 IEEE curves)

2.4.1 Reset timer (P122 & P123 only)

For the first phase and earth overcurrent stages, MiCOM P122 and P123 have a timer hold
facility "t Reset", which can be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic
(IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful for some applications, for example when
grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time
delays.
This timer hold facility used to reduce the time to clear a fault is also useful in situations
where intermittent faults occur. This may occur for example in a plastic insulated cable. In
this case, the fault energy may provocate the cable insulation to melt and reseal, thereby
extinguishing the fault. This process repeats itself a couple of times giving a succession of
fault current pulses, each one of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the
pulses, until the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is minimum the relay will be repeatedly reset
and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility,
the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 12/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

The reset timer "t Reset" for MiCOM P122 & P123 can be found in the following menu :

− If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEC or RI curve, the reset
timer "t Reset" with DMT characteristic can be set under the menu :

− Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/t Reset for the phase.

− Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/t Reset for the earth.

− If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEEE or CO curve, the
reset timer "t Reset" with a DMTor IDMT characteristic can be set under the menu :

− Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/Type Tempo Reset for the phase

− Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/Type Tempo Reset for the earth.

Reset Time "t Reset" with an IDMT characteristic :
The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is :

 K 
t = T ×  
 1 − (I I s )α 


Where :
t = Reset time
K = Coefficient (see table)
I = Value of the measured current
IS = Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)

α = Coefficient (see table)

T = Reset Time Multiplier (Rtms) between 0.025 and 3.2

Type of curves Standard K factor α factor

Short time inverse C02 2.261 2
Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE 4.85 2
Long time Inverse C08 5.95 2
Very inverse ANSI/IEEE 21.6 2
Extremely inverse ANSI/IEEE 29.1 2

2.5 Time graded protection

Inverse definite minimum time relays are time graded in such a way that the relay closer to
the fault operates faster than the upstream relays. This is referred to as relay co-ordination
because if the relay nearest to the fault does not operate, the next relay will trip in a slightly
longer time. The time grading steps are typically 400 ms, the operation times becoming
progressively longer with each stage.
When difficulty is experienced in arranging the required time grading steps, the use of a
blocked overcurrent scheme should be considered (described in a later section).
NOTE : The dynamic range of measurement is typically 1000 times minimum
setting.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/76

3. TRANSFORMER INRUSH CURRENTS

Either I>>/Ie>> or I>>>/Ie>>> elements can be used as high-set instantaneous elements.
The design is such that they do not respond to the DC transient component of the fault
current. The principle of operation allows the current settings to be set down to 35% of the
prospective peak inrush current that will be taken by a transformer when it is energised. As a
first approximation, the peak inrush is given by the reciprocal of the per unit series reactance
of the transformer.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 14/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

4. BUSBAR PROTECTION ON RADIAL SYSTEMS

The use of non-directional overcurrent relays to protect a busbar is based on the following
hypotheses:
- The network is a radial system,
- The incoming and outgoing feeders are clearly defined, the incomers being always
considered as suppliers of energy and feeders as loads.
Under these circumstances, the busbar is effectively protected using the interlocking
principle (Figure 2).

Incomer
I>/t> Block short time overcurrent
I>>/t>>
I>>>/t>>>
Trip

Back trip

Busbar

Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder n

I>/inst. I>/inst. I>/inst.

I>>/t>> I>>/t>> I>>/t>>

P0023ENa

FIGURE 2 : BLOCKED OVERCURRENT FOR BUSBAR PROTECTION

The instantaneous overcurrent signals of the feeders protection are grouped together and
wired to the « Blocking logic » logic input of the relay protecting the incomer. The blocking
function is programmed to inhibit either the first or first two thresholds. The third I>>>
threshold picks up at a high value (>10 In) with a short time delay (<60 ms).
If a fault appears on the network, the relay protecting the associated feeder will immediately
(in less than 30 ms) send a blocking order to the relay protecting the incomer. After the fault
has been cleared (by opening the circuit breaker), the blocking order is removed and the
relay protecting the incomer is unblocked. As the fault current is no longer present, the timer
is reinitialised.
If the fault appears on the busbar, the fault current exceeds by far the value of the third
threshold (I>>>). As this third threshold is not blocked by the blocking logic of relays
protecting the incomers, the trip order is sent in less than 60 ms and the busbar is de-
energised.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/76

5. BLOCKING LOGIC FUNCTION (BLOCKED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION)

This type of protection can be applied to radial feeder circuits where there is little or no back
feed. For parallel feeders, ring circuits or where there can be a back feed from generators,
directional relays should be considered.
The blocking logic function allows the upstream IDMT relay to be blocked by the start output
of a downstream relay that has detected the presence of fault current above its threshold.
Thus both upstream and downstream relays can have the same current and time settings,
and the blocking feature will automatically provide grading. If the breaker fail protection is
active, the blocking order on the upstream relay will be removed if the down-stream circuit
breaker fails to trip.
Thus for a fault downstream from relay C, the start output from relay C will prevent relay B
from operating and the start output of relay B will prevent relay A from operating. Thus all 3
relays could have the same time and current threshold settings and the grading would be
obtained by the blocking signal received from a relay closer to the fault. This gives a
constant, close time grading, but there will be no back-up protection in the event of pilots
being short circuited.
However, in practice it is recommended to set the upstream relay to a value that is 10%
higher than the downstream relay setting. This ensures that the downstream relay
successfully blocks the upstream relay when required.

P0024ENa

FIGURE 3 : BLOCKING LOGIC

To assign the "Blocking Logic" functions, go under the AUTOMAT CTRL/Blocking Logic
menu.
MiCOM P120 & P121 relays have only one blocking logic function.
MiCOM P122 & P123 relays have two blocking functions, which can be used to block the
Earth and Phase thresholds.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 16/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

6. RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT

MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 provide Restricted Earth Fault protection. It should be
noted that:
The algorithms implemented in P120 and P121 for the first and second thresholds ( I> , I0>
and I>>, I0>>) are similar to the ones implemented in the P122 and P123 for the same
thresholds. However the algorithm of the third threshold (I>>> and I0>>>) of P120 and P121
is different to the one of P122 and P123.
In fact, the algorithm of the third threshold of the P122 and P123 is based on a current
sample base in addition to the Fast Fourier Transformation base. This implementation allows
to trip faster on highly saturated current signals. The third threshold of P120 and P121- as it
is for the first and second threshold of P120, P121, P122 and P123 products - is based on
the Fourier transformation;
This explains the outstanding results obtained by the third threshold of P122 and P123
compared to the other thresholds regarding the high impedance restricted earth fault
application. So for :

• P122 and P123 : The user can use all the thresholds for REF application. Note that
the results of the third threshold will be greater due to the fact that a sample base
algorithm is used.

• P120 and P121 : The user can use all the threshold for REF application. The results of
the third threshold will be similar to one of the first and second threshold (since all the
thresholds are based on Fast Fourier Transformation).
NOTE: For P122 and P123, the maximum internal fault level for the third
threshold (for the 0.002 to 1In range) must not exceed 20In.
6.1 Introduction
The restricted earth fault relay is a high impedance differential scheme which balances zero
sequence current flowing in the transformer neutral against zero sequence current flowing in
the transformer phase windings. Any unbalance for in-zone fault will result in an increasing
voltage on the CT secondary and thus will activate the REF protection.
This scheme is very sensitive and can then protect against low levels of fault current in
resistance grounded systems where the earthing impedance and the fault voltage limit the
fault current.
In addition, this scheme can be used in a solidly grounded system. It provides a more
sensitive protection, even though the overall differential scheme provides a protection for
faults over most of the windings.
The high impedance differential technique ensures that the impedance of the circuit is of
sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under external
fault conditions is lower than the voltage required to drive setting current through the relay.
This ensures stability against external fault conditions and then the relay will operate only for
faults occurring inside the protected zone.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/76

6.2 High impedance principle

High impedance schemes are used in a differential configuration where one current
transformer is completely saturated and the other CTs are healthy.

Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected
circuit
Zm Zm A-G

RCT1 RCT2

IF
R L1 R L3
VS R ST

R L2 R R L4

FIGURE 4 : HIGH IMPEDANCE SCHEME PRINCIPLE

The voltage applied across the relay is:

Vr=If (RCT + 2RL)

If : Maximum secondary external fault current.

RCT : Resistance of the Current transformer secondary winding.
RL : Resistance of a single wire from the relay to the CT.
A stabilizing resistor R ST can be used in series with the relay circuit in order to improve the
stability of the relay under external fault conditions. This resistor will limit the spill current
under Is.
Vs=Is (RST)
Is : Current relay setting
Vs : Stability Voltage setting
Note that the relay consumption has been taken into account.
The general stability conditions can be obtained when:
Vs> K.If (RCT + 2RL)

Where K is the stability factor.

This stability factor is influenced by the ratio Vk/Vs which in turns governs the stability of the
REF protection element for through faults .
Vk = The Knee point voltage of the CT.
To obtain a high speed operation for internal faults, the Knee point voltage Vk of the CT must
be significantly higher than the stability voltage Vs . A ratio of 4 or 5 would be appropriate.
For MiCOM P121, P122 and P123, we found the following results:
K= 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 and
K= 1.2 for Vk/Vs > 16.
NOTE: The maximum internal fault level for stage 3 of 0.002 to 1In board
must not exceed 20In.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 18/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

C
STAB
E/F Input

P0343ENa

FIGURE 5 : CT CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR HIGH IMPEDANCE REF APPLICATION

6.3 Setting guide
The characteristics of the relay and the value of K influence the stability of the scheme as
explained here above.
The typical setting values shall be chosen to provide a primary operating current less than 30
% of the minimum earth fault level for a resistance earthed system. For a solidly earthed
system, the typical setting shall provide an operating current between 10 and 60% of the
rated current.
The primary operating current, at the secondary, depends on the following factors:

− Current Transformer ratio

− Relay operating current IS

− Number of CT in parallel with the relay element (n)

− The inrush current of each CT (Ie) at the stability voltage

Iop= CTRatio .(Is + n.Ie)

Current setting should be selected for a high impedance element so that the primary current
reaches its nominal current with a given CT, according to the following equation:
Is < {(Iop / CTRatio) - n.Ie}

It is also possible to determine the maximum inrush current of the CT to reach a specific
primary operating current with a given relay setting.
The setting of the stabilising resistor must be calculated according to the above formula,
where the setting depends on the required stability voltage setting Vs and the relay setting Is

Vs k If (RCT+2RL)
=
Is IS

For MiCOM P12x, Is is equivalent to Ie>, so the above equation becomes:

Vs k If (RCT+2RL)
=
Ie> Ie>

with
K= 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 and
K= 1.2 for Vk/Vs > 16.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 19/76

So
k If (RCT+2RL)
RST =
Ie>

with Vk ќ 4.Is.RST (A typical value to ensure the high speed operation for an internal fault).
6.3.1 CT requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection
The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall remain stable for through faults
and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided that the following equations are
met in determining CT requirements and the value of the associated stabilising resistor:
Rs = [k* (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS

VK ≥ 4 * Is * Rs
with
K= 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 and
K= 1.2 for Vk/Vs > 16.
6.4 Use of METROSIL non linear resistors
Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under
internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers,
relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand 3KV peak.
The following formula should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that could be
induced by an internal fault. This peak voltage depends on:

− CT Knee point (VK)

− Voltage that would be induced by an internal fault if CT doesn’t saturate (Vf)

This prospective voltage itself depends on:

− Maximum internal fault secondary current

− CT ratio

− CT secondary winding resistance

− CT lead resistance to the common point

− Relay lead resistance

− Stability resistor value

Vp = 2√ {2.VK (Vf - Vk)}

Vf = I'f.(Rct + 2RL + RST)

P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 20/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Where

− Vp : peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions

− Vf : maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur

− Vk : current transformer Knee point voltage

− I’f : is the maximum internal secondary fault current

− Rct : current transformer secondary winding transformer

− RL : maximum lead burden from CT to relay

− RST : Relay stabilising resistor.

When the value given by the formula is greater than 3KV peak, it is necessary to use
Metrosils. They are connected across the relay circuit and they allow to shunt the secondary
current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very high
secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and have annular discs shape.
Their operating characteristics is according to the formula:

V = C.I0.25
Where

− V : Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)

− C : Constant of the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)

− I : Instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)

With the sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil, the RMS current would be
approximately 0.25 times the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows:
4
Vs(rms). 2 
Irms = 0.52 
 C 
Where

− Vs(rms) : RMS value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the Metrosil is not sinusoidal but
appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of the non-linear resistor (Metrosil), its characteristics should
comply with the following requirements:

− At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) current should be as
low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms for 1A current
transformers and approximately 100mA rms for 5A current transformer.

− At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay voltage
settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, so higher
fault voltage may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical types of Metrosil that will be required, depending on
relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 21/76

6.4.1 Metrosil units for relays with 1A CT

The Metrosil units with 1A CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions:

− At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 30mA rms.

− At the maximum secondary internal fault current, the Metrosil unit should limit the
voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended to be used with 1Amp CTs are shown in the
following table:

Relay Voltage Nominal Characteristics Recommended Metrosil Type

setting C β Single pole Relay Triple pole relay
Up to 125V rms 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195

NOTE: Single pole Relay Metrosil Units are normally supplied without
mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer.
6.4.2 Metrosil units for relays with 5A CT
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:

− At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100mA rms (the
actual maximum currents passed by the units shown below their type description)

− At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the
voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25 second. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to
limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, hence higher voltage have to be tolerated
( indicated by * ,** , *** ).
The Metrosil units normally recommended for the used with 5 Amps CTs and single pole
relays are shown in the following table:

Secondary Recommended Metrosil Type

Internal fault
current Relay Voltage Setting

Amps rms Up to 200V rms 250V rms 275V rms 300V rms
600A/S1/S1213 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1223
50A C= 540/640 C= 670/800 C= 670/800 C= 740/870*
35mA rms 40mA rms 50mA rms 50mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1217 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1196
100A C= 470/540 C= 570/670 C= 570/670 C= 620/740*
35mA rms 75mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1219 600A/S3/P/S1220 600A/S3/P/S1221 600A/S3/P/S1222
150A C= 430/500 C= 520/620 C= 570/670** C= 620/740***
100mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rms

NOTE: * 2400V peak

** 2200V peak
*** 2600V peak
In some cases, single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact
AREVA T&D for detailed information.
The Metrosil units used with 5 Amps CTs can also be used with triple
pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the
same central stud but electrically insulated from each other. To order
these units please specify “Triple pole Metrosil type”, followed by the
single pole type reference.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 22/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

7. RECTIFIER PROTECTION
Rectifiers require a specific inverse time protection curve.
Protecting a rectifier is different from protecting conventional overcurrent applications. In fact,
a large number of rectifiers can withstand relatively long periods of overcharge without being
damaged. To give an idea, they can generally withstand 150 % of the load for 2 hours and
300 % for 1 minute.
A typical application is shown on the diagram below.

A +
B
C -
A B C N
Rs
Transformer Rectifier
Protection P0025ENa

FIGURE 6 : PROTECTION FOR SILICON RECTIFIERS

10000

Typical thermal limit

for silicon rectifier
1000

Protection curve

100 Instantaneous
Time (seconds)

overcurrent

10

Typical
1 load area

0.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Multiple of rated current P0026ENa

FIGURE 7 : MATCHING CURVE TO LOAD AND THERMAL LIMIT OF RECTIFIER

Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 23/76

The current threshold I> should be set to the rated rms value of the current that flows into the
transformer when the rectifier is delivering its rated load. The relay will give a start indication
when the current exceeds this setting but this is of no consequence because this function is
not used in this application. The rectifier curve should be an inverse time curve and should
cut-off currents below 1.6 times allowing the rectifier to carry 150% overload for long periods.
If this is not acceptable, the I> setting can be adjusted to move the cut-off point relative to
the current scale. The operation time can be modified by adjusting the time multiplier setting
(TMS) so that the time lies between limiting characteristic of the rectifier and the tolerated
load area.
Typical settings for the TMS area :
Light industrial service TMS = 0.025
Medium duty service TMS = 0.1
Heavy duty traction TMS = 0.8
The high set is typically set at 8 times the rated current as this ensures HV AC protection will
discriminate with faults covered by the LV protection. However, the high set could be set to 4
or 5 times the rated current if the AC protection is not trustworthy.
Use of the thermal element to provide protection between 70% and 160% of rated current
could enhance the protection. It is also common practice to provide restricted earth fault
protection for the transformer feeding the rectifier. Refer to the corresponding section dealing
with restricted earth fault protection.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 24/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

8. BACK-UP DIAGRAM USING « TRANSFERRED SELECTIVE TRIPPING »

In this application, the relay protecting the incomer can trip the circuit breaker of the faulty
feeder via the watchdog contact of the relay protecting the faulty feeder.
Figure 8 illustrates this example :

Incomer

tI>> P121 tI>>>

CB
50/51
CT

P121 Trip P121 Trip

& &
WD WD
>= 1 CB1 >= 1 CB n
50/51 50/51
CT CT

Feeder 1 Feeder n

P0027ENa

FIGURE 8 : EXAMPLE OF A BACK-UP DIAGRAM USING " TRANSFERRED SELECTIVE TRIP"

Thus, a fault occurring on a feeder can be cleared tripping the circuit breaker of the faulty
feeder, even if the relay protecting this feeder failed to operate. Without this function, the
fault would normally be cleared by the opening of the circuit breaker of the incomer. This
would lead to a total loss of operation on the affected busbar.
The relay protecting the incomer has two time delay output contacts available (among
others):

− 3rd threshold: tI>>> time delay at 60ms (active threshold for the high phase faults)

− 2nd threshold: tI>> time delay selectively greater than for the third threshold, i.e.
360ms.
The output contact associated with the 2nd threshold is wired in serie with the watchdog
contact of the downstream relays, so that it can activate the trip coil of the circuit breakers of
the feeders. Regarding the output contact associated with the 2nd and 3rd threshold, this
contact is directly wired to the trip coil of the incomer circuit breaker.

Case n°1 → all relays operate normally :

In this case, watchdog contacts of all the relays are open.
Thus, for a phase fault on the busbar, threshold tI>> or tI>>> of the P121 located on the
incomer will clear the fault.
For a phase fault on one of the feeder, the thresholds tI>> and tI>>> of the relay located on
the incomer being selectively set to higher values than the ones set for the phase thresholds
of downstream relays, the fault shall be cleared selectively by the relay of the faulty feeder
(selectivity between the relay of the incomer and relays of the feeders is ensured thanks to
intervals of selectivity correctly chosen, or thanks to a suitable blocking diagram).
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/76

Case n°2 → the relay supervising one of the feeders is faulty :

In this case, the watchdog contact of this relay is closed.
Thus, for a phase fault on the busbar, thresholds tI>> and tI>>> activate their associated
output contact. However, threshold tI>> will clear the fault as this threshold has been set to a
lower value than the threshold tI>>>.
For a phase fault on one of the ‘healthy’ feeders, thresholds tI>> and tI>>> of the relay
located on the incomer being selectively set to higher values than the ones set for the phase
thresholds of the downstream relays, the fault shall be cleared selectively by the relay of the
faulty feeder (selectivity between the relay of the incomer and relays of the feeders is
ensured thanks to intervals of selectivity correctly chosen or thanks to a suitable blocking
diagram).
For a phase fault on the feeder of the failed relay, the threshold tI>> of the relay located on
the incomer operates via the watchdog contact of the faulty relay on the trip coil of the circuit
breaker of the faulty feeder. This threshold being selectively set to a value lower than the
threshold tI>>> (which operates directly on the coil of the incomer circuit breaker ), the fault
is therefore selectively cleared.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 26/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

9. REMOTE PROTECTION STAND-BY DIAGRAM

MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 relays can be used as a HV distance back-up protection
(Figure 9). Depending on the type of selectivity required, 51/51N function of P121, P122 and
P123 needs to be set either as time constant or as time dependent. The value of the time
delay of I>/Ie> is set to a value that is compatible with thresholds Z2 or Z3 (2nd and 3rd
distance protection zone).

Busbar

Distance protection
Circuit Breaker
21

P 121
50/51

Feeder P0028ENa

FIGURE 9 : ASSISTANCE OF REMOTE PROTECTION BY A MiCOM P121 PROTECTION

The «Equipment default » contact of the distance protection (case of a numerical protection)
can be wired to a MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 relays to optimise the time to trip.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/76

10. 1 ½ BREAKER SCHEME

For HV/EHV stations with a 1 ½ circuit breaker scheme (Figure 10), the zone between the
two circuit breakers and the switch section needs to be protected with a standard ANSI 50
protection.
The time to trip is an essential criteria to be considered when choosing this protection.
MiCOM P121, P122 or P123 relays are perfectly suited for this application. The time delay of
the first threshold (tI>) is set to a low value (typically 100 ms above the circuit breaker failure
time). This will allow the relay to be blocked by the close contact of the associated switch.

Busbar

Circuit
Breaker

Circuit Breaker
CT
P121
50/51
CT
Circuit
Breaker

Busbar
Contactor

Feeder
P0029ENa

FIGURE 10 : 1 ½ BREAKER SCHEME

P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 28/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

11. THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY)

Thermal overload protection can be applied to prevent damages to the equipment of the
electrical plant when operating at temperatures that are above the values designed for
maximum withstand. A prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in
premature deterioration of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure.
MiCOM P122 & P123 relays incorporate a current based thermal replica, using load current
to reproduce the heating and cooling of the equipment to be protected. The element thermal
overload protection can be set with both alarm and trip stages.
The heating within any plant equipment, such as cables or transformers, is of resistive type
(I²R x t). Thus, the quantity of heat generated is directly proportional to the current squared
(I²). The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is based on current squared, integrated
over time.
MiCOM P122 & P123 relays automatically use the highest phase current as input information
for the thermal model.
Protection equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to
its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc.
Over-temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to
flow for a certain period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow
exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during
cooling.
In order to apply this protection element, the thermal time constant (Te) of the plant
equipment to be protected is therefore required.
The following sections will show that different plant equipment possesses different thermal
characteristics, due to the nature of their construction.
11.1 Time Constant Characteristic
This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type AN), and
capacitor banks.
The thermal time characteristic is given by:

 −t 
 
e τ  =
(I 2
− (k × I FLC )2 )
(I 2
− I 2p )
Where:
t = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I
τ = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant equipment
I = Largest phase current
IFLC = Full load current rating (relay setting ‘Thermal Trip’)
k = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC
IP = Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the
overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from “hot” or “cold”.
Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are presented in the chapter
P12x/EN TD/C55 of the Technical Guide.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 29/76

Mathematical formula applicable to the MiCOM Relays :

The calculation of the Time to Trip is given by :

 K 2 − θ2 
Ttrip = Te In  2 

 K − θtrip²
 

With :
Ttrip = Time to trip (in seconds)
Te = Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds)

K = Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k Iθ >

Ieq = Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase
current.

Iθ > = Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier.
k = Factor associated to the thermal state formula.

θ2 = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then θ2 = 0.3

θtrip2 = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%,
then θ trip2 = 1
The settings of these parameters are available in the menus :
PROTECTION G1/ [49] Therm OL
PROTECTION G2/ [49] Therm OL
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula :

2  −t  
 
 −t 
 
 I eq  1 − e  Te   + Θ e  Te 
Θ τ +1 =  
   τ
 k × IΘ >   

θ being calculated every 20ms.

P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 30/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

11.2 Setting Guidelines

The current setting is calculated as:

Thermal Trip (θtrip) = Permissible continuous loading of the plant equipment / CT ratio.
Typical time constant values are given in the following tables. The ‘Time Constant’
parameter is given in minutes.
Paper insulated lead sheathed cables or polyethylene insulated cables are placed above the
ground or in conduits. The table shows τ in minutes, for different cable rated voltages and
conductor cross-sectional areas:

CSA mm2 6 -11 kV 22 kV 33 kV 66 kV

25 - 50 10 15 40 -
70 - 120 15 25 40 60
150 25 40 40 60
185 25 40 60 60
240 40 40 60 60
300 40 60 60 90
Time constant τ (minutes)

Other plant items:

Time constant τ (minutes) Limits

Dry-type transformers 40 Rating < 400 kVA
60 - 90 Rating 400 - 800 kVA
Air-core reactors 40
Capacitor banks 10
Overhead lines 10 Cross section ≥ 100 mm2 Cu
or 150mm² Al
Busbars 60

An alarm can be raised when reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the
trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Trip’ = 70% of thermal capacity.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 31/76

12. COLD LOAD PICK-UP (P122 & P123 ONLY)

The Cold Load Pick-up feature allows selected settings of MiCOM P122 and P123 relays to
be changed to react to temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts.
This condition may happen by switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling
period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents.
When a feeder is energised, the current levels that flow for a period of time following
energising may differ greatly from the normal load levels. Consequently, overcurrent settings
that have been applied to give short circuit protection may not be suitable during this period.
The Cold Load Pick-up (CLP) logic included in MiCOM P122 & P123 relays raises the
settings of selected stages for a set duration. This allows the protection settings to be set
closer to the load profile by automatically increasing them after energising. The CLP logic
provides stability, without compromising protection performance during starting. Note that
any of the disabled overcurrent stages in the main relay menu will not appear in the Cold
Load PU Menu.
The following table shows the relay menu associated to the ‘Cold Load Pick-up ’ logic, and
the setting ranges and setting by default (out of factory).

MENU TEXT SETTING RANGE STEP SIZE

AUTOMAT. CTRL MIN MAX
Cold Load PU NO YES
tI> NO YES
tI>> NO YES
tI>>> NO YES
tIe> NO YES
tIe>> NO YES
tIe>>> NO YES
t Therm NO YES
tI2> NO YES
tI2>> NO YES
level 20 % 500 % 1%
tCL 100 ms 3 600 s 100 ms

The timer tCL in the CLP menu controls the time for which the relevant protections elements
in CLP menu (%) are altered following an external input signal (e.g. circuit breaker closure.
When the set tCL time has elapsed, all relevant settings revert back to their original values
or are unblocked.
tCL is initiated thanks to a dedicated logic input signal (refer to AUTOMAT. CTRL/INPUTS
menu), that is generated by connecting an auxiliary contact from the circuit breaker (52a or
52b) or starting device to the logic relevant inputs of the relay.
The following sections describe applications where the CLP logic may be useful and the
settings that need to be applied.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 32/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

12.1 Air Conditioning/Resistive Heating Loads

Where a feeder is used to supply air conditioning or resistive heating loads there may be a
conflict between the "steady state" overcurrent settings and those required following
energizing. This is due to the temporary increase in load current that may arise during
starting.
With the Cold Load Pick-up function enabled, the affected thresholds are selected to be
adjusted for the required time to allow the start condition to subside. A percentage value is
selected as the amount by which the selected threshold is increased or decreased.
The time for which the adjusted thresholds are valid is defined by the tCL setting. After this
time, the settings return to normal.
It may not be necessary to alter the protection settings following a short supply interruption.
In this case the CLP function is not activated.
12.2 Motor Feeders
In general, a dedicated motor protection device, such as MiCOM P220, P225 or P241 relays
should protect feeders supplying motor loads. However, if no specific protection has been
applied (possibly due to economic reasons) then the CLP function in the MiCOM P122 or
P123 relay may be used to modify the overcurrent settings accordingly during starting.
Depending upon the magnitude and duration of the motor starting current, it may be
sufficient to simply block operation of instantaneous elements or, if the start duration is long,
the time delayed protection settings may also need to be raised. Hence, a combination of
both blocking and raising of settings of the relevant overcurrent stages may be adopted. The
CLP overcurrent settings in this case must be chosen with regard to the motor starting
characteristic.
As previously described, the CLP logic includes the option of raising the settings of the first
stage of the earth fault protection. This may be useful where instantaneous earth fault
protection is required to be applied to the motor. During conditions of motor starting, it is
likely that incorrect operation of the earth fault element would occur due to asymmetric CT
saturation. This is a result of the high level of starting current causing saturation of one or
more of the line CTs feeding the overcurrent and/or earth fault protection. The resultant
transient imbalance in the secondary line current quantities is thus detected by the residually
connected earth fault element. For this reason, it is normal to either apply a nominal time
delay to the element, or to utilise a series stabilising resistor.
The CLP logic may be used to allow reduced operating times or current settings to be
applied to the earth fault element under normal running conditions. These settings could then
be raised prior to motor starting, via the logic.
12.3 Earth Fault Protection applied to Transformers
Where an earth fault relay is residually connected on the primary side of a delta-star
transformer, no time delay is required for co-ordination purposes, due to the presence of the
delta winding. However, a nominal time delay or stabilising resistor is recommended, to
ensure transient stability during transformer energising.
The CLP logic may be used in a similar manner to that previously described for the motor
application.
It should be noted that this method will not provide stability in the event of asymmetric CT
saturation which occurs as a result of an unbalanced fault condition. If problems of this
nature are encountered, the best solution would still be the use of a stabilising resistor.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 33/76

13. SWITCH ONTO FAULT / TRIP ON RECLOSE PROTECTION (P123 ONLY)

13.1 General
In some feeder applications, fast tripping may be required if a fault is still present on the
feeder after the reclose of the circuit breaker (Close on to fault).
Some faults may not be cleared after a reclose due to the fact that the conditions that led to
the fault have not been removed from the feeder after a reclosing cycle or a manual trip, or
due to earthing clamps left on after a maintenance visit. In these cases, it may be desirable
to clear the fault condition in a quicker time, rather than to wait for the trip delay time DMT or
IDMT associated with the involved protection to elapse.
In the case of a CB being manually closed, a switch on to an existing fault may occur. This
situation is particularly critical because the overcurrent protection would not clear the fault
until the set time delay has elapsed. It is then desirable to clear the fault as fast as possible.
The SOTF acronym means Switch On To Fault.
The TOR acronym means Trip on Recloser.
Activation and setting of the SOTF/TOR function can be done under the AUTOMATIC
CTRL/SOTF submenu.
The crossing of I>> and I>>> thresholds initiate the SOTF function.
13.2 SOTF/ TOR description
Three types of signals can activate the SOTF/TOR function:
- a “Control Close” command generated by a digital input labelled “Man. Close”
- a command sent remotely and labelled “Control Close”
- a digital output labelled “AR Close”
The following diagram illustrates this functionality.

SOTF/TOR
tI >
tI >> >
tI >>>

I>> Trip
Enable SOTF/TOR of
I>> >
AR close &
MAN close > t
0 t
TC close > 0
500 ms
Settable delay time
from 0 to 500ms
I>>> in steps of 0.001 ms
Enable SOTF/TOR of
I>>>
AR close &
MAN close > t
0
TC close 500 ms
P0572ENa

FIGURE 11 : LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE SOTF

When at least one of these 3 signals have been detected, a fixed timer starts and lasts
500ms.
Once this fixed timer has elapsed and I>> or I>>> thresholds have been crossed, the
configurable timer named “t Sotf” starts. This configurable timer is particularly useful in
applications where selectivity for fault occurring in stage two or three is requested.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 34/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

This timer is also useful for cases where serious transient happen, where the three poles of
the CB do not close at the same time and in cases where the CB may not instantaneously
close.
This “t SOFT” can also be considered a trip delay time that substitutes the trip timer of the
threshold that has been crossed so that the time to trip is accelerated.
If a trip due to switch on to fault occurs during the reclaim time of the ARC, the trip will be
definitive and the ARC will be locked.
If the I>> and I>>> reset during the settable timer “t Sotf”, the SOTF/TOR function is reset.

The user can set the SOTF function under the AUTOMATIC CTRL/TRIP COMMAND
submenu and the AUTOMATIC CTRL/Output relays submenu.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 35/76

14. LOCAL / REMOTE MODE (P123 ONLY)

14.1 General
The goal of this feature is to be able to block commands sent remotely. This is done to
prevent any accidents or maloperation during maintenance work performed on site.
A digital input labelled “LOCAL MODE” is assigned to this feature. When this input is
energised, remote commands sent through communication networks (like setting
parameters, control command, etc.) will not be allowed. Nonetheless, note that even in Local
mode the synchronising time signal sent through the communication network is allowed as
this signal can’t cause operation of the output relays and can’t lead to the operation of the
circuit breaker.
When the logic input is not energised, writing commands sent remotely will be authorised.
All communication protocols available in the P123 have this feature implemented.
Along with this feature, a differentiation had to be made between a trip issued by the
protection elements and a trip issued remotely, as well as between the close command
issued remotely and the close command issued by the Auto-reclose function.
Indeed, “Control trip” (named “CTRL TRIP” in the relay menu) and “Control close” (named
“CTRL CLOSE” in the relay menu) are named this way to signify that a trip command has
been issued remotely.
“Autoreclose close” (named “CB Close” in the relay menu) command is named this way to
signify that the close command is issued by the autoreclose function.
“Protection trip” (named “TRIP” in the relay menu) means that the trip command has been
issued by the protection elements (time delay threshold crossing).
This is done to identify if the trip order has been issued by a remote command, by the
crossing of a time delay threshold or by the activation of the autoreclose function.
Commands sent remotely (CTRL TRIP and CTRL CLOSE) as well as commands sent by the
autoreclose function (CB Close) can be set to activate their own dedicated output relay (and
not necessarily the same output relay as the protection trip output RL1).
The trip order is issued if the protection trip (named “TRIP” in the relay menu) or a remote
control trip (named “CTRL TRIP”) is sent (OR gate).
The close order is issued if the Auto-reclose close command (named “CB CLOSE” in the
relay menu) or the control close command (named “CTRL CLOSE”) is sent (OR gate).
14.2 Setting
In the AUTOMATIC CTRL/TRIP COMMAND menu, TC item uses the “CTRL TRIP” function
to open the CB.
In the AUTOMATIC CTRL/Output relays menu, the “CTRL TRIP” and “CTRL CLOSE”
functions are assigned to remotely open and close the CB.
The “CB CLOSE” relay is assigned to close the CB by Autoreclose (ARC).
In order to keep the functionality of previous firmware versions, the user will have to assign
both “TRIP” and “CTRL TRIP” information to relay RL1, and to assign both “CTRL CLOSE”
and “CB CLOSE” information to the same auxiliary relay.

Here is an example of application.

In the following scheme, the user may assign the different signals to different relays: “TRIP”
signal may be assigned to the trip relay RL1, the “CTRL TRIP” signal to the auxiliary relay
number 2, the “CB CLOSE” signal to the auxiliary relay number 3 and the “CTRL CLOSE” to
the auxiliary relay number 4.
When the “Local” input is energised, all remote commands are blocked. When the “Local”
input is de-energised, remote control commands can be issued.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 36/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

DC V+ REMOTE: 1,2 closed; 7,8 closed; 3,4 open; 5,6 open

LOCAL: 3,4 closed; 5,6 closed; 1,2 open; 7,8 open
P123
Switch
REMOTE/LOCAL
RL 1
Control trip 1 2

Local trip
3 4

Local close 5 6
RL 3
7 8
Control close

RL 2
AR close

RL TRIP
Protection trip
P0573ENb

FIGURE 12 : EXAMPLE OF LOCAL/REMOTE APPLICATION

Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 37/76

15. AUXILIARY TIMERS (P122 & P123 ONLY)

Four auxiliary timers tAux1, tAux2, tAux3 and tAux4 (P123 only) are available and
associated to Aux1, Aux2, Aux3 and Aux4 logic inputs (refer to AUTOMAT. CRTL/INPUTS
menu). When these inputs are energised, the associated timers start and, when the set time
has elapsed, the associated output relays close (refer to AUTOMAT. CRTL/OUTPUTS
menu). Time delays can be independently set from 0 ms to 200 s.
NOTE : It is possible to allocate logic inputs of the MiCOM P120 & P121 to the
external information Aux1 and Aux2. Therefore, these inputs cannot
command output relays. Moreover, the tAux1 and tAux2 timers are
fixed and equal to 0. Thus the Aux1 and Aux2 inputs can only be used
for indication on the communication network.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 38/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

16. SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY)

MiCOM P122 and P123 relays have two setting groups associated to the protection
functions named PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2. Only one group is active.
Switching between the groups can be done via:

− the relay front panel interface (CONFIGURATION/GROUP SELECT/ SETTING

GROUP 1 or 2),

− a dedicated logic input (AUTOMAT. CTRL/INPUT X/CHANGE SET) where X is

the chosen logic input,

− through the communications port (refer to Mapping Database for detailed

information).

To avoid any false trip, the change of setting group is only carried out when no protection
function is running (except the thermal overload function).
If a setting group change is received during any protection or automation function, it is stored
and executed after the last timer has elapsed.
The user can check which one of the active group is active looking under the OP
PARAMETERS menu.
The user can also assign the active group to an output relay. Using a normally open contact,
this means that:

− an open contact will indicate that the active group is Group 1

− a close contact will indicate that the active group is Group 2

Change of setting group done by a digital input
It is possible to change the setting group via the activation of a digital input (on level).
The user can select an activation of the input on falling edge or low level (idem for rising
edge or high level) going under the CONFIGURATION/Group Select/Change Group/Input
menu.
Warning: if the digital input that has been assigned to the change of setting group operates
on level (low or high), it is not possible to change the setting group via remote
communication or front panel.
SWITCH BETWEEN ACTIVE GROUPS :
When powering on the relay, the group selected (Group 1 or Group 2) corresponds to the
state of the logic input. This means:
A - With a Logic input configuration = 0
Group 1 = logic Input is not active
Group 2 = logic Input is active
If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1.
If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V , then the active group will be G2.
B - With a Logic input configuration = 1
Group 1 = logic Input is not active
Group 2 = logic Input is active
If the set logic input is energized with +V, then the active group will be G2.
If the set logic input is not energized with +V, then the active group will be G1.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 39/76

Priority
When changing parameters through the front panel, the priority is given to the user that
takes local control of the relay when entering a password. Change of setting group done via
a remote command is not allowed for as long as the password is active (5mn).

ORIGIN OF THE ORDER PRIORITY LEVEL

FRONT PANEL MAXIMUM
LOGIC INPUT MEDIUM
REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS MINIMUM
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 40/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

17. MAINTENANCE MODE

This menu allows the user to verify the operation of the protection functions without actually
sending any external command (Tripping or signalling).
The selection of the maintenance mode is possible by logic input, control command (rear or
front port), or by front panel interface. The end of maintenance mode is done by logic input,
by control command or on the front panel interface time out (5 minutes) and by turning off
the power supply.

Maintenance Mode
YES

When this menu is activated (set to YES), the Alarm led will start to flash and the alarm
message “MAINTENANCE MODE” will be displayed. In this case, all the output contacts are
blocked, and no command can be issued to these contacts, even if a protection threshold
associated to one of these output contacts has been crossed.
(If a protection threshold is crossed, all associated LEDs will be ON, even the TRIP LED, if
the threshold is associated to the RL1).

RELAYS 8765W4321
CMD 000000000

This window allows the user to verify the external wiring to the relay output contacts. To do
this, the user just has to assign a 1 to any of the output contacts, and this will close the
contact and the continuity of the wiring can be verified.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 41/76

18. SELECTIVE SCHEME LOGIC (P122 & P123 ONLY)

The following figure describes the use of non-cascade protection schemes using the start
contacts from downstream relays to block operation of upstream relays.
In the case of Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL), the start contacts are used to increase the
time delays of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative
approach to achieving a non-cascade type of overcurrent scheme. It may be more familiar to
some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement.

P0024ENa

FIGURE 13 : TYPICAL SCHEME LOGIC

The SOL function temporarily increase the time delay settings of the second and third stages
of phase overcurrent, derived and measured earth fault and sensitive earth fault protection
elements. This logic is initiated by energising the appropriate logic input (Log Sel1 or Log
Sel2) as selected in AUTOMAT.CRTL/INPUTS menu.
To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of the second
and third stages should include a nominal delay. Guidelines for minimum time settings are
identical to those given for blocked overcurrent schemes.
The tSel1 and tSel2 timers can be independently set from 0 to 150 s.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 42/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

19. NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (P122 & P123

ONLY)
In traditional phase overcurrent protection schemes, overcurrent thresholds must be set
above maximum load current levels. This limits the sensibility of the relay. Most protection
schemes also use an earth fault element using residual current, which improves sensitivity
for earth faults. However, it can happen that some faults occur and stay undetected by such
schemes.
Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current. Thus, a negative
phase sequence overcurrent element can detect both phase-to-phase and phase to earth
faults.
This section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied
in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to solve some
problems of application.

• Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements is more sensitive to resistive phase-

to-phase faults, whereas phase overcurrent elements may not operate.

• In some applications, an earth fault relay may not be able to detect a residual current
because of the configuration of the network. For example, an earth fault relay
connected on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults
on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of
the transformer in any fault condition, independently of the transformer configuration.
Therefore, negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be used to provide
time-delayed back-up protection for any uncleared asymmetrical faults.

• Where fuses are used to protect motors on rotating machines, a blown fuse produces
a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the
machine because negative phase sequence current generates overheating. Then, a
negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be used to back-up motor
protection relays.

• It may also be required to trigger an alarm to announce the presence of negative

phase sequence currents in the system. Operators are then prompted to investigate
the cause of the unbalance.
The negative phase sequence overcurrent elements have a current pick up settings I2> and
I2>>, and can be time-delayed using configurable timers tI2> and tI2>>.
19.1 I2> and I2>> Setting Guidelines
I2> and I2>> thresholds can be set under the PROTECTION G1 (2)/[46] Neg Seg 0C menu.
The current pick-up threshold I2> must be set to a value that is higher than the normal
negative phase sequence current because of the normal unbalance conditions on the
network. This can be done practically during the commissioning, using the
MEASUREMENTS menu of the relay to display the negative phase sequence current value.
Then, this value has to be increased by 20%.
Where negative phase sequence element is used to clear particular cases of uncleared
asymmetric faults, the threshold setting have to be calculated based on a fault analysis of
that particular system, due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure that the
protection element will operate, the current pick-up value has to be set to approximately 20%
below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current for a specific remote
fault.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 43/76

It is essential to set correctly the time delay associated to this function. It should also be
noted that this element is used primarily as a back-up protection to other protective devices
or to provide an alarm. Therefore, this function is usually set with a long time delay.
Care must be made to ensure that the time delay is set above the operating time of any
other protection device (at minimum fault level) present on the system and that may react to
unbalanced faults, such as:

• Phase overcurrent elements

• Earth fault elements

• Broken conductor elements

• Negative phase sequence influenced thermal protection elements

tI2> and tI2>> timers associated to I2 threshold can be set under the menu PROTECTION
G1(2)/[46] Neg Seg OC.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 44/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

20. BROKEN CONDUCTOR DETECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY)

Most of the faults that affect a power system occur between one phase and the earth or
between two phases and the earth. These faults are shunt faults and are caused by
lightning discharges and other overvoltages generating flashovers. They may also arise from
birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage on underground cables, etc.
Such faults lead the current to increase appreciably and therefore they can easily be
detected in most applications. Open circuit faults are a different type of faults that can
happen in electrical networks. These faults can be caused by broken conductors, blown
fuses or misoperation of a pole of a circuit-breaker.
Series faults will not lead to an increase in phase current and therefore they can not be
easily detected by common overcurrent relays. However, this type of faults produce an
unbalance that creates negative phase sequence current, which can be detected.
The use of negative phase sequence overcurrent is then recommended to detect such faulty
conditions. However, on lightly loaded lines, the value of the negative sequence current
caused by a faulty condition may be very close to, or even inferior, to the full load steady
state unbalance generated by CT errors, load unbalance, etc. As a consequence, a negative
sequence protection element would not work for low level of loads.
As a solution, MiCOM P122 and P123 have a protection element that measures the ratio
between the negative and the positive phase sequence current (I2/I1). Using this ratio
instead of the measure of I2 only, the relay will be able to detect a faulty condition
independently on the level of load on the network, since the ratio is approximately constant
with variations in load current. It is then possible to get a more sensitive setting.
NOTE: the Broken conductor function is inhibited if the current value flowing
in each one of the three phases is inferior to 10% of the nominal
current.
Setting Guidelines
On single point earthed power systems, there is a low zero sequence current flow and the
ratio I2/I1 that flows is close to100%. On multiple earthed power systems, (assuming that the
impedances in each sequence network are equals), the ratio I2/I1 will be equal to 50%.
It is possible to calculate the ratio of I2/I1 corresponding to various system impedances,
according to the following equations:
Eg(Z2+Z0)
I1F =
Z1Z2+Z1Z0+Z2Z0

–EgZ0
I2F =
Z1Z2+Z1Z0+Z2Z0

Where :
Eg = System Voltage
Z0 = Zero sequence impedance
Z1 = Positive sequence impedance
Z2 = Negative sequence impedance
Therefore :
I2F Z0
=
I1F Z0+Z2

As a consequence, for an open circuit in a particular part of the system, I2/I1 can be
determined from the ratio between the zero sequence and the negative sequence
impedance. It must be noted however, that this ratio may vary depending on the location of
the fault. It is therefore desirable to apply a setting that is as sensitive as possible.
Practically, the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system
guide the choice of this minimum setting. A system study, or the use of measurement data of
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 45/76

the relay during commissioning stage are two ways to determine this minimum setting. If the
latter method is chosen, it is important to take measurements during maximum load
conditions, to be sure that all single phase loads are taken into account.
When sensitive settings are used, it is probable that the element will operate for any
unbalance condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole autoreclose
cycle). Therefore, a long time delay is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other
protective devices. It is common to set the time delay to 60 seconds.
The setting range of the Broken Conductor feature is described in the following table:

DEFAULT SETTING RANGE IN STEPS

MENU
SETTING MIN MAX OF

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Brkn Cond.? NO NO YES
tBC 1 1s 14 400 s 1s
RATIO I2/I1 20 % 20 % 100 % 1%

20.1 Example of Setting

The following information comes from a the relay commissioning report;
Ifull load = 500A
I2 = 50A
Then:
I2/I1 = 50/500 = 0.1
To tolerate some margin and load variations, it is typical to set this value at 200% above this
value: Therefore, RATIO I2/I1 = 20%

Set tBC at 60s to allow short circuits to be cleared by time delayed protections.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 46/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

21. DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE

FUNCTION (P123 ONLY)
21.1 Introduction
An analysis of faults on overhead line network has shown that 80-90% are transient in
nature.
A transient fault, such as an insulator flashover, is a self clearing ‘non-damage’ fault. This
type of fault can be cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more circuit breakers to
isolate the fault, and does not reappear when the line is re-energised. Lightning is the most
common cause of transient faults. Other causes are clashing conductors and debris blown
by the wind. The remaining 10 - 20% of faults are either non-permanent (arcing fault) or
permanent.
A small tree branch falling on the line could cause a non-permanent fault. Here the
immediate trip will not clear the fault, and the use of the recloser may be necessary to clear
it. Permanent faults could caused by broken conductors, transformer faults, cable faults or
machine faults which must be located and repaired before the supply can be restored.
Most of the time, if the faulty line is immediately tripped, and the fault arc has sufficient time
to de-ionise, reclose of the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully re-
energised. Autoreclose schemes are used to automatically reclose a switching device once a
time delay has elapsed and starting after the CB has opened.
On HV/MV distribution networks, the autoreclose function is used mainly for radial feeders
where system stability problems do not generally arise. Using the autoreclose bring the
following advantages:

• Minimises time of interruption suffered by the consumer.

• Reduces operating costs. Indeed, less man hours are needed to repair damages
caused by the fault and it offers the possibility to have running substations unattended.
Thanks to the automatic autorecloser, instantaneous protection can be used, which
means shorter time to clear the fault and so helps to minimise damages and to reduce
the number of permanent faults.
As 80% of faults in overhead lines are transient, the use of the autorecloser is very
advantageous. Automatic autorecloser allow a substation to operate unattended. The
number of visits on site to manually reclose a circuit breaker after a fault can then be
substantially reduced. This feature constitutes therefore an important advantage for
substations supervised remotely.
The autorecloser is of great benefit function gives an important benefit on circuits using time
graded protection, in that it allows the use of instantaneous protection to give a high speed
first trip. With fast tripping, the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault
is reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the chance of damage to the line, which might
otherwise cause a transient fault to develop into a permanent fault.
Using short time delay protection also prevents blowing of fuses and reduces circuit breaker
maintenance by eliminating pre-arc heating when clearing transient faults.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 47/76

The next figure shows an example of 4 autoreclose cycles (maximum numbers of allowed
cycles) to the final trip:
tD1, tD2, tD3, tD4 = dead time 1, 2, 3 and 4 timers
tR = Reclaim time
O = CB open
C = CB closed
Current

O C O C O C O C O final trip

I threshold

td1 tr td2 tr td3 tr td4 tr

In

Time
Fault P0031ENa

FIGURE 14 : TYPICAL AUTORECLOSE CYCLES

It should be noted that when short time delay protection is used with autoreclose, the
scheme is normally arranged to block the instantaneous protection after the first trip.
Therefore, if the fault persists after re-closing time graded protection will give discriminative
tripping with fuses or other protection devices, resulting in the isolation of the faulted section.
However, for certain applications, where the majority of the faults are likely to be transient, it
is not uncommon to allow more than one instantaneous trip before the instantaneous
protection is blocked.
Some schemes allow a number of re-closings and time graded trips after the first
instantaneous trip, which may result in the burning out and clearance of non-permanent
faults. Such an approach may also be used to allow fuses to operate in teed feeders where
the fault current is low.
When considering feeders which consist partly of overhead lines and partly of underground
cables, any decision to apply the autoreclose function would be influenced by all data known
on the frequency of transient faults. When a significant proportion of the faults are
permanent, the advantages of the autoreclose are small, particularly since re-closing on to a
faulty cable is likely to aggravate the damage.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 48/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

21.2 Description of the function

21.2.1 Autorecloser activation
The autoreclose function of the MiCOM P123 is available only if the following conditions are
verified :

• The auxiliary contact of the CB status 52a must be connected to the relay.
Refer to the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu

• The trip output relay RL1 must not be latched to the earth and/or phase protection
function.
Refer to the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Latch functions menu
NOTE : If the auxiliary supply is lost during an autoreclose cycle, the
autoreclose function is totally disabled.
21.2.2 Autoreclose menu
The setting of the Autoreclose function is described in the following table:
The same settings apply for the Menu PROTECTION G2.

MENU TEXT SETTING RANGE STEP SIZE

PROTECTION G1 MIN MAX
Autoreclose ? NO YES
Ext CB Fail ? NO YES
Ext CB Fail Time 10 ms 600 s 10 ms
Ext Block ? NO YES
tD1 10 ms 300 000 ms 10 ms
tD2 10 ms 300 000 ms 10 ms
tD3 10 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms
tD4 10 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms
Reclaim Time tR 20 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms
Inhib Time tI 20 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms
Phase Cycles 0 4 1
E/Gnd Cycles 0 4 1
CYCLES 4321
tI> 1201
CYCLES 4321
tI>> 1211
CYCLES 4321
tI>>> 1110
CYCLES 4321
tIe> 0111
CYCLES 4321
tIe>> 1121
CYCLES 4321
tIe>>> 1111
CYCLES 4321
tAux1 1112
CYCLES 4321
tAux2 0101
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 49/76

Example of setting :

CYCLES 4321
tI> 1201
4321 are the cycles associated to the trip on tI> pick up
1201 are the actions to be executed after the tI> time delay has elapsed :
0= no action on autorecloser : definitive trip
1= trip on tI> pick up, followed by a reclosing cycle
2= no trip on tI> pick up : and this whatever the setting is in the AUTOMAT.
CRTL/Trip commands/Trip tI> menu.

In addition to these settings, the user will be able to fully link the autoreclose function to the
protection function using the menus PROTECTION G1/Phase OC and
PROTECTION/E/Gnd. Refer to Chapter 3 of the Technical Guide.
21.2.3 Logic Functions
21.2.3.1 Logic Inputs
The autoreclose function has four inputs that can be assigned to the autoreclose logic.
These inputs can be opto-isolated inputs configured for that under the AUTOMAT. CTRL
menu. External contacts can then be wired to be used as an input and influence the
autorecloser scheme. These 4 inputs are described hereafter.
21.2.3.2 External CB fail
Most of circuit breakers are only able to provide only one trip-close-trip cycle. As a
consequence, it is necessary to verify if there is enough power to reclose the CB. The state
of the CB (healthy or failed) can be checked using an input that has been assigned to the
“CB FLT” function. If on completion of the dead time, the CB FLT input indicates that there is
not enough energy availableduring the time tCFE, a lockout occur and the CB remains open.

This function is disabled if not assigned under the PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose menu
(function CB FLT set to NO).
21.2.3.3 External starting orders
Two independent and programmable inputs (AUTOMAT.CTRL/INPUTS menu) can be used
to initiate the autorecloser function from an external device (such as an existing overcurrent
relay). These logic inputs may be used independently and also in parallel with the MiCOM
P123 Overcurrent settings.
These external orders can be independently disabled by not assigning the functions in the
PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/CYCLES tAux1 and PROTECTION
G1/Autoreclose/CYCLES tAux2 menus.
21.2.3.4 External blocking order
The Block –79 input can be set under the AUTOMAT.CTRL/INPUTS menu. This input can
block the autoreclose function and cause a lock-out if the autorecloser function is in
progress. It can be used when a protection is needed without requiring the use of the
autorecloser function.
A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where the autoreclose may be initiated from
the feeder protection but need to be blocked from the transformer protection side.
These external orders can be disabled by not assigning the function in the
PROTECTION/Autoreclose/Ext Block menu.
21.2.3.5 Autoreclose Logic Outputs
The following output signals can be assigned to relay outputs or to LEDs to provide
information about the status of the auto Reclose cycle. These outputs are described
hereafter.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 50/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

21.2.3.6 Autoreclose in progress

The "Autoreclose in progress" signal is present during the complete reclose cycles from
protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout.
The "Autoreclose in progress" information is allocated to a LED in the
CONFIGURATION/Led/Recloser Run menu.

The "Autoreclose in progress" information is allocated to the output relays in the

AUTOMAT.CTRL/Output Relays/79 Run menu.
21.2.3.7 Final trip
The "Final trip" signal indicates that a complete autoreclose cycle has been completed and
that the fault has been cleared. The "Final trip" signal can be reset after a manual closing of
the CBafter the inhibit time (tI).
This inhibit time (tI) can be set under the menu PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/Inhib Time.

The "Final trip" signal can be assigned to the output relays under the menu
AUTOMAT.Ctrl/Output Relays/79 Trip.

The "Final trip" signal can be assigned to a LED under the menu
CONFIGURATION/Led/Recloser Blocked.
21.2.4 Autoreclose logic description
The autoreclose function provides the ability to automatically control the autorecloser. This
function can perform two, three or four shot cycle. The parameters Phase Cycles numbers
and E/Gnd Cycles numbers are used to enter the number of shots chosen. Dead times for
all the shots (reclose attempts) can be independently adjusted.
The number of shots is directly related to the type of faults likely to occur on the system and
the voltage level of the system. Generally, on medium voltage networks where the
percentage of transient and non-permanent faults is likely to be high, a multi-shot
autoreclose device will increase the possibility for the distribution line to be successfully re-
energised after the reclosure of the circuit breaker.
The crossing of a protection element (phase or earth) will trigger the autoreclose provided
circuit breaker was closed before that. The dead time (Dead Time tD1, Dead Time tD2,
Dead Time tD3, Dead Time tD4) starts when the CB has tripped (when the 52a input has
disappeared).
At the end of the relevant dead time, a CB close signal is sent, provided that certain system
conditions are met. For example, the spring that allows the circuit breaker to close should be
fully charged. The CB FLT input provides this information . The CB close signal dropped off
as soon as the circuit breaker closes.
The reclaim time (Reclaim Time) starts when the CB has closed.
If the circuit breaker does not trip again, the autoreclose function resets at the end of the
reclaim time.
If the protection operates during the reclaim time, the relay either advances to the next shot
that is programmed in the autoreclose cycle, or, if all the programmed reclose attempts have
been accomplished, it locks out.
The total number of reclosures is displayed under the MEASUREMENT menu. This value can
be reset to zero pressing the key "C" (Clear) in the MEASUREMENTS/Reclose Stats menu.
21.2.5 Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close
The “Inhib Time tI” timer can be used to block the autoreclose being initiated after the CB is
manually closed onto a fault. The Autoreclose is blocked during the “Inhib Time tI“ following
manual CB Closure.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 51/76

21.2.6 Recloser lockout

If the protection element operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt,
the relay will lockout and the autoreclose function is disabled until the lockout condition
resets.
The lockout condition can reset by a manual closing after the "Inhib Time tI".

The Autoreclose can also be locked out using a CB FLT input. The external information can
be generated by the spring of the CB is not charged or suffers a low gas.This CB FLT
information can be issued from the "not charged" or "Low gas pressure" indications of CB
springs.
Note that Autoreclose can also be locked by :

• The fact that the CB doesn’t open after tBf delay (CB Fail)

• An operating time that is above programmed thresholds.

21.2.7 Setting group change lockout
The change of setting groups on MiCOM P122 and P123 is only possible if there are no
protection or automation functions running (except the thermal overload function). During the
autorecloser cycle, if the relay receives an order to change setting groups, this order is kept
in memory, and will only be executed after the timer has elapsed.
21.3 Setting Guidelines
21.3.1 Number Of Shots
There is no perfect rule to define the number of shots for a particular application. For
medium voltage systems it is common to use two or three autoreclose shots. However, in
some countries, for specific applications, the use of four shots is not uncommon. The
advantage of using four shots is that the final dead time can be set for a time long enough to
allow thunderstorms to stop before definitive final reclose. This scheme prevents
unnecessary lockout caused by consecutive transient faults.
Typically, the first trip, and sometimes the second, are caused by the instantaneous
protection. Since 80% of faults are transient, the following trips will be time delayed, and all
will have increasing dead times to clear non-permanent faults.
In order to determine the number of shots required, it is important to take into account the
following factors.
The first factor is the ability for the circuit breaker to perform several trip-close operations in a
short time and, the effect of these operations on the maintenance period.
If the statistics made on a particular system reveal a moderate percentage of non-permanent
faults which could be burned out, two or more shots are justified. In addition to this, if fused
‘tees’ are used and the fault level is low, the timer of the fuses may not discriminate with the
main IDMT relay and it would then be useful to have several shots. The use of several shots
would then be useful, as this would warm up the fuse to a such extent that it would
eventually blow before the main protection operated.
21.3.2 Dead Timer Setting
It is important to take the following factors into consideration when setting the dead timer.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 52/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

21.3.2.1 Load
Due to the great diversity of load which may exist on a system, it may be very difficult to
optimise the dead time. However, it is possible to study each type of load separately and
thereby be able to define a typical dead time. Hereafter are presented the most common
types of loads.
Synchronous motors tolerate only extremely short interruptions of supply without loss of
synchronism. In practice, it is desirable to disconnect the motor from the supply in the event
of a fault; the dead time should be sufficient to allow the motor no-volt device to operate.
Typically, a minimum dead time of 0.2-0.3 seconds is recommended to allow this device to
operate.
Induction motors, on the other hand, can withstand supply interruptions, up to a maximum of
0.5 seconds and re-accelerate successfully. In general dead times of 3-10 seconds are
normally satisfactory, but there may be special cases for which additional time is required to
allow the reset of manual controls and safety devices.
Loss of supply of lighting circuits, such as street lighting, can lead to important safety
problems. A 10 seconds loss of supply may be dangerous for car circulation. Regarding
domestic customers, the main consideration is linked to the inconvenience caused.
An important criteria for many power utilities is the number of minutes lost per year to
customers which will be reduced on feeders using the autorecloser and will also be affected
by the dead time settings used.
21.3.2.2 Circuit Breaker
For high speed autoreclose, the minimum dead time of the power system depends on the
minimum time delay imposed by the circuit breaker during a trip and reclose operation.
Since a circuit breaker is a mechanical device, it has an inherent contact separation time.
This operating time for a modern circuit breaker is usually within the 50-100ms range, but
could be longer with older designs.
After a trip, the mechanism need some time to reset before applying a close pulse. This
reset time varies depending on the circuit breaker, but lasts typically 0.1 seconds.
Once the circuit breaker has reset, the breaker can start to close. The period of time
between the energisation of the closing mechanism and the making of the contacts is called
closing time. Because of the time constant of a solenoid closing mechanism and the inertia
of the plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3s. A spring operated breaker, on
the other hand, can close in less than 0.2 seconds.
Where high speed reclosing is required, for the majority of medium voltage applications, the
circuit breaker mechanism dictates itself the minimum dead time. However, the fault de-
ionising time may also have to be considered.
High speed autoreclose may be required to maintain stability on a network that has two or
more power sources. For high speed autoreclose, the system disturbance time should be
minimised using fast protection, <50 ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection
and fast circuit breakers < 100 ms. Fast fault clearance can reduce the time for the fault arc
to de-ionise.
To ensure stability between two sources, a dead time of <300 ms is typically required.
Considering only the CB, this minimum time corresponds to the reset time of the the
mechanism plus the CB closing time. Thus, a solenoid mechanism is not adapted for high
speed autoreclose due to the fact that the closing time is generally too long.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 53/76

21.3.2.3 Fault De-ionising Time

For high speed autoreclose, the time to de-ionise faults may be the factor the most important
when considering the dead time. This is the time required for the ionised air to disperse
around the fault position so that the insulation level of the air is restored. This time may be
around the following value:
De-ionising time = (10.5 + ((system voltage in kV)/34.5)) / frequency
For 66 kV = 0.25 s (50Hz)
For 132 kV = 0.29 s (50 Hz)
21.3.2.4 Protection Reset
It is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time
discrimination is maintained after reclose on to a fault. For high speed autoreclose,
instantaneous reset of protection is required.
Typical 11/33kV dead time settings in the UK are as follow:
1st dead time = 5 - 10 seconds
2nd dead time = 30 seconds
3rd dead time = 60 - 100 seconds
4th dead time (uncommon in the UK, however used in South Africa) = 60 - 100 seconds
21.3.3 Reclaim Timer Setting
The following factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer:

• Supply continuity - Large reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for transient
faults.

• Fault incidence/Past experience - Small reclaim times may be required where there is
a high incidence of lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for transient faults.

• Charging time of the spring - For high speed autoreclose, the reclaim time may be set
longer than the spring charging time to ensure that there is sufficient energy in the
circuit breaker to perform a trip-close-trip cycle. For delayed autoreclose, this setting is
of no need as the dead time can be extended by an extra CB healthy check window
time if there is insufficient energy in the CB. If there is insufficient energy after the
check window time the relay will lockout.

• Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can
mean shorter maintenance periods. A minimum reclaim time of 5s may be needed to
give sufficient time to the CB to recover after a trip and close before it can perform
another trip-close-trip cycle.
The reclaim time must be long enough to allow any time delayed protection leading to
autoreclose to operate. Failure to do so can cause the autoreclose scheme to reset too soon
and the reactivation of the instantaneous protection.
If that were the case, a permanent fault would look like some transient faults, caused by
continuous autorecloses. Applying a protection against excessive fault frequency lockout is
an additional precaution that can solve this problem.
It is possible to obtain short reclaim times by blocking the reclaim time from the protection
start signals. If short reclaim times are to be used, then the switchgear rating may dictate the
minimum reclaim time. The advantage of a short reclaim time is that there are less lockouts
of the CB, and therefore the number of maintenance visits periods would be reduced.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 54/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Sensitive earth fault protection is used to detect high resistance earth faults. The time delay
of such protections is usually a long time delay, typically about 10-15s. If autoreclose is
generated by the SEF protection, this timer must be taken into account when deciding the
value of the reclaim time, if the reclaim time is not blocked by an SEF protection start signal.
Sensitive earth faults, caused by a broken overhead conductor in contact with dry ground or
a wood fence are rarely transient faults and may be dangerous to people.
It is therefore common practice to block the autoreclose using the sensitive earth fault
protection and lockout the circuit breaker.
Where motor-wound spring closed circuit breakers are used, the reclaim time must be at
least as long as the spring winding time for high speed autoreclose to ensure that the
breaker can perform a trip-close-trip cycle.
A typical 11/33kV reclaim time is 3-10 seconds, this prevents unnecessary lockout during
thunderstorms. However, times up to 60-180 seconds maybe used.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 55/76

22. CIRCUIT BREAKER STATE MONITORING

An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear.
Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has
insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The MiCOM
P120/P121/P122/P123 relays incorporate a circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an
indication of the position of the circuit breaker.
This indication is available either on the relay front panel (P122 - P123 only) or via the
communication network.
The positions of the CB can be selected under the AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs and
CONFIGURATION/Led menu.
Further, the MiCOM P122 and P123 relays are able to inform the operator that the CB has
not opened following a remote trip command (refer section “CB FAIL protection”).
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 56/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

23. CIRCUIT BREAKER CONDITION MONITORING (P122 & P123 ONLY)

Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and that
the mechanism operates correctly, and also that the interrupting capability has not been
compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is based on a
fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of
monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough indication only and can lead to excessive
maintenance.
The relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing a
more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition. These monitoring features are
discussed in the following section.
23.1 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features
For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following
table taken from the relay menu. The RECORDS/CB Monitoring menu cells shown are
counter values only.
This information is for reading only.

MENU TEXT
CB Monitoring
CB Opening Time Display the CB opening time (Note 1)
CB Closing Time Display the CB closing time (Note 2)
CB Operations Display the number of opening commands executed by the CB
ΣAmps(n) IA Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps)
interrupted by the CB phase A
Σ Amps(n) IB Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps)
interrupted by the CB phase B
Σ Amps(n) IC Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps)
interrupted by the CB phase C

NOTE 1: the CB opening time is measured between the trip command (Trip
output relay) and the change of position of O/O (52a).
NOTE 2: the CB closing time is measured between the closing command
(output auxiliary relay) and the change of position of O/O (52a).
The above counters in the CB condition monitoring function may be reset to zero, for
example, following a maintenance inspection and overhaul.The following table, detailing the
options available for the CB condition monitoring, is taken from the relay menu. It includes
the setup of the current broken facility and those features which can be set to raise an alarm
or CB lockout.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 57/76

All the settings are available in the AUTOMAT.CTRL/CB supervision menu.

SETTING RANGE
MENU TEXT STEP SIZE
MIN MAX
CB Supervision
CB Open S’vision No Yes
CB Open Time 50 ms 1 000 ms 50 ms
CB Close S’vision No Yes
CB Close Time 50 ms 1 000 ms 50 ms
CB Open Alarm ? No Yes
CB Open NB 0 50 000 1
ΣAmps (n) ? No Yes
ΣAmps (n) 0 4 000 E6 1 E6
n 1 2 1
t Open Pulse 100 ms 5 000 ms 100 ms
t Close Pulse 100 ms 5 000 ms 100 ms

The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay issues
a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is
also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by allocating one of the
logic inputs or via the communication to accept a trigger from an external device.
23.2 Setting guidelines

23.2.1 Setting the Σ In Thresholds

Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers
(OCB’s), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear.
Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations.
However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and
hence oil degradation is slower than expected.

The Σ In counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter
allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made.

For OCB’s, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of Σ I2t. This
is where ‘I’ is the fault current broken, and ‘t’ is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not
the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately, the relay would
normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting n = 2.
For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems,
practical evidence suggests that the value of n = 2 may be inappropriate. In such
applications n’ may be set to 1.
An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV
pressure testing, for example.
It is imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the switchgear
manufacturer’s instructions.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 58/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

23.2.2 Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds

Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus,
routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of
operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised,
indicating when preventative maintenance is due.
Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the autoreclose
function on reaching a operations threshold. This prevents further reclosure when the circuit
breaker has not been maintained to the standard demanded by the switchgear
manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCB’s) can only perform a certain
number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each
fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties.
23.2.3 Setting the Operating Time Thresholds
Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore,
alarm is provided and is settable in the range of 100 ms to 5 s. This time is set in relation to
the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 59/76

24. UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION FUNCTION (P122 & P123 ONLY)

MiCOM P122 & P123 relays include 2 undercurrent elements. One is dedicated for the CB
fail detection (see CB failure protection section).
The other one can be used to provide additional protective functions to prevent
damage/further damage to the power system. This function allows typical applications such
as loss of load.

Alarm
indication
Ia under
I< threshold
Ib under tI< 0
I< threshold >=1
& Output
Ic under Relays
I< threshold Digital
Input 52a P0032ENa

FIGURE 15 : UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION LOGIC

The undercurrent protection function is available only if the auxiliary contact of the CB status
is connected to the relay. A logic input should be energised via the 52a contact of the CB.
In this way a logic input (1 to 5 for P123, 1 to 3 for P122) is allocated to the 52a function. See
the AUTOMAT. CTRL/ Inputs x menu.
An alarm is given when :

− at least one of the 3 phase current is detected under the threshold I<

− and the CB is closed.

When the alarm condition is present and lasts longer than the set time tI<, one or more
output relay can be energised.
See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/trip commands/Trip tI< menu to assign tI< to the trip output
relay RL1.
See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays/ tI< menu to assign tI< to the auxiliary output
relay RL2 to RL8 (to RL6 for P122).
I< threshold can be set under the PROTECTION G1(2)/Undercurrent/ I< menu from 2% to
100% of the rated current In.
tI< time can be set under the PROTECTION G1(2)/Undercurrent/ tI< menu from 0 to 150s.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 60/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

25. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION : CBF (P122 & P123 ONLY)
When a fault is detected, one or more main protection elements will issue a trip order to the
associated circuit breaker(s). To isolate the fault, and prevent (heavier) damage on the
power system it is essential that the circuit breaker operates correctly.
On power systems, a fault that is not clear quickly enough threatens the stability of the
system. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which
monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable period of time. If the fault
current has not been eliminated after the set time delay, the breaker failure protection (CBF)
will send a signal.
The CBF protection can be used to back-trip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the
fault is correctly isolated. The CBF protection can also eliminate all blocking orders
associated to logic selectivity.

CB Fail Enabled

Any Trip
tBF CB Fail Alarm
1 S
Q
External CBF R
Initiate

CBF Ia<

CBF Ib<

CBF Ic<
P0428ENa

FIGURE 16 : CB FAIL PRINCIPLE

25.1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection mechanism
Hereafter is described how the CB failure protection available in MiCOM P122 & P123 relays
works.
The t BF timer is initiated when a trip order is given to the output relay RL1. Note that the trip
order can be issued either by a protection element, or by a logic input. Then the relay
monitors the current signal of each phase and compares each phase current signal with the
bandzone made by the undercurrent I< threshold. This threshold value can be set under the
AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB FAIL menu.
Once the t BF timer has been initiated, the relay detects the first time that the current goes
out of the I< bandzone. When the relay detects this transition, it initiates an other timer. This
timer is of fixed duration and equivalent to 20 samples.
The relay sampling rate being 32 samples by cycle, this timer is of 12,5 ms duration for
system at 50 Hz and 10,4 ms for a system at 60 Hz. During this period of time, the relay is
checking if the current goes out the I< bandzone again. In case that the current is not
eliminated, the current signal should again go out the I< bandzone, and this after half a
cycle, i-e 16 samples (10ms at 50Hz).
Each time the relay detects that the current goes out the I< bandzone, the relay re-initiates
again the timer ( of a 20 samples). In this 20 samples time window, the relay checks that the
current signal going out the I< bandzone is in opposite way than the first one.

• If there is no current signal going out in opposite way compared to the first one, the
relay considers that there is an opened CB pole condition. The « CB pole open »
internal signal is initiated.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 61/76

• If there is a current signal going out in opposite way compared to the first one, the
relay considers that the pole of the CB is not yet open. The « CB pole closed » internal
signal is maintained.
Once the t BF time delay has elapsed, the relay checks the internal state of each pole of the
circuit breaker. If one or several internal poles are not opened, the relay then declares that
the CB has failed. The “CB FAIL” message is displayed.
Note that it is possible to initiate the CB fail detection function by a digital input without
having any trip order being given by the relay. In this case, the tBF timer starts its countdown
when receiving this digital input signal. If the CB is not opened (by an another protection
relay) once the tBF has elapsed, the relay declares that the CB has failed.
The user can associate the digital input to the "CB Fail detection" under the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/Inputs menu.
Figure 17 hereafter shows the start of the CB Fail detection after a trip order was sent:

Trip order
t BF timer
20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples

I< threshold

I< threshold

20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples

P0033ENa

FIGURE 17 : CB FAIL DETECTION PRINCIPLE

Figure 18 hereafter shows the normal opening of the CB before tBF has elapsed. In this
case, no CB fail alarm is given.

CB pole opened
detection
« CB pole closed » internal signal
Trip order
t BF timer
20 samples 20 samples 20 samples

I< threshold

I< threshold

P0034ENa
20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples

FIGURE 18 : CB OPEN BEFORE tBF EXPIRED

P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 62/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Figure 19 hereafter shows a CB failure condition. After the t BF timer elapses, the relay
doesn’t detect the opening of the CB pole. Therefore, a CB FAIL signal is given.

CB failed
« CB FAIL » signal

« CB pole closed » internal signal

Trip order
t BF timer
20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples

I< threshold

I< threshold

20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples P0035ENa

FIGURE 19 : CB NOT YET OPEN BEFORE tBF EXPIRED

Figure 20 hereafter shows an other case of normal CB operation. Once the fault is cleared,
the phase current signal takes time to decrease due to the de-magnetisation of the phase
CT. It is a typical case for TPY class CTs which are built with air gap in their magnetic core.
Before the drop off of the t BF timer, the relay has detected an opening of the CB pole, thus
no CB failure signal is given as it is required. A basic Breaker Failure element based on an
simple undercurrent element would detect a false CB failure condition as the current signal
value is outside the I< bandzone at the t BF timer drop off.
NOTE : Both « CB pole closed » and « CB pole opened » internal signals
mentioned in the above diagrams are derived from the Circuit Breaker
Failure function algorithm. They are not affected by the status of the
relay opto-inputs wired to the 52a and 52b CB auxiliary contacts.

« CB pole opened »
detection
« CB pole closed» internal signal
Trip order
t BF timer
20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples

I< threshold

I< threshold

20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples P0036ENa

FIGURE 20 : DE-ENERGIZATION OF THE CT PHASE

Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 63/76

The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows:

SETTING RANGE
MENU TEXT STEP SIZE
MIN MAX
CB Fail ? No Yes
tBF 0.03 s 10 s 10 ms
I< 0.02 In In 0.01 In

25.2 Typical settings

25.2.1 Breaker Fail Timer Settings
A typical timer setting used with a 2 ½ cycle circuit breaker is around 150 ms.
25.2.2 Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings
The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set to a value that is under the load current, to
ensure that I< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for
overhead line or cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common for generator circuit breaker
CBF.
NOTE: The reset time of P122 and P123 is around 15 ms.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 64/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

26. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION (P122 & P123 ONLY)

The trip circuit extends beyond the relay enclosure and passes through more components,
such as fuse, wires, relay contacts, auxiliary switch contact and so on.
These complications, coupled with the importance of the circuit, have directed attention to its
supervision.
The simplest arrangement for trip circuit supervision contains a healthy trip lamp in series
with a resistance placed in parallel with a trip output relay contacts of the protection device.
26.1 Trip Circuit Supervision mechanism
The Trip Circuit Supervision function included in the MiCOM P122 and P123 relays is
described below:
A logic input is programmed to the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision/TC Supervision
function. The logic input is associated to the label Trip Circ within the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/Inputs menu. Then, this logic input is wired in the trip circuit according to one of the
typical application diagrams shown in the following example.
When the function TC Supervision is set to "Yes" under the CB Supervision sub-menu, the
relay checks continuously on trip circuit continuity whatever the CB status is CB opened or
CB closed. The function TC Supervision is enabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is not
energised. The function TC Supervision is not enabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is
energised.
A 52 Fail (trip circuit failure) signal is generated if the logic input detects no voltage signal
during a time longer than the settable timer tSUP. See Chapter P12y/EN FT (User Guide)
and Chapter P12y/EN TD (Technical Data) for the settings.
As this function is disabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is energised, this function is
suitable for use with the enabled relay latching logic.
The tSUP timer can be set according to the following table :

SETTING RANGE
MENU TEXT STEP SIZE
MIN MAX
TC Supervision ? Yes No
tSUP 100ms 10s 50ms

Binary input tSUP 0

Trip Circ.
52 Fail
& signal
Tripping
Relay RL1
energized P0037ENa

FIGURE 21 : TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM

Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 65/76

Three examples of application are given below.

NOTE : It is considered that the CB is fitted out with its own safety device.
Example 1
In this example only the 52a auxiliary contact is available, the MiCOM relay monitors the trip
coil whatever the CB status is (CB open or CB closed ).

+Vdc

52a

2 6 Trip
order Opto-
input

MiCOM P123

- Vdc
P0038ENa

FIGURE 22 : TRIP COIL MONITORING

Example 2
In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available; the MiCOM P122 and
P123 relays monitor the complete trip circuit when the CB is closed and a part of the trip
circuit when the CB is open.
In this case it is necessary to insert a resistor R1 in series with 52b, if either the output (RL1)
trip is latched or it stays involuntarily closed, or a long time trip pulse is programmed.

+Vdc

2 6
Trip
order Opto-
input
MiCOM P123

52a 52b

Trip Coil Resistor R1

- Vdc
P0039ENa

FIGURE 23 : TRIP COIL AND AUXILIARY CONTACTS MONITORING

P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 66/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Example 3
In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the MiCOM P122 and
P123 relays monitor the complete trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB
closed).
In this case it is necessary to insert a R1, if either the output (RL1) trip is latched, or it stays
involuntarily closed, or a long time trip pulse is programmed.

+Vdc

2 6
Trip
order Opto-
input

MiCOM P123

52a 52b

Resistor R1

Trip Coil

- Vdc
P0040ENa

FIGURE 24 : TRIP COIL AND AUXILIARY CONTACTS MONITORING WHATEVER THE POSITION OF
THE CB
EXTERNAL RESISTOR R1 CALCULATION
The calculation of the R1 resistor value will take into account that a minimum current is
flowing through the logic input. This minimum current value is a function of the relay auxiliary
voltage range (Ua).
1 - Case of example No 2 :
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:

0,8 × U a − U min
R1 < [Ohm]
I min

Where:
Ua = auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label under the
top hinged cover. See table below).
Umin = internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
Imin = minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate.

Relay auxiliary voltage range (Ua)

24-60 VDC 48-150 VDC 130-250 VDC/110-250 VAC
R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 15)/0.0035 R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 25)/0.0035 R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 38)/0.0022

The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:

PR1 > 2 ×
(1,2 × U a ) 2 [W]
R1
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 67/76

2 - Case of example No 3 :
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:

0,8 × U a − U min
R1 < − R Coil [Ohm ]
I min
Where:
Ua = auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label under
the top hinged cover. See table below).
Umin = internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
Imin = minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
Rcoil = Trip coil resistance value.

Relay auxiliary voltage range (Ua)

24 – 60 VDC 48 – 150 VDC 130 – 250 VDC/110-250 VAC
R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 15)/0.0035–Rcoil R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 25)/0,0035–Rcoil R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 38)/0,0022–Rcoil

The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:

PR1 > 2 ×
(1,2 × U a ) 2 [W]
(R1 + R Coil )
NOTES: – The presence of auxiliary relays, such as an anti-pumping system
for instance, in the trip circuit must be taken into account for the R1
resistance values specification.
– We consider that the maximum variations of the auxiliary voltage
value is ±20%.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 68/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

27. EVENT RECORDS (P122 & P123 ONLY)

The relay records and time tags up to 75 events and stores them in a non-volatile (battery
backed up) memory. This allows the system operator to analyse the sequence of events that
occurred within the relay after a particular power system condition, or switching sequence,
etc. When the available space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest
fault.
The real time clock within the relay times tag each event, with a resolution of 1ms.
The user can view event records either via the front panel interface, via the EIA (RS) 232
port, or remotely, via the rear EIA (RS) 485 port.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 69/76

28. FAULT RECORDS (P122 & P123 ONLY)

Each time any of the programmed thresholds are crossed, a fault record is created and
stored in memory. The fault record tags up to 5 faults and stores them in a non-volatile
(battery backed up) memory. This allows the system operator to identify and analyse
network failures. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new fault
automatically overwrites the oldest fault.
The user can view actual fault record under the RECORD/Fault Record menu, where he can
select to display up to 5 stored records. These records are fault flags, fault measurements,
etc. Also note that the time stamp displayed in the fault record itself will be more accurate
than the corresponding time stamp given in the event record. This is due to the fact that
events are logged some time after the actual fault record happens.
The user can view event records either via the front panel interface, via the EIA (RS) 232
port, or remotely, via the rear EIA (RS) 485 port.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 70/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

29. INSTANTANEOUS RECORDER (P122 & P123 ONLY)

Each time any of programmed thresholds are crossed, an instantaneous record is created
and displayed under the RECORDS/Instantaneous menu. The last five starting information
with the duration of the information are available.
The following information is displayed under the RECORDS/Fault Record menu: number of
faults, hour, date, origin (crossing of I>, I>>, I>>> or Ie>, Ie>> or Ie>>> thresholds), duration
of the instantaneous, and if the crossing of the threshold lead to a trip or not.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 71/76

30. DISTURBANCE RECORDER (P122 & P123 ONLY)

The integral disturbance recorder has a memory space specifically dedicated for storage of
disturbance records. Up to 5 disturbance records of 3 seconds duration each can be stored.
When the available memory space is exhausted, the new record automatically overwrites the
oldest record.
The recorder stores actual samples that are taken at a rate of 32 samples per cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of analogue and digital channels. (Note that the relevant
CT ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary
quantities). The RECORD/DISTURB RECORD menu is shown below :

SETTING RANGE
MENU TEXT STEP SIZE
MIN MAX

Disturb Record
Pre-Time 100 ms 3000 ms 100 ms
Post-Time 100 ms 3000 ms 100 ms
Disturb Rec Trig On Instantaneous On Trip
The total disturbance recording time is 3.0 s (pre-trigger plus post-trigger). For example,
default settings show that if the pre-time time is set to 100 ms and the post -time to 2.5 s,
than the total disturbance recording time will be 2.6 s.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 72/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

31. ROLLING AND PEAK VALUE DEMANDS (P122 & P123 ONLY)
MiCOM P122 and P123 relays can store the 3 phases rolling average and maximum
subperiod values. The description and principle of calculation are presented hereafter.
31.1 Rolling demand
Calculation of the rolling demand value for IA, Ib and IC currents is done the following way:

• Calculation of the average of the RMS values on a "Rolling Sub Period" period.
The width of the period "Rolling Sub Period" can be set under the "RECORDS/Rolling
Demand/Sub Period" menu.
Setting range : from 1 to 60 minutes.

• Storage of these values in a sliding window.

Calculation of the average of these average values (sliding window values) on the number of
"Num of Sub Periods" periods.
The number of Sub Period "Num of Sub Periods" can be set under the "RECORDS/Rolling
Demand/Num of Sub Per" menu.
Setting range : from 1 to 24.

• Display of the first result under the MEASUREMENTS menu only after the storage of
"Num of Sub Periods" periods. The 3 phases Rolling average value are displayed :
Rolling Average IA RMS
Rolling Average IB RMS
Rolling Average IC RMS
The calculation is reset either via the front operator interface (Key c) without entering a
password, or by a remote command.
NOTE : In case of loss of power supply the rolling demand are not stored.
A modification of the settings (either "Rolling Sub Period" or "Num of
Sub Periods" parameter) reset the calculation.
Example :
Sub Period = 5 mn
Num of Sub Period = 2

At the end of the Sub Period 2 :

Rolling average value = (average value 1 + average value 2)/2
At the end of the Sub Period 3 :
New Rolling average value = (average value 2 + average value 3)/2
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 73/76

31.2 Peak value demand

The principle of calculation of the Peak value demand for IA, IB and IC currents is the
following :
For every "Rolling Sub Period", a new average value is compared with the previous value
calculated at the previous "Rolling Sub Period". If this new value is greater than the previous
value already stored, then this new value is stored instead of the previous one.
In the other way, if this new value is lower than the previous value already stored, then the
previous value is stored.
This way the average peak vale will be refreshed each Sub Period;
There is no dedicated setting for this calculation. The setting of the Sub Period in the
RECORDS menu is used.
The 3 phase Peak value demand are displayed in the MEASUREMENTS menu :
MAX SUBPERIOD IA RMS
MAX SUBPERIOD IB RMS
MAX SUBPERIOD IC RMS

− The calculation is reset either by pushing key ! without using a password, or by

remote command.
NOTE : In case of loss of power supply, Peak average values are stored.
A modification of the "Rolling Sub Period" parameter reset the
calculation.
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 74/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

32. CT REQUIREMENTS
Hereafter are presented the CT requirements for MiCOM P12x Overcurrent. Current
transformer requirements are based on a potential maximum fault current that is 50 times
the relay rated current (In) and on the setting of the instantaneous at 25 times rated current
(In). The current transformer requirements are designed to provide operation of all protection
elements.
When the criteria for a specific application are higher than the criteria described above, or
when the actual lead resistance exceeds the limiting value recommended, it may be
desirable to increase the CT requirements according to the following formula.

Nominal Nominal Accuracy Accuracy Limit Limiting lead

Rating Output Class Factor resistance
1A 2.5VA 10P 20 1.3 ohms
5A 7.5VA 10P 20 0.11 ohms

32.1 Definite time / IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection

Time-delayed Phase overcurrent elements :

VK ≥ Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)

Time-delayed Earth Fault overcurrent elements :

VK ≥ Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)

32.2 Instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements :

VK ≥ Isp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)

CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements :

VK ≥ Isn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)

32.3 Definite time / IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection
Time delay SEF protection :

VK ≥ Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)

SEF Protection - as fed from a core-balance CT :
The type of current transformers that are required are core balance type and with metering
class accuracy and with a limiting secondary voltage that follows the following formula:
Time Delayed element:

VK ≥ Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)

Instantaneous element:

VK ≥ Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)

In addition, note that phase error of the applied core balance current transformer should be
less than 90 minutes at 10% of rated current and less than 150 minutes at 1% of rated
current.
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 75/76

Abbreviations used in the previous formula are explained below:

Where :
VK = Required CT knee-point voltage (volts),
Ifn = Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current (amps),
Ifp = Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current (amps),
Icn = Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current or 31 times I> setting
(whichever is lower) (amps),
Icp = Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current or 31 times I> setting
(whichever is lower) (amps),
Isn = Stage 2 & 3 Earth Fault setting (amps),
Isp = Stage 2 and 3 setting (amps),
RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms),
Rrp = Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In (ohms),
Rrn = Impedance of the relay neutral current input at 30In (ohms).
32.4 Low impedance restricted earth fault (REF) protection

VK ≥ 24 * In * (RCT + 2RL) for X/R < 40 and if < 15In

VK ≥ 48 * In * (RCT + 2RL) for X/R < 40, 15In < If < 40In
and 40 <X/R < 120, If < 15In
Where :
VK = Required CT knee point voltage (volts),
In = Rated secondary current (amps),
RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms),
If = Maximum through fault current level (amps).
32.5 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection
The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall remain stable for through faults
and shall operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided that following equations are
met when determining CT requirements and the value of the associated stabilising resistor:
Rs = [K * (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS

VK ≥ 4 * Is * Rs
K = 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16
K = 1.2 for Vk/Vs greater than 16
Where :
VK = Required CT knee-point voltage (volts),
Rs = Value of Stabilising resistor (ohms),
If = Maximum through fault current level (amps).
VK = CT knee point voltage (volts),
IS = Current setting of REF element (amps),
RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms),
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms).
P12x/EN AP/F75 Application Guide

Page 76/76 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

MODBUS DATABASE
COURIER DATABASE
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP 3.0 DATABASE
MiCOM P120 - P121 - P122 - P123
VERSION V6.G
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

MODBUS DATABASE
MiCOM P120 - P121 - P122 - P123
VERSION V6
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/170

CONTENT

1. INTRODUCTION 3
1.1 Purpose of this document 3
1.2 Glossary 3

2. MODBUS PROTOCOL 4
2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection 4
2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection 4
2.1.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages 4
2.1.3 Message validity check 4
2.1.4 Address of the MiCOM relays 4
2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays 5
2.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol 5
2.3.1 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relays 5
2.3.2 Messages validity check 6

3. MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAY DATABASE

ORGANISATION 7
3.1 Description of the application mapping 7
3.1.1 Settings 7
3.1.2 Disturbance records (P122, P123) 7
3.1.3 Event records (P122, P123) 8
3.1.4 Fault records (P122, P123) 8
3.1.5 Characteristics 8
3.2 Page 0h (Read access only) 9
3.3 Page 1h 13
3.4 Page 2h (Access in reading and in writing) 20
3.5 Page 3h (Access in reading and in writing) 24
3.6 Page 4h 27
3.7 Pages 5h/6h 27
3.8 Page 7h 28
3.9 Page 8h (P122, P123) 28
3.10 Mapping Access Characteristics 29
3.11 Pages 9h to 21h 30
3.11.1 Meaning of each value channel 31
3.11.2 Calculation formula for phase current values 31
3.11.3 Calculation formula for earth current values 31
3.12 Page 22h 32
3.13 Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah) 32
3.14 Page 36h 35
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 2/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

3.15 Page 37h 36

3.15.1 Fault nature code meaning 37
3.15.2 Calculation formula for phase current values 37
3.15.3 Calculation formula for earth current values 37
3.16 Page 3Eh 38
3.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch 38
3.17.1 Calculation formula for phase current values 39
3.17.2 Calculation formula for earth current values 39
3.18 Pages 3Dh 39

4. DESCRIPTION OF THE MAPPING FORMAT, MiCOM P122 AND P123 41

4.1 Disturbance record additional information 49
4.1.1 MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record 49
4.1.2 Request to know the number of disturbance records in SRAM 49
4.1.3 Service requests 49
4.1.4 Disturbance record upload request 49
4.1.5 Index frame upload request 50
4.1.6 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event 50
4.1.7 Request to retrieve a dedicated event 50
4.1.8 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records 50
4.1.9 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record 51
4.1.10 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record 51
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/170

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose of this document
This document describes the characteristics of the MODBUS, K-Bus/COURIER and IEC
60870-5-103 communication protocol of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays.
1.2 Glossary
Ir, Is, It : currents measured on the concerned phases (r, s, t)
IE : residual current measured by earth input (= 3.I zero sequence)
pf : soft weight of a word of 16 bits
PF : heavy weight of a word of 16 bits
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 4/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2. MODBUS PROTOCOL
MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays can communicate by a RS 485 link behind the
unit following the MODBUS RTU protocol.
2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection
2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection
The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows:

− Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz),

− MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode

− Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front panel of

the relay:

Baud rate
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400

Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog

Mode
1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop: total 10 bits
1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop: total 11 bits

2.1.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages

All character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission time of
3 characters is considered as a firm start.
2.1.3 Message validity check
The frame validity is working with a cyclical redundancy code CRC with 16 bits.
The generator polynomial is:
1 + x² + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h
2.1.4 Address of the MiCOM relays
The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1 and
255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/170

2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays

The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are:
Function 1 or 2: Reading of n bits
Function 3 or 4: Reading of n words
Function 5: Writing of 1 bit
Function 6: Writing of 1 word
Function 7: Fast reading of 8 bits
Function 8: Reading of the diagnostics counter
Function 11: Reading of the Event counter
Function 15: Writing of n bits
Function 16: Writing of n words
2.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol
Master slave protocol, all exchange understands a master query and a slave response
Frame size received from MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays
Frame transmitted by the master ( query):

Slave number Function code Information CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
0 à FFh 1 à 10h

Slave number:
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
A frame transmitted with a slave number 0 is globally addressed to all pieces of equipment
(broadcast frame )
Function code:
Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16)
Information:
Contains the parameters of the selected function.
CRC16:
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.
NOTE: The MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent
out by the master.
2.3.1 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relays
Frame sent by the MiCOM relay ( response)

Slave number Function code Data CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
1 à FFh 1 à 10h

Slave number:
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 6/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Function code:
Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16) .
Data:
Contains reply data to master query .
CRC 16:
Value of the CRC 16 calculated by the slave.
2.3.2 Messages validity check
When MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays receive a master query, it validates the
frame:
If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays do not
reply to the query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message,
this is the only case of non-reply by MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays to a master
query.
If the CRC is good but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sends an exception
response.
Warning frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response)

Slave number Function code Warning code CRC16

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes
1 to FFh 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh pf ... PF

Slave number:
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
Function code:
The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the warning frame is the code in which the
most significant bit (b7) is forced to 1.
Warning code:
On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of them:

• code 01: function code unauthorised or unknown.

• code 03: a value in the data field is unauthorised ( incorrect data ).

− Control of pages being read

− Control of pages being written

− Control of addresses in pages

− Length of request messages

CRC16:
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave.
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/170

3. MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAY DATABASE

ORGANISATION
3.1 Description of the application mapping
3.1.1 Settings
MiCOM P122 and P123 application mapping has 9 pages of parameters.
Page 0h: Product information, remote signalling, measurements
Page 1h: General remote parameters
Page 2h: Setting group 1 remote parameters
Page 3h: Setting group 2 remote parameters
Page 4h: Remote controls
Pages 5h/6h: Reserved pages
Pages 7h: Quick reading byte
Pages 8h: Time synchronisation (only for P122, P123)
3.1.2 Disturbance records (P122, P123)
Before uploading any disturbance record, a service request must be send to select the
record number to be uploaded.
The answer following this request contain the following information:
1. Numbers of samples (pre and post time)
2. Phase CT ratio
3. Earth CT ratio
4. Internal phase and earth ratios
5. Number of the last disturbance mapping page
6. Number of samples in this last disturbance mapping page
The mapping pages used for this service request are from 38h to 3Ch.
Pages 9h to 21h: Contain the disturbance data (25 pages)
A disturbance mapping page contains 250 words:
0900 à 09FAh: 250 disturbance data words
0A00 à 0AFAh: 250 disturbance data words
0B00 à 0BFAh: 250 disturbance data words
2100 à 21FAh: 250 disturbance data words
The disturbance data pages contain the sample of a single channel from a record.
Page 22h: contains the index of the disturbance
Page 38h à 3Ch: Selection of the disturbance record and channel
Page 3Dh: A dedicated request allows to know the number of disturbance records stored in
SRAM.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 8/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

3.1.3 Event records (P122, P123)

To upload the event records two requests are allowed:
Page 35h: Request to upload an event record without acknowledge of this event.
Used addresses:
3500h: EVENT 1
.....
354Ah: EVENT 75
Page 36h: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored event record.
Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual
acknowledgement
The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h).
If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is
automatic.
In automatic mode, the reading of the event acknowledges the event.
In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest
event.
(set the bit 13 of control word 400 h )
3.1.4 Fault records (P122, P123)
Page 37h: Page dedicated to upload fault record
Used addresses:
3700h: FAULT 1
3701h: FAULT 2
.....
3704h: FAULT 5
Page 3Eh: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored fault record.
Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual
acknowledgement
The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h).
If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is
automatic.
In automatic mode, the reading of the fault acknowledges automatically the event.
In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest fault.
(set the bit 14 of control word 400 h )
3.1.5 Characteristics
Page 0h can only be read through communication.
Pages 1h, 2h, 3h and 4h can be read and write.
Page 7h can be access in quick reading only.
Page 8h can be write (P122, P123 only).
They are describe more precisely in the following chapters.
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/170

3.2 Page 0h (Read access only)

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0000 Product Relay description 32-127 1 - F10 P120 to P123
Information characters 1 and 2
0001 Relay description 32-127 1 - F10 P1 P120 to P123
characters 3 and 4
0002 Relay description 32-127 1 - F10 23 P120 to P123
characters 5 and 6
0003 Unit reference 32-127 1 - F10 AL P120 to P123
characters 1 and 2
0004 Unit reference 32-127 1 - F10 ST P120 to P123
characters 3 and 4
0005 Software version 10-xx 1 - F21 P120 to P123
0006 Front communication 0-3 1 - F41 P122-P123
0007 Internal phase ratio - F1 P122-P123
0008 Internal earth ratio - F1 P122-P123
0009 General start info. 0-1 1 - F1 P120 to P123
000A to Reserved P120 to P123
000C
000D Real Active Setting 1-2 F1 P122-P123
Group (after taking into
account the protection
flags)
000E Password active* - F24 0 P120 to P123
000F Relay status - F45 P120 to P123
0010 Remote Logical inputs 0 to 7 or 1 - F12 P120 to P123
signalling to 31
0011 Logical data 0 to 2n - F20 P120 to P123
FFFF
0012 Internal Logic 0 to 2n - F22 P120 to P123
FFFF
0013 Output contacts 0 to 127 1 - F13 P120 to P123
or to 511
0014 Output information: I> 0 to 1 - F17 P121-P122-
FFFF P123
0015 Output information: 0 to 1 - F17 P121-P122-
I>> FFFF P123
0016 Output information: 0 to 1 - F17 P121-P122-
I>>> FFFF P123
0017 Output information: IE> 0 to 1 - F16 P120 to P123
FFFF
0018 Output information: 0 to 1 - F16 P120 to P123
IE>> FFFF
0019 Output information: 0 to 1 - F16 P120 to P123
IE>>> FFFF

* From the V3.A Software

Does not exist for previous versions.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 10/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
001A I> memorisation 0 to 1 - F17 P121-P122-
FFFF P123
001B I>> memorisation 0 to 1 - F17 P121-P122-
FFFF P123
001C I>>> memorisation 0 to 1 - F17 P121-P122-
FFFF P123
001D tI> memorisation 0 to 1 - F17 P121-P122-
FFFF P123
001E tI>> memorisation 0 to 1 - F17 P121-P122-
FFFF P123
001F tI>>> memorisation 0 to 1 - F17 P121-P122-
FFFF P123
0020 Thermal state 0 to 1 1 - F37 P122-P123
information
0021 Output information: I< 0 to 1 - F17 P122-P123
FFFF
0022 Output information: 0 to 1 - F16 P122-P123
I2> FFFF
0023 Output information: 0 to 1 - F38 P122-P123
broken conductor FFFF
/ CB failure
/ CB alarm
0024 tI< memorisation 0 to 1 - F17 P122-P123
FFFF
0025 Memorised flag for non - F36 P122-P123
acknowledged alarms
0026 Number of disturbance 0 to 5 1 - F31 P122-P123
records available
0027 Tripping output (RL1) 0 to 1 1 - F1 P122-P123
status
0028 CB supervision flag - F43 P122-P123
0029 memorised flag 2 for - F44 P122-P123
non acknowledged
alarms
002A Reserved Logical 0 to 2n - F20 P120 to P123
data FFFF bis
002B Threshold information: 0 to 1 - F16 P122-P123
Iinv>> FFFF
002C to Reserved P120 to P123
002F
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/170

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0030 Remote Phase A current RMS 0 to 1 A/100 F18 P121-
measurements value 600 000 P122-P123
0032 Phase B current RMS 0 to 1 A/100 F18 P121-
value 600 000 P122-P123
0034 Phase C current RMS 0 to 1 A/100 F18 P121-
value 600 000 P122-P123
0036 Earth current RMS 0 to 1 A/100 F18 P120 to
value 120 000 P123
0038 to Reserved P120 to
0039 P123
003A Thermal state (saved) % F1 P122-P123
003B Frequency 4500 to 1 1/100 F1 P120 to
6500 Hz P123
003C Max RMS value phase 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
A 000
003E Max RMS value phase 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
B 000
0040 Max RMS value phase 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
C 000
0042 Average RMS value 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
Phase A 000
0044 Average RMS value 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
Phase B 000
0046 Average RMS value 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
Phase C 000
0048 Harmonic IO* 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
000
004A Inverse Current 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
(fundamental)
004C Direct current 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
004E I2/I1 ratio % F1 P122-P123
004F Reserved P120 to
P123
0050 Fourier Module IA - F1 P121-
Module P122-P123
0051 Module IB - F1 P121-
P122-P123
0052 Module IC - F1 P121-
P122-P123
0053 Module IE - F1 P120 to
P123

* From V3.A Software only

P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 12/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0054 Fourier Argument IA - F1 P121-P122-
Argument P123
0055 Argument IB - F1 P121-P122-
P123
0056 Argument IC - F1 P121-P122-
P123
0057 Argument IO - F1 P120 to
P123
0058 Module I2** - F1 P122-P123
0059 Module I1** - F1 P122-P123
005A Recloser Cycle total number - F1 P123
statistics
005B Cycle 1 number - F1 P123
005C Cycle 2 number - F1 P123
005D Cycle 3 number - F1 P123
005E Cycle 4 number - F1 P123
005F Definitive tripping - F1 P123
number
0060 Closing order number - F1 P123
0061 Rolling Average sliding time 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
Demand window- RMS IA 000
0063 Average sliding time 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
window- RMS IB 000
0065 Average sliding time 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
window- RMS IC 000
0067 Maximum of the sub 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
period average value 000
RMS phase A
0069 Maximum of the sub 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
period average value 000
RMS phase B
006B Maximum of the sub 0 to 600 1 A/100 F18 P122-P123
period average value 000
RMS phase C
006D to Reserved P122-P123
006F
0070 Output information: 0 to 1 - F54 P123
SOTF FFFF

** From V3.B software only

Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/170

3.3 Page 1h
Read and write access

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0100 Remote Address 1 to 255 1 - F1 1 P120 to
parameters P123
0101 Reserved P120 to
P123
0102 Password characters 1 32 -127 1 - F10 AA P120 to
and 2 P123
0103 Password characters 3 32 -127 1 - F10 AA P120 to
and 4 P123
0104 Frequency 50-60 10 Hz F1 50 P120 to
P123
0105 Phase A label ** L1-A-R VTA - F25 A P121-
P122-P123
0106 Phase B label ** L2-B-S VTA - F25 B P121-
P122-P123
0107 Phase C label ** L3-C-T VTA - F25 C P121-
P122-P123
0108 Earth label *** N-G-E VTA - F25 N P120 to
P123
0109 Fault display *** 1-4 1 - F26 1 P120 to
P123
010A User reference 32-127 1 F10 AL P120 to
(characters 1 and 2) P123
010B User reference 32-127 1 F10 ST P120 to
(characters 3 and 4) P123
010C Fault number to be 1-5 1 F31 5 P122-P123
displayed
010D Configuration of EDGE 0 F12 0 P122-P123
validation of logic inputs
010E Instantaneous fault 1-5 1 F31 5 P122-P123
number to be displayed
010F Voltage Type applied to 0-1 1 F50 0 P122-P123
the logic inputs
0110 CB monitoring Operation number 1 - F1 P122-P123
measurements
0111 CB Operating time 1 1/100 F1 P122-P123
sec
0112 Switched square Amps An F18 P122-P123
phase A sum
0114 Switched square Amps An F18 P122-P123
phase B sum
0116 Switched square Amps An F18 P122-P123
phase C sum
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 14/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0118 CB Closing time 1/100 F1 P122-P123
sec
0119 to Reserved P120 to
011D P123
011E Maintenance mode P122-P123
011F Relays Latching F14 P121-
P122-P123
0120 Ratio Primary phase CT value 1 to 1 - F1 1000 P121-
50000* P122-P123
0121 Secondary phase CT 1 to 5 4 - F1 1 P121-
value P122-P123
0122 Primary earth CT value 1 to 1 - F1 1000 P120 to
50000* P123
0123 Secondary earth CT 1 to 5 4 - F1 1 P120 to
value P123
0124 to Reserved P120 to
012E P123
012F Rotation phase sequence 0 to 1 1 - F51 0 P121-
P122-P123
0130 Communication Speed 0 to 7 1 - F4 6= P120 to
19200 P123
bds
0131 Parity 0 to 2 1 - F5 0= P120 to
without P123
0132 Data bits 0 to 1 1 - F28 1 = 8 bits P120 to
P123
0133 Stop bit 0 to 1 1 - F29 0=1 P120 to
stop bit P123
0134 COM available 0 to 1 1 - F30 1=COM P120 to
available P123
0135 Date Format 0 to 1 1 - F48 0= P122-P123
Private
0136 to Reserved 0 P120 to
013F P123
0140 Configuration Setting group 1 to 2 1 - F1 1 P122-P123
0141 Validation of 0 to 1 1 - F1 0 P122-P123
instantaneous alarms
auto reset
0142 Configuration of change 0 to 1 1 - F47 1 P122-P123
of group selection
0143 Battery alarm and RAM 0 to 1 1 - F1 0 P122-P123
error configuration
0144 Configuration of LED 0 to 1 1 F1 0 P122-P123
reset on fault
0145 to Reserved 0 P120 to
0149 P123
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/170

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
014A Output Relay Max I2>> 0 to 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
allocation
014B to Reserved P120 to
014F P123
0150 LEDs Led 5 1 - F19 4 P120 to
allocation P123
0151 Led 6 1 - F19 16 P120 to
P123
0152 Led 7 1 - F19 32 P120 to
P123
0153 Led 8 1 F19 64 P120 to
P123
0154 Led PF 5 1 F19' 0 P122-P123
0155 Led PF 6 1 F19' 0 P122-P123
0156 Led PF 7 1 F19' 0 P122-P123
0157 Led PF 8 1 F19' 0 P122-P123
0158 to Reserved P122-P123
015A
015B Logic input Logic input 1 VTA - F15 0 P122-P123
allocation Bis
015C Logic input 2 VTA - F15 0 P122-P123
Bis
015D Logic input 3 VTA - F15 0 P122-P123
Bis
015E Logic input 4 VTA - F15 0 P122-P123
Bis
015F Logic input 5 VTA - F15 0 P122-P123
Bis

* From the V6.E Software

From the V3.A Software to V6.E: 1 to 9999.
For the previous versions: 1 to 3000.
** For addresses n°0105, 0106, 0107: for P121, these information are available until the
V2.X software. For the following versions, they are suppressed
*** For addresses n°0108 and 0109: for P120, P121, these information are available until
the V2.X software. For the following versions, they are suppressed.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 16/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0160 Logic input Logic input 1 VTA - F15 0 P120 to
allocation P123
0161 Logic input 2 VTA - F15 0 P120 to
P123
0162 Logic input 3 VTA - F15 0 P122-P123
0163 Logic input 4 VTA - F15 0 P123
0164 Logic input 5 VTA - F15 0 P123
0165 Output relay Broken conductor 0-31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
allocation detection
0166 CB failure 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
0167 I< 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
0168 I2> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
0169 Thermal overload alarm 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
016A Thermal overload trip 0-31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
016B CB close 0-31 1 - F14 0 P121-
P122-P123
016C tAUX1 0-31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
016D tAUX2 0-31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
E
016 CB alarms 0-31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
016F Trip circuit 0-31 1 - F14 0 P123
0170 Active setting group 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
If active group =2 than
output =1
0171 Trip 0 - 31 1 - F14 1 P120 to
P123
0172 tI> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P121-
P122-P123
0173 tI>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P121-
P122-P123
0174 tI>>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P121-
P122-P123
0175 tIE> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P120 to
P123
0176 tIE>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P120 to
P123
0177 tIE>>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P120 to
P123
0178 I> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P121-
P122-P123
0179 I>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P121-
P122-P123
017A I>>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P121-
P122-P123
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/170

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
017B IE> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P120 to
P123
017C IE>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P120 to
P123
017D IE>>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P120 to
P123
017E Recloser running 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P123
017F Recloser final trip 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P123
0180 Automation Trip 0 to 63 1 - F6 1 P120 to
P123
0181 Relay latching 0 to 63 1 - F8 0 P120 to
P123
0182 Blocking logic 1 0 to 63 1 - F8' 0 P120 to
P123
0183 Blocking logic 2 0 to 63 1 - F8' 0 P122-P123
0184 Broken conductor 0-1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
detection
0185 tBC 0 to 14400 1 - F1 0 P122-P123
0186 Cold load start 0-1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
0187 Cold load start thresholds 0 to 255 1 - F33 0 P122-P123
0188 Cold load start % 100 to 500 1 F1 50 P122-P123
0189 Cold load start delay 1 to 36000* 1 1/10 s F1 10 P122-P123
018A CB failure 0-1 1 F24 0 P122-P123
018B tBF 0 to 1000 1 1/100 F1 10 P122-P123
s
018C Logic Selectivity1 0 to 15 1 - F40 0 P122-P123
018D tSEL1 0 to 15000 1 1/100 F1 0 P122-P123
s
018E Logic Selectivity2 0 to 15 1 - F40 0 P122-P123
018F tSEL2 0 to 15000 1 1/100 F1 0 P122-P123
s
0190 Disturbance Pre-time 1 to 30 1 - F1 1 P122-P123
0191 Post-time 1 to 30 1 - F1 1 P122-P123
0192 Disturbance starting 0-1 1 - F32 0 P122-P123
condition

* From the V3.A Software

For the previous versions: 10 to 360, Step 5, unit 1/100s.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 18/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0193 CB monitoring Operating time 0-1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
0194 Operating time threshold 5 to 100 5 1/100 s F1 5 P122-P123
0195 Operation number 0-1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
0196 Operation number 0 - 50000 1 - F1 0 P122-P123
threshold
0197 CB switched Amps sum 0-1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
(Power n)
0198 CB switched Amps sum 0 to 10E6 An F3 P122-P123
threshold 4000
0199 Amps or square Amps 1-2 1 F1 1 P122-P123
019A Closing time threshold 5 to 100 5 1/100 s F1 0 P122-P123
019B Auxiliary timer 1 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P122-P123
019C Auxiliary timer 2 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P122-P123
019D Peak value 5 to 60 VTA min F42 5 P122-P123
019E I2/I1 threshold 20 to 100 1 % F1 20 P122-P123
019F Tripping time 10 to 500 5 1/100 s F1 10 P122-P123
01A0 Closing time 10 to 500 5 1/100 s F1 10 P122-P123
01A1 Closing time threshold 0-1 1 F24 0 P122-P123
validation
01A2 Trip circuit supervision 0-1 1 F24 0 P122-P123
validation
01A3 t SUP 10 to 1000 5 1/100 s F1 10 P122-P123
01A4 I< threshold CB failure 10 - 100 1 %In F1 10 P122-P123
01A5 Instantaneous phase 0–1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
blocking if CB failure
01A6 Instantaneous earth 0–1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
blocking if CB failure
01A7 Rolling Sub period 0 – 60 1 min F1 P122-P123
Demand
01A8 Sub period number 0 – 24 1 - F1 P122-P123
01A9 Output relay Communication Order 1* 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
allocation
01AA Communication Order 2* 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
01AB Communication Order 3* 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
01AC Communication Order 4* 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
01AD T comm 1* 10 – 500 5 1/100s F1 10 P122-P123
01AE T comm 2* 10 – 500 5 1/100s F1 10 P122-P123
01AF T comm 3* 10 – 500 5 1/100s F1 10 P122-P123
01B0 T comm 4* 10 – 500 5 1/100s F1 10 P122-P123
01B1 tEXT 3 0 – 31 1 - F14 0 P122-P123
01B2 tEXT 4 0 – 31 1 - F14 0 P123
01B3 Auxiliary timer3 0 – 20000 1 1/100s F1 0 P122-P123
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 19/170

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
01B4 Auxiliary timer4 0 – 20000 1 1/100s F1 0 P123
01B5 to Reserved P120 to
01BF P123
01C0 to Reserved ** P123
01F5
01F6 Remote trip** 0 – 31 1 - F14 0 P123
01F7 Remote close** 0 – 31 1 - F14 0 P123
01F8 SOFT function** 0–1 1 - F52 0 P123
01F9 SOFT timer** 0 - 500 1 1/1000s F1 0 P123
01FA SOFT parameter I>> or 0-1 1 - F53 0 P123
I>>>**
01FB Trip bis** 0 to 63 1 - F6’ 0 P123
01FC Relay latching bis** 0 to 63 1 - F7 0 P123
01FD Output relay SOFT** 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P123
allocation
01FE Output relay Locked recloser *** 0 - 31 1 - F14 0 P123
allocation

* From V5.D
** From V6.C
*** From V6.G
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 20/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

3.4 Page 2h (Access in reading and in writing)

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0200 Setting group I> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P121-P122-
1 P123
0201 I> threshold 10 to 2500 1 In/100 F1 10 P121-P122-
P123
0202 I> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0 P121-P122-
P123
0203 I> IDMT Curve Type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1 P121-P122-
P123
0204 I> TMS value 25 to 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P121-P122-
P123
0205 I> K value (RI curve) 100 to 10000 5 1/1000 F1 100 P121-P122-
P123
0206 tI> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P121-P122-
P123
0207 I> Reset type 0-1 1 F27 0 P122-P123
0208 I> RTMS value 25 to 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0209 I> tRESET value 4 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P122-P123
020A to Reserved 0 P120 to
020F P123
0210 I>> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P121-P122-
P123
0211 I>> Threshold 50 to 4000 5 In/100 F1 50 P121-P122-
P123
0212 tI>> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P121-P122-
P123
0213 I>> time delay type 0–2 1 - F27 0 P122-P123
0214 I>> IDMT curve type 0 – 10 1 - F3 1 P122-P123
0215 I>> TMS value 25 – 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0216 K value (RI curve) 100 – 10000 5 1/1000 F1 100 P122-P123
0217 I>> Reset Type 0–1 1 - F27 0 P122-P123
0218 I>> RTMS value 25 – 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0219 I>> tRESET value 4 – 10000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P122-P123
021A to Reserved 0 P120 to
021F P123
0220 I>>> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P121-P122-
P123
0221 I>>> Threshold 50 to 4000 5 In/100 F1 50 P121-P122-
P123
0222 tI>>> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P121-P122-
P123
0223 I>>> on sample 0–1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
0223 to Reserved 0 P120 to
022F P123
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 21/170

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0230 IE> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P120 to
P123
0231 IE> Threshold 10 to 1000 5 1/1000 F1 10 P120 to
I0n P123
0232 IE> time delay type 0 to 3 1 - F27’ 0 P120 to
P123
0233 IE> IDMT curve type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1 P120 to
P123
0234 IE> TMS value 25 to 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P120 to
P123
0235 IE> K value (RI curve) 100 to 10000 5 1/1000 F1 100 P120 to
P123
0236 tIE> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P120 to
P123
0237 IE> reset type 0-1 1 F27 0 P122-P123
0238 IE> RTMS value 25 to 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0239 IE> tRESET value 4 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P122-P123
023A IE> Curve type 0–2 0 1 F3’ 0 P122-P123
(Belgium)
023B to Reserved P120 to
023F P123
0240 IE>> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P120 to
P123
0241 IE>> Threshold 10 to 8000 5 1/1000 F1 10 P120 to
I0n P123
0242 tIE>> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P120 to
P123
0243 IE>> time delay type 0 to 3 1 - F27’ 0 P122-P123
0244 IE>> IDMT curve type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1 P122-P123
0245 IE>> TMS value 25 to 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0246 IE>> K value 100 to 10000 5 1/1000 F1 100 P122-P123
(RI curve)
0247 TReset Type 0–1 1 - F27 0 P122-P123
0248 Time Multiplier 25 – 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
TDMS
0249 TReset 4 – 10000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P122-P123
024A Curve Type 0–2 0 1 F3’ 0 P122-P123
(Belgium)
024B to Reserved 0 P120 to
024E P123
024F IE>> on sample 0–1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
0250 IE>>> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P120 to
P123
0251 IE>>> Threshold 10 to 8000 5 1/1000 F1 10 P120 to
I0n P123
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 22/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0252 tIE>>>value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P120 to
P123
0253 Ith> 0-1 1 F24 0 P122-P123
0254 Ith> Threshold 10 to 320 5 1/100 F1 8 P122-P123
0255 Ith> k value 100 to 150 1 1/100 F1 105 P122-P123
0256 Ith> trip threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 100 P122-P123
0257 Ith> alarm 0-1 1 F24 0 P122-P123
0258 Ith> alarm threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 90 P122-P123
0259 Thermal overload time 1 to 200 1 mn F1 1 P122-P123
constant
025A I< 0-1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
025B I< threshold 0 to 100 1 % In F1 20 P122-P123
025C I2> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
025D I2> threshold 10 to 4000 1 In/100 F1 10 P122-P123
025E I2> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0 P122-P123
025F I2> IDMT type 0 to 9 1 - F3 1 P122-P123
0260 I2> TMS value 25 to 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0261 I2> K value (RI) 100 to 10000 5 1/1000 F1 100 P122-P123
0262 tI2> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 P122-P123
0263 I2> Reset type 0-1 1 F27 0 P122-P123
0264 I2> RTMS value 25 to 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0265 I2> tRESET value 4 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P122-P123
0266 Iinv>> 0–1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
0267 Iinv>> Threshold 10 – 4000 1 1/100 In F24 10 P122-P123
0268 tIinv>> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 P122-P123
0269 to Reserved 0 P120 to
026E P123
026F tI< value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 P122-P123
0270 AR Recloser valid 0-1 1 F24 0 P123
0271 CB position active 0-1 1 F1 0 P123
0272- Supervision window 1 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 1 P123
0273
0274 External blocking input 0 – 1 1 F24 0 P123
0275 to Reserved P120 to
0276 P123
0277 Dead time 1 0 to 30000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P123
0278 Dead time 2 0 to 30000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P123
0279- Dead time 3 0 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 1 P123
027A
027B- Dead time 4 0 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 1 P123
027C
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 23/170

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
027D- Reclaim time 2 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 2 P123
027E
027F- Inhibit time 2 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 2 P123
0280
0281 Recloser cycles for 0 to 4 1 F1 0 P123
phase faults
0282 Recloser cycles for 0 to 4 1 F1 0 P123
earth faults
0283 I> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0284 I>> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0285 I>>> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0286 IE> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0287 IE>> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0288 IE>>> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0289 TAUX1 cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
028A TAUX2 cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 24/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

3.5 Page 3h (Access in reading and in writing)

Values Fault Range

Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0300 Setting group I> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P121-P122-
2 P123
0301 I> threshold 10 to 2500 1 In/100 F1 10 P121-P122-
P123
0302 I> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0 P121-P122-
P123
0303 I> IDMT Curve Type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1 P121-P122-
P123
0304 I> TMS value 25 to 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P121-P122-
P123
0305 I> K value (RI curve) 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100 P121-P122-
10000 P123
0306 tI> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P121-P122-
P123
0307 I> Reset type 0-1 1 F27 0 P122-P123
0308 I> RTMS value 25 to 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0309 I> tRESET value 4 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P122-P123
030A to Reserved 0 P120 to
030F P123
0310 I>> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P121-P122-
P123
0311 I>> Threshold 50 to 4000 5 In/100 F1 50 P121-P122-
P123
0312 tI>> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P121-P122-
P123
0313 I>> time delay type 0–2 1 - F27 0 P122-P123
0314 I>> IDMT curve type 0 – 10 1 - F3 1 P122-P123
0315 I>> TMS value 25 – 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0316 K value (RI curve) 100 – 5 1/1000 F1 100 P122-P123
10000
0317 I>> Reset Type 0–1 1 - F27 0 P122-P123
0318 I>> RTMS value 25 – 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0319 I>> tRESET value 4 – 10000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P122-P123
031A to Reserved 0 P120 to
031F P123
0320 I>>> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P121-P122-
P123
0321 I>>> Threshold 50 to 4000 5 In/100 F1 50 P121-P122-
P123
0322 tI>>> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P121-P122-
P123
0323 to Reserved 0 P120 to
032F P123
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/170

Values Fault Range

Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0330 IE> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P120 to
P123
0331 IE> Threshold 10 to 1000 5 1/1000 F1 10 P120 to
I0n P123
0332 IE> time delay type 0 to 3 1 - F27’ 0 P120 to
P123
0333 IE> IDMT curve type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1 P120 to
P123
0334 IE> TMS value 25 to 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P120 to
P123
0335 IE> K value (RI curve) 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100 P120 to
10000 P123
0336 tIE> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P120 to
P123
0337 IE> reset type 0-1 1 F27 0 P122-P123
0338 IE> RTMS value 25 to 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0339 IE> tRESET value 4 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P122-P123
033A IE> Curve type (Belgium) 0 – 2 0 1 F3’ 0 P122-P123
033B to Reserved P120 to
033F P123
0340 IE>> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P120 to
P123
0341 IE>> Threshold 10 to 8000 5 1/1000 F1 10 P120 to
I0n P123
0342 tIE>> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P120 to
P123
0343 IE>> time delay type 0 to 3 1 - F27’ 0 P122-P123
0344 IE>> IDMT curve type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1 P122-P123
0345 IE>> TMS value 25 to 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0346 IE>> K value 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100 P122-P123
(RI curve) 10000
0347 TReset Type 0–1 1 - F27 0 P122-P123
0348 Time Multiplier 25 – 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
TDMS
0349 TReset 4 – 10000 1 1/100 F1 4 P122-P123
sec
034A Curve Type 0–2 0 1 F3’ 0 P122-P123
(Belgium)
034B to Reserved 0 P120 to
034F P123
0350 IE>>> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P120 to
P123
0351 IE>>> Threshold 10 to 8000 5 1/1000 F1 10 P120 to
I0n P123
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 26/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values Fault Range

Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0352 tIE>>>value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P120 to
P123
0353 Ith> 0-1 1 F24 0 P122-P123
0354 Ith> Threshold 10 to 320 5 1/100 F1 8 P122-P123
0355 Ith> k value 100 to 150 1 1/100 F1 105 P122-P123
0356 Ith> trip threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 100 P122-P123
0357 Ith> alarm 0-1 1 F24 0 P122-P123
0358 Ith> alarm threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 90 P122-P123
0359 Thermal overload time 1 to 200 1 mn F1 1 P122-P123
constant
035A I< 0-1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
035B I< threshold 0 to 100 1 % In F1 20 P122-P123
035C I2> 0-1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
035D I2> threshold 10 to 4000 1 In/100 F1 10 P122-P123
035E I2> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0 P122-P123
035F I2> IDMT type 0 to 9 1 - F3 1 P122-P123
0360 I2> TMS value 25 to 1500 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0361 I2> K value (RI) 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100 P122-P123
10000
0362 tI2> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 P122-P123
0363 I2> Reset type 0-1 1 F27 0 P122-P123
0364 I2> RTMS value 25 to 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123
0365 I2> tRESET value 4 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 4 P122-P123
0366 Iinv>> 0–1 1 - F24 0 P122-P123
0367 Iinv>> Threshold 10 – 4000 1 1/100 F24 10 P122-P123
In
0368 tIinv>> value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 P122-P123
0369 to Reserved 0 P120 to
036E P123
036F tI< value 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 P122-P123
0370 AR Recloser valid 0-1 1 F24 0 P123
0371 CB position active 0-1 1 F1 0 P123
0372- Supervision window 1 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 1 P123
0373
0374 External blocking input 0–1 1 F24 0 P123
0375 to Reserved P120 to
0376 P123
0377 Dead time 1 0 to 30000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P123
0378 Dead time 2 0 to 30000 1 1/100 s F1 1 P123
0379- Dead time 3 0 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 1 P123
037A
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/170

Values Fault Range

Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
037B- Dead time 4 0 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 1 P123
037C
037D- Reclaim time 2 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 2 P123
037E
037F- Inhibit time 2 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 2 P123
0380
0381 Recloser cycles for 0 to 4 1 F1 0 P123
phase faults
0382 Recloser cycles for earth 0 to 4 1 F1 0 P123
faults
0383 I> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0384 I>> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0385 I>>> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0386 IE> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0387 IE>> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0388 IE>>> Phase cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
0389 TAUX1 cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration
038A TAUX2 cycle 0 – 2222 1 F49 0 P123
configuration

3.6 Page 4h
Access in writing

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0400 Remote Remote control word 1 0 to 31 1 - F9 0 P120 to
control P123
0401 Reserved 0 P120 to
P123
0402 Remote control word 2 0 to 511 1 - F39 0 P122-P123
(single output command)
0403 Remote control word 3 0 to 1 1 - F46 0 P122-P123

3.7 Pages 5h/6h

These pages are reserved
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 28/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

3.8 Page 7h
Access in quick reading only (MODBUS 07 function)

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0700 Quick Description of the 1 - F23 0
reading byte protection autocontrol

3.9 Page 8h (P122, P123)

Time synchronisation: access in writing for n words (function 16). The time synchronisation
format is based on 8 bits (4 words).
If date Format (0135h) is private date then format is:

Timer @page Nb bits Values range Unit

Year pF+pf 8 2 Year
Month 8 1 1 - 12 Month
Day 8 1 1 - 31 Day
Hour 8 1 0 - 23 Hour
Minute 8 1 0 - 59 Minute
Millisecond pF+pf 8 2 0 - 59999 Ms

Else format is ( Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a):

Timer @page Nb bits Values range Unit

8 1 0
Year 8 1 0 – 99 Year
Month 8 1 1 – 12 Month
Day of Week / 8 1 1 – 12 Day
Day of Month 1 – 31
Summer time / 00/ 8 1 0 –1 / 00 / Hour
Hour 0 – 23
Invalidity/ 8 1 0-1 / 0 / Minute
Minute 0 – 59
Millisecond pF+pf 8 2 0 – 59999 Ms
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 29/170

3.10 Mapping Access Characteristics

• Description of accessible addresses in reading of words (function 03 and 04).

P121
PAGE 00h PAGE 01h PAGE 02h
0000h to 006Fh 0100h to 0190h 0200h to 025Fh
PAGE 03h PAGE 05h
0300h to 035Fh 0500h to 052Ah
P122, P123
PAGE 00h PAGE 01h PAGE 02h
0000h to 006Fh 0100h to 01BFh 0200h to 028Ah
PAGE 03h PAGE 05h
0300h to 038Ah 0500h to 052Ch

• Description of accessible addresses in writing of 1 word (function 06).

P121
PAGE 01h PAGE 02h PAGE 03h
0100h to 0190h 0200h to 025Fh 0300h to 035Fh
PAGE 04h PAGE 05h
0400h to 0403h 0500h to 052Ah
P122, P123
PAGE 01h PAGE 02h PAGE 03h
0100h to 01BFh 0200h to 028Ah 0300h to 038Ah
PAGE 04h PAGE 05h
0400h to 0403h 0500h to 052Ch

• Description of accessible addresses in writing of n words (function 16).

P121
PAGE 01h PAGE 02h
0100h to 0190h 0200h to 025Fh
PAGE 03h PAGE 05h
0300h to 035Fh 0500h to 052Ah
P122, P123
PAGE 01h PAGE 02h PAGE 03h
0100h to 01BFh 0200h to 028Ah 0300h to 038Ah
PAGE 05h PAGE 08h
0500h to 052Ch 0800h to 0803h

• Description of accessible addresses in reading of bits (function 01 and 02).

WARNING: THE BITS NUMBER MUST NOT BE HIGHER THAN16. ADDRESSES ARE
GIVEN IN BIT ADDRESSES.
P121:
PAGE 00h PAGE 01h
0100h to 01F0h 1500h to 1830h
P122, P123:
PAGE 00h PAGE 01h
0100h to 0250h 1500h to 1830h
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 30/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

• Description of accessible addresses in writing of 1 bit (function 05).

WARNING: THE BITS NUMBER MUST NOT BE HIGHER THAN 16.
P121, P122, P123:
PAGE 04h
4000h to 4002h

• Description of accessible addresses in writing of n bits (function 15).

WARNING: THE BITS NUMBER MUST NOT BE HIGHER THAN 16.
P121, P122, P123:
PAGE 01h PAGE 04h
1500h to 1830h 4000h to 400Fh and
4030h to 403Fh (only P122, P123)
3.11 Pages 9h to 21h
Disturbance record data (25 pages). Access in words writing (function 03)
Each disturbance mapping page contain 250 words.

Addresses Contents
0900h to 09FAh 250 disturbance data words
0A00h to 0AFAh 250 disturbance data words
0B00h to 0BFAh 250 disturbance data words
0C00h to 0CFAh 250 disturbance data words
0D00h to 0DFAh 250 disturbance data words
0E00h to 0EFAh 250 disturbance data words
0F00h to 0FFAh 250 disturbance data words
1000h to 10FAh 250 disturbance data words
1100h to 11FAh 250 disturbance data words
1200h to 12FAh 250 disturbance data words
1300h to 13FAh 250 disturbance data words
1400h to 14FAh 250 disturbance data words
1500h to 15FAh 250 disturbance data words
1600h to 16FAh 250 disturbance data words
1700h to 17FAh 250 disturbance data words
1800h to 18FAh 250 disturbance data words
1900h to 19FAh 250 disturbance data words
1A00h to 1AFAh 250 disturbance data words
1B00h to 1BFAh 250 disturbance data words
1C00h to 1CFAh 250 disturbance data words
1D00h to 1DFAh 250 disturbance data words
1E00h to 1EFAh 250 disturbance data words
1F00h to 1FFAh 250 disturbance data words
2000h to 20FAh 250 disturbance data words
2100h to 21FAh 250 disturbance data words

NB: The disturbance data pages contain values of one channel from one
given disturbance record.
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 31/170

3.11.1 Meaning of each value channel

• IA, IB, IC and IO channels:

The value is an signed 16 bits word equivalent to the ADC value
3.11.2 Calculation formula for phase current values
Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11, 12 or 13)
* phase primary CT / phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007) *√2
3.11.3 Calculation formula for earth current values
The formula depends of nominal earth current:
0.1 to 40 Ion range
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth
primary CT / earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=800) *√2
0.01 to 8 Ion range
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth
primary CT / earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=3277) *√2
0.002 to 1 Ion range
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth
primary CT / earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=32700) *√2

• Frequency channel:
Time between two samples in microseconds

• Logic channels:

Logic channel Contents

Bit 0 Trip relay (RL1)
Bit 1 Output relay 2 (RL2)
Bit 2 Output relay 3 (RL3)
Bit 3 Output relay 4 (RL4)
Bit 4 Watch-dog relay (RL0)
Bit 5 Output relay 5 (RL5)
Bit 6 Output relay 6 (RL6)
Bit 7 Output relay 7 (RL7)
Bit 8 Output relay 8 (RL8)
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Logic input 1 (EL1)
Bit 11 Logic input 2 (EL2)
Bit 12 Logic input 3 (EL3)
Bit 13 Logic input 4 (EL4)
Bit 14 Logic input 5 (EL5)
Bit 15 Reserved
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 32/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

3.12 Page 22h

Disturbance record index frame (7 to 9 Words)
Access in word reading (function 03)

Addresses Contents
2200h Disturbance data index frame

Disturbance record index frame

Word Contents
n° 1 Disturbance record number
n° 2 Disturbance record finish date (second)
n° 3 Disturbance record finish date (second)
n° 4 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
n° 5 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
n° 6 Disturbance record starting condition:
1: tripping command (RL1)
2: instantaneous
3: remote command
4: logic input
n° 7 Frequency at the post-time beginning
n° 8 (=0) Optional
n° 9 (=0) Optional

3.13 Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah)

Event record data (9 words)
Word n° 1: Event meaning
Word n° 2: MODBUS associated value
Word n° 3: MODBUS address
Word n° 4: COURIER Cell address
Words n° 5 & 6 if data format is private:
Event date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94
Words n° 7 & 8 if data format is private:
Event date (millisecond)
Words N°5, 6, 7, 8, if data format is Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
See format § 3.9 Page 8h (P122, P123)
Word n° 9: Acknowledge
0=event non acknowledged
1= event acknowledged
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 33/170

MODBUS COURIER
Code Meaning of the event Type
address Cell
00 No event - -
01 Remote closing F9 013h 021
02 Remote tripping F9 013h 021
03 Disturbance recording start F9 -
04 Trip output delatch F9 013h 021
05 Setting change Address -
06 Remote thermal reset F9 -
07 Maintenance Mode F9 ↑ ↓ 0400h -
08 Control relay in maintenance mode F39 ↑ ↓ 013h -
09 I> F17 ↑ ↓ 014h 023
10 I>> F17 ↑ ↓ 015h 023
11 I>>> F17 ↑ ↓ 016h 023
12 IE> F16 ↑ ↓ 017h 023
13 IE>> F16 ↑ ↓ 018h 023
14 IE>>> F16 ↑ ↓ 019h 023
15 Thermal overload alarm F37 ↑ ↓ 020h 023
16 Thermal overload threshold F37 ↑ ↓ 020h 023
17 tI> F17 ↑ ↓ 014h 023
18 tI>> F17 ↑ ↓ 015h 023
19 tI>>> F17 ↑ ↓ 016h 023
20 tIE> F16 ↑ ↓ 017h 023
21 tIE>> F16 ↑ ↓ 018h 023
22 tIE>>> F16 ↑ ↓ 019h 023
23 tI< F16 ↑ ↓ 021h 023
24 Broken conductor F38 ↑ ↓ 023h 024
25 t Aux 1 F38 ↑ ↓ 023h 024
26 t Aux 2 F38 ↑ ↓ 023h 024
27 CB failure F38 ↑ ↓ 023h 024
28 Selective scheme logic 1 F20 ↑ ↓ 011h 020
29 Selective scheme logic 2 F20 ↑ ↓ 011h 020
30 Blocking logic 1 F20 ↑ ↓ 011h 020
31 Blocking logic 2 F20 ↑ ↓ 011h 020
32 Setting group change F20 011h 020
33 52a F20 ↑ ↓ 011h 020
34 52b F20 ↑ ↓ 011h 020
35 Acknowledgement of the output F20 ↑ ↓ 011h 020
relay latched, by logic input,
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 34/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

MODBUS COURIER
Code Meaning of the event Type
address Cell
36 SF6 F20 ↑ ↓ 011h 020
37 Cold load start F20 ↑ ↓ 011h 020
38 Change of input logic state F12 ↑ ↓ 010h 020
39 Thermal overload trip F37 013h 021
40 tI> trip F13 013h 021
41 tI>> trip F13 013h 021
42 tI>>> trip F13 013h 021
43 tIE> trip F13 013h 021
44 tIE>> trip F13 013h 021
45 tIE>>> trip F13 013h 021
46 tI< trip F13 013h 021
47 Broken conductor trip F13 013h 021
48 tAUX 1 trip F13 013h 021
49 tAUX 2 trip F13 013h 021
50 Output relays command F39 ↑ ↓ 013h 021
51 Front panel single alarm acknowl. - -
52 Front panel all alarms acknowledge - -
53 Remote single alarm acknowledge - -
54 Remote all alarms acknowledge - -
55 Major material alarm F45 ↑ ↓ 00Fh 022
56 Minor material alarm F45 ↑ ↓ 00Fh 022
57 I2> F16 ↑ ↓ 022h 024
58 tI2> F16 ↑ ↓ 022h 024
59 Operation time F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 024
60 Operation numbers F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 024
61 Sum of switched square amps F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 024
62 Trip circuit supervision F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 024
63 Closing time F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 024
64 Reclose successful F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 024
65 Recloser final trip F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 025
66 Recloser settings error or F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 024
configuration error
67 I2> trip F16 ↑ ↓ 013h 021
68 General Starting (IEC103) F1 ↑ ↓ 009h -
69 Recloser active (IEC103) F43 ↑ ↓ 028h -
70 CB Closed by autoreclosure -
(IEC103)
71 Relays latching F13 02Eh -
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 35/170

MODBUS COURIER
Code Meaning of the event Type
address Cell
72 External CB failure F20 bis ↑ ↓ 02Ah 020
73 I< F16 ↑ ↓ 021h 023
74 I2>> F16 ↑ ↓ 022h 024
75 tI2>> F16 ↑ ↓ 022h 024
76 I2>> Trip F16 ↑ ↓ 013h 021
77 Reserved
78 Latching Trip Relay (RL1) - - -
79 t AUX3 F38 023h 025
80 t AUX3 TRIP F13 013h 021
81 t AUX4 F38 023h 025
82 t AUX4 TRIP F13 013h 021
83 t Reset I> F17 ↑ ↓ 014h 025
84 t Reset I>> F17 ↑ ↓ 015h 025
85 t Reset Ie> F16 ↑ ↓ 017h 025
86 t Reset Ie>> F16 ↑ ↓ 018h 025
87 t Reset I2> F16 ↑ ↓ 022h 025
88 TRIP Breaker Failure F13 013h 021
89 t BF / Ext. Breaker Failure F38 023h 025
90 Manual Close (input) F20 bis ↑ ↓ 02Ah 020
91 t SOTF F54 070h 025
92 TRIP t SOTF F13 013h 021
93 Local Mode (IEC 103) F20 bis ↑ ↓ 02Ah 020
94 Reset leds (IEC103)
95 Recloser locked F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 024
96 Recloser in progress F43 ↑ ↓ 028h 025

NOTA: The double arrow ↑ ↓ means the event is generated on event

occurrence (↑) and on event disappearance (↓).
On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is
set to « 1 ».
On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated
format is set to « 0 ».
3.14 Page 36h
Most older event data
Access in word reading (function 03)

Addresses Contents
3600h Most older event data
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 36/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

3.15 Page 37h

Fault record value data
Access in word reading (function 03)

Addresses Contents
3700h Fault value record n°1
3701h Fault value record n°2
3702h Fault value record n°3
3703h Fault value record n°4
3704h Fault value record n°5

Word n° 1: Fault number

Words n° 2 & 3 if data format is private:
Event date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94
Words n° 4 & 5 if data format is private:
Event date (millisecond)
Word n° 6 if data format is private:
Fault date (season)
0= winter
1= summer
2= undefined
Words n° 5, 6, 7, 8, if data format is Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
See format § 3.9 Page 8h (P122, P123)
Word n° 6 if data format is Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
Null value
Word n° 7: Active setting group during the fault (1 or 2)
Word n° 8: Fault origin
0= none
1= phase A
2= phase B
3= phase C
4= phases A-B
5= phases A-C
6= phases B-C
7= phases A-B-C
8= earth
Word n° 9: Fault recording starting origin
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 37/170

3.15.1 Fault nature code meaning

Code Fault origin

00 Null event
01 Remote trip
02 Thermal overload trip
03 tI> trip
04 tI>> trip
05 tI>>> trip
06 tIE> trip
07 tIE>> trip
08 tIE>>> trip
09 tI< trip
10 Broken conductor trip
11 t Aux 1 trip
12 t Aux 2 trip
13 tI2> trip
14 tI2>> trip
15 t Aux 3 trip
16 t Aux 4 trip
17 Breaker Failure Trip
18 SOTF

Word n° 10: Fault value current (fundamental value)

Word n° 11: Phase A current value (True RMS value)
Word n° 12: Phase B current value (True RMS value)
Word n° 13: Phase C current value (True RMS value)
Word n° 14: Earth current value (True RMS value)
Word n° 15: Acknowledge of fault 0: fault non-acknowledged
1: fault acknowledged
3.15.2 Calculation formula for phase current values
Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11, 12 or 13)
* phase primary CT / phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007)
3.15.3 Calculation formula for earth current values
The formula depends of nominal earth current:
0.1 to 40 Ion range
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth
primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=800)
0.01 to 8 Ion range
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth
primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=3277)
0.002 to 1 Ion range
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth
primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=32700)
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 38/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

3.16 Page 3Eh

Most older Fault record value data
Access in word reading (function 03)

Addresses Contents
3E00h Most older Fault record

3.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch

Selection of the disturbance record and channel (11 to 13 words are uploaded for each
address reading)
Access in word reading (function 03)

Address Disturbance record number Format

3800h 1 IA
3801h 1 IB
3802h 1 IC
3803h 1 IE
3804h 1 Frequency
3805h 1 Logic input and outputs
3900h 2 IA
3901h 2 IB
3902h 2 IC
3903h 2 IE
3904h 2 Frequency
3905h 2 Logic input and outputs
3A00h 3 IA
3A01h 3 IB
3A02h 3 IC
3A03h 3 IE
3A04h 3 Frequency
3A05h 3 Logic input and outputs
3B00h 4 IA
3B01h 4 IB
3B02h 4 IC
3B03h 4 IE
3B04h 4 Frequency
3B05h 4 Logic input and outputs
3C00h 1 IA
3C01h 1 IB
3C02h 1 IC
3C03h 1 IE
3C04h 1 Frequency
3C05h 1 Logic input and outputs
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 39/170

Word n° 1: Number of samples included in the mapping

Word n° 2: Sample number in pre-time
Word n° 3: Sample number in post-time
Word n° 4: Phase primary CT ratio
Word n° 5: Phase secondary CT ratio
Word n° 6: Earth primary CT ratio
Word n° 7: Earth secondary CT ratio
Word n° 8: Phase internal CT ratio
Word n° 9: Earth internal CT ratio
Word n° 10: Mapping last page number
Word n° 11: Number of words in the mapping last page
Word n° 12: Coefficient of samples conversion (=1) (Optional)
Word n° 13: Reference of samples conversion (=1) (Optional)
3.17.1 Calculation formula for phase current values
Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. address 3800h, 3801h
or 3802h) * phase primary CT * (1 / internal phase ratio) * √2
3.17.2 Calculation formula for earth current values
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. address 3803h) * earth
primary CT * (1 / internal earth ratio) * √2
3.18 Pages 3Dh
Number of disturbance records available
Access in word reading (function 03)

Addresses Contents
3D00h Number of disturbance records available

Word n° 1: Number of disturbance records available

Word n° 2: Oldest disturbance record number (n)
Words n° 3 & 4: Oldest disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 5 & 6: Oldest disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 7: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 8: Acknowledge
Word n° 9: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+1)
Words n° 10 & 11: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 12 & 13: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 14: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 15: Acknowledge
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 40/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Word n° 16: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+2)

Words n° 17 & 18: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 19 & 20: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 21: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 22: Acknowledge
Word n° 23: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+3)
Words n° 24 & 25: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 26 & 27: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 28: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 29: Acknowledge
Word n° 30: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+4)
Words n° 31 & 32: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 33 & 34: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 35: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 36: Acknowledge
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 41/170

4. DESCRIPTION OF THE MAPPING FORMAT, MiCOM P122 AND P123

CODE DESCRIPTION
F1 Unsigned integer – numerical data: 65535
F2 Signed integer – numerical data: -32768 – 32767
F3 Unsigned integer – curves type
0: STI (IEC)
1: SI (IEC)
2: VI (IEC)
3: EI (IEC)
4: LTI (IEC)
5: STI (C02)
6: MI (ANSI)
7: LTI (CO8)
8: VI (ANSI)
9: EI (ANSI)
10: RC (IEC) Rectifier curve
F3’ Unsigned integer –Belgium curves type for Earth sensitive version
0: Network 1 (Laborellec)
1: Network 2 (Laborellec)
2: source 3 (Laborellec)
F4 Unsigned integer: MODBUS speed
0: 300
1: 600
2: 1200
3: 2400
4: 4800
5: 9600
6: 19200
7: 38400
F5 Unsigned integer: parity
0: without
1: even
2: odd
F6 Unsigned integer: Tripping configuration
bit 0: tI>
bit 1: tI>>
bit 2: tI>>>
bit 3: tIE>
bit 4: tIE>>
bit 5: tIE>>>
bit 6: I<
bit 7: tIth>
bit 8: Broken conductor detection
bit 9: t Aux 1
bit 10: t Aux 2
bit 11: tI2>
bit 12: tI2>>
bit 13: t Aux 3
bit 14: t Aux 4
bit 15: Breaker Failure
F6’ Unsigned integer: Tripping configuration
bit 0: SOFT
bit 1: Remote Trip
bit 2 to 15: Reserved
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 42/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

CODE DESCRIPTION
F7 Unsigned integer: Latching configuration
bit 0: SOFT
bit 1 to 15: Reserved
F8 Unsigned integer: Latching configuration
bit 0: I> latching
bit 1: I>>
bit 2: I>>>
bit 3: IE>
bit 4: IE>>
bit 5: IE>>>
bit 6: I<
bit 7: tIth>
bit 8: Broken conductor detection
bit 9: t Aux 1
bit 10: t Aux 2
bit 11: tI2>
bit 12: tI2>>
bit 13: t Aux 3
bit 14: t Aux 4
bit 15: Breaker Failure
F8' Unsigned integer: Blocking logic configuration
bit 0: I> blocking
bit 1: I>>
bit 2: I>>>
bit 3: IE>
bit 4: IE>>
bit 5: IE>>>
bit 6: reserved
bit 7: tIth>
bit 8: Broken conductor detection
bit 9: t Aux 1
bit 10: t Aux 2
bit 11: tI2>
bit 12: tI2>>
bit 13: t Aux 3
bit 14: t Aux 4
bit 15: reserved
F9 Unsigned integer: Remote control 1
bit 0: Tripping contact delatched
bit 1: 1st alarm acknowledge
bit 2: All alarms acknowledge
bit 3: Remote tripping
bit 4: Remote closing
bit 5: Setting group change
bit 6: Thermal state reset
bit 7: Peak and rolling value reset
bit 8: Disturbance record remote start
bit 9: Maintenance mode
bit 10: Recloser counter reset
bit 11: Recloser reset
bit 12: Local manual acknowledge
bit 13: Oldest event acknowledge
bit 14: Oldest fault acknowledge
bit 15: Hardware RAM alarm acknowledge
F10 2 characters ASCII
32 –127 = ASCII character1
32 – 127 = ASCII character 2
F11 Reserved
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 43/170

CODE DESCRIPTION
F12 Unsigned integer: Logic input status
bit 0: logic input number 1
bit 1: logic input number 2
bit 2: logic input number 3
bit 3: logic input number 4
bit 4: logic input number 5
bits 5 to 15: reserved
F13 Unsigned integer: logic outputs status
bit 0: logic output number RL1 (tripping)
bit 1: logic output number RL2
bit 2: logic output number RL3
bit 3: logic output number RL4
bit 4: logic output number RL0 (watchdog)
bit 5: logic output number RL5
bit 6: logic output number RL6
bit 7: logic output number RL7
bit 8: logic output number RL8
bits 9 to 15: reserved
F14 Unsigned integer: logic outputs configuration
bit 0: selection logic output number RL2
bit 1: selection logic output number RL3
bit 2: selection logic output number RL4
bit 3: selection logic output number RL5
bit 4: selection logic output number RL6
bit 5: selection logic output number RL7
bit 6: selection logic output number RL8
F15 Unsigned integer: logical input allocation
bit 0: delatch allocation
bit 1: allocation 52 a
bit 2: allocation 52 b
bit 3: allocation Lack of SF6
bit 4: allocation external input 1
bit 5: allocation external input 2
bit 6: allocation logic blocking 1
bit 7: allocation logic blocking 2
bit 8: allocation disturbance start
bit 9: allocation cold load start
bit 10: allocation selective scheme logic 1
bit 11 allocation selective scheme logic 2
bit 12: allocation change of setting group
bit 13: allocation recloser locked
bit 14: allocation thermal state reset
bit 15: allocation trip circuit supervision
F15bis bit 0: allocation Circuit Breaker Failure
bit 1: Reset of LEDs alarms
bit 2: Maintenance mode
bit 3: allocation external input 3
bit 4: allocation external input 4
bit 5: SOFT/TOR (from V6.C)
bit 6: Local/remote (from V6.C)
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 44/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

CODE DESCRIPTION
F16 Unsigned integer: threshold earth information status
bit 0: information threshold exceeded (IE> or IE>> or IE>>>)
bit 1: reserved
bit 2: reserved
bit 3: reserved
bit 4: reserved
bit 5: Instantaneous information IE> or IE>> or IE>>>
bit 6: Tripping information tIE> or tIE>> or tIE>>>
bits 7 to 15: reserved
F17 Unsigned integer: threshold phase information status
bit 0: information thresold exceeded (I>, I>>, I>>>)
bit 1: Instantaneous IA
bit 2: Instantaneous IB
bit 3: Instantaneous IC
bit 4: reserved
bit 5: Instantaneous information I> or I>> or I>>>
bit 6: Tripping information tI> or tI>> or tI>>>
bits 7 to 15: reserved
F18 Long integer
F19 Unsigned integer: LEDs allocation
bit 0: I>
bit 1: tI>
bit 2: I>>
bit 3: tI>>
bit 4: I>>>
bit 5: tI>>>
bit 6: IE>
bit 7: tIE>
bit 8: IE>>
bit 9: tIE>>
bit 10: IE>>>
bit 11: tIE>>>
bit 12: Thermal overload trip
bit 13: tI2>
bit 14: Broken conductor trip
bit 15: CB failure
bit 16: Logic input 1
bit 17: Logic input 2
bit 18: Logic input 3
bit 19: Logic input 4
bit 20: Logic input 5
bit 21: Recloser running
bit 22: Recloser locked
bit 23: tAUX1
bit 24: tAUX2
bit 25: tI2>>
bit 26: SOFT (from V6.C)
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 45/170

CODE DESCRIPTION
F20 Unsigned integer: logic input data status
bit 0: Selective scheme logic 1
bit 1: Selective scheme logic 2
bit 2: Relay delatch
bit 3: CB position (52 a)
bit 4: CB position (52 b)
bit 5: Lack of SF6
bit 6: External 1
bit 7: External 2
bit 8: Blocking logic 1
bit 9: Blocking logic 2
bit 10: Disturbance record start
bit 11: Cold load start
bit 12: Setting group change
bit 13: Recloser locked
bit 14: Thermal state reset
bit 15: Trip circuit supervision
F20 bis bit 0: CB Failure by external signalisation
bit 1: LEDs alarms reset
bit 2: maintenance mode
bit 3: External 3
bit 4: External 4
bit 5: Manual Close (SOFT/TOR)
bit 6: Local Mode

F21 Unsigned integer: software version

10: Version 1.A
11: Version 1.B
20: Version 2.A

F22 Unsigned integer: internal logic data

bit 0: Latching
bit 1: reserved
F23 Unsigned integer: relay status
bit 0: Relay status
bit 1: Minor material alarm
bit 2: Presence of non-acknowledged event
bit 3: Synchronisation state
bit 4: Presence of non-acknowledged disturbance record
bit 5: Presence of non-acknowledged fault record
bit 6: reserved
bit 7: reserved
F24 Status of the relay functions
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
F25 2 ASCII characters
F26 1: IA measurement display (True RMS)
2: IB measurement display (True RMS)
3: IC measurement display (True RMS)
4: IN measurement display (True RMS)
F27 0: DMT time delay
1: IDMT time delay
2: RI time delay
F27’ 0: DMT time delay
1: IDMT time delay
2: RI time delay
3: Belgium curves
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 46/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

CODE DESCRIPTION
F28 0: 7 data bits
1: 8 data bits
F29 0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
F30 0: Communication non-available
1: Communication available
F31 Unsigned integer: Number of available event records
0: None
1: 1 event record available
2: 2 event records available
3: 3 event records available
4: 4 event records available
5: 5 event records available
F32 Unsigned integer:
0: Disturbance record start condition on INSTANTANEOUS
1: Disturbance record start condition on TRIPPING
F33 Cold load start thresholds
bit 0: tI>
bit 1: tI>>
bit 2: tI>>>
bit 3: tIE>
bit 4: tIE>>
bit 5: tIE>>>
bit 6: Thermal overload trip
bit 7: tI2>
bit 8: tI2>>
bit 9 to 15: reserved
F34 Reserved
F35 0: No disturbance record uploaded
1: Disturbance record upload running
F36 Memorised flags of non acknowledged alarms:
bit 0: IE>
bit 1: tIE>
bit 2: IE>>
bit 3: tIE>>
bit 4: IE>>>
bit 5: tIE>>>
bit 6: Thermal overload alarm
bit 7: Thermal overload trip
bit 8: Broken conductor
bit 9: CB failure
bit 10: I2>>
bit 11: I2>
bit 12: tI2>
bit 13: t Aux 1
bit 14: t Aux 2
bit 15: tI2>>
F37 Unsigned integer: Thermal overload information
bit 0: Thermal overload alarm
bit 1: Thermal overload trip
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 47/170

CODE DESCRIPTION
F38 Unsigned integer:
bit 0: reserved
bit 1: CB failure
bit 2: Pole A opening
bit 3: Pole B opening
bit 4: Pole C opening
bit 5: Broken conductor
bit 6: t Aux 1
bit 7: t Aux 2
bit 8: Broken conductor time delay
bit 9: CB failure time delay
bit 10: Cold load pick up time delay
bit 11: CB alarms or bits 0,1,2,4 of F43
bit 12: t Aux 3
bit 13: t Aux 4
F39 Unsigned integer: output relay remote word in maintenance mode
bit 0: RL1 (trip)
bit 1: RL2
bit 2: RL3
bit 3: RL0 (watch-dog)
bit 4: RL4
bit 5: RL5
bit 6: RL6
bit 7: RL7
bit 8: RL8
F40 Unsigned integer: selective scheme logic configuration
bit 0: tI>>
bit 1: tI>>>
bit 2: tIE>>
bit 3: tIE>>>
F41 0: Front and rear MODBUS communication
1: Front MODBUS and rear Courier communication
2: Front MODBUS and rear IEC103 communication
3: Front MODBUS and rear DNP3 communication
F42 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes
F43 bit 0: CB operating time overreach
bit 1: CB operation number overreach
bit 2: Square Amps sum overreach
bit 3: Trip circuit self-test
bit 4: CB closing time overreach
bit 5: Recloser locked
bit 6: Recloser successful
bit 7: Recloser in progress
bit 8: Closing command issued from recloser cycle
bit 9: Recloser configuration error
bit 10: Recloser in service
bit 11: Recloser final trip
F44 bit 0: CB, operating time overreach, memorised alarm
bit 1: CB operation number overreach, memorised alarm
bit 2: Square Amps sum overreach, memorised alarm
bit 3: Trip circuit self-test, memorised alarm
bit 4: CB closing time overreach, memorised alarm
Bit 5: t Aux 3, Memorised alarm
Bit 6: t Aux 4, Memorised alarm
Bit 7: reserved
bit 8: SOFT
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 48/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

CODE DESCRIPTION
F45 Unsigned integer: relay status
bit 0: Watchdog
bit 1: Communication failure
bit 2: EEPROM data failure
bit 3: Analogue failure
bit 4: Datation failure
bit 5: EEPROM calibration failure
bit 6: SRAM failure
bit 7: Battery failure
bit 8: Reserved
bit 9: Default settings alarm
bit 10 to 15: reserved
F46 bit 0: Launching IO harmonic calculation
bit 1: internally reserved for delatching of tripping relay only (RL1), and not like
bit 0 in F9.
bit 2: Acknowledgement of the oldest disturbance record
bit 3: End of maintenance mode
bit 4: Reset of Rolling Demands Data (average avlues and timers)
bit 5: Reset of maximum values of the averages in sub period
bit 6: LEDs reset
bit 7: Internal reset of non latched tripping LED
bit 8: communication Order 1
bit 9: communication Order 2
bit 10: communication Order 3
bit 11: communication Order 4
F47 0: user wishes working on EDGE (Rising or Falling) of the logic inputs
(configuration can be done by communication or by the front panel)
1: user wishes working on LEVEL (High or Low) of the logic inputs
F48 0: Private Format Date
1: IEC Format Date
F49 bit 0: Cycle 1 configuration ( trip and initialise the reclosure)
bit 1: Cycle 1 configuration ( block the tripping on cycle )
bit 2, 3: reserved
bit 4: Cycle 2 configuration ( trip and initialise the reclosure)
bit 5: Cycle 2 configuration ( block the tripping on cycle )
bit 6, 7: reserved
bit 8: Cycle 3 configuration ( trip and initialise the reclosure)
bit 9: Cycle 3 configuration ( block the tripping on cycle )
bit 10, 11: reserved
bit 12: Cycle 4 configuration ( trip and initialise the reclosure)
bit 13: Cycle 4 configuration ( block the tripping on cycle )
F50 0: DC Voltage
1: AC Voltage
F51 0: Direct phase rotation ABC
1: Inverse phase rotation ACB
F52 Status of SOFT functions (Switch On To Fault)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
F53 SOFT parameters
0: Start I>>
1: Start I>>>
F54 Bit 0: SOFT in progress
Bit 1: Instantaneous information
Bit 2: Tripping information
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 49/170

4.1 Disturbance record additional information

4.1.1 MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record
To upload a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given
order:
1. (optional): Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available in
SRAM.
2. (compulsory): Send a request with the record number and the channel number.
3. (compulsory): Send one or several requests to upload the disturbance record data. It
depends of the number of samples.
4. (compulsory): Send a request to upload the index frame.
4.1.2 Request to know the number of disturbance records in SRAM

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Dh 00 00 24h xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with the error code:
EVT_NOK(OF): No record available
NOTA: If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contains zero
in the non-used words.
4.1.3 Service requests
This request must be send before uploading the disturbance record channel samples. It
allows to know the record number and the channel number to upload. It allows also to know
the number of samples in the channel.

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Bh xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes:
CODE_DEF_RAM(02): SRAM failure
CODE_EVT_NOK(03): No disturbance record available in SRAM
4.1.4 Disturbance record upload request

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h Refer to mapping 01 to 7Dh xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes:
CODE_DEP_DATA(04): The required disturbance data number is
greater than the memorised number.
CODE_SERV_NOK(05): The service request for disturbance record and
channel number has not been send.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Modbus Database
Page 50/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

4.1.5 Index frame upload request

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 22h 00 00 07h xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with an error code:

CODE_SERV_NOK(05): The service request for disturbance record and
channel number has not been send.
Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record:

− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event.

− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.

4.1.6 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h xx xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code:
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved RAM.
NOTE: On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record
acknowledgement:
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval:
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0.
On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.
b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval:
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 13 of
this frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
4.1.7 Request to retrieve a dedicated event

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 09h xx xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code:
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved RAM.
NOTA: This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.
4.1.8 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records
Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record:
Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.
Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Modbus Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 51/170

4.1.9 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh xx xx

NOTA: On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record
acknowledgement:
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval:
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0.
On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.
b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval:
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14 of this
frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
4.1.10 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Fh xx xx

NOTA: This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

COURIER DATABASE
MiCOM P120 - P121 - P122 - P123
VERSION V6.E
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/170

CONTENT

1. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE 3

1.1 K-BUS 3
1.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer 3
1.1.2 K-Bus connection 3
1.1.3 Auxiliary equipment 3
1.2 Relay courier database 4
1.3 Setting changes 4
1.4 Systems integration data 4
1.4.1 Address of the relay 4
1.4.2 Measured values 4
1.4.3 Status word 5
1.4.4 Unit status word 5
1.4.5 Control status word 5
1.4.6 Logic input status word 5
1.4.7 Output relay status word 5
1.4.8 Control information 6
1.4.9 Protection Indication 6
1.4.10 Measurement control 7
1.4.11 Change of remote measurements 8
1.5 Event extraction 9
1.5.1 Automatic event extraction 9
1.5.2 Event types 9
1.5.3 Event format 9
1.5.4 Manual record extraction 10
1.6 Disturbance record extraction (P122, P123 only) 10

2. LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY 11

3. COURIER DATABASE ORGANISATION P120 14

4. COURIER DATABASE ORGANISATION P121 21

5. COURIER DATABASE ORGANISATION P122, P123 33

P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 2/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/170

1. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE

The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi-drop network proposing an
instantaneous interface with IEC 870 - 5 - FT1.2 standards. The language and the
communication protocol used are Courier. This concept permits especially to the generic
programmes of the principal units to access to a high number of different relay types without
need to change permanently the principal unit program for each relay type. The relays forms
a distributed database in which the principal workstation proceeds to a selective call of the
slave relays in order to know all necessary information.
Courier has a concept for the functions with a selective call system which allows not a slave
periphery to communicate directly with the central unit when one shall informs another about
a particular event. The slave workstation has to wait that the principal workstation asks for
the information. With Courier each information is given into a box with a code of the length
and the database type. In knowing the database format the reception periphery can read
them.
1.1 K-BUS
K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries in
remoting on the central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and remote
control functions using the appropriated communication language. K-Bus is not able to
permit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a communication
between the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established. The principal
characteristics of the K-Bus are his profitability, his high security level, his installation facility
and his user friendliness.
1.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer
The communication port is supported on the reception levels and the voltage transmission
RS485 with galvanic isolation assured by a transformer. A selective call protocol is used. No
relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received a validation message without any
error detection. The transmission is synchronous on a pair of isolated waves. The data are
coded FM0 with a clock signal for eliminate all CC-component, allows the signal to cross the
transformers.
With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. No defective unit from
the system can interfere with the communications established with the other units. The
message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 kbits/s.
1.1.2 K-Bus connection
The connection on the K-Bus port is realised by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOS
standards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realise the connection,
knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use an external screen earth
linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screen has to be fixed with a M4
screw following the wiring scheme (cf. TG: P12X/EN T). The functioning of the K-BUS
network is guaranteed for 32 units connected on 1000 meters of cables. Thanks to the data
code method, the polarity of the Bus cable connection is not important.
NOTE: The K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance on each
end of the Bus. The principal workstation can be placed anywhere on
the network. This command point has to be unique.
1.1.3 Auxiliary equipment
For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter case K-
Bus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, an interconnection cable
RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a software conform to the specification
of the Courier protocol.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 4/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.2 Relay courier database

The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database being
referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range
from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, eg 0A02 is
column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be part of the same column,
row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the contents of the column.
This data base is given in paragraph 1, 4, 5.
1.3 Setting changes
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits
Pre-load Setting - Places a new value in the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that setting
corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this action.
Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive response
will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be returned.
Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method and is ideally suitable for on-line editors as the setting limits
are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this method can be
slow if many settings are to be changed as three commands are required for each change.
1.4 Systems integration data
1.4.1 Address of the relay
The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255
corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slave peripheries are
responding. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be resent from a slave
periphery to a global message. This permits to avoid that all peripheries respond at the same
time creating by this way user conflict on the Bus.
Each relay has an address settled on 255 in order to guarantee that in case of his
connection to the operating network, its address cannot create any conflict with the address
of another periphery already running. In order to permit to a new periphery to get entirely
operational, its address has to be settled. The address can be modified manually by
capturing the password, than by following the method of the setting change through the user
interface on the front plate of the relay.
The same, if the network functioning on a computer takes in charge the auto-addressing, the
relay address can be settled on 0 to active the characteristic of auto-addressing of the
computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address on the Bus.
If the address is 255 or it is unknown, it can be modified by sending a new address, with a
global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. This method is used
for those peripheries which do not have any user interface for reading or for changing the
address in process.
1.4.2 Measured values
Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of MiCOM P120,
P121, P122 and P123 relays.
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/170

1.4.3 Status word

Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent by the
relay at the beginning of each message for signalling important data. The principal
workstation can be design for responding automatically to these important data.
The contained indications are the following:
Bit 0 - 1 = Recording of disturbance available for retrieval
Bit 1 - 1 = Change of the Unit status word
Bit 2 - 1 = Change of the control status word
Bit 3 - 1 = Relay busy, no response possible in time
Bit 4 - 1 = Relay out of service
Bit 5 - 1 = Recording of events available for retrieval
Bit 6 - 1 = Switched alarm indicator
Bit 7 - 1 = Switched tripping indicator
Only the bit 3 is used for versions P120 & P121.
1.4.4 Unit status word
The unit status word is located in the menu 000C.
Each bits pair of the Unit status word serves to indicate the status (position) of the unit
elements checked through the relay.
This functionality is not supported on MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays.
1.4.5 Control status word
The Control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D.
It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the central unit.
Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays, which are not using
this control characteristic.
1.4.6 Logic input status word
The logic control input status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell
of menu 0020. The 2 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each of the 2
logic inputs. This cell is accessible only in reading.
Bit 0: logic input 1
Bit 1: logic input 2
Bit 2: logic input 3
Bit 3: logic input 4
Bit 4: logic input 5
1.4.7 Output relay status word
The output relay status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell of
menu 0021. The 8 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each of the 5
output relays. This cell is accessible only in reading.
Bit 0: relay 1 (TRIP)
Bit 1,2,3: programmable relays n° 2,3,4
Bit 4: Watchdog
Bit 5,6,7,8: programmable relays n° 5,6,7,8
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 6/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.4.8 Control information

The status of internal controls triggered by the auto-control program of the relays can be
observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0022.
The bits 0 to 6 indicate the material controls of the product.
Bit 0 Analogue Output error
Bit 1 Communication error
Bit 2 EEPROM data error
Bit 3 Analogue fault
Bit 4 Clock error
Bit 5 EEPROM calibration error
Bit 6 RAM error
Bit 7 Battery error
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Default settings
Bit 10 to 15 Reserved
1.4.9 Protection Indication
The protection indications gives the status of different protection elements in the relay. The
fault indications are generated with these indications.
They are transmitted in the events recordings, in case of a fault recording.
This is the only way to access to these indications.
The status of internal protection indication of the relays can be observed in proceeding to a
selective call of the cell of menu 0023 and 0024.
The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0023:

Bit position Function of the protection

0 I>
1 I>>
2 I>>>
3 Ie>
4 Ie>>
5 Ie>>>
6 tI>
7 tI>>
8 tI>>>
9 tIe>
10 tIe>>
11 tIe>>>
12 Thermal alarm
13 Thermal overload
14 tI<
15 reserved
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/170

The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0024:

Bit position Function of the protection

0 Broken conductor
1 t Aux 1
2 t Aux 2
3 Breaker failure
4 I2>
5 tI2>
6 Open operating time
7 Trip operation number
8 SA 2n
9 Trip circuit Supervision
10 Close operating time
11 Successful autoreclose
12 Locked autorecloser
13 Autorecloser configuration fail
14 I2>>
15 tI2>>

The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0025:

Bit position Function of the protection

0 t Aux 3
1 t Aux 4
2 t Reset I>
3 t Reset I>>
4 t Reset I0>
5 t Reset I0>>
6 t Reset I2>
7 t BF
8 t SOTF
9 Final Trip
10 Autoreclos. In progress
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved

1.4.10 Measurement control

The control functions through a relay of the MiCOM P12x range can be executed on a serial
link. These functions are supported in particular on the changes of the individual relay
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 8/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

settings, on the changes of the setting groups, on the remote control of the circuit breaker,
as well as on the functions and the locking of the selected output relays.
The remote control is limited in the control functions selected in the table of the relays menu.
The CRC and the controls of the message length are used on each received message. No
response is given for messages received with an error detection. The principal unit can be
re-initialised in order to resent an order as often as wanted if he is not receiving any
response or if he receives a response with an error detection.
NOTE: The control commands are generally materialised by the change of
the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. No response
is allowed for the global orders to avoid any user conflict of the Bus.
For this type of order, a double start is used for the verification of the
message by the relay.
The relay transmits then a confirmation indicating that the control
order or the change of setting has been accepted.
If this is not the case, the relay is sending an error message.
1.4.11 Change of remote measurements
The relay is only responding to the orders of a setting change through the serial port if the
SD0 link = 1 is selected. The selection of the SD0 link = 1 is blocking all the changes of
remote setting with the exception of the SC logical links and the password capture. When the
SD0 link = 0 is selected, the remote setting are protected by the password.
For changing the remote links, the password has to be first remote captured and the SD and
SD0 function links have to be settled on 1.
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/170

1.5 Event extraction

Events can be extracted either automatically or manually. For automatic extraction all events
are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault.
The manual approach allows the user to select randomly an event, or a fault from the stored
records.
1.5.1 Automatic event extraction
This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is
produced via the rear port.
When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this
indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest, unextracted
event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command. The relay will
respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or Type 3 event. The Type
3 event is used for fault records.
Once an event is extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to confirm that the
event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been extracted then the event bit
will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the next event can be accessed using
the Send Event command as before.
1.5.2 Event types
Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:

• Change of state of output contact

• Change of state of opto input

• Protection element operation

• Alarm condition

• Setting Change

• Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)

1.5.3 Event format
The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay:

• Cell Reference

• Timestamp

• Cell Text

• Cell Value
Paragraph 2 contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how the
contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records will return a Courier Type 3 event
which contains the above fields together with two additional fields:

• Event extraction column

• Event number
These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using the
referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting which
allows the fault record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event number value
returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from the relay by uploading
the text and data from the column.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 10/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.5.4 Manual record extraction

Column 02 of the database can be used for manual viewing fault records. The contents of
this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible to select directly a
fault record.
Fault Record Selection (Row 01) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record using
a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will be the most
recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the details of the fault
record selected (row 02 to 0A)
It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the relay the
number associated with a particular record will change when a new fault occurs.
1.6 Disturbance record extraction (P122, P123 only)
The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courier interface.
Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be extracted.
Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will be assigned positive
values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To facilitate automatic
extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever
there are un-extracted disturbance records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can
be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using the block transfer
mechanism from cell B00B.
As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract disturbance
records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier mechanism defined in
Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide.
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/170

2. LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY

Code Cell text Cell reference
00 UNKNOWN EVENT -
01 REMOTE CB CLOSING 0
02 CB TRIP 0
03 DIST TRIG 0
04 UNLOCK TRIP 0
05 SET. CHANGE 0
06 RESET THERM 0
07 SET MAINT MODE 0
08 SET RELAY MAINT MODE 0021
09 I> 0023
10 I>> 0023
11 I>>> 0023
12 IE> 0023
13 IE>> 0023
14 IE>>> 0023
15 TH. ALARM 0023
16 TH OVERLOAD 0023
17 tI> 0023
18 tI>> 0023
19 tI>>> 0023
20 tIE> 0023
21 tIE>> 0023
22 tIE>>> 0023
23 tI< 0023
24 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 0024
25 t Aux1 0024
26 t Aux2 0024
27 BREAKER FAILURE 0024
28 Logic Sel. 1 0020
29 Logic Sel. 2 0020
30 Blocking Logic 1 0020
31 Blocking Logic 2 0020
32 Setting change 0020
33 52 a 0020
34 52 b 0020
35 ACK ALL ALAR 0020
36 SF6 0020
37 COLD LOAD PICKUP 0020
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 12/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Code Cell text Cell reference

38 TS Change 0020
39 TRIP: TH OVERLOAD 0
40 TRIP: tI> 0
41 TRIP: tI>> 0
42 TRIP: tI>>> 0
43 TRIP: tIE> 0
44 TRIP: tIE>> 0
45 TRIP: tIE>>> 0
46 TRIP: tI< 0
47 TRIP: BROKEN CONDUCTOR 0
48 TRIP: t Aux 1 0
49 TRIP: t Aux 2 0
50 AUX Relays 0021
51 ACK 1 AL (FRONT) 0
52 ACK ALAR (FRONT) 0
53 ACK 1 ALARM (COM) 0
54 ACK ALAR (COM) 0
55 Hard Maj Alarm 0022
56 Hard min Alarm 0022
57 I2 > 0024
58 t2> 0024
59 OPEN OPERATING TIME 0024
60 TRIP OPERATION Nb 0024
61 SA2N 0024
62 SW TRIP CIRCUIT 0024
63 CLOSE OPERATING TIME 0024
64 SUCCESS AUTORECLOSE 0024
65 AUTORECLOSER FINAL TRIP 0025
66 AUTORECLOSER CONF. FAIL 0024
67 TRIP: t I2 > 0021
68 Reserved
69 Reserved
70 Reserved
71 LATCHED RELAYS -
72 EXT BREAKER FAILURE 0020
73 I< 0023
74 I2>> 0024
75 tI2>> 0024
76 TRIP: tI2>> 0021
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/170

Code Cell text Cell reference

77 Reserved
78 LATCHED RELAY TRIP
79 t AUX3 0025
80 TRIP: t AUX3 0021
81 t AUX4 0025
82 TRIP: t AUX4 0021
83 t Reset I> 0025
84 t Reset I>> 0025
85 t Reset I0> 0025
86 t Reset I0>> 0025
87 t Reset I2> 0025
88 TRIP Breaker Failure 0021
89 t BF /Ext. Breaker Failure 0025
90 MANUAL CLOSE (Inp) 0020
91 t SOTF 0025
92 TRIP t SOTF 0021
93 LOCAL MODE 0020
94 Reserved
95 LOCKED AUTORECLOSER 0024
96 AUTORECLOS. IN PROGRESS 0025
GEN. SET. CHANGE

NOTA: When the cell reference is different of zero this means that the event
is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event
disappearance.
When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event on edging edge is generated.
Twelve bits are available in the string of characters to describe the contain of the Courier
cell:
On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 1 ».
On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 0 ».
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 14/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

3. COURIER DATABASE ORGANISATION P120

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
00 00 SYSTEM DATA
01 Language Ver>: Indexed String 0 Lang1 (French) Setting 0/3/1
1 Lang2 (English) *
2 Lang3 (German)
3 Lang4 (Spanish)
02 Password ASCII Password(4 bytes) AAAA Setting 32/127/1
03 Fnlinks:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
04 Description ASCII Text (6 bytes) “ P120 ”* Setting 32/127/1
05 Plant Reference ASCII Text (4 bytes) “ Pref ” Setting 32/127/1
06 Model Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Model Number ” Data
07 Firmware Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Firmware Number ” Data
08 Serial Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Serial Number ” Data
09 Frequency Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) XXXX Hz Setting 50/60/10
0A Communication Level Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 Data
0B Address Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/255/1
0C Plant Status Word:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0D Control Status Word:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0E Setting Group Unsigned Integer Data Always = 1
0F Load shed Stage:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
10 Circuit Breaker Control Binary flag (3 bits) 0: No operation Data
1: Trip
2: Close
11 Software Reference ASCII Text (16 characters) Data
12-1F Unused, reserved
20 Logic Input Status Binary flag (3 bits) 0: log input 1 Data
1: log input 2
21 Relay Output Status Binary flag (5 bits) 0: relay 1 (trip) Data
1: relay 2
2: relay 3
3: relay 4
4: watchdog relay
22 Alarm Binary flag (16 bits) 0: Ana output err Data
1: Comm err
2: Eeprom err data
3: Ct error
4: reserved
5: Eeprom err calib
6: reserved
7: reserved
8: reserved
9: Default settings
10 to 15: reserved
23 Pseudo Logic Input Binary flag (12 bits) 3: I0> Data
Status group 1 4: I0>>
5: I0>>>
9: t I0>
10: t I0>>
11: t I0>>>
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 16/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
01 00 USER CONTROL
01 Remote control 1 Binary flag (5 bits) 0: Unlock trip cont.* Setting 0/ 31/1
1: Ack first alarm
2: Ack all alarms
3: TRIP
4: CLOSE
5 to 15: Reserved
03 00 MEASUREMENTS
01 I0 RMS Courier floating point Data
number
09 FREQUENCY Courier floating point Data Starting from V5.F
number
0E 00 CT RATIOS
01 CT Primary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * Setting 1/3000/1
02 CT Secondary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/5/4
Protection Group n° 1
21 00 EARTH FAULT
01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
02 Max I> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 2102=1 Setting 0.01/1.0/0.005
number
04 Tempo Type I> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2102=1 Setting 0/3/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
3 3: Laborelec curves
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
05 Curve Type I> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2104=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
07 TMS I> Courier floating point 0.025 * 2104=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
08 K I> Courier floating point 0.1 * 2104=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
09 Tempo I> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2104=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
0C-0F Reserved
10 Stage 2 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
11 Max I>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I>> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 2111=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number
18 Tempo I>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2113=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
1C-1F Reserved
20 Stage 3 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
21 Max I>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I>>> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n * 2121=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 18/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
23 Tempo I>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2121=1 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
60 00 AUTOMATISM
01 Trip Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0: t I> * Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: t I>>
2: t I>>>
6 to 15: reserved
02 Latched Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0: Latch I> * Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: Latch I>>
2: Latch I>>>
6 to 15: reserved
03 Blocking 1 Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0: Blocking t I> * Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: Blocking t I>>
2: Blocking t I>>>
6 to 15: reserved
61 00 TS SETTINGS
01 Logical input allocation 1 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0/7/1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: CB failure
5 5: External input 1
6 6: External input 2
7 7: Logic blocking
02 Logical input allocation 2 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0/7/1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: CB failure
5 5: External input 1
6 6: External input 2
7 7: Logic blocking
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 19/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
62 00 TC SETTINGS
01 GENERAL TRIP Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
02 I> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
03 tI> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
04 I>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
05 t I>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
06 I>>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
07 t I>>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
63 00 LEDS SETTINGS
01 Led 5 Binary (16 bits) 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>> *
3: t I>>
4: I>>>
5: t I>>>
12 to 15: Reserved
02 Led 6 Binary (16 bits) 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>>
3: t I>>
4: I>>> *
5: t I>>>
12 to 15: Reserved
03 Led 7 Binary (16 bits) 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>>
3: t I>>
4: I>>>
5: t I>>> *
12 to 15: Reserved
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 20/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
04 Led 8 Binary (16 bits) 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>>
3: t I>>
4: I>>>
5: t I>>>
12 to 15: Reserved
BF 00 COMM SYSTEM DATA
03 Setting Transfert Setting 0/1/1
04 Reset Demand Timers NOT IMPLEMENTED
05 Reset Event Report NOT IMPLEMENTED
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 21/170

4. COURIER DATABASE ORGANISATION P121

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
00 00 SYSTEM DATA
01 Language Ver>: Indexed String 0 Lang1 (French) Setting 0/3/1
1 Lang2 (English) *
2 Lang3 (German)
3 Lang4 (Spanish)
02 Password ASCII Password (4 bytes) AAAA Setting 32/127/1
03 Fnlinks:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
04 Description ASCII Text (6 bytes) “ P121 ”* Setting 32/127/1
05 Plant Reference ASCII Text (4 bytes) “ Pref ” Setting 32/127/1
06 Model Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Model Number ” Data
07 Firmware Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Firmware Number ” Data
08 Serial Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Serial Number ” Data
09 Frequency Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) XXXX Hz Setting 50/60/10
0A Communication Level Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 Data
0B Address Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/255/1
0C Plant Status Word:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0D Control Status Word:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0E Setting Group Unsigned Integer Data
0F Load shed Stage:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 22/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
10 Circuit Breaker Control Binary flag (3 bits) 0: No operation Data
1: Trip
2: Close
11 Software Reference ASCII Text (16 characters) Data
12-1F Unused, reserved
20 Logic Input Status Binary flag (3 bits) 0: log input 1 Data
1: log input 2
2: log input 3
21 Relay Output Status Binary flag (5 bits) 0: relay 1 (trip) Data
1: relay 2
2: relay 3
3: relay 4
4: watchdog relay
22 Alarm Binary flag (16 bits) 0: Ana output err Data
1: Comm err
2: Eeprom err data
3: Ct error
4: reserved
5: Eeprom err calib
6: reserved
7: reserved
8: reserved
9: Default settings
10 to 15: reserved
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 23/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
23 Pseudo Logic Input Binary flag (12 bits) 0: I> Data
Status group 1 1: I>>
2: I>>>
3: I0>
4: I0>>
5: I0>>>
6: t I>
7: t I>>
8: t I>>>
9: t I0>
10: t I0>>
11: t I0>>>
01 00 USER CONTROL
01 Remote control 1 Binary flag (5 bits) 0: Unlock trip cont.* Setting 0/ 31/1
1: Ack first alarm
2: Ack all alarms
3: TRIP
4: CLOSE
5 to 15: Reserved
03 00 MEASUREMENTS
01 IA RMS Courier floating point Data
number
02 IB RMS Courier floating point Data
number
03 IC RMS Courier floating point Data
number
04 I0 RMS Courier floating point Data
number
09 FREQUENCY Courier floating point Data
number
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 24/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
0D 00 GENERAL SETTING
01 Phase rotation sense Indexed string 0: Direct (A/B/C) Setting 0 (A/B/C)
1: Inverse (A/B/C) 1 (A/B/C)
0E 00 CT RATIOS
01 Phase CT Primary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * Setting 1/3000/1
02 Phase CT Secondary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/5/4
03 Neutral CT Primary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * Setting 1/3000/1
04 Neutral CT Secondary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/5/4
Protection Group n° 1
20 00 PHASE OVERCURRENT
01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
02 Max I> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 2002=1 Setting 0.1/25.0/0.1
number
04 Temporisation Type I> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2002=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
05 Curve type I> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2004=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
06 TMS I> Courier floating point 0.025 * 2004=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
07 K I> Courier floating point 0.1 * 2004=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
08 Tempo I> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2004=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
0C-0F Reserved
10 Stage 2 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
11 Max I>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 2011=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
13 Temporisation Type I>> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2011=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
14 Curve type I>> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2013=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
15 TMS I>> Courier floating point 0.025 * 2013=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
16 K I>> Courier floating point 0.1 * 2013=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 26/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
17 Tempo I>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2013=0 Setting 0 /150/0.01
number
1B-1F Reserved
20 Stage 3 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
21 Max I>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I>>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 2021=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
23 Tempo I>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2021=1 Setting 0 /150/0.01
number
21 00 EARTH FAULT
01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
02 Max I0> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I0> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 2102=1 Setting 0.01/1.0/0.005
number
04 Tempo Type I0> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2102=1 Setting 0/3/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
3 3: Laborelec curves
05 Curve Type I0> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2104=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
06 Curve Type 2 Indexed String 0 Curve type 1 * 2104=3 Setting 0/2/1
(Laborelec) I0> 1 Curve type 2
2 Curve type 3
07 TMS I0> Courier floating point 0.025 * 2104=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
08 K I0> Courier floating point 0.1 * 2104=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
09 Tempo I0> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2104=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
0C-0F Reserved
10 Stage 2 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
11 Max I0>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I0>> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 2111=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number
13 Tempo Type I0>> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2111=1 Setting 0/3/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
3 3: Laborelec curves
14 Curve Type I0>> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2113=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 28/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
15 Curve Type 2 Indexed String 0 Curve type 1 * 2113=3 Setting 0/2/1
(Laborelec) I0>> 1 Curve type 2
2 Curve type 3
16 TMS I0>> Courier floating point 0.025 * 2113=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
17 K I0>> Courier floating point 0.1 * 2113=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
18 Tempo I0>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2113=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
1C-1F Reserved
20 Stage 3 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
21 Max I0>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I0>>> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n * 2121=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number
23 Tempo I0>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2121=1 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
60 00 AUTOMATISM
01 Trip Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0: t I> * Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: t I>>
2: t I>>>
3: t I0>
4: t I0>>
5: t I0>>>
6 to 15: reserved
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 29/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
02 Latched Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0: Latch I> * Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: Latch I>>
2: Latch I>>>
3: Latch I0>
4: Latch I0>>
5: Latch I0>>>
6 to 15: reserved
03 Blocking 1 Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0: Blocking t I> * Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: Blocking t I>>
2: Blocking t I>>>
3: Blocking t I0>
4: Blocking t I0>>
5: Blocking t I0>>>
6 to 15: reserved
61 00 TS SETTINGS
01 Logical input allocation 1 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0/7/1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: CB failure
5 5: External input 1
6 6: External input 2
7 7: Logic blocking
02 Logical input allocation 2 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0/7/1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: CB failure
5 5: External input 1
6 6: External input 2
7 7: Logic blocking
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 30/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
62 00 TC SETTINGS
01 GENERAL TRIP Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
02 I> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
03 tI> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
04 I>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
05 t I>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
06 I>>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
07 t I>>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
08 I0> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
09 t I0> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
0A I0>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
0B t I0>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
0C I0>>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
0D t I0>>> Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
15 Reclosing Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
1D TC lock setting Binary (3 bits) 000 * Setting 0/7/1
bit 0 to 2 =1: TC Locked
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 31/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
63 00 LEDS SETTINGS
01 Led 5 Binary (16 bits) 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>> *
3: t I>>
4: I>>>
5: t I>>>
6: I0>
7: t I0>
8: I0>>
9: t I0>>
10: I0>>>
11: t I0>>>
12 to 15: Reserved
02 Led 6 Binary (16 bits) 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>>
3: t I>>
4: I>>> *
5: t I>>>
6: I0>
7: t I0>
8: I0>>
9: t I0>>
10: I0>>>
11: t I0>>>
12 to 15: Reserved
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 32/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
03 Led 7 Binary (16 bits) 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>>
3: t I>>
4: I>>>
5: t I>>> *
6: I0>
7: t I0>
8: I0>>
9: t I0>>
10: I0>>>
11: t I0>>>
12 to 15: Reserved
04 Led 8 Binary (16 bits) 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>>
3: t I>>
4: I>>>
5: t I>>>
6: I0> *
7: t I0>
8: I0>>
9: t I0>>
10: I0>>>
11: t I0>>>
12 to 15: Reserved
BF 00 COMM SYSTEM DATA
03 Setting Transfert
04 Reset Demand Timers NOT IMPLEMENTED
05 Reset Event Report NOT IMPLEMENTED
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 33/170

5. COURIER DATABASE ORGANISATION P122, P123

This Database organisation is common for both products, except for the Autorecloser function, the SOTF function (with Control Trip and Control Close
outputs).

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
00 00 SYSTEM DATA
01 Language Ver>: Indexed String 0 Lang1 (French) Setting 0/3/1
1 Lang2 (English)*
2 Lang3 (German)
3 Lang4 (Spanish)
02 Password ASCII Password (4 bytes) AAAA Setting 32/127/1
03 Fnlinks:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
04 Description ASCII Text (6 bytes) “ P123 ”* Setting 32/127/1
05 Plant Reference ASCII Text (4 bytes) “ Pref ” Setting 32/127/1
06 Model Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Model Number ” Data
07 Firmware Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Firmware Number ” Data
08 Serial Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Serial Number ” Data
09 Frequency Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) XXXX Hz Setting 50/60/10
0A Communication Level Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 Data
0B Address Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/255/1
0C Plant Status Word:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0D Control Status Word:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0E Setting Group Unsigned Integer Data
0F Load shed Stage:
NOT IMPLEMENTED
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 34/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
10 Circuit Breaker Control Indexed String 0*: No operation Setting 0/2/1
1: Trip
2: Close
11 Software Reference ASCII Text (16 characters) Data
12-1F Unused, reserved
20 Logic Input Status Binary flag (5 bits) 0: log input 1 Data
1: log input 2
2: log input 3
3: log input 4
4: log input 5
21 Relay Output Status Binary flag (9 bits) 0: relay 1 (trip) Data
1: relay 2
2: relay 3
3: relay 4
4: watchdog relay
5: relay 5
6: relay 6
7: relay 7
8: relay 8
22 Alarm Binary flag (16 bits) 0: Ana output err Data
1: Comm err
2: Eeprom err data
3: Ct error
4: Clock error
5: Eeprom err calib
6: Ram error
7: Battery error
8: reserved
9: Default settings
10 to 15: reserved
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 35/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
23 Pseudo Logic Input Binary flag (16 bits) 0: I> Data
Status group 1 1: I>>
2: I>>>
3: I0>
4: I0>>
5: I0>>>
6: t I>
7: t I>>
8: t I>>>
9: t I0>
10: t I0>>
11: t I0>>>
12: Thermal Alarm
13: Therm. Overload
14: t I<
15: I<
24 Pseudo Logic Input Binary flag (16 bits) 0: Broken Conductor Data
Status group 2 1: t Aux 1
2: t Aux 2
3: Breaker Fail.
4: Iinv >
5: t Iinv>
6: Open operating time
7: Trip operation Nb
8: SA 2 n
9: SW Trip Circuit
10: Close operating time
11: Successful autoreclose
12: Locked autorecloser
13: Autorecloser conf. fail
14: Iinv>>
15: t Iinv>>
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 36/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
25 Pseudo Logic Input Binary flag (16 bits) 0: t Aux 3 Data
Status group 3 1: t Aux 4
2: t Reset I>
3: t Reset I>>
4: t Reset I0>
5: t Reset I0>>
6: t Reset I2>
7: t BF
8: t SOTF
9: Final Trip
10: Autoreclos. in progress
11 à 15: reserved
01 00 USER CONTROL
01 Remote control 1 Binary flag (16 bits) 0: Unlock trip cont.* Setting 0/65535/1
1: Ack first alarm
2: Ack all alarms
3: TRIP
4: CLOSE
5: Setting Change
6: Th. State Reset
7: RMS aver&max Reset
8: Dist. Rec. Trig
9: Maintenance Start
10: Recloser timer Reset
11: Recloser Reset
12: Reserved
13: Reserved
14: Reserved
15: SRAM def . ack
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 37/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
02 Remote control 2 Binary flag (9 bits) 0: Relay 0: TRIP* Setting 0/511/1
1: Relay 1
2: Relay 2
3: Relay 3
4: Watchdog Relay
5: Relay 4
6: Relay 5
7: Relay 6
8: Relay 7
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 38/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
03 Remote control 3 Binary flag (6 bits) 0: Reset I0 Harmonic Setting 0/63/1
1: Reserved
2: Reserved
3: Maintenance stop
4: Reset rolling averages
5: Reset sub-period
average peaks.
02 00 VIEW RECORDS
01 Record number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 5* Setting 1/5/1
02 Occur date Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)
03 Active set group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)
04 Phase in fault ASCII Text
05 Fault Id ASCII Text
06 Magnitude Courier floating point
number
07 Ia magnitude Courier floating point
number
08 Ib magnitude Courier floating point
number
09 Ic magnitude Courier floating point
number
0A In magnitude Courier floating point
number
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 39/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
03 00 MEASUREMENTS
01 IA RMS Courier floating point Data
number
02 IB RMS Courier floating point Data
number
03 IC RMS Courier floating point Data
number
04 I0 RMS Courier floating point Data
number
05 Idirect Courier floating point Data
number
06 IINV Courier floating point Data
number
07 Ratio Idir / Iinv Courier floating point Data
number
08 THERMAL STATE (Rst) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
(%)
09 FREQUENCY Courier floating point Data
number
0A RST RMS MAX &
AVERAGE
0B MAX RMS IA Courier floating point Data
number
0C MAX RMS IB Courier floating point Data
number
0D MAX RMS IC Courier floating point Data
number
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 40/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
0E IA RMS AVERAGE Courier floating point Data
number
0F IB RMS AVERAGE Courier floating point Data
number
10 IC RMS AVERAGE Courier floating point Data
number
11 IN – Fn (Rst) Courier floating point Data
number
20 RST Sub-period
average Peaks
21 IA RMS Sub-period Courier floating point Data
average Peak number
22 IB RMS Sub-period Courier floating point Data
average Peak number
23 IC RMS Sub-period Courier floating point Data
average Peak number
24 RST Rolling Averages
25 IA RMS Rolling Average Courier floating point Data
number
26 IB RMS Rolling Average Courier floating point Data
number
27 IC RMS Rolling Average Courier floating point Data
number
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 41/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
04 00 RECLOSER
STATISTICS (Rst)
01 TOTAL CYCLE Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
NUMBER
02 CYCLE 1 NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
03 CYCLE 2 NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
04 CYCLE 3 NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
05 CYCLE 4 NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
06 DEFINITIVE TRIP Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
NUMBER
07 RECLOSE ORDER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
NUMBER
05 00 PROCESS: in versions >
06 00 SW MONITORING
01 RST SAn Ix
02 SAn IA Courier floating point Data
number
03 SAn IB Courier floating point Data
number
04 SAn IC Courier floating point Data
number
05 SW operation nb (Rst) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
06 SW operation time Courier floating point 0.0 s Data
number
07 SW Closing time Courier floating point Data
number
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 42/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
08 00 TIME:
01 Date/Time IEC870 Time & Date Data
02 Date Format (IEC/no) Indexed String 0: Private * Setting 0 (Private) / 1
1: IEC (IEC)
0D 00 GENERAL SETTING
01 Phase Rotation sense Indexed String 0: Direct (A/B/C) * Setting 0 (A/B/C) / 1
1: Inverse (A/C/B) (A/C/B)
0E 00 CT RATIOS
01 Phase CT Primary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * Setting 1/50000/1
02 Phase CT Secondary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/5/4
03 Neutral CT Primary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * Setting 1/50000/1
04 Neutral CT Secondary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/5/4
0F 00 SETTING GROUPS
01 Setting group toggle Indexed String 0: Edge * Setting 0 (Edge) / 1
1: Level (Level)
02 Select setting group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* 0F01=0 Setting 1/2
03 Group 1 visible Indexed String 0: YES * Setting 0 (YES) /
1: NO 1 (NO)
04 Group 2 visible Indexed String 0: YES Setting 0 (YES) /
1: NO * 1 (NO)
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 43/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
Protection Group n° 1
20 00 PHASE
OVERCURRENT
01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
02 Max I> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 2002=1 Setting 0.1/25.0/0.1
number
04 Temporisation Type I> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2002=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
05 Curve type I> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2004=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
06 TMS I> Courier floating point 0.025 * 2004=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
07 K I> Courier floating point 0.1 * 2004=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
08 Tempo I> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2004=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
09 Tempo reset type I> Indexed String 0: definite time 2004=1 & Setting 0/1
1: inverse time 2005>= 5 &
2005 <=9
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 44/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
0A RTMS I> Courier floating point 0.025 2009 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
0B T RESET I> Courier floating point 0.04 2009 = 0 or Setting 0/600.0/0.01
number 2004 =0 or
2004 =2
or (2004=1 &
2005 < 5 &
2005 > 9)
0C-0F Reserved
10 Stage 2 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
11 Max I>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 2011=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
13 Temporisation Type I>> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2011=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
14 Curve type I>> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2013=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
15 TMS I>> Courier floating point 0.025 * 2013=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 45/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
16 K I>> Courier floating point 0.1 * 2013=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
17 Tempo I>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2013=0 Setting 0 /150/0.01
number
18 Tempo reset type I>> Indexed String 0: definite time 2013=1 & Setting 0/1
1: inverse time 2014>= 5 &
2014 <=9
19 RTMS I>> Courier floating point 0.025 2018 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
1A T RESET I>> Courier floating point 0.04 2018 = 0 or Setting 0/600.0/0.01
number 2013 = 0 or
2013 =2
or (2013=1 &
2014 < 5 &
2014 > 9)
1B-1F Reserved
20 Stage 3 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
21 Max I>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I>>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 2021=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
23 Tempo I>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2021=1 Setting 0 /150/0.01
number
24 Sample I>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 2021=1 Setting 0/1/1
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 46/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
21 00 EARTH FAULT
01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
02 Max I0> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I0> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 2102=1 Setting 0.01/1.0/0.005
number or 0.002 I0n* if great or 0.1/25.0/0.01 if
sensivity normal sensitivity
or 0.002/1.0/0.001
if great sensivity
04 Tempo Type I0> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2102=1 Setting 0/3/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
3 3: Laborelec curves
05 Curve Type I0> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2104=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
06 Curve Type 2 Indexed String 0 Curve type 1 * 2104=3 Setting 0/2/1
(Laborelec) I0> 1 Curve type 2
2 Curve type 3
07 TMS I0> Courier floating point 0.025 * 2104=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
08 K I0> Courier floating point 0.1 * 2104=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 47/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
09 Tempo I0> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2104=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
0A Tempo reset Type I0> Indexed String 0: definite time 2104=1 & Setting 0/1
1: inverse time 2105>= 5 &
2105 <=9
0B RTMS I0> Courier floating point 0.025 210A = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
0C T RESET I0> Courier floating point 0.04 210A = 0 or Setting 0/600.0/0.01
number 2104 = 0 or
2104 =2
or 2104 =3
or (2104=1 &
2105 < 5 &
2105 > 9)
0D-0F Reserved
10 Stage 2 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
11 Max I0>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I0>> Courier floating point I0n* 2111=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number or 0.50 I0n* if normal or 0.50/40.0/0.01
sensitivity if normal
or 0.002 I0n* if great sensitivity
sensivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001
if great sensivity
13 Tempo Type I0>> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2111=1 Setting 0/3/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
3 3: Laborelec curves
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 48/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
14 Curve Type I0>> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2113=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
15 Curve Type 2 Indexed String 0 Curve type 1 * 2113=3 Setting 0/2/1
(Laborelec) I0>> 1 Curve type 2
2 Curve type 3
16 TMS I0>> Courier floating point 0.025 * 2113=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
17 K I0>> Courier floating point 0.1 * 2113=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
18 Tempo I0>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2113=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
19 Tempo reset Type I0>> Indexed String 0: definite time 2113=1 & Setting 0/1
1: inverse time 2114>= 5 &
2114 <=9
1A RTMS I0>> Courier floating point 0.025 2119 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
1B T RESET I0>> Courier floating point 0.04 2119 = 0 or Setting 0/600.0/0.01
number 2113 = 0 or
2113 =2
or 2113 =3
or (2113=1 &
2114 < 5 &
2114 > 9)
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 49/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
1C-1F Reserved
20 Stage 3 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
21 Max I0>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I0>>> Courier floating point I0n* 2121=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number or 0.50 I0n* if normal or 0.50/40.0/0.01
sensitivity if normal
or 0.002 I0n* if great sensitivity
sensivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001
if great sensivity
23 Tempo I0>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2121=1 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
24 Sample I0>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 2121=1 Setting 0/1/1
22 00 THERMAL OVERLOAD
01 Ith> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold Ith> Courier floating point 0.10 Ith* 2201=1 Setting 0.01/3.2/0.01
number
03 K Ith> Courier floating point 1.05 * 2201=1 Setting 1.0/1.50/0.01 In
number
04 θ TRIP Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 100 % * 2201=1 Setting 50 / 200/ 1 %
05 θ ALARM ? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 2201=1 Setting 0/1/1
06 θ ALARM Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 90 % * 2205 =1 Setting 50 / 200/ 1 %
07 Thermal constant Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* 2201=1 Setting 1/ 200 / 1 mn
23 00 MIN I<
01 I< Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold I< Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 20 %In * 2301=1 Setting 2 / 100 / 1 %In
03 Tempo I < Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2301=1 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 50/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
24 00 NEGATIVE CURRENT
01 Iinv> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold Iinv> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 2401 = 1 Setting 0.1/40.0/0.01 In
number
03 Temporisation Type Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2401 = 1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
04 Curve type Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2403 = 1 Setting 0/9/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
05 TMS Courier floating point 0.025 * 2403=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
06 K (RI) Courier floating point 0.1 * 2403=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
07 Tempo Iinv> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2403=0 Setting 0 /150.0/1.0
number
08 Reset tempo type Indexed String 0: definite time 2403=1 & Setting 0/1/1
1: inverse time 2404>= 5 &
2404 <=9
09 RTMS Courier floating point 0.025 * 2408 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 51/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
0A T RESET Courier floating point 0.04 * 2408 = 0 Setting 0.04/100/0.01
number or 2403 =2
or (2403=1 &
2404 < 5 &
2404 > 9)
10 Iinv>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
11 Threshold Iinv>> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 2410 = 1 Setting 0.1/40.0/0.01 In
number
12 Tempo Iinv>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2410 = 1 Setting 0 /150.0/1.0
number
25 00 AUTORECLOSER
01 Autorecloser Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 State circuit breaker Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 2501 = 1 Setting 0/1/1
03 Control window Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2502 = 1 Setting 0.01 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
04 External blocking Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 2501 = 1 Setting 0/1/1
07 Temporisation cycle 1 Courier floating point 0.05 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.05 / 300.00 /
number 0.01 s
08 Temporisation cycle 2 Courier floating point 0.05 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.05 / 300.00 /
number 0.01 s
09 Temporisation cycle 3 Courier floating point 0.05 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.05 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
0A Temporisation cycle 4 Courier floating point 0.05 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.05 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
0B Reclaim TIME Courier floating point 0.02 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.02 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
0C Inhibition time Courier floating point 0.02 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.02 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 52/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
0D Number of short circuit Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 2501 = 1 Setting 0/4/1
cycle
0E Number of earth fault Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 2501 = 1 Setting 0/4/1
cycle
0F Cycles tI> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
bit group
10 Cycles tI>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
bit group
11 Cycles tI>>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
configuration bit group
12 Cycles tI0> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
bit group
13 Cycles tI0>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
configuration bit group
14 Cycles tI0>>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
configuration bit group
15 Cycles tAux1> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
configuration bit group
16 Cycles tAux2> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
configuration bit group
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 53/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
Protection Group n° 2
40 00 PHASE
OVERCURRENT
01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
02 Max I> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 4002=1 Setting 0.1/25.0/0.1
number
04 Tempo Type I> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 4002=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
05 Curve Type I> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 4004=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
06 TMS I> Courier floating point 0.025 * 4004=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
07 K I> Courier floating point 0.1 * 4004=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
08 Tempo I> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4004=0 Setting 0.01/150.0/1.0
number
09 Reset tempo type I> Indexed String 0: definite time 4004=1 & Setting 0/1
1: inverse time 4005>= 5 &
4005 <=9
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 54/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
0A RTMS I> Courier floating point 0.025 4009 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
0B T RESET I> Courier floating point 0.04 4009 = 0 Setting 0/600.0/0.01
number or 4004 =0
or 4004 =2
or (4004=1 &
4005 < 5 &
4005 > 9)
0C-0F Reserved
10 Stage 2 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
11 Max I>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 4011=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
13 Tempo Type I>> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 4011=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
14 Curve Type I>> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 4013=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
15 TMS I>> Courier floating point 0.025 * 4013=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
16 K I>> Courier floating point 0.1 * 4013=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 55/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
17 Tempo I>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4013=0 Setting 0 /150/0.01
number
18 Reset tempo type I>> Indexed String 0: definite time 4013=1 & Setting 0/1
1: inverse time 4014>= 5 &
4014 <=9
19 RTMS I>> Courier floating point 0.025 4018 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
1A T RESET I>> Courier floating point 0.04 4018 = 0 Setting 0/600.0/0.01
number or 4013 =0
or 4013 =2
or (4013=1 &
4014 < 5 &
4014 > 9)
1B-1F Reserved
20 Stage 3 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
21 Max I>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I>>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 4021=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
23 Tempo I>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4021=1 Setting 0 /150/0.01
number
24 Sample I>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 4021=1 Setting 0/1/1
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 56/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
41 00 EARTH FAULT
01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
02 Max I0> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I0> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 4102=1 Setting 0.01/1.0/0.005
number or 0.002 I0n* if great or 0.1/25.0/0.01if
sensivity normal sensitivity
or 0.002/1.0/0.001
if great sensivity
04 Temporisation Type I0> Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 4102=1 Setting 0/3/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
3 3: Laborelec curve
05 Curve type I0> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 4104=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
06 Curve Type 2 Indexed String 0 Curve type 1 * 4104=3 Setting 0/2/1
(Laborelec) I0> 1 Curve type 2
2 Curve type 3
07 TMS I0> Courier floating point 0.025 * 4104=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
08 K I0> Courier floating point 0.1 * 4104=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 57/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
09 Tempo I0> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4104=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
0A Tempo reset Type I0> Indexed String 0: definite time 4104=1 & Setting 0/1
1: inverse time 4105>= 5 &
4105 <=9
0B RTMS I0> Courier floating point 0.025 4109 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
0C T RESET I0> Courier floating point 0.04 4109 = 0 Setting 0/600.0/0.01
number or 4104 =0
or 4104 =2
or 4104 =3
or (4104=1 &
4105 < 5 &
4105 > 9)
0D-0F Reserved
10 Stage 2 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
11 Max I0>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I0>> Courier floating point I0n* 4111=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number or 0.50 I0n* if normal or 0.50/40.0/0.01
sensitivity if normal
or 0.002 I0n* if great sensitivity
sensivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001
if great sensivity
13 Temporisation Type Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 4111=1 Setting 0/3/1
I0>> 1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
3 3: Laborelec curve
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 58/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
14 Curve type I0>> Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 4113=1 Setting 0/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
10 RC (CEI)
15 Curve Type 2 Indexed String 0 Curve type 1 * 4113=3 Setting 0/2/1
(Laborelec) I0>> 1 Curve type 2
2 Curve type 3
16 TMS I0>> Courier floating point 0.025 * 4113=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
17 K I0>> Courier floating point 0.1 * 4113=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
18 Tempo I0>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4113=0 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
19 Tempo reset Type I0>> Indexed String 0: definite time 4113=1 & Setting 0/1
1: inverse time 4114 >= 5 &
4114 <=9
1A RTMS I0>> Courier floating point 0.025 4119 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
1B T RESET I0>> Courier floating point 0.04 4119 = 0 Setting 0/600.0/0.01
number or 4113 =0
or 4113 =2
or 4113 =3
or (4113=1 &
4114 < 5 &
4114 > 9)
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 59/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
1C-1F Reserved
20 Stage 3 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
21 Max I0>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I0>>> Courier floating point I0n* 4121=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number or 0.50 I0n* if normal or 0.50/40.0/0.01
sensitivity if normal
or 0.002 I0n* if great sensitivity
sensivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001
if great sensivity
23 Tempo I0>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4121=1 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
24 Sample I0>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 4121=1 Setting 0/1/1
42 00 THERMAL OVERLOAD
01 Ith> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold Ith> Courier floating point 0.10 Ith* 4201=1 Setting 0.01/3.2/0.01
number
03 K Ith> Courier floating point 1.05 * 4201=1 Setting 1.0/1.50/0.01 In
number
04 θ TRIP Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 100 % * 4201=1 Setting 50 / 200/ 1 %
05 θ ALARM ? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 4201=1 Setting 0/1/1
06 θ ALARM Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 90 % * 4205 =1 Setting 50 / 200/ 1 %
07 Thermal constant Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* 4201=1 Setting 1/ 200 / 1 mn
43 00 MIN I<
01 I< Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold I< Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 20 %In * 4301=1 Setting 2 / 100 / 1 %In
03 Tempo I < Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4301=1 Setting 0 /150.0/0.01
number
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 60/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
44 00 NEGATIVE CURRENT
01 Iinv> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold Iinv> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 4401 = 1 Setting 0.1/40.0/0.01 In
number
03 Temporisation type 0 0: definite time * 4401 = 1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
04 Curve Type Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 4401 = 1 Setting 0/9/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
05 TMS Courier floating point 0.025 * 4403=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
06 K (RI) Courier floating point 0.1 * 4403=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
07 Tempo Iinv> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4403=0 Setting 0 /150.0/1.0
number
08 Temporisation reset type Indexed String 0: definite time 4403=1 & Setting 0/1/1
1: inverse time 4404>= 5 &
4404 <=9
09 RTMS Courier floating point 0.025 * 4408 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 61/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
0A T RESET Courier floating point 0.04 * 4408 = 0 or Setting 0.04/100/0.01
number 4403 =2 or
(4403=1 &
4404 < 5 &
4404 > 9)
10 Iinv>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
11 Threshold Iinv>> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 4410 = 1 Setting 0.1/40.0/0.01 In
number
12 Tempo Iinv>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4410 = 1 Setting 0 /150.0/1.0
number
45 00 AUTORECLOSER
01 Autorecloser Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 State circuit breaker Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 4501 = 1 Setting 0/1/1
03 Control window Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4502 = 1 Setting 0.01 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
04 External blocking Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 4501 = 1 Setting 0/1/1
07 Temporisation cycle 1 Courier floating point 0.05 s * 4501 = 1 Setting 0.05 / 300.00 /
number 0.01 s
08 Temporisation cycle 2 Courier floating point 0.05 s * 4501 = 1 Setting 0.05 / 300.00 /
number 0.01 s
09 Temporisation cycle 3 Courier floating point 0.05 s * 4501 = 1 Setting 0.05 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
0A Temporisation cycle 4 Courier floating point 0.05 s * 4501 = 1 Setting 0.05 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
0B Reclaim TIME Courier floating point 0.02 s * 4501 = 1 Setting 0.02 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
0C Inhibition time Courier floating point 0.02 s * 4501 = 1 Setting 0.02 / 600.00 /
number 0.01 s
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 62/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
0D Number of short circuit Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 4501 = 1 Setting 0/4/1
cycle
0E Number of earth fault Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 4501 = 1 Setting 0/4/1
cycle
0F Cycles tI> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
bit group
10 Cycles tI>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
bit group
11 Cycles tI>>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
bit group
12 Cycles tI0> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
bit group
13 Cycles tI0>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
configuration bit group
14 Cycles tI0>>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
configuration bit group
15 Cycles tAux1> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
configuration bit group
16 Cycles tAux2> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4
configuration bit group
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 63/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
60 00 AUTOMATISM
01 Trip Configuration Binary (15 bits) 1* 0: t I> * Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: t I>>
2: t I>>>
3: t I0>
4: t I0>>
5: t I0>>>
6: t I<
7: t Therm
8: Broken Conductor
9: t Aux1
10: t Aux2
11: t I2>
12: t I2>>
13: t Aux3
14: t Aux4
15: reserved
02 Latch Configuration Binary (15 bits) 0* 0: Latch I> Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: Latch I>>
2: Latch I>>>
3: Latch I0>
4: Latch I0>>
5: Latch I0>>>
6: Latch I<
7: Latch Therm. Ov.
8: Latch Broken Conductor
9: Latch Aux1
10: Latch Aux2
11: Latch I2>
12: Latch I2>>
13: Latch Aux3
14: Latch Aux
15: reserved
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 64/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
03 Blocking 1 Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0* 0: Blocking t I> * Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: Blocking t I>>
2: Blocking t I>>>
3: Blocking t I0>
4: Blocking t I0>>
5: Blocking t I0>>>
6: Blocking t I<
7: Blocking t Therm
8: Blocking Broken
Conductor
9: Blocking t Aux1
10: Blocking t Aux2
11: Blocking t I2>
12: Blocking t I2>>
13: Blocking t Aux3
14: Blocking t Aux4
15: reserved
04 Blocking 2 Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0* 0: Blocking t I> * Setting 0 / 65535 / 1
1: Blocking t I>>
2: Blocking t I>>>
3: Blocking t I0>
4: Blocking t I0>>
5: Blocking t I0>>>
6: Blocking t I<
7: Blocking t Therm
8: Blocking Broken
Conductor
9: Blocking t Aux1
10: Blocking t Aux2
11: Blocking t I2>
12: Blocking t I2>>
13: Blocking t Aux3
14: Blocking t Aux4
15: reserved
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 65/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
05 Broken conductor Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
detection
06 Tempo tBC Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 6005 = 1 Setting 0 / 144.0 / 0.01 s
07 Threshold mod Courier floating point 20 % * 6005 = 1 Setting 20 / 100 / 1 %
iinv/idirect in % number
08 Cold load start Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
09 Threshold of cold load Binary (8 bits) 0* 6008 = 1 Setting 0 / 255 / 1
start
0A % of cold load start Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 50 % * 6008 = 1 Setting 100 / 500 / 1
0B Cold load start Tempo Courier floating point 1.0 s * 6008 = 1 Setting 0.1 / 3600.0 / 0.1
number s
0C Breaker failure Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
0D I< Threshold for Breaker Courier floating point 10 % * 600C = 1 Setting 2 / 100/ 1 %
failure number
0E Tempo tBF Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0.1 s * 600C = 1 Setting 0.03 / 10.0 / 0.01
s
0F Phase instant blocking Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 600C = 1 Setting 0 / 1/ 1
10 Earth instant blocking Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 600C = 1 Setting 0 / 1/ 1
11 Logic selectivity 1 Binary (4 bits) Setting 0 / 15/ 1
12 Tempo selectivity1 Courier floating point 6011 = 1 Setting 0 / 150.0 / 0.01 s
number
13 Logic selectivity 2 Binary (4 bits) Setting 0 / 15 / 1
14 Tempo selectivity 2 Courier floating point 6013 = 1 Setting 0 / 150.0 / 0.01 s
number
15 Trip Configuration 2/2 Binary (2 bits) 0* 0: Trip SOTF Setting 0/3/1
1: Control TRIP
16 Latch Configuration 2/2 Binary (2 bits) 0* 0: Latch SOTF Setting 0/3/1
1: Reserved
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 66/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
61 00 TS SETTINGS
01 Logical input allocation 1 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0 / 23 / 1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: CB failure
5 5: External input 1
6 6: External input 2
7 7: Logic blocking 1
8 8: Logic blocking 2
9 9: Disturbance start
10 10: Cold load start
11 11: Log Selectivity 1
12 12: Log Selectivity 2
13 13: Change of group
14 14: Recloser locked
15 15: Thermal reset
16 16: Trip circuit supervision
17 17: external CB failure
18 18: Leds reset
19 19: Maintenance mode
20 20: External input 3
21 21: External input 4
22 22: Manual Close
23 23: Local Mode
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 67/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
02 Logical input allocation 2 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0 / 23 / 1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: CB failure
5 5: External input 1
6 6: External input 2
7 7: Logic blocking 1
8 8: Logic blocking 2
9 9: Disturbance start
10 10: Cold load start
11 11: Log Selectivity 1
12 12: Log Selectivity 2
13 13: Change of group
14 14: Recloser locked
15 15: Thermal reset
16 16: Trip circuit supervision
17 17: external CB failure
18 18: Leds reset
19 19: Maintenance mode
20 20: External input 3
21 21: External input 4
22 22: Manual Close
23 23: Local Mode
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 68/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
03 Logical input allocation 3 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0 / 23 / 1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: CB failure
5 5: External input 1
6 6: External input 2
7 7: Logic blocking 1
8 8: Logic blocking 2
9 9: Disturbance start
10 10: Cold load start
11 11: Log Selectivity 1
12 12: Log Selectivity 2
13 13: Change of group
14 14: Recloser locked
15 15: Thermal reset
16 16: Trip circuit supervision
17 17: external CB failure
18 18: Leds reset
19 19: Maintenance mode
20 20: External input 3
21 21: External input 4
22 22: Manual Close
23 23: Local Mode
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 69/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
04 Logical input allocation 4 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0 / 23 / 1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: CB failure
5 5: External input 1
6 6: External input 2
7 7: Logic blocking 1
8 8: Logic blocking 2
9 9: Disturbance start
10 10: Cold load start
11 11: Log Selectivity 1
12 12: Log Selectivity 2
13 13: Change of group
14 14: Recloser locked
15 15: Thermal reset
16 16: Trip circuit supervision
17 17: external CB failure
18 18: Leds reset
19 19: Maintenance mode
20 20: External input 3
21 21: External input 4
22 22: Manual Close
23 23: Local Mode
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 70/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
05 Logical input allocation 5 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0 / 23 / 1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: CB failure
5 5: External input 1
6 6: External input 2
7 7: Logic blocking 1
8 8: Logic blocking 2
9 9: Disturbance start
10 10: Cold load start
11 11: Log Selectivity 1
12 12: Log Selectivity 2
13 13: Change of group
14 14: Recloser locked
15 15: Thermal reset
16 16: Trip circuit supervision
17 17: external CB failure
18 18: Leds reset
19 19: Maintenance mode
20 20: External input 3
21 21: External input 4
22 22: Manual Close
23 23: Local Mode
06 Timer aux 1 Courier floating point number 0* Setting 0 / 200.0 / 0.01
07 Timer aux 2 Courier floating point number 0* Setting 0 / 200.0 / 0.01
08 TS setting (Edge type) Binary (5 bits) Bit 0 to 4 = 0: Rising edge Setting 0 / 31 / 1
Bit 0 to 4 = 1: Falling edge
09 TS voltage Indexed String 0 * = DC Setting 0/1/1
1 = AC
0A Timer aux 3 Courier floating point number 0* Setting 0 / 200.0 / 0.01
0B Timer aux 4 Courier floating point number 0* Setting 0 / 200.0 / 0.01
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 71/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
62 00 TC SETTINGS
01 GENERAL TRIP Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
02 I> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
03 tI> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
04 I>> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
05 t I>> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
06 I>>> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
07 t I>>> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
08 I0> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
09 t I0> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
0A I0>> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
0B t I0>> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
0C I0>>> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
0D t I0>>> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
0E Broken conductor Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
0F Breaker failure Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
10 t I< Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
11 t Iinv> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
12 t Iinv>> Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
13 Thermal alarm Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
14 Thermal trip Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
15 Reclosing Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
16 tAux 1 Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
17 tAux 2 Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 72/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
18 Breaker alarm Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
19 Trip circuit alarm Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
1A Autoreclose in progress Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
1B Definitive trip Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
1C TC Active Setting Group Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
bit 0 to 6 =0: Group 1
bit 0 to 6 =1: Group 2
1D TC lock setting Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
bit 0 to 6 =1: TC Locked
1E tAux 3 Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
1F tAux 4 Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
20 tCOMM1 Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
21 tCOMM2 Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
22 tCOMM3 Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
23 tCOMM4 Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
24 SOTF Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
25 CONTROL TRIP Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
26 CONTROL CLOSE Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
27 Locked Autorecloser Binary (7 bits) 0000000 * Setting 0/127/1
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 73/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
63 00 LEDS SETTINGS
01 Led 5 Binary (16 bits) 4* 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>> *
3: t I>>
4: I>>>
5: t I>>>
6: I0>
7: t I0>
8: I0>>
9: t I0>>
10: I0>>>
11: t I0>>>
12: Thermal Overload
13: t I2>
14: Broken Conductor
15: Breaker Failure
02 Led 6 Binary (16 bits) 16 * 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>>
3: t I>>
4: I>>> *
5: t I>>>
6: I0>
7: t I0>
8: I0>>
9: t I0>>
10: I0>>>
11: t I0>>>
12: Thermal Overload
13: t I2>
14: Broken Conductor
15: Breaker Failure
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 74/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
03 Led 7 Binary (16 bits) 32 * 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>>
3: t I>>
4: I>>>
5: t I>>> *
6: I0>
7: t I0>
8: I0>>
9: t I0>>
10: I0>>>
11: t I0>>>
12: Thermal Overload
13: t I2>
14: Broken Conductor
15: Breaker Failure
04 Led 8 Binary (16 bits) 64 * 0: I> Setting 0/65535/1
1: t I>
2: I>>
3: t I>>
4: I>>>
5: t I>>>
6: I0> *
7: t I0>
8: I0>>
9: t I0>>
10: I0>>>
11: t I0>>>
12: Thermal Overload
13: t I2>
14: Broken Conductor
15: Breaker Failure
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 75/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
05 Led PF5 Binary (9 bits) 0* 0: Input 1 Setting 0/2047/1
1: Input 2
2: Input 3
3: Input 4
4: Input 5
5: Locked Autorecloser
6:Autorecloser in progress
7: t Aux1
8: t Aux2
9: t I2>>
10: SOTF
06 Led PF6 Binary (9 bits) 0* 0: Input 1 Setting 0/2047/1
1: Input 2
2: Input 3
3: Input 4
4: Input 5
5: Locked Autorecloser
6:Autorecloser in progress
7: t Aux1
8: t Aux2
9: t I2>>
10: SOTF
07 Led PF7 Binary (9 bits) 0* 0: Input 1 Setting 0/2047/1
1: Input 2
2: Input 3
3: Input 4
4: Input 5
5: Locked Autorecloser
6:Autorecloser in progress
7: t Aux1
8: t Aux2
9: t I2>>
10: SOTF
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 76/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
08 Led PF8 Binary (9 bits) 0* 0: Input 1 Setting 0/2047/1
1: Input 2
2: Input 3
3: Input 4
4: Input 5
5: Locked Autorecloser
6:Autorecloser in progress
7: t Aux1
8: t Aux2
9: t I2>>
10: SOTF
64 00 ALARMS
01 Instant. alarm self-reset Binary (1 bits) Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Reset leds on Fault Binary (1 bits) Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Battery alarm Binary (1 bits) Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
69 00 SW SUPERVISION
01 Trip circuit supervision ? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Trip circuit time ? Courier floating point 0.1 s * 6901 = 1 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.05 s
number
03 SW Operating time? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
04 SW Operating time Courier floating point 0.05 s* 6903 = 1 Setting 0.05/1.0/0.05 s
number
05 SW Operating number? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
06 SW Closing time ? Courier floating point 0.05 s* 6905 = 1 Setting 0.05/1.0/0.05 s
number
07 SW Closing time Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
08 SW Operating number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 6907 = 1 Setting 0/50000/1
09 SA2n? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 77/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
0A SA2n Courier floating point 0 exp+06 A² * 6909 = 1 Setting 0/4000/1
number (*exp+06)
0B N Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/2/1
0C TRIP t Courier floating point 0.1 s* Setting 0.1/5.0/0.05 s
number
0D CLOSE t Courier floating point 0.1 s* Setting 0.1/5.0/0.05 s
number
6A 00 COMM ORDER LATCH
TIMES
01 t COMM1 Courier floating point 0.1 s* 6220 != 0 Setting 0.1/5.0/0.05 s
number
02 t COMM2 Courier floating point 0.1 s* 6221 != 0 Setting 0.1/5.0/0.05 s
number
03 t COMM3 Courier floating point 0.1 s* 6222 != 0 Setting 0.1/5.0/0.05 s
number
04 t COMM4 Courier floating point 0.1 s* 6223 != 0 Setting 0.1/5.0/0.05 s
number
6B 00 SWITCH ON TO FAULT
01 SOTF function ? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 TManual close Courier floating point 0.1 s* 6B01 = 1 Setting 0/0.50/0.01 s
number
03 Start I>> / I>>> Binary (2 bit) 0 0*: Start I>> 6B01 = 1 Setting 0/3/1
1 1: Start I>>>
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 78/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
70 00 RECORDER CONTROL VERSION P122 & P123
01 Start/Trigger recorder Indexed String 0 Stopped Setting 1/2/1
1 Trigerred
2 Running *
02 Recorder Source Indexed String 0 Samples * Data
20 Pretemps Courier floating point 0.1 secondes Setting 0.1/3.0/0.1
number
21 Postemps Courier floating point 0.1 secondes Setting 0.1/3.0/0.1
number
22 Trigger Indexed String 0 On Inst* / On Trig Setting 0/1/1
30 Measurement period Indexed String 0 5* / 10 / 15 / 30 / 60 min Setting 0/4/1
40 Rolling Demands
41 Rolling sub-period Courier floating point 1 min* Setting 1/60/1
number
42 Rolling sub-period Courier floating point 1* Setting 1/24/1
number number
80 00 DISTURBANCE REC
01 Record Number Unsigned integer (1 byte) 0* Setting 0/5/1 (selon
contexte)
02 Trigger Time IEC870 Time & Date dd/mm/yy hh:mm Data
03 Available Channel Bit Binary Flag 11111 Data
Mask Indexed String 0 “ Ia ”
1 “ Ib ”
2 “ Ic ”
3 “ I0 ”
4 “ Inputs/Outputs ”
04 Channel Types Binary Flag 0: digital, 1: 01111 Data
analogue
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
Courier Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 79/170

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
05 Channel Offsets Repeated group of Courier Upload Offsets Data
numbers
06 Scaling Factors Repeated group of Courier Upload Scal. Factors Data
numbers
07-0F NOT IMPLEMENTED –
reserved
10 Record Length Integer (2 bytes) Data
11 Trigger position Integer (2 bytes) Data
12 Time Base Courier floating point Data
number
13 NOT IMPLEMENTED –
reserved
14 Upload Timer Repeated group of Integers Data
15-1F NOT IMPLEMENTED –
reserved
20 Upload Channel 0 Repeated group of Integers Data
21 Upload Channel 1 Repeated group of Integers Data
22 Upload Channel 2 Repeated group of Integers Data
23 Upload Channel 3 Repeated group of Integers Data
24 Upload Channel Repeated group of Data
Inputs/Outputs Integer/Bin. flags
90 00 AUTOMAT. FLT
01 Record number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Setting
(automatic)
02 Occur fault date Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
03 Active set group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 Data
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
Courier Database
Page 80/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(*: default)
04 Phase in fault ASCII Text (10 bytes) “ PHASE A ” Data
05 Fault Id ASCII Text (18 bytes) “ I >> ” Data
06 Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
number
07 Ia Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
number
08 Ib Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
number
09 Ic Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
number
0A In Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
number
BF 00 COMM SYSTEM DATA
01 Dist Record Cntrl Ref Menu Cell (2) 0x7000 Data
02 Dist Record Extract Ref Menu Cell (2) 0x8000 Data
03 Setting Transfert
04 Reset Demand Timers NOT IMPLEMENTED
05 Reset Event Report NOT IMPLEMENTED
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

IEC 60870-5-103
MiCOM P120 - P121 - P122- P123
VERSION V5
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
IEC 60870-5-103
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/170

CONTENTS

1. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE 3
1.1 Physical connection and link layer 3
1.2 Initialisation 3
1.3 Time synchronisation (P122 & P123 only) 3
1.4 Spontaneous events (P122 & P123 only) 4
1.5 General interrogation 4
1.6 Cyclic measurements 4
1.7 Commands 4
1.8 Disturbance records (P122 & P123 only) 4
1.9 Blocking of monitor direction 4

2. APPENDIX 1 5
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
IEC 60870-5-103
Page 2/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
IEC 60870-5-103
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/170

1. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device.
This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay conforms to
compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

• Initialisation (Reset)

• Time Synchronisation

• Event Record Extraction

• General Interrogation

• Cyclic Measurements

• General Commands
1.1 Physical connection and link layer
Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is possible to
select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel interface. Following a
change, a reset command is required to re-establish communications.
The parameters of the communication are the following:

• Even Parity

• 8 Data bits

• 1 stop bit

• Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds

1.2 Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been
changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The relay will
respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being
that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay’s transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the
Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained
in the data section of this ASDU:
Manufacturer Name: AREVA
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay model
number to identify the type of relay, e.g. P123.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also
produce a power up event.
1.3 Time synchronisation (P122 & P123 only)
The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC60870-
5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-
103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay
will respond with a confirm. Whether the time synchronisation message is sent as a send
confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be
returned as Class 1 data.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
IEC 60870-5-103
Page 4/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.4 Spontaneous events (P122 & P123 only)

The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/information
numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are not used, thus any events
that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will not be sent.
Events are categorised using the following information:

• Common Address

• Function Type

• Information number
APPENDIX 1 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The common
address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces more events of a
certain type than can be passed using the standardised messages. For example if the relay
produces starts and trips for three stages of overcurrent only two stages can be passed
using the standardised messages.
Using the different common address for two of the overcurrent stages allows each stage to
be indicated. The table in APPENDIX 1 shows the common address as an offset value. The
common address offset will be added to the station address in order to pass these events.
1.5 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, information
numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated
in APPENDIX 1.
1.6 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read
from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used).
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of
either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. The selection of either 1.2 or
2.4 for a particular value is indicated in APPENDIX 1.
1.7 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in APPENDIX 1. The relay will respond to
other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command.
1.8 Disturbance records (P122 & P123 only)
The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism
defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the VDEW
control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the start of every
GI cycle.
1.9 Blocking of monitor direction
The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.IEC 60870-5-
103 DATABASES
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
IEC 60870-5-103
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/170

2. APPENDIX 1
2.1 Spontaneous messages managed by MiCOM P12x
These messages includes a sub-assembly of events which are generated on the relay,
because some generated events are not registered in VDEW. They are the most priority
messages.
An event is always generated on the rising edge of the information.
Some events can be generated on the rising or lowering edge.
In the list below, events only generated on rising edge will be tagged with a ‘*’.
Two types of ASDU can be generated for events: ASDU 1 (time-tagged message) or ASDU
2 (time-tagged message with relative time).
The following list of processed events is the list with the private messages option active,
for all Overcurrent protection functions, with the associated FUNCTION Type,
INFORMATION NUMBER, ASDU TYPE, CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON
ADDRESS OF ASDU (The corresponding numbers with private messages option inactive
are given just below).
FUN <160>: Function type in Public range for Overcurrent Protections (compatible).
FUN <168>: Function type in Private range (Reserved for Overcurrent Protections).
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
IEC 60870-5-103
Page 6/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Status indications in monitor direction: Availability

− Autorecloser active: FUN<160>;INF <16>; TYP <1>;COT<1> ,<ADDR> ↑↓ P123

− LEDs reset: FUN<160>;INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>; <ADDR>,* P122-P123

− Local parameter Setting active: FUN<160>;INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

− Setting Group number 1 active: FUN<160>;INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

− Setting Group number 2 active: FUN<160>;INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

− Auxiliary input 1: FUN<160>;INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

− Auxiliary input 2: FUN<160>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

− Auxiliary input 3: FUN<160>;INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

− Auxiliary input 4: FUN<160>;INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P123

− Logical input 1: FUN<168>;INF <160>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical input 2: FUN<168>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical input 3: FUN<168>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical input 4: FUN<168>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical input 5: FUN<168>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical output 1: FUN<168>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical output 2: FUN<168>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
IEC 60870-5-103
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/170

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical output 3: FUN<168>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical output 4: FUN<168>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical output 5: FUN<168>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical output 6: FUN<168>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical output 7: FUN<168>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Logical output 8: FUN<168>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

Supervision Indications in monitor direction: Availability

− Trip Circuit Supervision: FUN<160>;INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

Fault Indications in monitor direction: Availability

− Start / pick-up I>: FUN<168>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P121 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <64>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Start / pick-up I>>: FUN<168>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P121 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Start / pick-up I>>>: FUN<168>;INF <11>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P121 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <66>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Start / pick-up IN>: FUN<168>;INF <12>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
IEC 60870-5-103
Page 8/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <96>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Start / pick-up IN>>: FUN<168>;INF <13>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Start / pick-up IN>>>: FUN<168>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <98>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Start / pick-up N: FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

− Start / pick-up I<: FUN<168>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Start / pick-up I2>: FUN<168>;INF <104>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <57>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Start / pick-up I2>>: FUN<168>;INF <106>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <74>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− General Trip: FUN<160>;INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

− Trip L1: FUN<160>;INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

− Trip L2: FUN<160>;INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

− Trip L3: FUN<160>;INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

− General Start / pick-up: FUN<160>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

− Breaker failure: FUN<160>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P122-P123

− Trip I>: FUN<160>;INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

− Trip I>>: FUN<160>;INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

− Trip I>>>: FUN<168>;INF <19>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
IEC 60870-5-103
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/170

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <94>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR+1>,*

− Trip IN>: FUN<160>;INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

− Trip IN>>: FUN<160>;INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

− Trip IN>>>: FUN<168>;INF <22>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <95>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR+1>,*

− Trip I<: FUN<168>;INF <23>; TYP <2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,*

− Trip I2>: FUN<168>;INF <58>; TYP <2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <105>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,*

− Trip I2>>: FUN<168>;INF <75>; TYP <2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <107>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,*

− Thermal Alarm FUN<168>;INF <15>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR> P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <110>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>

− Thermal Overload FUN<168>;INF <16>; TYP <2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <111>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,*

− Trip Broken conductor FUN<168>;INF <39>; TYP <2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <114>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
Auto-recloser Indications (monitor direction): Availability

− Circuit Breaker ‘ON’ by short-time autorecloser:

FUN<160>;INF <128>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>,* P123

− Circuit Breaker ‘ON’ by long-time autorecloser:

FUN<160>;INF <129>; TYP <1>; COT<1>*,<ADDR> P123

− Autorecloser blocked: FUN<160>;INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P123

− Autorecloser configuration in error : FUN<168>;INF <65>; TYP <1>;COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P121 to P123

P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
IEC 60870-5-103
Page 10/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

− Final Trip : FUN<168>;INF <66>; TYP <1>;COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P121 to P123

− Autorecloser in progress : FUN<168>;INF <67>; TYP <1>;COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P121 to P123

− CB in O/O (« closed ») position: FUN<168>;INF <33>; TYP <1>;COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P121 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− CB in F/O (« open ») position: FUN<168>;INF <34>; TYP <1>;COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P121 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Trip TC: FUN<168>;INF <1>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

− Close TC: FUN<168>;INF <2>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓ P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

NOTE: The double arrow ↑↓ means that the event generated on event occurrence and another event is generated on event disappearing.

2.2 List of data contained in General Interrogation

It is given in the answer to the General Interrogation (GI).
Relay state information are Class 1 data, they are systematically sent to the master station, during a General Interrogation.
The list of processed data, following a General Interrogation, is given below: it is a sub-assembly of the spontaneous message list, so like spontaneous
messages, these data are generated on rising and lowering edge.
Status indications (monitor direction): Availability

− Auto-recloser active: FUN<160>;INF <16>; TYP <1>;COT<9>,<ADDR> 123

− Leds reset: FUN<160>;INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>,* 120 to P123

− Local parameter Setting active: FUN<160>;INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

− Setting Group number 1 active: FUN<160>;INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P122-P123

− Setting Group number 2 active: FUN<160>;INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P122-P123
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
IEC 60870-5-103
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/170

− Auxiliary input 1: FUN<160>;INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

− Auxiliary input 2: FUN<160>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

− Logical input 1: FUN<168>;INF <160>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical input 2: FUN<168>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical input 3: FUN<168>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical input 4: FUN<168>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical input 5: FUN<168>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical output 1: FUN<168>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical output 2: FUN<168>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical output 3: FUN<168>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical output 4: FUN<168>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical output 5: FUN<168>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical output 6: FUN<168>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P122-P123

P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
IEC 60870-5-103
Page 12/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical output 7: FUN<168>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− Logical output 8: FUN<168>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>
Supervision Indications in monitor direction: Availability

− Trip Circuit Supervision: FUN<160>;INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P122-P123

Fault Indications in monitor direction: Availability

− Start / pick-up N: FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

− General Start / pick-up: FUN<160>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P120 to P123
Auto-recloser Indications in monitor direction: Availability

− Autorecloser blocked: FUN<160>;INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P123

− CB in O/O (« closed ») position: FUN<168>;INF <33>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P121 to P123
with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

− CB in F/O (« open ») position: FUN<168>;INF <34>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR> P121 to P123
with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDR>

2.3 Processed Commands

System Commands: Availability

− Synchronization Command (ASDU 6): FUN<255>,INF <0>; TYP <6>;COT<8> P122-P123

This command can be sent to a specific relay, or global. The time sent by master is the time of the first bit of the frame. The relay synchronizes with this
time, corrected by the frame transmission delay. After updating its time, the relay send back an acknowledge to the master, by giving its new current time.
This acknowledge message will be an event of ASDU 6 type.
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
IEC 60870-5-103
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/170

− General Interrogation Initialization command (ASDU 7):

FUN<255>;INF <0>;TYP <7>; COT<9> P120 to P123
This command starts the relay interrogation:
The relay then sends a list of data containing the relay state (see list described above).
The GI command contains a scan number which will be included in the answers of the GI cycle generated by the GI command.
If a data has just changed before extracted by the GI, the new state is sent to the master station.
When an event is generated during the GI cycle, the event is sent in priority, and the GI cycle is temporarily interrupted. The end of the GI consists in
sending an ASDU 8 to the master station.
If, during a General Interrogation cycle, another GI Initialization command is received, the precedent answer is stopped, and the new GI cycle started.
General Commands (ASDU 20) (Control direction): Availability

− Auto-recloser On / Off: only on MiCOM P123: P123

FUN<160>;INF<16>, TYP<20>, COT <20>

− LEDs Reset: This command acknowledge all alarms on Front Panel on MiCOM P12x products:
FUN<160>;INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT <20>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

− Setting group number 1: FUN<160>;INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20>,<ADDR> P122-P123

− Setting group number 2: FUN<160>;INF<24>, TYP<20>, COT <20>,<ADDR> P122-P123

− Order TC COMM1: FUN<168>;INF <234>; TYP <20>; COT<20>,<ADDR> P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <136>; TYP <1>; COT<20>,<ADDR>

− Order TC COMM2: FUN<168>;INF <235>; TYP <20>; COT<20>,<ADDR> P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <137>; TYP <1>; COT<20>,<ADDR>

− Order TC COMM3: FUN<168>;INF <238>; TYP <20>; COT<20>,<ADDR> P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <138>; TYP <1>; COT<20>,<ADDR>

− Order TC COMM4: FUN<168>;INF <239>; TYP <20>; COT<20>,<ADDR> P122-P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <139>; TYP <1>; COT<20>,<ADDR>

− Trip TC: FUN<168>;INF <1>; TYP <20>; COT<20>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
IEC 60870-5-103
Page 14/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<20>,<ADDR>

− Close TC: FUN<168>;INF <2>; TYP <20>; COT<20>,<ADDR> P120 to P123

with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<20>,<ADDR>
After executing one of these commands, the relay sends an acknowledge message, which contains the result of command execution.
If a state change is the consequence of the command, it must be sent in a ASDU 1 with COT 12 (remote operation).
If the relay receive another command message from the master station before sending the acknowledge message, it will be discarded.
Commands which are not processed by the relay are rejected with a negative acknowledge message.

2.4 Relay re initialization

In case of relay re initialization, the relay send to the master station: Availability

− A message indicating relay start/restart (FUN<160>;INF <5>; TYP <5> COT <5>) P120 to P123

− or a message indicating Reset CU (FUN<160>;INF <5>; TYP <3> COT <4>) P120 to P123

− or a message indicating Reset FCB (FUN<160>;INF <5>; TYP <2> COT <3>) P120 to P123
Each identification message of the relay (ASDU 5) contains the manufacturer name in 8 ASCII characters et 4 free characters containing: « P122 » or
« P123 ».

2.5 Cyclic Messages (ASDU9 and ASDU 77)

Only measurands can be stored in these messages.
The measurands values are stored in lower levels of communication, before polling by master station.
Several of the fields in the ASDU 9 (FUN<160>,INF <148>) are unused in the P122/P123 relay (Voltage and Power values), so they are set to 0: Only
RMS Ia, Ib, Ic values and frequency are stored (with a rate such as: 2,4 * nominal value = 4096).
The second ASDU is ASDU3.4 (FUN<160>,INF<147>), which contains in first position In earth current value in rated format (with a rate such as: 2,4 *
nominal value = 4096). Vn value does not exist, so the second position value in ASDU3.4 is set to « unused ».
Another ASDU, ASDU 77 (FUN<168>,INF <209>), which is a private ASDU, contains 4 other measurands: Iinverse and Idirect values, Thermal state (in
%), in «short floating-point » format (IEEE 32 bits floating-point format). These values are not rated.
with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <149>
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
IEC 60870-5-103
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/170

2.6 IEC870-5-103 messages for Disturbance record extraction

The disturbance extraction procedure with IEC870-5-103 in MICOM Px2x relays is in conformance with IEC870-5-103 standard definition.
The maximum disturbance record number stored in a P122/P123 is 5.
The disturbance record mapping for P122 and P123 is the following:

− Number of analog channels transmitted: 4, which are:

Channel 1: Ia current (Phase L1).
Channel 2: Ib current (Phase L2).
Channel 3: Ic current (Phase L3).
Channel 4: IN current (Earth).

− Identifiers of tags (13) transmitted in ASDU 29 (logical informations) for P122:

− Tag number 1: IN>: FUN <160> INF <67>

− Tag number 2: General start: FUN <160> INF <84>

− Tag number 3: CB Failure: FUN <160> INF <85>

− Tag number 4: General Trip: FUN <160> INF <68>

− Tag number 5: tI>: FUN <160> INF <90>

− Tag number 6: tI>>: FUN <160> INF <91>

− Tag number 7: tI>>>: FUN <168> INF <19>

with private option inactive: FUN <160>,INF <94>

− Tag number 8: tIN> (Earth): FUN <160> INF <92>

− Tag number 9: tIN>> (Earth): FUN <160> INF <93>

− Tag number 10: tIN>>> (Earth): FUN <168> INF <22>

with private option inactive: FUN <160>,INF <95>

− Tag number 11: Log input 1: FUN <168> INF <160>

P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
IEC 60870-5-103
Page 16/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

with private option inactive: FUN <160>,INF <161>

− Tag number 12: Log input 2: FUN <168> INF <161>

with private option inactive: FUN <160>,INF <162>

− Tag number 13: Log input 3: FUN <168> INF <162>

with private option inactive: FUN <160>,INF <163>
For a P123, there are 15 identifiers of tags, so the two following tags in addition to the precedents:

− Tag number 14: Log input 4: FUN <168> INF <163>

with private option inactive: FUN <160>,INF <164>

− Tag number 15: Log input 5: FUN <168> INF <164>

with private option inactive: FUN <160>,INF <165>
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

DNP 3.0 DATABASE

MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123
VERSION V5
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
DNP 3.0 Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/170

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 3
1.1 Purpose of this document 3
1.2 DNP V3.00 device Profile 3
1.3 Implementation Table 6
1.4 Point List 8
1.4.1 Binary Input Points 8
1.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks 11
1.4.3 Counters 12
1.4.4 Analog Inputs 13
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
DNP 3.0 Database
Page 2/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
DNP 3.0 Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/170

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose of this document
The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed
Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 within P12x MiCOM relays.
P12x uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version 2.18.
This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP Subset
Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate with P12x via
the DNP 3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2,
contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even beyond
Subset Level 3.
1.2 DNP V3.00 device Profile
The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in
the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset
Definitions as a “Document,” it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This
table, in combination with the following should provide a complete
interoperability/configuration guide for P12x:

• the Implementation Table provided in Section 1.3 (beginning on page 6),

• the Point List Tables provided in Section 1.4 (beginning on page 8),

• and a description of configuration methods and user-interface in Sections

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 1.3, BEGINNING ON PAGE 6).
Vendor Name: AREVA T&D Antomation & Information
Device Name: SERIAL 20 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave
Source Code Library, Version 2.18.
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:

For Requests: Level 2 . Master

For Responses: Level 2 " Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels
Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):

For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-
stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to
request qualifier code 06 (no range – or all points).
Static object requests received with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with
qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests received with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be
responded with qualifiers 17 or 28.
For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested.
The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048
Received 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
. None
" Fixed at 2 " None
. Configurable . Configurable
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
DNP 3.0 Database
Page 4/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 1.3, BEGINNING ON PAGE 6).
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
" Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

Never
Always
" When reporting Event Data
" When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm: None "Fixed at 100 ms Variable Configurable.

Complete Appl. Fragment: " None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable
Application Confirm: None "Fixed at 1s Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Response: " None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable

Others:
Binary input change scanning period: 5ms
Analog input change scanning period: 1s
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs " Never Always Sometimes Configurable

SELECT/OPERATE Never " Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Never " Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Never " Always Sometimes Configurable

Count > 1 " Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Pulse On Never " Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off " Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Queue " Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Clear Queue " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events
no specific variation requested: when no specific variation requested:

Never " Never for P121

" Only time-tagged for P122 and " Binary Input Change With Time for
P123 P122 and P123
" Only non-time-tagged for P121 Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

" Never " Never

Configurable When Device Restarts
Only certain objects When Status Flags Change
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED No other options are permitted.
Function codes supported
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
DNP 3.0 Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/170

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 1.3, BEGINNING ON PAGE 6).
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

No Counters Reported No Counters Reported

Configurable Configurable (attach explanation)
" Default Object: 20 " 16 Bits
Default Variation: 5 " 32 Bits
Point-by-point list attached Other Value: _____
" Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
" Yes
No
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
DNP 3.0 Database
Page 6/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.3 Implementation Table

The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the
P12x in both request messages and in response messages.
For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will
be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will
be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are
always responded.

In the table below the text shaded as indicates

Subset Level 3
Subset Level 3 functionality
beyond Subset Level indicates
(beyond Subset Level 2), and text shaded as
3 functionality
beyond Subset Level 3.

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(Library will parse) (Library will respond with)
Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Function Qualifier
Description (dec)
Number Number Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 22 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index
2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
is used to request default
variation)
2 1(default – Binary Input Change without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
see note 1 for 07, 08 (limited qty)
Time
P120 - P121)
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(only P122- (default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
P123) see note 1)
10 0 Binary Output Status (Variation 0 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
is used to request default 07, 08 (limited qty)
variation) 17, 28 (index)
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) echo of request
4 (operate) 07, 08 (limited qty)
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all)
used to request default variation) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty)
P123)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
P123) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
P123) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
Flag 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
P123)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
Flag 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
P123)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
21 0 Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 06 (no range, or all)
used to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
P123)
17, 28 (index)
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
P123) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
DNP 3.0 Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/170

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(Library will parse) (Library will respond with)
Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Function Qualifier
Description (dec)
Number Number Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
P123) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
Flag 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
P123)
17, 28 (index)
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
Flag 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
P123)
17, 28 (index)
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
32 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
0 is used to request default
variation)
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
without Time
see note 1)
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited qty)
without Time
32 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(only P122- 07, 08 (limited qty)
Time
P123)
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(only P122- 07, 08 (limited qty)
Time
P123)
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
P123) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(only P122- (default – 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
P123) see note 1) 07 (limited qty=1) see note 2)
08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
(qty = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28

60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28

07, 08 (limited qty)
60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28
07, 08 (limited qty)
60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28
07, 08 (limited qty)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(index must =7)
No Object (function code only) –See 13 (cold restart)
Note 3
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0

is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only
responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28,
respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00,
01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For
change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: For P12x, a cold restart is implemented as a warm restart – the
executable is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
DNP 3.0 Database
Page 8/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.4 Point List

The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this
implementation of DNP 3.0. uses the database protection.
1.4.1 Binary Input Points
Every Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in
one of classes 1, 2 or 3.

Binary Input Points

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 for P120 et P121 and
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P122 and P123
P120 P121 P122 P123 Change
Point Point Point Point Event Class
Name/Description init val.
Index Index Index Index (1, 2, 3 or
none)
0 0 0 0 Output relay 1 (trip) 0 1
1 1 1 1 Output relay 2 0 2
2 2 2 2 Output relay 3 0 2
3 3 3 3 Output relay 4 0 2
4 4 4 4 Output relay 0 ( watch dog) 0 2
5 5 Output relay 5 0 2
6 6 Output relay 6 0 2
7 Output relay 7 0 2
8 Output relay 8 0 2
5 5 7 9 Opto isolator 1 0 2
6 6 8 10 Opto isolator 2 0 2
9 11 Opto isolator 3 0 2
12 Opto isolator 4 0 2
13 Opto isolator 5 0 2
7 10 14 Phase overcurrent stage 1 start 0 1
8 11 15 Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip 0 1
9 12 16 Phase overcurrent stage 2 start 0 1
10 13 17 Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip 0 1
11 14 18 Phase overcurrent stage 3 start 0 1
12 15 19 Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip 0 1
7 13 16 20 Earth overcurrent stage 1 start 0 1
8 14 17 21 Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip 0 1
9 15 18 22 Earth overcurrent stage 2 start 0 1
10 16 19 23 Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip 0 1
11 17 20 24 Earth overcurrent stage 3 start 0 1
12 18 21 25 Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip 0 1
22 26 tI< 0 1
23 27 Thermal start 0 1
24 28 Thermal trip 0 1
25 29 Taux1 0 1
26 30 Taux2 0 1
27 31 Broken conductor 0 1
28 32 cb failure 0 1
29 33 I2> start 0 1
30 34 tI2> trip 0 1
31 35 Number of cb operation 0 1
32 36 Cb operation time alarm 0 1
33 37 sa2n 0 1
34 38 trip circuit alarm 0 1
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
DNP 3.0 Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/170

Binary Input Points

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 for P120 et P121 and
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P122 and P123
P120 P121 P122 P123 Change
Point Point Point Point Event Class
Name/Description init val.
Index Index Index Index (1, 2, 3 or
none)
35 39 cb close time alarm 0 1
40 Blocking autoreclosure 0 1
41 Successful autoreclosure 0 1
42 In Progress autoreclosure 0 1
36 43 logic Selectivity 1 0 1
37 44 logic Selectivity 2 0 1
13 19 38 45 Blocking logic 1 0 1
39 46 Blocking logic 2 0 1
14 20 40 47 52a 0 1
15 21 41 48 52b 0 1
16 22 42 49 Lack of SF6 0 1
43 50 Cold load Pick up 0 1
17 23 44 51 De latching by a logic input 0 1
18 24 45 52 De latching of the Tripping output relay by a logic input 0 1
19 25 46 53 Closing order by a logic input 0 1
20 26 47 54 Tripping order by a logic input 0 1
48 55 Thermal Resetting by communication 0 1
49 56 Shifting to maintenance mode 0 1
21 27 50 57 Major material Alarms 0 1
22 28 51 58 Minor material Alarms 0 1
29 52 59 Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) 0 3
30 53 60 Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched) 0 3
31 54 61 Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched) 0 3
23 32 55 62 Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) 0 3
24 33 56 63 Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched) 0 3
25 34 57 64 Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched) 0 3
58 65 tI< alarm (latched) 0 3
59 66 Thermal start alarm (latched) 0 3
60 67 Thermal trip alarm (latched) 0 3
61 68 Taux1 alarm (latched) 0 3
62 69 Taux2 alarm (latched) 0 3
63 70 Broken conductor alarm (latched) 0 3
64 71 cb failure alarm (latched) 0 3
65 72 tI2> alarm (latched) 0 3
66 73 Cb operation time alarm(latched) 0 3
67 74 Number of cb operation (latched) 0 3
68 75 sa2n alarm (latched) 0 3
69 76 trip circuit alarm(latched) 0 3
70 77 cb close time alarm ( latched) 0 3
78 Fault Configuration of autoreclosure 0 3
71 79 I min Start 0 1
72 80 External CB Failure 0 1
73 81 Latching of Relay 0 2
74 82 I2>> start 0 1
75 83 tI2>> trip 0 1
76 84 tI2>> alarm (latched) 0 3
77 85 taux3 0 1
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
DNP 3.0 Database
Page 10/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Binary Input Points

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 for P120 et P121 and
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P122 and P123
P120 P121 P122 P123 Change
Point Point Point Point Event Class
Name/Description init val.
Index Index Index Index (1, 2, 3 or
none)
78 86 taux3 alarm( latched) 0 3
87 taux4 0 1
88 taux4 alarm( latched) 0 3
89 Final trip (autorecloser) 0 1
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
DNP 3.0 Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/170

1.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control
Relay Output Blocks (Object 12). Binary Output Status points are not included in class 0
polls.

Binary Output Status Points

Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate),
5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
P120 P121 P122 P123 Supported Control
Initial Status
Point Point Point Point Name/Description Relay Output Block
Value
Index Index Index Index Fields

0 0 0 0 De Latch of relays 0 Unpaired Pulse On,

Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
st
1 1 1 1 Acknowledgement of the 1 alarm 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
2 2 2 2 Acknowledgement of all the alarms 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
3 3 3 3 Remote control Triping 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
4 4 4 4 Remote control Closing 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
5 5 Change of Active Group 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
6 6 Thermal State Resetting 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
7 7 Average and Max rms values resetting 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
8 8 Acknowledgement of RAMs material alarms 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
9 Counters initialization of the autorelosure 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
9 10 Initialization of rolling demand (average) 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
10 11 Initialization of Maximum 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
12 Re initialization of autoreclosure 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
11 13 tc com1 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
12 14 tc com2 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
13 15 tc com3 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
14 16 tc com4 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
DNP 3.0 Database
Page 12/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.4.3 Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21).
When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available
in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
Binary Counters and Frozen Counters are not included in class 0 polls.
P120 and P121 do not support binary Counters and Frozen Counters.

Binary Counters
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20
Change Event Object Number: not supported
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
Frozen Counters
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21
Change Event Object Number: not supported
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Frozen Binary without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
P122 P123
Point Point Name/Description Data type
Index Index
0 0 Max RMS current phase A D1
1 1 Max RMS current phase B D1
2 2 Max RMS current phase C D1
3 3 Average RMS current phase A D1
4 4 Average RMS current phase B D1
5 5 Average RMS current phase C D1
6 6 CB operation number D2
7 7 sa2n ia D3
8 8 sa2n ib D3
9 9 sa2n ic D3
10 Total number of autoreclosure cycle D2
11 Number of cycles 1 D2
12 Number of cycles 2 D2
13 Number of cycles 3 D2
14 Number of cycles 4 D2
15 Definitive Tripping number D2
16 Number of closing order D2
10 17 Rolling demand(average) RMS phase A D1
11 18 Rolling demand(average) RMS phase B D1
12 19 Rolling demand(average) RMS phase C D1
13 20 Maximum RMS phase A (after a new initialization) D1
14 21 Maximum RMS phase B (after a new initialization) D1
15 22 Maximum RMS phase C (after a new initialization) D1
Communications P12x/EN CT/F75
DNP 3.0 Database
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/170

1.4.4 Analog Inputs

The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and
32-bit variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output
Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that
are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. For each
point, the “Scaling and Units” column indicates the value of a transmitted 32767. This also
implies the value of a transmitted –32767. The entry in the column does not imply a valid
value for the point.
Always indicating the representation of 32767 in the tables below is a consistent method for
representing scale, applicable to all scaling possibilities.
The “Default Deadband,” and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are used
to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change
event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3) will the change
event be reported. Only the default values for these columns are documented here because
the values may change in operation due to either local (user-interface) or remote (through
DNP) control.
Every Analog Inputs points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of
classes 1, 2 or 3.

Analog Inputs
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o
Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
Scaling Initial
and Units Change Change
P120 P121 P122 P123
Initial (represent Valid Event Event
Point Point Point Point Name/Description
Value ation of Range Dead- Class (1,
Index Index Index Index
32767 – band 2, 3 or
see above) none)
0 0 Active Group 1 32767 1à2 1 1
0 1 1 Magnitude IA 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.02 In 3
1 2 2 Magnitude IB 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.02 In 3
2 3 3 Magnitude IC 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.02 In 3
0 3 4 4 Magnitude IN 0 40 I0n 0 to 40 I0n 0.02 I0n 3
4 5 5 rms IA 0A 327.67A 0 to 3
40000000 2%
A/100
5 6 6 rms IB 0A 327.67A 0 to 3
40000000 2%
A/100
6 7 7 rms IC 0A 327.67A 0 to 3
40000000 2%
A/100
1 7 8 8 rms IN 0A 327.67A 0 to 3
40000000 2%
A/100
9 9 Thermal State 0% 32767% 0 to 65535 10 3
10 10 Frequency 0 327,67 Hz 45Hz to 1Hz 3
65 Hz and
99.99Hz ==
ERROR
11 11 Magnitude I2 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 3
12 12 Magnitude I1 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 3
13 13 Tripping Time 0 327.67s 0 to 10.00s 10 ms 3
14 14 Closing Time 0 327.67s 0 to 10.00s 10 ms 3
15 15 Fault number 0 32767 0 to 65535 1 2
16 16 group 0 32767 1 to 2 each new 2
fault
17 17 phase fault 0 32767 0 to 8 (F1) each new 2
fault
P12x/EN CT/F75 Communications
DNP 3.0 Database
Page 14/170 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Analog Inputs
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o
Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
Scaling Initial
and Units Change Change
P120 P121 P122 P123
Initial (represent Valid Event Event
Point Point Point Point Name/Description
Value ation of Range Dead- Class (1,
Index Index Index Index
32767 – band 2, 3 or
see above) none)
18 18 origin fault 0 32767 0 to each new 2
16 (P122) fault
17 (P123)
(F2)
19 19 Fault magnitude 0 40 In 0 to 40 In each new 2
fault
20 20 Fault magnitude IA 0 40 In 0 to 40 In each new 2
fault
21 21 Fault magnitude IB 0 40 In 0 to 40 In each new 2
fault
22 22 Fault magnitude IC 0 40 In 0 to 40 In each new 2
fault
23 23 Fault magnitude IN 0 40 I0n 0 to 40 I0n each new 2
fault

Format:
F1:
0: None, 1: Phase A, 2: Phase B, 3: Phase C, 4: Phase AB, 5: Phase AC, 6: Phase BC, 7:
Phase A B C, 8: Terre
F2:
0: Null, 1: Remote trip, 2: thermal overload, 3: tI>, 4: tI>>, 5: tI>>>, 6: tIN>, 7: tIN>>, 8:
tIN>>>, 9: tI<, 10: broken conductor, 11: taux1, 12: taux2, 13: tIinv>, 14: tIinv>>, 15:taux2,
16: taux3(only p123), 17:breaker failure, 18: SOFT (only P123)..
Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

COMMISSIONING AND
MAINTENANCE GUIDE
Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/18

CONTENTS

1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING 3

2. COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT 4

2.1 Important notes 4
2.1.1 Injection test sets 4
2.1.2 Additional commissioning test equipment 4
2.1.3 Communication 4
2.2 Commissioning test sheets 4

3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS 5

3.1 Allocation of terminals 5
3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 5
3.3 Visual inspection 5
3.4 Earthing 5
3.5 Current transformers (CT's) 5
3.5.1 Use of a Core CT for earth faults. 5
3.6 Auxiliary supply 7
3.7 Logic inputs 7
3.8 Logic outputs 7
3.9 RS 485 rear communication 8

4. SETTING CHECK 9
4.1 Settings 9
4.2 Measurements 9
4.2.1 MiCOM P120 9
4.2.2 MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 9
4.3 Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>) 10
4.3.1 Test wiring diagram 10
4.3.2 MiCOM settings 10
4.4 Final checks 14
P12x/EN CM/F75 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 2/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5. MAINTENANCE 15
5.1 Equipment failure 15
5.1.1 Minor fault 15
5.1.2 Major fault 15
5.2 Method of repair 16
5.2.1 Replacing the active part 16
5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay 16
5.2.3 Changing the battery (MiCOM P122 & P123 only) 17
5.3 Problem solving 17
5.3.1 Password lost or not accepted 17
5.3.2 Communication 18
Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/18

1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

The MiCOM P12x relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and
non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relays use a high degree of self-checking
and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the
commissioning test do not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical relays (static or
electromechanical).
To commission MiCOM relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software setting have been applied to the MiCOM relay.
It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been
verified by one of the following method :

• Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the appropriate setting software
MiCOM S1 (preferred method)

• Via the front panel user interface.

REMINDER : It is not possible to download a new setting software as long as
the programming mode is active.
To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have
been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection element.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining
the application-specific settings to be applied to the MiCOM relays and for testing of any
scheme logic applied by external wiring.
Blank commissioning test sheets and setting records are provided at the APPENDIX 2 of the
Technical Guide for completion as required.
WARNING : BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE RELAY, THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE
MANUAL MUST BE READ.
P12x/EN CM/F75 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 4/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2. COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT

2.1 Important notes
All commissioning tests of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are carried out by
injecting currents to the secondary of the earth and/or phases CTs using appropriate
injection test sets provided for this purpose.
2.1.1 Injection test sets
For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a single-phased
injection test set is more suitable for commissioning and is able to perform all commissioning
tests regarding MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays.
Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the commissioning tests with a
single-phase injection test set.
However, for certain commissioning tests, the three-phase wiring diagrams are easier to
understand and in this case the description is also given in three-phase format.
Single-phase injection test set
1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
Three-phase injection test set
3 currents (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
2.1.2 Additional commissioning test equipment

− 1 multimeter (precision 1%),

− 1 connecting terminal to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%),

− Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CT's secondary (dimension
according to the currents injected).
2.1.3 Communication
For all commissioning tests, the records can be made by using the RS 485 communication
on the rear connector of the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays or for MiCOM P122
and P123 using the RS232 front port.
According to each RS 485 communication protocol (MODBUS, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103,
DNP3).
2.2 Commissioning test sheets
Commissioning test sheets are available in the APPENDIX 2 of the Technical Guide.
The presentation of the Commissioning test sheets follows the description of the tests of this
chapter.
The contents of these Commissioning test sheets enable you to log :
The name of the relay, station and circuit
The characteristics of the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays
The various settings
The results of the protection and automation checks
The result of the test records after commissioning.
Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/18

3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

3.1 Allocation of terminals
It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram provided in the APPENDIX 1 of the
Technical Guide whilst observing the various polarities and ground/earth connection.
3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the
recommendations in User guide of this Technical Guide.
3.3 Visual inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration following
installation.
Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the assembly
diagram. The reference number of the relay diagram is indicated on a label situated under
the upper flap of the front panel.
When the relay is withdraw from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the current short-
circuits (phases and earth CT's) between the terminals indicated on the wiring diagram are
closed.
3.4 Earthing
Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is used to
connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure that the copper
earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing terminals of each case.
3.5 Current transformers (CT's)
DANGER :
NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER
SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE
INSULATION.
3.5.1 Use of a Core CT for earth faults.
If a core CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must check the following
points:
MV or HV cable screens and core CT,
No current flow through the MV or HV cables,
Orientation of the core CT (P1-S1, P2-S2)
3.5.1.1 Cable shields and core CT
When mounting a core CT around electric cables, check the connection to the earth of the
cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the opposite direction
through the core CT. This cancel the currents carried by the cable shields through the core
CT.
P12x/EN CM/F75 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 6/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Electrical cables directed

to the busbar Screen shields

P1 S1
P2 S2

Other ends
of electrical cables

P0041ENa

FIGURE 1 : SCREEN SHIELDS AND CT CORE

3.5.1.2 Induced current flow through electric cables
When an electric line is earthed at its two ends for logging purposes, induced current may
circulate if a second line is in parallel. This current can be read on the MiCOM P120, P121,
P122 and P123 and produce false readings.

Busbar 1 Busbar 2
Circuit Breaker 1 Electrical line Circuit Breaker 2

P121
with CT core
Earthing 1 Earthing 2
P0042ENa

FIGURE 2 : LOGGING OF AN ELECTRICAL LINE

3.5.1.3 Core CT polarity
It is necessary to check the polarity of the core CT by following the figure below :
Momentarily connect the battery + to P1 and – to P2. The centre zero ammeter connected
with + to S1 and – to S2 will deflect in the positive direction if the wiring is correct.
CT phase may be tested using the same method.

_
P1 S1 + mA
+
_

P2 S2

P0043ENa

FIGURE 3 : CORE CT ORIENTATION TEST

Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/18

NOTE : De-magnetise the CT after polarity test. Inject an ac current starting

from zero and increase to slowly exceed the CT nominal value and
then decrease slowly to zero.
3.6 Auxiliary supply
Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value measured
shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 time the dc nominal auxiliary supply voltage, or 0.8 and 1.1
time the ac nominal auxiliary supply voltage indicated on MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and
P123.

Maximum peak value

Uaux range (Volts) Uaux nominal zone (Volts)
(Volts)
24 - 60 Vdc 19 - 72 Vdc 80
48 - 150 Vdc 38 -180 Vdc 201
130 - 250 Vdc/100 - 250 Vac 100 - 300 Vdc/80 - 275 Vac 336

3.7 Logic inputs

This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P123 have 5
opto-isolated inputs while P122 relays have 3 opto-isolated inputs and P120/P121 have 2
logic opto-isolated inputs.
The opto inputs should be energised on at a time. The status of the input can be viewed
using menu OP. PARAMETERS/Input Status, an 1 indicating an energised input and a 0
indicating a de-energised input. When each logic input is energised one of the characters on
the bottom line of the menu display will change to the value show in the following table to
indicate the new state of the inputs.

OP. PARAMETERS/Inputs
Input MiCOM P12x models
Status cell value

Opto input 1
P120,P121, P122, P123 00001
22-24 Terminals
Opto input 2
P120,P121, P122, P123 00010
26-28 Terminals
Opto input 3
P122, P123 00100
17-19 Terminals
Opto input 4
P123 01000
21-23 Terminals
Opto input 5
P123 10000
25-27 Terminals

3.8 Logic outputs

This test checks that all outputs are functioning correctly. The P123 have 9 outputs while
P122 relays have 7 outputs and P120/P121 have 5 outputs.
For all MiCOM relays, the WATCHDOG output is a normally close relays and is designed as
WD (35-36), (normally open pin terminals 35-37).
For all MiCOM relays, the RL1 and RL2 are change-over relays (2-4-6, 8-10-12).
For all MiCOM relays, the RL3 and RL4 are normally open relays (14-16, 18-20).
For MiCOM P122 and P123 relays, the RL5 and RL6 are normally open relays (1-3, 5-7).
For MiCOM P123 relay, the RL7 and RL8 are normally open relays (9-11, 13-15).
Each output contact may have its own and independent power supply (refer to wiring
schemes).
P12x/EN CM/F75 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 8/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

The status of the outputs can be viewed using menu OP. PARAMETERS/ Relay Status, an
indicating an close output relay and a 0 indicating a open output relay. When each output
relay is closed one of the characters on the bottom line of the menu display will change to
the value show in the following table to indicate the new state of the inputs.

OP. PARAMETERS/Relay
OUTPUT MiCOM P12x models
Status cell value
RL 1 P120,P121, P122, P123 00000001
RL 2 P120,P121, P122, P123 00000010
RL 3 P120,P121, P122, P123 00000100
RL 4 P120,P121, P122, P123 00001000
RL 5 P122, P123 00010000
RL 6 P122, P123 00100000
RL 7 P123 01000000
RL 8 P123 10000000

3.9 RS 485 rear communication

This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location
and will vary depending on the communication protocol being adopted (refer to label under
the upper flap).
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay
to the remote location, just the relay's rear communication port and any protocol converter
necessary.
Connect a laptop PC to the RS485 rear port (via a KITZ for Courier communication) and
check the communication with the appropriate command.
Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/18

4. SETTING CHECK
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay setting for the particular
installation have been correctly applied to the relay.
Transfer the setting file to the relay using a laptop PC running the appropriate software via
the RS232 front port (MiCOM P122 and P123) or the RS485 rear port (all MiCOM models).
This method is preferred transfer function settings because it is much faster and there is less
margin for error.
If the setting software is not used then enter manually via the relay front panel interface.
The commissioning is following the points below:

• Consignation of the settings

• Validation of the measurements

• Validation of the thresholds and associated timers.

4.1 Settings
Carry forward the settings on the commissioning test sheets.
4.2 Measurements
The MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays measure phase and earth currents (P120
only one phase or earth) as a True RMS value up to the 10th harmonics. The value(s)
indicated take account of the phase and/or earth CT ratio.
WARNING : MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAYS HAVE 1 AND 5 AMP
CURRENT INPUTS.
CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE
SELECTED RANGE.
4.2.1 MiCOM P120

− Note the select CT ratio.

− Energise the MiCOM P120 relay.

− Apply current to input terminals 55-56 or 47-48 and verify the value on the LCD
display.

− Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied value and relay
value displayed)
4.2.2 MiCOM P121, P122 and P123

− Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio.

− Energise the MiCOM P121, P122 or P123 relay.

− Apply current to input (as per wiring diagram) and verify the values on the LCD
display.

− Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay
values displayed).
P12x/EN CM/F75 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 10/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

4.3 Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>)

Set the various thresholds on the trip output (refer to User Guide). For MiCOM P120, the
same test can be performed for the phase/or earth threshold.
4.3.1 Test wiring diagram
This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the I> and I>>
thresholds.
The diagram describes current injection onto the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals 41-
42, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection for the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the same test
on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54).

INJECTION
TEST SET

AUXILIARY +Uaux 33

-Uaux
SUPPLY 34

A 49
1A
50
51
1A
CURRENT
MiCOM
52
53
1A 1A
N
P121
54

41
A 5A
42
43
CURRENT 5A

5A 44
45
5A
N 46

35 Case earth
36 WD Watchdog
29
6 -
TIMER Stop 4
2 RL1 Trip output * 30

12 31
+ RS 485 communication port
10
RL2 Programmable output 32
8 -
P0044ENa

FIGURE 4 : I> AND I>> TESTS WIRING

4.3.2 MiCOM settings
4.3.2.1 MiCOM P120 Settings
Protection Menu

Ie> YES
Ie> 1 In
tIe> DMT or IDMT or RI
tIe> (if DMT) 20 s
Type of curve (if IDMT) IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT) 1
K value (if RI) 1
Ie>> YES
Ie>> 12 In
tIe>> 10 s
Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/18

AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip commands Menu

TRIP tIe> YES

TRIP tIe>> YES
4.3.2.1.1 MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 settings
Protection Menu

I> YES
I> 1 In
tI> DMT or IDMT or RI
tI> (if DMT) 20 s
Type of curve (if IDMT) IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT) 1
K value (if RI) 1
I>> YES
I>> 12 In

AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip commands Menu

TRIP tI> YES

TRIP tI>> YES

4.3.2.2 I> threshold with DMT tI>

Values to be recorded :
I> threshold for each phase
Time delay tI> for each phase.
I> threshold check:
If the time delay tI> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the value of the I>
threshold.
If the time delay tI> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then
inject 1,1 x I threshold and check the trip.
Gradually decreases the injected current and record the value of the drop out I> threshold.
Checks :
Alarm message on the LCD display.
Alarm LED flashes.
Trip LED on
I> threshold LED on (if programmed).
Trip output closes.
I> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tI> time delay check :
Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting the
current above the I> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting the
current above the I> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
P12x/EN CM/F75 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 12/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

4.3.2.3 I> threshold with IDMT tI>

Values to be recorded :
I> threshold for each phase
tI>time delay for each phase.
I> threshold check:
Inject a current equal to 2 x I threshold onto one of the phase current inputs. Repeat the
operation for various current values (n x I threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for example).
Check that the values measured correspond to those indicated in the table below (for TMS =
1).
IEC curves

Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1

IEC 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold
Nominal Min Max Nominal Min Max
Accuracy +/- 12.5 % for nominal tripping time +/- 5 % for nominal tripping time
greater than 40ms. greater than 40ms.
+/- 50 ms for nominal tripping time +/- 20 ms for nominal tripping time
less than 40ms. less than 40ms.

STI (Alstom) 1.78 1.56 2.00 0.518 0.492 0.544

SI 10.03 8.78 11.28 2.971 2.822 3.119
VI 13.5 11.81 15.19 1.5 1.425 1.575
EI 26.67 23.33 30.00 0.808 0.7676 0.8484
LTI (Alstom) 120 105.0 135.0 13.33 12.667 14.00

IEEE/ANSI curves

Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1

IEEE/ANSI 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold
Nominal Min Max Nominal Min Max
Accuracy +/- 12.5 % for nominal tripping time +/- 5 % for nominal tripping time
greater than 40ms. greater than 40ms.
+/- 50 ms for nominal tripping time +/- 20 ms for nominal tripping time
less than 40ms. less than 40ms.

STI (CO2) 1.7319 1.515 1.948 0.5249 0.4987 0.5512

MI 3.8032 3.328 4.279 1.2068 1.1464 1.2671
LTI (CO8) 2.1633 1.893 2.434 0.2401 0.2201 0.2601
VI 7.0277 6.149 7.906 0.6891 0.6546 0.7235
EI 9.5215 8.33 10.71 0.4063 0.3860 0.4267

RI electromechanical curve

Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds) for K =1

Electromechanical 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold
Nominal Min - Max Nominal Min - Max
RI 4.5 4-5 3.2 2.8 - 3.6
Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/18

Rectifier curve

Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1

Rectifier 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold
Nominal Min - Max Nominal Min - Max
RC 966 917 - 1014 0.402 0.382 - 0.422

Laborelec curve

Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds)

Primary zero sequence Primary zero sequence
1A 40A
Nominal Min - Max Nominal Min - Max
Laborelec 1 4 3.80 - 4.20 0.5 0.48 - 0.52
Laborelec 2 4.5 4.22 - 4.73 1 0.96 - 1.04
Laborelec 3 5 4.75 - 5.25 1.5 1.44 - 1.56

For other injected current values, compare the values found with the theoretical values
calculated according to the formulae of the curves.
NOTE : Equations of IEC, IEEE/ANSI, RI, RC and Laborelec curves are given
in Chapter "Application Guide" of the present Technical Guide.
Checks :
Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
Trip LED on
I> threshold LED on (if programmed).
Trip output closes.
I> threshold output closes (if programmed).
P12x/EN CM/F75 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 14/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

4.3.2.4 I>> threshold

Values to be recorded
l>> threshold for each phase
tl>> time delay for each phase
I>> threshold check :
If tI>> time delay is short, gradually raise the injection current up to the value of I>>
threshold.
If tI>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip. Then inject 1.1 x
I threshold and check the trip output is close.
Gradually lower the injected current and note the value of the drop out I>> threshold.
Checks :
Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.
Alarm LED flashes
Trip LED on
I>> threshold LED on (if programmed).
Trip output closes.
I>> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tI>> time delay check :
Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-setting the
current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-setting the
current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
4.4 Final checks
The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc… If it is
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replace in accordance
with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the MMLG
cover so that the protection is put into service.
For MiCOM P122 and P123 models, ensure that all event, fault and disturbance records,
alarm and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay.
For MiCOM P123, if the relay is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has been just
maintained, the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These
counters can be reset using command in RECORD/CB Monitoring menu (refer to User
Guide).
Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/18

5. MAINTENANCE
5.1 Equipment failure
MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are full digital and self-diagnosing. As soon as
an internal fault is detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is
displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or
flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one).
An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the
dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the
fault and hence reset the fault LED.
All tests are performed during relay boot and permanently in the background software task
excepted EEPROM tests performed only when relay boots and on any setting change.
All tests are performed during relay boot and permanently in the background software task
excepted EEPROM tests performed only when relay boots and on any setting change.
5.1.1 Minor fault
Regarded by the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays as a minor fault is a
communication failure. If the communication is in fault, MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123
protection and automation modules are not affected. The MiCOM relay is fully operational.
The watchdog relay is energised (35-36 contact open and 36-37 contact closed).
Message :
"COMM.ERROR" : Communication fault
Cause :
Hardware or software failure of the communication module
Action :
Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
Alternative : If communication is not used, disable communication in the COMMUNICATION
menu (Communication ? = No).
Message :
"RAM ERROR" : Ram supplied by battery in fault.
"Battery Fail" : Battery in fault.
Cause :
See Section 5.2.3 of this Commissioning and Maintenance Guide.
If the message still remain after restart, return the module to the factory for repair.
5.1.2 Major fault
Major fault for MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are all software and hardware
failures except the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the
watchdog (WD) is de-energised (35-36 contact closed and 36-37 contact open) and all
operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication).
P12x/EN CM/F75 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 16/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.1.2.1 Hardware and software faults

Messages :
"DEFAULT SETTING" : Indication that the relay has its default setting
"SETTING ERROR" : Failure to get access to EEPROM during setting change
"EEPROM ERROR CALIBR." : Calibration zone in fault
"CT ERROR" : Analogue channel in fault
Cause :
Hardware or software failure
Action :
Restart the protection software (refer § 5.3).
If the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module
to the factory for repair.
5.2 Method of repair
5.2.1 Replacing the active part
The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the
MiCOM P12x relay should replacement or repair become necessary without disconnect the
scheme wiring.
NOTE : The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting
switches which will close when the active part is removed from the
case.
Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the external
screws. Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3 mm screwdriver and extract the
active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front panel of the
MiCOM relay.
The reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instruction in reverse,
ensuring that no modification has been done on the scheme wiring.
5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay
To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be removed from
the rear connector.
Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM relay and
ensure that the relay is no more powered.
DANGER :
NEVER OPEN THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE
THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE TO THE
INSULATION.
Remove all wiring (communication, logic inputs, outputs, auxiliary voltage, current inputs).
Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay.
Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc… .These are the screws
with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the upper and lower flaps are
installed.
Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc… carefully because it will be heavy due to the
internal transformers.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions reverse, ensuring
that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and case earth, communication
are replaced.
Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the instruction in
sections 1 to 4 inclusive of this chapter.
Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/18

5.2.3 Changing the battery (MiCOM P122 & P123 only)

Each MiCOM P122 and P123 relay has a battery to maintain recording data and the correct
time when the auxiliary voltage fails. The data maintained include event, fault and
disturbance records and the thermal state at the time failure.
The battery is designed for a life of 10 years in standard atmospheric conditions.
"RAM ERROR" message could be the result of a battery failure.
"Battery Fail" message is the result of a battery failure.
To replace the battery follow the following instructions :

• Open the lower flap on the front of the relay

• Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver.

• Ensure that metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and
dust.

• The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the
battery holder, ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those
adjacent to the socket.
NOTE :
ONLY USE A TYPE 1/2AA LITHIUM BATTERY WITH A NOMINAL VOLTAGE OF 3.6 V.
• Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are
making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket.

• Close the lower flap on the front of the relay.

• The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the
disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
5.3 Problem solving
5.3.1 Password lost or not accepted
Problem :
Password lost or not accepted
Cause :
MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA.
This password can be changed by the user ( refer OP PARAMETERS menu).
Action :
There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be
supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper
flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your AREVA T&D'S Automation &
Information Systems Business local dealer or AREVA T&D'S Automation & Information
Systems Business After Sales Dept.
P12x/EN CM/F75 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 18/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

5.3.2 Communication
5.3.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely
Problem :
The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ.
Cause :
The values accessible on the front face via the Measurement menu are refreshed every
second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the AREVA T&D'S
Automation & Information Systems Business Setting software generally have skeletal
refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing frequency of the supervision software differs from
that of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays (1s), there may be a difference between
indicated values.
Action:
Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the
setting software to 1 second.
5.3.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds
Problem :
No response from MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays when asked by the
supervision software without any communication fault message.
Cause :
Mainly, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123
communication parameters.
Action :
Check MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 communication parameters (data rate, parity,
etc.) are in accordance with the supervision settings.
Check MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 network address.
Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN.
Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests.
5.3.2.3 A remote command is not taken in account
Problem :
The communication between the relay and the PC is correct, but the relay does not accept
any remote command or file downloading.
Cause :
Generally this is due to the fact that the relay is in programming situation. This means that
the password is active.
Action :
Check that the password is not active in the relay since the last 5 minutes.
Connection Diagrams P12x/EN CO/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Connection Diagrams
 Alternative : The earth current input is connected to the sommation of the three phase CTs. The current inputs are connected to 3 phase CTs + a core balanced CT.
P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 37
A A 33 35
S2 S1 S2 S1 Auxiliary + WD Watch dog (4)
B B 36
voltage
}
C C _ 6
S2 S1 34
49 49 4
Programmable tripping
P121 RL1
2
} output
1A 1A
50 50 12
51 51 10
RL2 Programmable output
1A 1A P121 8
}
A only
52 52 16
53 53 RL3 Programmable output
14 }
1A 1A 20
54 54 RL4 18 Programmable output
55 55 }
Connection Diagrams

C B
1A 1A
Phase rotation
56 56
41 P121 41

5A 5A
42 42
43 43
5A 5A P121
only
44 44
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

45 45

5A 5A
46 46
47 47
5A 5A MiCOM
48 48

+ P120/121
Programmable 22
input L1 Case earth connection
24
-
Alternative (P121 only): Connection to 2 phases CTs + a core balanced CT.
{ +
Programmable 26
P2 P1 P2 P1 input L2
28
A -
{
S2 S1 Case earth
B 29
Communication
C 30 cable shield
S2 S1 1 2 29 30 *
49
3 4 31 32
1A 31 _ RS 485
5 6 33 34
50 Port communication
7 8 35 36
51
9 10 37 38 32
1A +
11 12 39 40
}
( : terminating resistor for the
52 13 14 41 42 *
53 last relay to be connected
15 16 43 44 between 30-32)
1A
17 18 45 46
54

SCHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF

55 19 20 47 48
21 22 49 50
1A
23 24 51 52
56 Nota :
41 25 26 53 54
(1) (a) CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect
5A 27 28 55 56

42
43 (b) Short terminals break before (c)
Module terminal blocks
5A (c) Long terminals
viewed from rear
44 (d)
45 (with integral case earth link) Pins terminals (pcb type)

5A (2) CT connection are typical only

46
47
(3) Earth terminals are typical only
5A (4) The MICOM P120/P121 relays are shown with supply off.

48

P0045ENb
Page 1/4
P12x/EN CO/F75
 Alternative : The earth current input is connected to the sommation of the three phase CTs. The current inputs are connected to 3 phase CTs + a core balanced CT.
P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 37
A A 33 35
S2 S1 S2 S1 Auxiliary + Watch dog (4)
B B WD 36
}
voltage
_
Page 2/4

C C 6
S2 S1
{ 34
Programmable tripping
49 49 4
RL1 output
2
1A 1A
}
50 50 12
51 51 10
RL2 Programmable output
1A 1A 8
A
}
52 52 16
53 53
P12x/EN CO/F75

RL3 14 }Programmable output

1A 1A 20
54 54 RL4 18 Programmable output
55 55
B 3
}
1A C 1A
Phase rotation RL5 1 Programmable output
56 56
41 41 7
}
RL6 5 Programmable output
5A 5A }
9
42 42
43 43 RL7 11 Programmable output
5A 5A 13
}
44 44 RL8 15 Programmable output
45 45
}
5A 5A P123 only
46 46
47 47
5A 5A MiCOM
48 48

+ P122/123
Programmable 22
input L1
24 Case earth connection
-
Alternative : Connection to 2 phases CTs + a core balanced CT.
{ +
Programmable 26
P2 P1 P2 P1 input L2
28
A -
{ +
S2 S1 Case earth Programmable 17
B L3 29
input 19 Communication
C -
S2 S1 1 2 29 30
{ + 30 cable shield
49 Programmable 21 *
3 4 31 32 input L4
1A 23 31 _
5 6 33 34 - RS 485
{ +
50 Programmable 25 Port communication
7 8 35 36
51 input L5
9 10 37 38 27 32
- +
1A
{ }
11 12 39 40 ( : terminating resistor for the
52 13 14 41 42 *
53 P123 only last relay to be connected
15 16 43 44 between 30-32)
1A
17 18 45 46
54
19 20 47 48

SCHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF

55
21 22 49 50
1A
23 24 51 52
56 Nota :
41 25 26 53 54
(1) (a) CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect
5A 27 28 55 56

42
43 (b) Short terminals break before (c)
Module terminal blocks
5A (c) Long terminals
viewed from rear
44 (d)
45 (with integral case earth link) Pins terminals (pcb type)

5A (2) CT connection are typical only

46
47 (3) Earth terminals are typical only
5A (4) The MICOM P122/P123 relays are shown with supply off.

48

P0046ENb
Connection Diagrams

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123
Connection Diagrams P12x/EN CO/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/4

1. COMMUNICATION CABLE CONNECTION

1.1 Products plugged in the same panel

Case earth connection

29
30
32 31

shield

RS485 cable

1. Connect a cable (green/yellow wire) on the case earth

connection of each product (with screw).
2. The communication cable shield must be connected
to the pin number 29 of each product.
3. The pin number 29 of each terminal block must be
connected to the case earth connection of each product
(with screw).

P0253ENa
P12x/EN CO/F75 Connection Diagrams

Page 4/4 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

1.2 Communication between distant products

EARTH

1. Connect a cable (green/yellow wire) on the case earth

connection of each product (with screw)
2. The communication cable shield must be connected to the pin
number 29 of each product .
3. The pin number 29 has to be connected to the case earth Earth
connection (with screw) to only ONE panel (do not leave the
cable shield "floating") P0254ENa
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

COMMISSIONING TEST &

RECORD SHEETS
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/58

CONTENTS

1. COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS 3

1.1 Relay identification 3
1.2 Commissioning test record 3

2. COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS 5

2.1 MiCOM P120 commissioning setting record sheets 5
2.1.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 5
2.1.2 CONFIGURATION Menu 5
2.1.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 5
2.1.4 PROTECTION Menu 6
2.1.5 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu 7
2.2 MiCOM P121 commissioning setting record sheets 9
2.2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 9
2.2.2 CONFIGURATION Menu 9
2.2.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 10
2.2.4 PROTECTION Menu 11
2.2.5 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu 12
2.3 MiCOM P122 commissioning setting record sheets 14
2.3.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 14
2.3.2 CONFIGURATION Menu 14
2.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 16
2.3.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu 17
2.3.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu 22
2.3.6 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 26
2.3.7 RECORDS Menu 33
2.4 MiCOM P123 commissioning setting record sheets 34
2.4.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 34
2.4.2 CONFIGURATION Menu 34
2.4.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 36
2.4.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu 37
2.4.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu 43
2.4.6 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu 48
2.4.7 RECORDING Menu 58
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 2/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

BLANK PAGE
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/58

1. COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS

1.1 Relay identification

Commissioning date :
Engineer :
Substation :
Circuit :
Network nominal frequency:

MiCOM Overcurrent relay model :

❑ P120 ❑ P121 ❑ P122 ❑ P123

Serial number :
Rated current In :
Auxiliary voltage Uaux :
Communication protocol :
Language :

1.2 Commissioning test record

(put a cross after each checked stage)

Serial number check ?

All current transformer shorting switches closed ?

Wiring checked against diagram (if available) ?

Case earth installed ?

Test block connections checked (if installed) ?

Insulation tested ?

Auxiliary supply control

Auxiliary voltage to relay

Auxiliary voltage value ________________ Vdc/Vac

Watchdog contacts
With auxiliary supply off Terminals 35 and 36

With auxiliary supply on Terminals 35 and 36

P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 4/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Measurements
Applied value Relay value
PHASE CT INPUT
Phase A current _______________ A A
Phase B current _______________ A A
Phase C current _______________ A A
EARTH CT INPUT
Earth current _______________ A A
Phase protection test
Theoretical value Relay value
I> threshold _______________ A
I> threshold A
I> drop threshold A
Time delay
Time delay at 2 x I> ______________ ms A
Time delay at 10 x I> ______________ ms A
I>> threshold _______________ A
I>> threshold _______________A
I>> drop threshold _______________A
Time delay
Time delay at 2 x I>> _______________ A A
Time delay at 10 x I>> _______________ A A
Earth protection test
Theoretical value Relay value
Ie> threshold _______________ A
Ie> threshold _______________A
Ie> drop threshold _______________A
Time delay
Time delay at 2 x Ie> ______________ ms ms
Time delay at 10 x Ie> ______________ ms ms
Ie>> threshold _______________ A
Ie>> threshold _______________A
Ie>> drop threshold _______________A
Time delay
Time delay at 2 x Ie>> ______________ ms ms
Time delay at 10 x Ie>> ______________ ms ms

Commissioning Engineer Date

_________________________ ______________
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/58

2. COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS

2.1 MiCOM P120 commissioning setting record sheets
2.1.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu

Password :
Reference :

Frequency :
! 50 Hz ! 60 Hz

2.1.2 CONFIGURATION Menu

2.1.2.1 Display

E/Gnd text ! N ! E ! G

2.1.2.2 CT Ratio

E/Gnd CT Primary Primary CT ratio

E/Gnd CT Secondary Secondary CT ratio ! 1A ! 5A
2.1.2.3 LEDs 5 to 8 configuration

Functions LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

Ie>/I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>/tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>/I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>/tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>>/I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>>/tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

2.1.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

2.1.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu (MODBUS)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity
! Odd ! Even ! None
Data bits
! 7 ! 8
Stop bits
! 1 ! 2
Relay Address
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 6/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.1.3.2 COMMUNICATION Menu (Courier)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Relay Address

2.1.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu (IEC 60870-5-103)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Relay Address

2.1.3.4 COMMUNICATION Menu (DNP3)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity
! Odd ! Even ! None
Data bits
! 7 ! 8
Stop bits
! 1 ! 2
Relay Address

2.1.4 PROTECTION Menu

2.1.4.1 [50N/51N] E/Gnd

Ie> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.1.4.1.1 [51N] Ie > DMT

tIe> ms

2.1.4.1.2 [51N] Ie > IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/58

2.1.4.1.3 [51N] Ie> RI

2.1.4.2 [51N] Ie>>

Ie>>
! YES ! NO
Ie>> Ien
tIe>> ms

2.1.4.3 [51N] Ie >>>

Ie>>> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Ien
tIe>>> ms

2.1.5 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu

2.1.5.1 Trip Command allocation

Trip tIe>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
2.1.5.2 Latch Function allocation

Latch tIe>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
2.1.5.3 Blocking logic allocation

Block tIe> =
! YES ! NO
Block tIe>> =
! YES ! NO
Block tIe>>> =
! YES ! NO
2.1.5.4 Output Relays allocation (RL2 to RL4)

Functions RL 2 RL 3 RL 4

trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 8/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.1.5.5 Inputs allocation

Input 1
! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux2 ! Blk log

Input 2
! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux2 ! Blk log

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/58

2.2 MiCOM P121 commissioning setting record sheets

2.2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu

Password :
Reference :
Software version :

Frequency :
! 50 Hz ! 60 Hz

2.2.2 CONFIGURATION Menu

2.2.2.1 Display

Phase A Text ! A ! L1 ! R
Phase B Text ! B ! L2 ! S
Phase C Text ! C ! L3 ! T
E/Gnd Text ! N ! E ! G

2.2.2.2 CT Ratio

Line CT Primary Primary phase CT ratio

Line CT Secondary Secondary phase CT ratio !1A !5A
E/Gnd CT Primary Primary earth CT ratio
E/Gnd CT Secondary Secondary earth CT ratio ! 1A ! 5A
2.2.2.3 LEDs 5 to 8 configuration

Functions LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

IE>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 10/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.2.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

2.2.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu (MODBUS)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity
! Odd ! Even ! None
Data bits
! 7 ! 8
Stop bits
! 1 ! 2
Relay Address

2.2.3.2 COMMUNICATION Menu (Courier)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Relay Address

2.2.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu (IEC 60870-5-103)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Relay Address

2.2.3.4 COMMUNICATION Menu (DNP3)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity
! Odd ! Even ! None
Data bits
! 7 ! 8
Stop bits
! 1 ! 2
Relay Address
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/58

2.2.4 PROTECTION Menu

2.2.4.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51]

2.2.4.1.1 [50/51] I>

I>?
! YES ! NO
I> In
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.2.4.1.1.1 [51] I> DMT

tI> ms

2.2.4.1.1.2 [51] I> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms

2.2.4.1.1.3 [51] I> RI

2.2.4.1.2 [51] I>>

I>>?
! YES ! NO
I>> In
tI>> ms

2.2.4.1.3 [51] I>>>

I>>>?
! YES ! NO
I>>> In
tI>>> ms

2.2.4.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N]

2.2.4.2.1 [50N/51N] E/Gnd

Ie>?
! YES ! NO
Ie> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.2.4.2.1.1 [51N] Ie > DMT

tIe> ms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 12/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.2.4.2.1.2 [51N] Ie > IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms

2.2.4.2.1.3 [51N] Ie> RI

2.2.4.2.2 [51N] Ie>>

Ie>>?
! YES ! NO
Ie>> Ien
tIe>> ms

2.2.4.2.3 [51N] Ie >>>

Ie>>> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Ien
tIe>>> ms

2.2.5 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu

2.2.5.1 Trip Command allocation

Trip tI>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
2.2.5.2 Latch function allocation

Latch tI>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/58

2.2.5.3 Blocking Logic function allocation

Block tI>
! YES ! NO
Block tI>>
! YES ! NO
Block tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Block tIe>
! YES ! NO
Block tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Block tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
2.2.5.4 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL2 to RL4)

Functions RL 2 RL 3 RL 4

Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
2.2.5.5 Inputs allocation

Input 1
! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux2 ! Blk log

Input 2
! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux2 ! Blk log

P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 14/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3 MiCOM P122 commissioning setting record sheets

2.3.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu

Password :
Reference :
Software version :

Frequency :
! 50 Hz ! 60 Hz

2.3.2 CONFIGURATION Menu

2.3.2.1 Display

Phase A Text ! A ! L1 ! R

Phase B Text ! B ! L2 ! S

Phase C Text ! C ! L3 ! T

E/Gnd Text ! N ! E ! G

2.3.2.2 CT Ratio

Line CT Primary Primary phase CT ratio

Line CT Secondary Secondary phase CT ratio ! 1A ! 5A

E/Gnd CT Primary Primary earth CT ratio

E/Gnd CT Secondary Secondary earth CT ratio ! 1A ! 5A

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/58

2.3.2.3 LEDs 5 to 8 configuration

Functions LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Thermal Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Brkn. Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Input 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Input 2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Input 3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
t Aux1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
t Aux2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
2.3.2.4 Group select configuration

Change group input ! Edge ! Level

Setting group ! 1 ! 2

2.3.2.5 Alarms configuration

Inst. Self Reset ! YES ! NO

Reset Led on fault ! YES ! NO
Alarm battery ! YES ! NO
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 16/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3.2.6 Inputs configuration

Inputs 3 2 1
! ! !
Voltage input DC ! DC ! AC

2.3.2.7 Relays maintenance

Maintenance Mode ! YES ! NO

Relays 6 5 W 4 3 2 1
CMD

2.3.2.8 Phase rotation configuration

Phase rotation ! A-B-C ! A-C-B

2.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

2.3.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu (MODBUS)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity
! Odd ! Even ! None
Data bits
! 7 ! 8
Stop bits
! 1 ! 2
Relay Address

2.3.3.2 COMMUNICATION Menu (Courier)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Relay Address

2.3.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu (IEC 60870-5-103)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Relay Address
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/58

2.3.3.4 COMMUNICATION Menu (DNP3)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity
! Odd ! Even ! None
Data bits
! 7 ! 8
Stop bits
! 1 ! 2
Relay Address

2.3.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu

2.3.4.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51]

2.3.4.1.1 [50/51] I>

I> ?
! YES ! NO
I> In
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.3.4.1.1.1 [51] I> DMT

tI> ms
t Reset ms

2.3.4.1.1.2 [51] I> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.3.4.1.1.3 [51] I> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.3.4.1.1.4 [51] I> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.4.1.1.5 [51] I> RI

K
t Reset ms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 18/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3.4.1.2 [51] I>>

I>> ?
! YES ! NO
I>> In
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.3.4.1.2.1 [51] I>> DMT

tI>> ms
t Reset ms

2.3.4.1.2.2 [51] I>> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.3.4.1.2.3 [51] I>> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.3.4.1.2.4 [51] I>> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.4.1.2.5 [51] I>> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.3.4.1.3 [51] I>>>

I>>>?
! YES ! NO
I>>> Sample
! YES ! NO
I>>> In
tI>>> ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 19/58

2.3.4.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N]

2.3.4.2.1 [50N/51N] E/Gnd

Ie>?
! YES ! NO
Ie> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.
2.3.4.2.1.1 [51N] Ie > DMT

tIe> ms
t Reset ms

2.3.4.2.1.2 [51N] Ie > IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.3.4.2.1.3 [51N] Ie> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.3.4.2.1.4 [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.4.2.1.5 [51N] Ie> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.3.4.2.1.6 [51N] Ie> LABORELEC

Idmt
! 1 ! 2 ! 3
2.3.4.2.2 [51N] Ie>>

Ie>>?
! YES ! NO
Ie>> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.
2.3.4.2.2.1 [51N] Ie >> DMT

tIe>> ms
t Reset ms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 20/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3.4.2.2.2 [51N] Ie >> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.3.4.2.2.3 [51N] Ie>> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.3.4.2.2.4 [51N] Ie>> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.4.2.2.5 [51N] Ie>> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.3.4.2.2.6 [51N] Ie>> LABORELEC

Idmt
! 1 ! 2 ! 3
2.3.4.2.3 [51N] Ie>>>

Ie>>> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Sample
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Ien
tIe>>> ms

2.3.4.3 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD

Therm OL ?
! YES ! NO
Iθ> In
Te mn
k
θ Trip %
θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO
θ Alarm %

2.3.4.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I<

I< ?
! YES ! NO
I< %
tI< ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 21/58

2.3.4.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>

I2> ?
! YES ! NO
I2> In
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.3.4.5.1 [46] I2> DMT

tI> ms

2.3.4.5.2 [46] I2> DMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms

2.3.4.5.3 [46] I2> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.3.4.5.4 [46] I2> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.4.5.5 [46] I2> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.3.4.6 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>>

I2>> ?
! YES ! NO
I2>> In
tI2>> ms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 22/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu

2.3.5.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51]

2.3.5.1.1 [50/51] I>

I> ?
! YES ! NO
I> In
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.3.5.1.1.1 [51] I> DMT

tI> ms
t Reset ms

2.3.5.1.1.2 [51] I> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.3.5.1.1.3 [51] I> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.3.5.1.1.4 [51] I> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.5.1.1.5 [51] I> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.3.5.1.2 [51] I>>

I>> ?
! YES ! NO
I>> In
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.3.5.1.2.1 [51] I>> DMT

tI>> ms
t Reset ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 23/58

2.3.5.1.2.2 [51] I>> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.3.5.1.2.3 [51] I>> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.3.5.1.2.4 [51] I>> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.5.1.2.5 [51] I>> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.3.5.1.3 [51] I>>>

I>>>?
! YES ! NO
I>>> Sample
! YES ! NO
I>>> In
tI>>> ms

2.3.5.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N]

2.3.5.2.1 [50N/51N] E/Gnd

Ie>?
! YES ! NO
Ie> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.
2.3.5.2.1.1 [51N] Ie > DMT

tIe> ms
t Reset ms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 24/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3.5.2.1.2 [51N] Ie > IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.3.5.2.1.3 [51N] Ie> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.3.5.2.1.4 [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.5.2.1.5 [51N] Ie> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.3.5.2.1.6 [51N] Ie> LABORELEC

Idmt
! 1 ! 2 ! 3
2.3.5.2.2 [51N] Ie>>

Ie>>?
! YES ! NO
Ie>> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.
2.3.5.2.2.1 [51N] Ie >> DMT

tIe>> ms
t Reset ms

2.3.5.2.2.2 [51N] Ie >> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.3.5.2.2.3 [51N] Ie>> DMT reset time

t Reset ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/58

2.3.5.2.2.4 [51N] Ie>> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.5.2.2.5 [51N] Ie>> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.3.5.2.2.6 [51N] Ie>> LABORELEC

Idmt
! 1 ! 2 ! 3
2.3.5.2.3 [51N] Ie>>>

Ie>>> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Sample
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Ien
tIe>>> ms

2.3.5.3 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD

Therm OL ?
! YES ! NO
Iθ> In
Te mn
k
θ Trip %
θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO
θ Alarm %

2.3.5.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I<

I< ?
! YES ! NO
I< %
tI< ms

2.3.5.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>

I2> ?
! YES ! NO
I2> In
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.3.5.5.1 [46] I2> DMT

tI> ms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 26/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3.5.5.2 [46] I2> DMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms

2.3.5.5.3 [46] I2> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.3.5.5.4 [46] I2> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.3.5.5.5 [46] I2> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.3.5.6 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>>

I2>> ?
! YES ! NO
I2>> In
tI2>> ms

2.3.6 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

2.3.6.1 TRIP Command allocation

Trip tI>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI<
! YES ! NO
Trip tI2>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI2>>
! YES ! NO
Trip Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Trip Brkn. Cond
! YES ! NO
Trip tAux1
! YES ! NO
Trip tAux2
! YES ! NO
Trip tAux3
! YES ! NO
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/58

2.3.6.2 Latch function allocation

Latch tI>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI<
! YES ! NO
Latch tI2>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI2>>
! YES ! NO
Latch Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Latch Brkn .Cond
! YES ! NO
Latch tAux1
! YES ! NO
Latch tAux2
! YES ! NO
Latch tAux3
! YES ! NO
2.3.6.3 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation

Block 1 tI>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tIe>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI<
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI2>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI2>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Block 1 Brkn .Cond
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tAux1
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tAux2
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tAux3
! YES ! NO
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 28/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3.6.4 Blocking Logic 2 function allocation

Block 2 tI>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tIe>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI<
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI2>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI2>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Block 2 Brkn .Cond
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tAux1
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tAux2
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tAux3
! YES ! NO
2.3.6.5 SELECTIVE SCHEME LOGIC1 function allocation

Logic Select 1
! YES ! NO
Sel1 tI>>
! YES ! NO
Sel1 tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Sel1 tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Sel1 tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
t SeL1 ms

2.3.6.6 SELECTIVE SCHEME LOGIC2 function allocation

Logic Select 2
! YES ! NO
Sel2 tI>>
! YES ! NO
Sel2 tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Sel2 tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Sel2 tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
t Sel2 ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 29/58

2.3.6.7 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation

2.3.6.7.1 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL2 to RL4)

Functions RL 2 RL 3 RL 4
Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI< ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
52 Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Brkn cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 4 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Active Group ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 30/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3.6.7.2 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL5 to RL8)

Functions RL 5 RL 6
Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI< ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
52 Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Brkn cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 4 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Active Group ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 31/58

2.3.6.8 LOGIC INPUT allocation

2.3.6.8.1 Inputs

Input 1 ! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux1

! Aux2 ! Blk Log 1 ! Blk Log 2

! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1

! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset

! Trip Circ. ! Rst Led ! Maint. M.

! Aux3 ! Strt tBF !

Input 2 ! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux1

! Aux2 ! Blk Log 1 ! Blk Log 2

! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1

! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset

! Trip Circ. ! Rst Led ! Maint. M.

! Aux3 ! Strt tBF !

Input 3 ! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux1

! Aux2 ! Blk Log 1 ! Blk Log 2

! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1

! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset

! Trip Circ. ! Rst Led ! Maint. M.

! Aux3 ! Strt tBF !

2.3.6.8.2 t Aux

Aux 1 time : t Aux 1 ms

Aux 2 time : t Aux 2 ms
Aux 3 time : t Aux 3 ms

2.3.6.9 BROKEN CONDUCTOR

Brkn. Cond ? ! YES ! NO

tBC ms
Ratio I2/I1 %
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 32/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.3.6.10 Cold Load Pick-up

Cold Load PU ? ! YES ! NO

tI> ? ! YES ! NO
tI>> ? ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ? ! YES ! NO
tIe> ? ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ? ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ? ! YES ! NO
tI2> ? ! YES ! NO
tI2>> ? ! YES ! NO
t Therm ? ! YES ! NO
Level %

tCL ms

2.3.6.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE

CB Fail ?
! YES ! NO
I< In
tBF ms
Block I> ?
! YES ! NO
Block Ie> ?
! YES ! NO
2.3.6.12 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION

TC Supervision ?
! YES ! NO
t SUP s
CB Open S'vision
! YES ! NO
CB Open Time ms
CB Close S'vision
! YES ! NO
CB Close Time ms
CB Open Alarm ?
! YES ! NO
CB Open NB
Σ Amps (n) ? ! YES ! NO
Σ Amps (n)
n
t Open Pulse ms
t Close Pulse ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 33/58

2.3.7 RECORDS Menu

2.3.7.1 DISTURBANCE RECORD

Pre-Time ms
Post-Time ms
Disturb Rec Trig
! ON INST. ! ON TRIP
2.3.7.2 TIME PEAK VALUE

Time Window mn

2.3.7.3 ROLLING DEMAND

Sub Period mn
Num of Sub Per.
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 34/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.4 MiCOM P123 commissioning setting record sheets

2.4.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu

Password :
Reference :
Software version :

Frequency :
! 50 Hz ! 60 Hz
2.4.2 CONFIGURATION Menu
2.4.2.1 Display

Phase A Text ! A ! L1 ! R

Phase B Text ! B ! L2 ! S

Phase C Text ! C ! L3 ! T

E/Gnd Text ! N ! E ! G

2.4.2.2 CT Ratio

Line CT Primary Primary phase CT ratio

Line CT Secondary Secondary phase CT ratio ! 1A ! 5A

E/Gnd CT Primary Primary earth CT ratio

E/Gnd CT Secondary Secondary earth CT ratio ! 1A ! 5A

Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 35/58

2.4.2.3 LEDs 5 to 8 configuration

Functions LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Brkn. Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI2>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Input 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Input 2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Input 3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Input 4 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Input 5 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Recloser Run ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Recloser Blocked ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

T Aux 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

T Aux 2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

CONF SOTF ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

2.4.2.4 Group select configuration

Change group input ! Edge ! Level

Setting group ! 1 ! 2
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 36/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.4.2.5 Alarms configuration

Inst. Self Reset ! YES ! NO

Reset Led on fault ! YES ! NO
Alarm battery ! YES ! NO

2.4.2.6 Inputs configuration

Inputs 3 2 1
! ! !
Voltage input DC ! DC ! AC

2.4.2.7 Relays maintenance

Maintenance Mode ! YES ! NO

8 7 6 5 W 4 3 2 1
Relays
CMD

2.4.2.8 Phase rotation configuration

Phase rotation ! A-B-C ! A-C-B

2.4.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

2.4.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu (MODBUS)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity
! Odd ! Even ! None
Data bits
! 7 ! 8
Stop bits
! 1 ! 2
Relay Address

2.4.3.2 COMMUNICATION Menu (Courier)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Relay Address
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 37/58

2.4.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu (IEC 60870-5-103)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Relay Address

2.4.3.4 COMMUNICATION Menu (DNP3)

Communication ?
! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1.200 bds ! 2.400 bds

! 4.800 bds ! 9.600 bds

! 19.200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity
! Odd ! Even ! None
Data bits
! 7 ! 8
Stop bits
! 1 ! 2
Relay Address

2.4.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu

2.4.4.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51]

2.4.4.1.1 [50/51] I>

I> ?
! YES ! NO
I> In
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.4.4.1.1.1 [51] I> DMT

tI> ms
t Reset ms

2.4.4.1.1.2 [51] I> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 38/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.4.4.1.1.3 [51] I> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.4.1.1.4 [51] I> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.4.1.1.5 [51] I> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.4.1.2 [51] I>>

I>> ?
! YES ! NO
I>> In
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.4.4.1.2.1 [51] I>> DMT

tI>> ms
t Reset ms

2.4.4.1.2.2 [51] I>> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.4.4.1.2.3 [51] I>> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.4.1.2.4 [51] I>> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.4.1.2.5 [51] I>> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.4.1.3 [51] I>>>

I>>>?
! YES ! NO
I>>> Sample
! YES ! NO
I>>> In
tI>>> ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 39/58

2.4.4.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N]

2.4.4.2.1 [50N/51N] E/Gnd

Ie> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.
2.4.4.2.1.1 [51N] Ie > DMT

tIe> ms
t Reset ms

2.4.4.2.1.2 [51N] Ie > IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms

2.4.4.2.1.3 [51N] Ie> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.4.2.1.4 [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.4.2.1.5 [51N] Ie> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.4.2.1.6 [51N] Ie> LABORELEC

Idmt
! 1 ! 2 ! 3
2.4.4.2.2 [51N] Ie>>

Ie>> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie>> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.
2.4.4.2.2.1 [51N] Ie >> DMT

tIe>> ms
t Reset ms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 40/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.4.4.2.2.2 [51N] Ie >> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms

2.4.4.2.2.3 [51N] Ie>> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.4.2.2.4 [51N] Ie>> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.4.2.2.5 [51N] Ie>> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.4.2.2.6 [51N] Ie>> LABORELEC

Idmt
! 1 ! 2 ! 3
2.4.4.2.3 [51N] Ie >>>

Ie>>> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Sample
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Ien
tIe>>> ms

2.4.4.3 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD

[49] Therm OL ?
! YES ! NO
Iθ> In
Te mn
k
θ Trip %
[49] θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO
θ Alarm %

2.4.4.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I<

I< ?
! YES ! NO
I< %
tI< ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 41/58

2.4.4.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>

I2>?
! YES ! NO
I2> In
Delay Trip
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.4.4.5.1 [46] I2> DMT

tI2> ms

2.4.4.5.2 [46] I2> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms

2.4.4.5.3 [46] I2> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.4.5.4 [46] I2> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.4.5.5 [46] I2> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.4.6 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>>

I2>>?
! YES ! NO
I2>> In
tI2>> ms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 42/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.4.4.7 [79] AUTORECLOSER

[79] Autoreclose ? ! YES ! NO

Ext CB Fail ? ! YES ! NO
Ext CB Fail Time ms
Ext Block ? ! YES ! NO
Aux 1 (I>) ! YES ! NO
Aux 2 (Ie>) ! YES ! NO
Dead Time tD1 ms
Dead Time tD2 ms
Dead Time tD3 ms
Dead Time tD4 ms
Reclaim Time tR ms
Inhib Time tI ms
Phase Cycles
E/Gnd Cycles
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tI>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tI>>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tI>>>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tIe>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tIe>>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tIe>>>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tAux 1
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tAux 2
! ! ! !
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 43/58

2.4.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu

2.4.5.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51]

2.4.5.1.1 [50/51] I>

I> ? ! YES ! NO
I> In
Delay Type ! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.4.5.1.1.1 [51] I> DMT

tI> ms
t Reset ms

2.4.5.1.1.2 [51] I> IDMT

Idmt ! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.4.5.1.1.3 [51] I> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.5.1.1.4 [51] I> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.5.1.1.5 [51] I> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.5.1.2 [51] I>>

I>> ? ! YES ! NO
I>> In
Delay Type ! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.4.5.1.2.1 [51] I>> DMT

tI>> ms
t Reset ms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 44/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.4.5.1.2.2 [51] I>> IDMT

Idmt ! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.4.5.1.2.3 [51] I>> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.5.1.2.4 [51] I>> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.5.1.2.5 [51] I>> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.5.1.3 [51] I>>>

I>>>?
! YES ! NO
I>>> Sample
! YES ! NO
I>>> In
tI>>> ms

2.4.5.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N]

2.4.5.2.1 [50N/51N] E/Gnd

Ie> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.
2.4.5.2.1.1 [51N] Ie > DMT

tIe> ms
t Reset ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 45/58

2.4.5.2.1.2 [51N] Ie > IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms

2.4.5.2.1.3 [51N] Ie> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.5.2.1.4 [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.5.2.1.5 [51N] Ie> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.5.2.1.6 [51N] Ie> LABORELEC

Idmt
!1 !2 !3
2.4.5.2.2 [51N] Ie>>

Ie>> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie>> Ien
Delay Type
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.
2.4.5.2.2.1 [51N] Ie >> DMT

tIe>> ms
t Reset ms

2.4.5.2.2.2 [51N] Ie >> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

! IEEE RC
Tms
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 46/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.4.5.2.2.3 [51N] Ie>> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.5.2.2.4 [51N] Ie>> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.5.2.2.5 [51N] Ie>> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.5.2.2.6 [51N] Ie>> LABORELEC

Idmt
! 1 ! 2 ! 3
2.4.5.2.3 [51N] Ie >>>

Ie>>> ?
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Sample
! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Ien
tIe>>> ms

2.4.5.3 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD

[49] Therm OL ?
! YES ! NO
Iθ> In
Te mn
k
θ Trip %
[49] θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO
θ Alarm %

2.4.5.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I<

I< ?
! YES ! NO
I< %
tI< ms

2.4.5.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>

I2>?
! YES ! NO
I2> In
Delay Trip
! IDMT ! DMT ! RI
2.4.5.5.1 [46] I2> DMT

tI2> ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 47/58

2.4.5.5.2 [46] I2> IDMT

Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms

2.4.5.5.3 [46] I2> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.4.5.5.4 [46] I2> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.4.5.5.5 [46] I2> RI

K
t Reset ms

2.4.5.6 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>>

I2>>?
! YES ! NO
I2>> In
tI2>> ms

2.4.5.7 [79] AUTORECLOSER

[79] Autoreclose ?
! YES ! NO
Ext CB Fail ?
! YES ! NO
Ext CB Fail Time ms
Ext Block ?
! YES ! NO
Aux 1 (I>)
! YES ! NO
Aux 2 (Ie>)
! YES ! NO
Dead Time tD1 ms
Dead Time tD2 ms
Dead Time tD3 ms
Dead Time tD4 ms
Reclaim Time tR ms
Inhib Time tI ms
Phase Cycles
E/Gnd Cycles
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tI>
! ! ! !
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 48/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

4 3 2 1
CYCLES tI>>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tI>>>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tIe>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tIe>>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tIe>>>
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tAux 1
! ! ! !
4 3 2 1
CYCLES tAux 2
! ! ! !
2.4.6 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu
2.4.6.1 TRIP Command allocation

Trip tI>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI<
! YES ! NO
Trip tI2>
! YES ! NO
Trip tI2>>
! YES ! NO
Trip Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Trip Brkn Cond
! YES ! NO
Trip tAux1
! YES ! NO
Trip tAux2
! YES ! NO
Trip tAux3
! YES ! NO
Trip tAux4
! YES ! NO
Trip SOTF
! YES ! NO
Ctrl Trip
! YES ! NO
Trip CB Fail
! YES ! NO
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 49/58

2.4.6.2 Latch function allocation

Latch tI>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI<
! YES ! NO
Latch tI2>
! YES ! NO
Latch tI2>>
! YES ! NO
Latch Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Latch Brkn . Cond
! YES ! NO
Latch tAux1
! YES ! NO
Latch tAux2
! YES ! NO
Latch tAux3
! YES ! NO
Latch tAux4
! YES ! NO
Latch SOTF
! YES ! NO
Latch CB FAIL
! YES ! NO
2.4.6.3 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation

Block 1 tI>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tIe>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI<
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI2>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI2>>
! YES ! NO
Block 1 Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Block 1 Brkn. Cond
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tAux1
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tAux2
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tAux3
! YES ! NO
Block 1 tAux4
! YES ! NO
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 50/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.4.6.4 Blocking Logic 2 function allocation

Block 2 tI>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tIe>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI<
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI2>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI2>>
! YES ! NO
Block 2 Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Block 2 Brkn. Cond
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tAux1
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tAux2
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tAux3
! YES ! NO
Block 2 tAux4
! YES ! NO
2.4.6.5 Selective Scheme Logic1 function allocation

Logic Select 1
! YES ! NO
Sel1 tI>>
! YES ! NO
Sel1 tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Sel1 tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Sel1 tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
t Sel1 ms

2.4.6.6 Selective Scheme Logic2 function allocation

Logic Select 2
! YES ! NO
Sel2 tI>>
! YES ! NO
Sel2 tI>>>
! YES ! NO
Sel2 tIe>>
! YES ! NO
Sel2 tIe>>>
! YES ! NO
tSel2 = ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 51/58

2.4.6.7 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation

2.4.6.7.1 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL2 to RL4)

Functions RL 2 RL 3 RL 4

Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI< ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux4 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
52 Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
79 Run ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
79 Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 52/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Functions RL 2 RL 3 RL 4

Order COM 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Order COM 2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 4 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Active Group ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
SOTF ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Control Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Control Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 53/58

2.4.6.7.2 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL5 to RL8)

Functions RL 5 RL 6 RL 7 RL8

Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI< ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux4 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
52 Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
79 Run ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
79 Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 54/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Functions RL 5 RL 6 RL 7 RL8

Order COM 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Order COM 2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 3 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Order COM 4 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Active Group ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
SOTF ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Control Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Control Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 55/58

2.4.6.8 LOGIC INPUT allocation

2.4.6.8.1 Inputs

Input 1
! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux 2 ! Blk Log 1 ! Blk Log 2

! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1

! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset

! Block - 79 ! Trip Circ ! Rst Led

! Maint. M. ! Aux 3 ! Aux 4

! Strt tBF ! Man. Close ! Local

Input 2
! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux 2 ! Blk Log 1 ! Blk Log 2

! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1

! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset

! Block - 79 ! Trip Circ ! Rst Led

! Maint. M. ! Aux 3 ! Aux 4

! Strt tBF
Input 3
! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux 2 ! Blk Log 1 ! Blk Log 2

! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1

! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset

! Block - 79 ! Trip Circ ! Rst Led

! Maint. M. ! Aux 3 ! Aux 4

! Strt tBF
Input 4
! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux 2 ! Blk Log 1 ! Blk Log 2

! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1

! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset

! Block - 79 ! Trip Circ ! Rst Led

! Maint. M. ! Aux 3 ! Aux 4

! Strt tBF
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 56/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Input 5
! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux 2 ! Blk Log 1 ! Blk Log 2

! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1

! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset

! Block - 79 ! Trip Circ ! Rst Led

! Maint. M. ! Aux 3 ! Aux 4

! Strt tBF
2.4.6.8.2 tAux

Aux 1 : Time tAux 1 ms

Aux 2 : Time tAux 2 ms
Aux 3 : Time tAux 3 ms
Aux 4 : Time tAux 4 ms

2.4.6.9 BROKEN CONDUCTOR

Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO

tBC ms

Ratio I2/I1 %

2.4.6.10 Cold Load Pick up

Cold Load PU ? ! YES ! NO

tI> ? ! YES ! NO
tI>> ? ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ? ! YES ! NO
tIe> ? ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ? ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ? ! YES ! NO
t2> ? ! YES ! NO
t2>> ? ! YES ! NO
T Therm ? ! YES ! NO
Level %

tCL ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/F75

MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 57/58

2.4.6.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE

CB Fail ? ! YES ! NO
tBF ms

I< In
Block I> ? ! YES ! NO
Block Ie> ? ! YES ! NO
2.4.6.12 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION

TC Supervision? ! YES ! NO
t SUP s

CB Open S'vision ! YES ! NO

CB Open Time ms

CB Close S'vision ! YES ! NO

CB Close Time ms

CB Open Alarm? ! YES ! NO

CB Open NB

Σ Amps(n)? ! YES ! NO
Σ Amps(n)

t Open Pulse ms

t Close Pulse ms

2.4.6.13 SOTF

SOTF? ! YES ! NO
t SOTF ms

I>> ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO
P12x/EN RS/F75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 58/58 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

2.4.7 RECORDING Menu

2.4.7.1 DISTURBANCE RECORD

Pre-time ms
Post-time ms
Disturb Rec Trig
! ON INST. ! ON TRIP
2.4.7.2 TIME PEAK VALUE

Time Window mn

2.4.7.3 ROLLING DEMAND

Sub Period mn
Num of Sub Per.
Hardware/Software Version P12x/EN VC/F75
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

HARDWARE/SOFTWARE
VERSION
P120 P121 P122 P123
HISTORY AND
COMPATIBILITY
Hardware/Software Version P12x/EN VC/F75
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/18

P120 - Serial number – Hardware Correlation

Serial Number Hardware installed
From 2299001 to 4799797 HARDWARE VERSION 2
From 4799798 to 1001999 HARDWARE VERSION 3
From 1101001 HARDWARE VERSION 4

Relay Type P120

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compati
Version Issue with previous
bility
hardware
V1.F 11/06/99 Resolution of KITZ201 problem – HARD V 2
Modification of the output relay latching HARD V 3
HARD V 4
V3.B 19/11/99 Suppression of password in order to •V2.0 HARD V 3
acknowledge the alarms
HARD V 4
Auto acknowledgement of the instantaneous
Modbus time out of 200 ms
Display of the letter P in the menu N and N-1
when password is active
V3.C 22/08/00 VDEW improvements •V2.0
V4.A 15/03/01 Integration of DNP3 protocol •V2.0 HARD V 4
Management of alternative logic input
Latching of the auxiliary output relay by relay
and not by function
The digital input can work with AC signals (100
to 250 V AC)
V4.D 27/08/02 Courier improvment : adding of the cell 0010 •V2.0 HARD V 4
(CB control)
IEC103 : correction of the checksum
calculation for short message.
V6.A 18/06/03 Add periodic self test of EEPROM data / V2.07 Two versions
calibration every 24 hours with safeguard of
HARD 3 or
the results in safeguarded RAM.
HARD 4
Add a new major alarm “Default settings”
which is set after an EEPROM data error, and
the following reloading of the default settings,
and automatically reset after the following (HARD 2 → *)
parameter write.
IEC870-5-103 communication :
- add ASDU 3.4 for measurement IN, instead
of private ASDU 77, for setting in conformity
with the standard (cf P127).
P12x/EN VC/F75 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 2/16 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Relay Type P120

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compati
Version Issue with previous
bility
hardware
V6.C 07/04/04 Software changes implemented in this V2.07 Two versions
version
HARD 3 or
MODBUS communication: added MODBUS
HARD 4
address filtering (rear panel).
Software improvement in this version
Modification to process leds for instantaneous (HARD 2 → *)
alarms when they are self-acknowledged by
the trip, or another instantaneous alarm
(before this fix, these instantaneous alarms
were not visible on configured leds). (Same fix
than for P121).
Modification to fix upload program for FPGA
of new CPU board (index E or higher).
Modification on 3rd threshold delay Ie>>>,
whose limitation test was done on 1st
threshold delay Ie>.
Hardware/Software Version P12x/EN VC/F75
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/18

P121 - Serial number – Hardware Correlation

Serial Number Hardware installed
From 2599001 to 4799797 HARDWARE VERSION 2
From 4799798 to 0801999 HARDWARE VERSION 3
From 0901001 HARDWARE VERSION 4

Relay Type P121

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compa
Version Issue with previous
tibility
hardware
V2.J 30/08/99 MODBUS improvement : – HARD V 2
Correction of al encountered problem (answer to HARD V 3
a synchronisation telegram, creation of a 2
HARD V 4
seconds time out …)
V3.B 19/11/99 Suppression of password in order to •V2.0 HARD V 3
acknowledge the alarms
HARD V 4
Auto acknowledgement of the instantaneous
Modbus time out of 200 ms
Display of the letter P in the menu N and N-1
when password is active
V3.C 25/01/00 Evolution of Modbus writing 16 bits •V2.0
V3.E 16/03/00 Czech and Hungarian version delivery •V2.0
V3.G 22/08/00 VDEW improvements •V2.0
V4.E 31/01/01 Latch of the output relays •V2.0 HARD V 4
Latch of the auxiliary relays, relay by relay and
not by function (like previously up to V3 version).
On the other hand the latch of the TRIP output
relay remains by function.
If the auxiliary relays are latched, no alarm is
displayed. For an aknowledgment of the latch
the user has to go in the OP-
PARAMETERS/Relay status Menu and push on
the «!» clear push button.
DNP3 level 2 and 3
Addition of the tripping and closing order for
IEC103
The digital input can work with AC signals (100
to 250 V AC)
V5.D 31/01/01 Improvement of the english labels. •V2.0
V5.F 08/08/02 Courier improvment : adding of the cell 0010 •V2.0 HARD V 4
(CB control)
IEC103 : correction of the checksum calculation
for short message.
P12x/EN VC/F75 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 4/16 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Relay Type P121

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compa
Version Issue with previous
tibility
hardware
V5.G 24/10/02 Added Private messages option (for non V2.07 Two versions
standard protection functions) in IEC870-5-103
HARD 3 or
communication.
HARD 4

(HARD 2 → *)
V6.A 18/06/03 Add periodic self test of EEPROM data / V2.09 Two versions
calibration every 24 hours with safeguard of the
HARD 3 or
results in safeguarded RAM.
HARD 4
Add a new major alarm “Default settings” which
is set after an EEPROM data error, and the
following reloading of the default settings, and
automatically reset after the following parameter (HARD 2 → *)
write.
IEC870-5-103 communication :
- add ASDU 3.4 for measurement IN, instead of
private ASDU 77, for setting in conformity with
the standard (cf P127).
V6.B 18/07/03 Improvement of the reading of the alarm V2.09 Two versions
"EEPROM DATA FAULT" when much access
HARD 3 or
EEPROM is done :
HARD 4
- Optimization of the readings in E2PROM
(writing of the value of the checksums in
internal RAM).
(HARD 2 → *)
- The function of access to the E2PROM
becomes protected from the interruptions.
V6.C 28/11/03 Software changes implemented in this version V2.10 Two versions
- Modif. treatment of the thermal model: 20 HARD 3 or
milliseconds instead of 100.
HARD 4
- Evolutions communication MODBUS:
addition of the read quick byte (Function 7)
by reading of words (Function 03 or 04), and (HARD 2 → *)
of the reading of the date (on page 8).
- Communication MODBUS Front Face:
addition of the filtering of address.
Software improvement done in this version
Fix on RI curves processing in certain cases.
V6.D 11/12/03 Software improvement done in this version V2.10 Two versions
Modification to remove the taking into account HARD 3 or
of the number of defect in the calculation of
HARD 4
checksum of page 1 of E2PROM, like in
autotest E2PROM.
(HARD 2 → *)
Hardware/Software Version P12x/EN VC/F75
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/18

Relay Type P121

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compa
Version Issue with previous
tibility
hardware
V6.E 07/06/04 Software changes implemented in this version V2.10 Two versions
DNP3 modifications : Binary inputs move to HARD 3 or
Class 0. Acceptance of variation 2 object 1.
HARD 4
Modified German texts for Front panel.
Software improvement done in this version
(HARD 2 → *)
Modification to fix upload program for FPGA of
new CPU board (index E or higher).
Fixed checksum verification test in Front panel
MODBUS communication.
Fixed a shift in the fault numbers introduced by
error since V6.A and V6.B.
V6.G 11/01/05 Software changes implemented in this version V2.12 Two versions
HARD 3 or
Possibility to come back to the head line of the
menu by pressing Clear Button. HARD 4
Software improvement done in this version
None. (HARD 2 → *)
P12x/EN VC/F75 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 6/16 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Relay Type P121

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compa
Version Issue with previous
tibility
hardware
P122 - Serial number – Hardware Correlation
Serial Number Hardware installed
From 2599001 to 4799797 HARDWARE VERSION 2
From 4799798 to 0801999 HARDWARE VERSION 3
From 0901001 HARDWARE VERSION 4

Relay Type P122

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compati
Version Issue with previous
bility
hardware
V2.J 30/08/99 MODBUS improvement : – HARD V 2
Correction of al encountered problem HARD V 3
(answer to a synchronisation telegram,
HARD V 4
creation of a 2 seconds time out …)

V3.B 29/11/99 Suppression of password in order to •V2.0 HARD V 3

acknowledge the alarms
HARD V 4
Auto acknowledgement of the instantaneous
Modbus time out of 200 ms
Display of the letter P in the menu N and N-1
when password is active
V3.C 06/01/00 Label correction •V2.0
V3.D 06/04/00 Evolution of Modbus writing 16 bits •V2.0
V3.E 16/03/00 Czech and Hungarian version delivery •V2.0
V3.G 22/08/00 VDEW improvements •V2.0
Hardware/Software Version P12x/EN VC/F75
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/18

Relay Type P122

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compati
Version Issue with previous
bility
hardware
V4.E 31/01/01 Latch of the output relays •V2.0 HARD V 4
Latch of the auxiliary relays, relay by relay
and not by function (like previously up to V3
version). On the other hand the latch of the
TRIP output relay remains by function.
If the auxiliary relays are latched,
an alarm will be displayed. If the user
acknowledges this alarm, the auxiliary relays
will be delatched.
DNP3 level 2 and 3
Addition of the tripping and closing order for
IEC103
Phase rotation (ABC or ACB)
Third threshold algorithm for improvment of
the behaviour on saturated current
transformers
Timer for the undercurrent feature (0 to 150
sec)
Tripping curves (rectifier curve +
LABORELLEC curves)
Selection of the Setting group by level or by
edge.
CB fail detection (possibility to inhibit the
starting signals)
Instanteneous record
Rolling demand
Peak value demand
Instantaneous alarm settable : self or not self
reset
Matrix for the autorecloser
The digital input can work with AC signals
signals (24 V to 250 V AC)
Necessity to set in HMI Configuration menu,
the type of voltage used, either AC or DC
V5.A 27/09/01 Maintenance mode for manual command of •V2.0
the output relays
Reset of leds by logic input or control
command or front panel or on new fault
appearance
Addition of negative sequence protection
feature (ANSI code 46) with two thresholds
Addition of the CB supervision feature.
V5.C 04/10/01 VDEW improvements •V2.0 HARD V 4
(Updating of the information SCN into the
ASDU END OF GENERAL
INTERROGATION)
V5.D 30/01/02 Addition of order COM1/COM2/COM3/COM4 •V2.0
assignalble on the auxiliary relays.
Addition of the logic inputs AUX3 and AUX 4
do not genrating alarm message.
Improvement of english label
P12x/EN VC/F75 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 8/16 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Relay Type P122

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compati
Version Issue with previous
bility
hardware
V5.F 08/08/02 EA approval option : logical input filtering on •V2.0 HARD V 4
24 samples instead of 12 either 15 ms at
50 Hz)
Improvment of the Recording of rolling
demand in ram saved. The previous version
could lead to an untimely ram saved error
message due to the management of this
recording
Courier improvment : adding of the cell 0010
(CB control) protected by password
Correction of the configuration of taux3 and
taux4 for MODBUS
IEC103 : correction of the checksum
calculation for short message. Correction of
the I0 channel data into the disturbance
record
V5.G 24/10/02 Added Private messages option option (for V2.07 Two versions
non standard protection functions) in
HARD 3 or
IEC870-5-103 communication
HARD 4

(HARD 2 → *)
V6.A 18/06/03 Add periodic self test of EEPROM data / V2.09 Two versions
calibration every 24 hours with safeguard of
HARD 3 or
the results in safeguarded RAM.
HARD 4
Add a new major alarm “Default settings”
which is set after an EEPROM data error,
and the following reloading of the default
settings, and automatically reset after the (HARD 2 → *)
following parameter write.
Add "tReset" events for the thresholds I>,
I>>, IN>, IN>> and I2>, and "tReset"
parameter for the constant time
temporization (thresholds I>, I>>, IN> and
IN>>).
Add "sample" parameter (Yes=Sample or
No=RMS values) for the third thresholds
I>>> and IN>>>.
Add "CB Fail" choice for the "Trip functions"
and "Latch functions" parameters. Add "tBF"
event.
IEC870-5-103 communication :
- add ASDU 3.4 for measurement IN, instead
of private ASDU 77, for setting in conformity
with the standard (cf P127).
- various improvements : in the management
of the validity of the date and season in the
messages, modifications in
acknowledgement of the orders and time
synchronization.
Hardware/Software Version P12x/EN VC/F75
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/18

Relay Type P122

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compati
Version Issue with previous
bility
hardware
V6.B 18/07/03 Improvement of the reading of major alarm V2.09 Two versions
"EEPROM DATA FAULT" appearing when
HARD 3 or
much access EEPROM is done :
HARD 4
- Optimization of the readings in E2PROM
(writing of the value of the checksums in
internal RAM).
(HARD 2 → *)
- Replacement of the data storage circuit
breaker in E2PROM by a storage in
safeguarded RAM.
- The function of access to the E2PROM
becomes protected from the
interruptions.
V6.C 28/11/03 Software changes implemented in this V2.10 Two versions
version
HARD 3 or
- Addition of function SOFT/TOR: Function
HARD 4
allowing send a tripping order without
awaiting temporization of release,
addition of manual logical input closed
(order of manual closing). (HARD 2 → *)

- Addition of function LOCAL/REMOTE by

wiring: addition of logical input LOCAL
MODE (mode switch-over local, for
inhibition of the writing orders the
communication), and addition of exits
CONTROL TRIP (remote control of
release) and CLOSED CONTROL
operate by remote control trip).
- Modif. treatment of the thermal model:
20 milliseconds instead of 100.
- Evolutions communication MODBUS:
addition of the read quick byte (Function
7) by reading of words (Function 03 or
04), and of the reading of the date (on
page 8).
- Communication MODBUS Front Face:
addition of the filtering of address.
Software improvement done in this version
Fix on RI curves processing in certain cases.
V6.D 11/12/03 Software improvement done in this version V2.10 Two versions
Modification to remove the taking into HARD 3 or
account of the number of defect in the
HARD 4
calculation of checksum of page 1 of
E2PROM, like in autotest E2PROM.
(HARD 2 → *)
P12x/EN VC/F75 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 10/16 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Relay Type P122

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compati
Version Issue with previous
bility
hardware
V6.E 07/06/04 Software changes implemented in this V2.10 Two versions
version
HARD 3 or
Modified recloser function : modified taking
HARD 4
in account of manual reclose while blocking
by recloser external input.
Added a new DNP3 function : fault data can (HARD 2 → *)
be accessed as analog inputs.
DNP3 modifications : Binary inputs move to
Class 0. Acceptance of variation 2 object 1.
Modified German texts for Front panel.
Software improvement done in this version
Modification to fix upload program for FPGA
of new CPU board (index E or higher).
Improvement on 3rd threshold delay Ie>>>,
whose limitation test was done on 1st threshold
delay Ie>.
Improved SOFT/TOR function.
Improved Breaker Fail alarm processing
Fixed checksum verification test in Front
panel MODBUS communication.
V6.F 08/10/04 Software changes implemented in this V2.10 Two versions
version
HARD 3 or
None.
HARD 4
Software improvements done in this
version
Improved KBUS/COURIER protocol. (HARD 2 → *)

IEC870-5-103 protocol : Enhancement to

improve all the system product line defect
report (RFA disturbance transmission).
V6.G 11/01/05 Software changes implemented in this V2.12 Two versions
version HARD 3 or
Possibility to come back to the head line of the HARD 4
menu by pressing Clear Button. The setting
group change will be done in exclusive way
either by setting, either by logic input. The logic (HARD 2 → *)
input will be active on level. The choice between
level or edge is suppressed.
Software improvements done in this
version
Software improvement done in this version
WThe blocking logic feature can be used with a
temporisation of the phase or earth current
threshold set to zero.
Hardware/Software Version P12x/EN VC/F75
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/18

P123 - Serial number – Hardware Correlation

Serial Number Hardware installed
From 2599001 to 4799797 HARDWARE VERSION 2
From 4799798 to 0801999 HARDWARE VERSION 3
From 0901001 HARDWARE VERSION 4

Relay Type P123

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compatibil
Version Issue with previous
ity
hardware
V2.J 30/08/99 MODBUS improvement : – HARD V 2
Correction of al encountered problem HARD V 3
(answer to a synchronisation telegram,
HARD V 4
creation of a 2 seconds time out …)
V3.B 29/11/99 Suppression of password in order to •V2.0 HARD V 3
acknowledge the alarms
HARD V 4
Auto acknowledgement of the instantaneous
Modbus time out of 200 ms
Display of the letter P in the menu N and N-1
when password is active
V3.C 06/01/00 Label correction •V2.0
V3.D 06/04/00 Evolution of Modbus writing 16 bits •V2.0
V3.E 13/04/00 Czech and Hungarian version delivery •V2.0
V3.G 22/08/00 VDEW improvements •V2.0
P12x/EN VC/F75 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 12/16 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Relay Type P123

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compatibil
Version Issue with previous
ity
hardware
V4.E 31/01/01 Latch of the output relays •V2.0 HARD V 4
Latch of the auxiliary relays, relay by relay
and not by function (like previously up to V3
version). On the other hand the latch of the
TRIP output relay remains by function. If the
auxiliary relays are latched, an alarm will be
displayed. If the user acknowledges this
alarm, the auxiliary relays will be delatched.
DNP3 level 2 and 3
Addition of the tripping and closing order for
IEC103
Phase rotation (ABC or ACB)
Third threshold algorithm for improvement of
the behaviour on saturated current
transformers
Timer for the undercurrent feature (0 to 150
sec)
Tripping curves (rectifier curve +
LABORELLEC curves)
Selection of the Setting group by level or by
edge.
CB fail detection (possibility to inhibit the
starting signals)
Instantaneous record
Rolling demand
Peak value demand
Instantaneous alarm settable : self or not self
reset
Matrix for the auto-recloser
Addition of a second threshold with definite
time for the I2 feature
The digital input can work with AC signals
(24 V to 250 V AC)
Necessity to set in HMI Configuration menu,
the type of voltage used, either AC or DC .
V5.A 27/09/01 Maintenance mode for manual command of •V2.0 HARD V4
the output relays
Reset of leds by logic input or control
command or front panel or on new fault
appearance
V5.C 04/10/01 VDEW improvements •V2.0
(Updating of the information SCN into the
END OF GENERAL INTERROGATION
ASDU)
V5.D 30/01/02 Addition of order COM1/COM2/COM3/COM4 •V2.0
assignalble on the auxiliary relays.
Addition of the logic inputs AUX3 and AUX 4
do not generating alarm message.
Improvement of english label
Hardware/Software Version P12x/EN VC/F75
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/18

Relay Type P123

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compatibil
Version Issue with previous
ity
hardware
V5.F 08/08/02 EA approval option : logical input filtering on •V2.0 HARD V4
24 samples instead of 12 either 15 ms at
50 Hz)
Improvment of the Recording of rolling
demand in ram saved. The previous version
could lead to an untimely ram saved error
message due to the management of this
recording
Courier improvment : adding of the cell 0010
(CB control) protected by password
Correction of the configuration of taux3 and
taux4 for MODBUS
IEC103 : correction of the checksum
calculation for short message. Correction of
the I0 channel data into the disturbance
record
V5.G 24/10/02 Added Private messages option option (for V2.07 Two versions
non standard protection functions) in
HARD 3 or
IEC870-5-103 communication
HARD 4

(HARD 2 → *)
V6.A 18/06/03 Add periodic self test of EEPROM data / V2.09 Two versions
calibration every 24 hours with safeguard of
Patch HARD 3 or
the results in safeguarded RAM.
Modbus
HARD 4
Add a new major alarm “Default settings” V2.08.005
which is set after an EEPROM data error,
and the following reloading of the default
settings, and automatically reset after the (HARD 2 → *)
following parameter write.
Add "tReset" events for the thresholds I>,
I>>, IN>, IN>> and I2>, and "tReset"
parameter for the constant time
temporization (thresholds I>, I>>, IN> and
IN>>).
Add "sample" parameter (Yes=Sample or
No=RMS values) for the third thresholds
I>>> and IN>>>.
Add "CB Fail" choice for the "Trip functions"
and "Latch functions" parameters. Add "tBF"
event.
IEC870-5-103 communication :
- add ASDU 3.4 for measurement IN, instead
of private ASDU 77, for setting in conformity
with the standard (cf P127).
- various improvements : in the management
of the validity of the date and season in the
messages, modifications in
acknowledgement of the orders and time
synchronization.
P12x/EN VC/F75 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 14/16 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Relay Type P123

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compatibil
Version Issue with previous
ity
hardware
V6.B 18/07/03 Improvement of the reading of major alarm V2.09 Two versions
"EEPROM DATA FAULT" appearing when
Patch HARD 3 or
much access EEPROM is done :
Modbus
HARD 4
- Optimization of the readings in E2PROM V2.08.005
(writing of the value of the checksums in
internal RAM).
(HARD 2 → *)
- Replacement of the data storage circuit
breaker in E2PROM by a storage in
safeguarded RAM.
- The function of access to the E2PROM
becomes protected from the
interruptions.
V6.C 28/11/03 Software changes implemented in this V2.10 Two versions
version
HARD 3 or
- Addition of function SOFT/TOR: Function
HARD 4
allowing send a tripping order without
awaiting temporization of release,
addition of manual logical input closed
(order of manual closing). (HARD 2 → *)

- Addition of function LOCAL/REMOTE by

wiring: addition of logical input LOCAL
MODE (mode switch-over local, for
inhibition of the writing orders the
communication), and addition of exits
CONTROL TRIP (remote control of
release) and CLOSED CONTROL
operate by remote control trip).
- Modif. treatment of the thermal model:
20 milliseconds instead of 100.
- Evolutions communication MODBUS:
addition of the read quick byte (Function
7) by reading of words (Function 03 or
04), and of the reading of the date (on
page 8).
- Communication MODBUS Front Face:
addition of the filtering of address.
Software improvements done in this
version
Fix on RI curves processing in certain cases.
V6.D 11/12/03 Software improvements done in this V2.10 Two versions
version
HARD 3 or
Modification to remove the taking into
HARD 4
account of the number of defect in the
calculation of checksum of page 1 of
E2PROM, like in autotest E2PROM.
(HARD 2 → *)
Hardware/Software Version P12x/EN VC/F75
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/18

Relay Type P123

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compatibil
Version Issue with previous
ity
hardware
V6.E 07/06/04 Software changes implemented in this V2.10 Two versions
version
HARD 3 or
Modified recloser function : modified taking
HARD 4
in account of manual reclose while blocking
by recloser external input.
Added a new DNP3 function : fault data can (HARD 2 → *)
be accessed as analog inputs.
DNP3 modifications : Binary inputs move to
Class 0. Acceptance of variation 2 object 1.
Modified German texts for Front panel.
Software improvement done in this version
Modification to fix upload program for FPGA
of new CPU board (index E or higher). (This
problem affects all Px2x products equiped
with this CPU board).
Modification on 3rd threshold delay Ie>>>,
whose limitation test was done on 1st
threshold delay Ie>.
Improved SOFT/TOR function
Improved Breaker Fail alarm processing.
Improved checksum verification test in Front
panel MODBUS communication.
V6.F 08/10/04 Software changes implemented in this V2.10 Two versions
version
HARD 3 or
None.
HARD 4
Software improvement done in this version
Improved KBUS/COURIER protocol
(visibility of threshold). (HARD 2 → *)

Improved IEC870-5-103 protocol :

Enhancement of all the system product line
defect report (RFA disturbance
transmission).
P12x/EN VC/F75 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 16/16 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123

Relay Type P123

Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compatibil
Version Issue with previous
ity
hardware
V6.G 11/01/05 Software changes implemented in this V2.12 Two versions
version HARD 3 or
Possibility to come back to the head line of the HARD 4
menu by pressing Clear Button.
(HARD 2 → *)
The setting group change will be done in
exclusive way either by setting, either by logic
input. The logic input will be active on level. The
choice between level or edge is suppressed.
Modification to the management of “ the
auto-recloser in progress ” information and
generation of associated event: - Pick-up:
at the start of the reclose cycle -> RL1 trip.
- Drop-off: at the end of the last
programmed cycle -> At the end of reclaim
time for a successful reclose cycle or at
release of "Final Trip" signal for an
unsuccessful cycle. Modification of the “
final trip ” information management. This
information must be now set to one during
the last tripping (if default is always
present and that the cycles are totally
used) and must be set to zero as soon as
the circuit breaker is done (supervision of
the 52a information). Also, it should be kept
at zero until the end of inhibits time (see
also below connection with the “ Recloser
locked ” signal status). The locked auto-
recloser information must be set to the
output relays and different from the “final
trip” information. It will be reset at the end
of the inhibit time.
Software improvement done in this version
The blocking logic feature can be used with a
temporisation of the phase or earth current
threshold set to zero.
Publication: P12x/EN T/F75

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com

T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/